aui-ref4_83

UTOMATIC

YNAMIC

NCREMENTAL

ONLINEAR

NALYSIS

ADINA User Interface

Command Reference Manual

Volume IV: Display Processing

Report ARD 05-5 October 2005

ADINA R & D, Inc.

ADINA User InterfaceCommand Reference Manual

Volume IV: Display Processing

Report ARD 05-5

October 2005

for the ADINA system version 8.3

ADINA R & D, Inc.71 Elton Avenue

Watertown, MA 02472 USA

tel. (617) 926-5199telefax (617) 926-0238

www.adina.com

Notices

ADINA R & D, Inc. owns both this software program system and its documentation. Both theprogram system and the documentation are copyrighted with all rights reserved by ADINA R & D, Inc.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Trademarks

ADINA is a registered trademark of K.J. Bathe / ADINA R & D, Inc.

All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright Notice

© ADINA R & D, Inc. 1994-2005October 2005 PrintingPRINTED IN USA

Table of contents

ADINA R & D, Inc. iii

Table of contents

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.1 Program execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.2 Command syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.3 Input details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41.4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81.5 File input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91.6 The AUI database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.7 Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.8 Plotting length units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111.9 Plotting symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111.10 Plotting colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111.11 Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121.12 Tips for writing batch files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131.13 New features in AUI 8.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141.14 ADINA System documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Chapter 2 Quick index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter 3 Input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.1 Database operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.2 Porthole files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73.3 Auxiliary files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123.4 Auxiliary commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-253.5 Program termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Chapter 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.2 Graphics interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Chapter 5 Display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.1 Screen control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.2 Mesh plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95.3 Load plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-675.4 Band plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-775.5 Vector plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-915.6 Element line plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1015.7 Reaction plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1115.8 Trace plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1195.9 J-integral line contour plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1475.10 Graph plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1515.11 Movie frames and animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-215

Table of contents

iv AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. IV � Display Processing

5.12 User defined plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2315.13 Plotting definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-241

Chapter 6 Display and post-processing definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16.2 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76.3 Response data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-276.4 Response range data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-476.5 Spectrum definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-556.6 Result control definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-676.7 Model points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-776.8 Model lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1136.9 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-129

Chapter 7 Results listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17.1 Model information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17.2 Variables listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Chapter 8 Graphics devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Command index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Chapter 1

Introduction

Sec. 1.1 Program execution

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-1

1. Introduction

This reference manual provides concise descriptions of the command input requirements forthe ADINA User Interface (AUI). This introduction serves to give some backgroundinformation and indicate the general command syntax including descriptions of theconventions used.

This manual only discusses those commands that you use for model display andpostprocessing. Refer to the other AUI Command Reference Manuals for descriptions of thecommands that you use for model definition.

1.1 Program execution

Commands can be entered in the following modes:

Interactive

(a) AUI is running with the user interface displayed – you can enter commands into the userinterface command window.

(b) AUI is running in command mode (using the "-cmd" option) – you can enter commandsfrom standard input.

Batch

(a) AUI is running with the user interface displayed – you can read commands from a file bychoosing File�Batch (UNIX versions) or File�Open (Windows version).

(b) Commands can be read from a given file using the aui startup options -s (UNIX versions)or -b (Windows version).

You can also read commands from a file using the READ command (see Section 3.3).

1.2 Command syntax

Here is the layout of a typical command reference page:

COMMAND[1] PARAM1 PARAM2[2]...

data1i data2i[3]...

Chap. 1 Introduction

1-2 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. IV – Display Processing

General description of command function.[4]

PARAM1 [<default>][6]

Description of parameter PARAM1[5]. {<input choices>}[7]

PARAM2 [<default>]Description of parameter PARAM2. {<input choices>}

...

data1i [<default>][6]

Description of data line entry data1i[5] (ith row, column 1). {<input choices>}[7]

data2i [<default>]Description of data line entry data2i (ith row, column 2). {<input choices>}

...

Auxiliary commands[8]

LIST COMMANDBrief description of this command.

DELETE COMMANDBrief description of this command.

Issuing a command allows you to alter the data associated with the command. This datacomprises the values associated with the command parameters and possibly a table, input via"data lines", associated with the command.

In the above, the command name "COMMAND"[1], given at the top of the reference page, hasthe first few characters emphasized to show the minimum number of characters required to beinput to uniquely identify the command. A list of parameters[2] and data lines[3] for thecommand then follows. In this list the first few characters in the parameter and data linenames are emphasized to show the minimum number of characters required to uniquelyidentify the parameter and data line names.

Following a general outline of the command function[4], a description of the commandparameters and data line entries is given below the relevant keynames[5].

The parameters usually have default values[6] which are assumed if the parameter is notexplicitly specified. The default values are indicated in brackets [ ] – a bold value indicates a

Sec. 1.2 Command syntax


default value (number or string) and an italicized string indicates the source of the defaultvalue, which is either (a) a text description of the default, (b) a parameter name from the samecommand, or (c) a combination of command + parameter names, indicating that the default istaken from the setting of another (different) command parameter.

A parameter for which no default is provided means that there is no default – i.e., somechoice must be entered for that parameter.

One important parameter type is that of an entity identifier – for which the parameterkeyname "NAME" is normally reserved. If the object identified by NAME has already beendefined, then the other parameter defaults are set to the previous settings for that object. If anew NAME is given then the defaults, as indicated by the command reference pages herein,are taken. In the former case, execution of the command redefines the named object.

The choice of parameter values is often discussed within the parameter description, but,where appropriate, a simple list of choices follows the parameter description[7]. For example,parameters with simple logical choices will have the list "{ YES / NO }" appended to thedescription.

When a table is associated with the command, the command includes data input lines. Forsome commands, the table is initially empty, but for other commands the table alreadyincludes data lines.

The columns of a data line can be divided into two types: key columns and data columns. When a data line has key columns, the key value columns always precede the data valuecolumns. In this case the values of the key columns uniquely identify the data line, and,therefore, two data lines cannot have the same key column values – for such input, the secondinput data line overwrites the data associated with the key column values.

You can delete a data line by preceding the key column values with the DELETE prefix. When a data line does not have key columns, two or more data lines can have the same values– but you cannot use the DELETE prefix to delete data lines without key columns. However,you can always delete all of the data lines of a table using the @CLEAR or CLEARkeywords. This is of course especially useful for those tables in which there are no keycolumns.

For data line input, not all the columns need be specified; the ENTRIES keyword, which canbe input as the first data line following the command line, can be used to select a subset of thedata column entries (see below). Then the values you enter in the subsequent data lines areassociated with the columns indicated by the ENTRIES parameters, the other data columnstaking default values whenever possible. Note, however, that key columns are required input,and should thus be included in the ENTRIES column list.



Many commands have "auxiliary" commands[8] which are entered with one of the followingprefixes:

LIST list object definitionsDELETE delete objects from the databaseUPDATE update command defaultsRESET reset command defaultsCOPY copy objectsSET set "currently active" objectsSHOW show "currently active" objects

Brief command descriptions are provided for the auxiliary commands.

1.3 Input details

Command inputPlease refer to command ZONELIST (which is fully described in Section 7.2) in thefollowing discussion:

ZONELIST ZONENAME RESULTGRID SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

When entering commands, only as many characters as necessary to uniquely specify thecommand name need be entered. The same rule applies to the parameters and data line entrykey names within a command. The minimum number of characters necessary are indicated inbold.

Note that commands and parameters are case insensitive. All commands, parameters, valuesare stored in upper case, except for string variables (headings, graph legends, filenames, etc.).

Parameter values can be input in any order if the keynames are used, e.g.,

ZONELIST SMOOTHING=NONE ZONENAME=ZONE1 VARIABLES=STRESS-XX, STRESS-YY

Some or all of the parameters can be excluded if the positional order of the parameters isobserved, e.g.,

ZONELIST ZONE1 , , NONE , , , , , STRESS-XX STRESS-YY

(the parameters RESULTGRID, RESULTCONTROL, RESPOPTION, RESPONSE,RESPRANGE have been omitted by the use of the commas).

Sec. 1.3 Input details


A mix of keyname parameters and positional input is allowed, e.g.,

ZONELIST ZONE1 , , NONE VARIABLES=STRESS-XX STRESS-YY

The above uses of the ZONELIST command are all equivalent. The omitted parameters ineach case take the default values.

Data linesMany commands require data line (tabular) input, e.g., NODELINE (see Section 6.8):

NODELINE NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE FACTOR

substructurei reusei nodei factori

Use the ENTRIES keyword to select only the data columns that you want to enter (the otherdata columns will be given default values):

NODELINE TESTENTRIES NODE FACTOR1 2.02 3.03 4.0DATAEND

Most commands that take this form of input also allow for incremental row generation via the"STEP inc TO" option where "inc" represents an increment in the generation. Here are someexamples:

1)

NODELINE TESTENTRIES NODE FACTOR1 2.0STEP 2 TO5 2.0DATAEND

is equivalent to

NODELINE TESTENTRIES NODE FACTOR1 2.03 2.05 2.0@



2)

NODELINE TESTENTRIES NODE FACTOR1 2.0STEP 1 TO5 2.0DATAEND

NODELINE TESTENTRIES NODE FACTOR1 2.0 TO5 2.0DATAEND

and

NODELINE TESTENTRIES NODE FACTOR1 2.0 / 2 2.0 / 3 2.0 / 4 2.0 / 5 2.0DATAEND

are all equivalent.

Note that data line input can be terminated either by entering the symbol "@" or the string"DATAEND" – otherwise data line input is terminated automatically by input of the nextcommand.

Data line rows can be deleted by preceding the key value by the prefix DELETE. Thismethod of deletion also supports row 'generation' – i.e., "DELETE i STEP k TO j" can beused to delete a range of values.

All the data lines associated with a command can be deleted simultaneously using the@CLEAR or CLEAR keywords. This is useful when you want to define a table if you do notknow if the table is already defined or not:

NODELINE TESTCLEARENTRIES NODE FACTOR1 2.0STEP 2 TO5 2.0DATAEND

Sec. 1.3 Input details


In this case, the CLEAR keyword deletes any existing rows defined for nodeline TEST. It isnot an error to use the CLEAR keyword when there are no existing rows defined.

NamesAUI names are usually of two types – alphanumeric strings of up to 30 characters or integerlabel numbers. Integer label numbers normally start with 1.

Integer valuesIntegers can be input with a maximum of 9 significant digits. For positive values, a preceding+ sign can, if desired, be input.

Real valuesSpecification of real values can include a decimal point and/or an exponent. The exponentmust be preceded by the letters E, e, D, or d, e.g.,

2E52.0d+05200000.

all refer to the same real number.

Alphanumeric valuesAlphanumeric values must start with a letter (A-Z, a-z) or a digit (0-9). The only permissiblecharacters allowed are the letters A-Z, a-z, the digits 0 to 9, the hyphen (-), and the underscore(_). Lower-case characters in an alphanumeric value are always converted to upper-case bythe AUI.

String valuesA string should be enclosed by apostrophes ('). Any apostrophe within the string must beentered twice. Any character can be included in a string. Lower-case characters in a stringvalue are not converted to upper-case.

FilenamesA filename should be enclosed by apostrophes ('). Filenames can be up to 256 characterslong.

Length of input linesInput lines to the AUI can each contain up to 256 characters.

Line continuation, line separator, blanks, and commasIf the last non-blank character of a command or data line is a comma (,), then the command ordata is continued on the next input line. The total length of an input line and all of itscontinuations can be up to 2000 characters.



A slash (/) in an input line can be used to end a command or data input line; more commandsor data can then be entered on the same input line.

A blank, several blanks, <Tab> characters, a comma, or a comma surrounded by blanks act asdelimiters. Commands, parameter keynames and values must be separated by delimiters.

CommentsComment lines can appear anywhere in the input and are identified by an asterisk (*) incolumn 1, e.g.,

* This is a comment line

Parameter substitutionYou can define parameters as numeric expressions, and use the parameter values in latercommands. This feature is useful when creating batch files used in structural optimization.For example:

PARAMETER A '5 + 7'PARAMETER B '2*A'PARAMETER C '3 + A + 4*B'BODY BLOCK DX1=$A DX2=$B DX3=$C

defines the size of a rectangular block in terms of parameters A, B and C. See thePARAMETER command (in Section 3.4) for more information and examples.

1.4 Messages

Commands will often echo messages confirming their successful completion, or provide otherinformation. Otherwise you may get error/warning messages with varying levels of severity:

*** INPUT ERRORYou have entered an unacceptable parameter value or data. The command will notexecute with invalid input.

*** WARNINGThe command has completed, but has detected a possible inconsistency which you mayhave to resolve.

*** ALERTThe command has completed, but has detected a definite inconsistency which you have toresolve.

*** ERRORThe command has not completed.

Sec. 1.5 File input/output


*** INTERNAL ERRORThe program has determined some internal inconsistency, normally due to a software bug. You should contact ADINA R & D Inc. if you encounter such a message. In order totrack down the source of the problem it would be most useful if the input responsible forthis condition is made available to the support engineers.

*** MEMORY OVERFLOWThe command has not completed, due to the program running out of memory. Increasethe memory allocation to the program.

Note: you can request that the AUI skip the remaining commands in a batch file after the AUIwrites error messages, see Section 1.12 and the ERRORACTION parameter of theCONTROL command for further information.

1.5 File input/output

The AUI uses several files for handling I/O. Here is a brief description of some of them,together with a suggested filename extension convention:

UNIX:

<file>.in ADINA-IN batch command input<file>.idb ADINA-IN permanent database<file>.plot ADINA-PLOT batch command input<file>.pdb ADINA-PLOT permanent database<file>.ses AUI session file (echo of command input)<file>.ps PostScript snapshot<file>.dat Analysis data<file>.port Analysis porthole file<file>.out Analysis printout

Windows:

<file>.in ADINA-IN batch command input<file>.idb ADINA-IN permanent database<file>.plo ADINA-PLOT batch command input<file>.pdb ADINA-PLOT permanent database<file>.ses AUI session file (echo of command input)<file>.ps PostScript snapshot<file>.dat Analysis data<file>.por Analysis porthole file<file>.out Analysis printout



1.6 The AUI database

The AUI uses an internal database to store and retrieve data used during program execution. The internal database is stored in main memory and, if main memory is not sufficient, atemporary database file is created to hold the excess data. The internal database can be savedin a disk file, called a permanent database file, so that it can be retrieved in a future run.

Five commands are used to create, open and save databases. DATABASE NEW creates anew empty internal database. DATABASE OPEN initializes the internal database using aspecified permanent database file. DATABASE SAVE saves the internal database to disk,allowing you to specify the name of the database file. DATABASE ATTACH causes theAUI to use the specified permanent database file as the internal database. DATABASEDETACH renames the internal database file as a permanent database file. All of thesecommands are described in Section 3.1.

The permanent database file is similar to a text file used in a word processing program. Likethe text file, the permanent database file resides on disk and can be retrieved by the programin a future run. The permanent database file can be saved on disk periodically duringprogram execution to protect against loss of data due to computer failure. During each saveoperation, a different permanent database file can be selected so that several versions of thedatabase are available for retrieval. (This is similar to saving several versions of a text file ondisk when working with a word processing program.)

For the differences between DATABASE OPEN and DATABASE ATTACH, see thecommand description for DATABASE ATTACH. For the differences between DATABASESAVE and DATABASE DETACH, see the command description for DATABASEDETACH.

1.7 Listings

Many AUI commands generate lists. For example, the ZONELIST command in Section 7.2lists the values of variables. You can specify whether listings are sent to your terminal or to adisk file (see the FILELIST command in Section 3.3).

When the listings are sent to your terminal, you are prompted by

--More--( %)

after each screen of the listing. The number printed before the percent sign represents thepercentage of the file that has been displayed so far. Responses to this prompt are as follows:

<return> Display another line of the listing.<spacebar> Display another screenful of the listing.

Sec. 1.8 Plotting length units


<i><spacebar> Display i more lines.D or d Display the next half-screen (a scroll) of the listing.<i>D or <i>d Set the number of lines in the scroll to i and display the next scroll.<i>Z or <i>z Set the number of lines in each screen to i and display the next screen.<i>S or <i>s Skip i lines and print a screenful of lines.<i>F or <i>f Skip i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines.<i>B or <i>b Skip back i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines.Q or q Stop the listing.= Print the current line number in the listing. . Repeat the last prompt response.

In these responses, <i> represents an optional integer argument, defaulting to 1. If you arefamiliar with the UNIX operating system, you will recognize that the above optionscorrespond closely to the options of the 'more' command.

1.8 Plotting length units

Many plotting commands and their related depiction commands have length unit parametersto indicate drawing units. The typical choices are:

CM centimeterINCHES inchesPERCENT percentage of size of graphics window, frame, or subframePIXELS screen resolution unitPOINTS 1 point = 1/72 inch

1.9 Plotting symbols

Many plotting commands allow you to select plotting symbols. These can be input via the"extended character" convention – see the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for details.

1.10 Plotting colors

Many plotting commands allow you to select plotting colors. There are many colorspredefined by the AUI; use the LIST COLORTABLE command in Section 5.13 to see theirdefinitions. You can use the COLORTABLE command in Section 5.13 to add or modifycolors.

The special color INVERSE is interpreted by the AUI as the opposite of the backgroundcolor. For example, if the background color of the graphics window is BLACK, then colorINVERSE plots as WHITE.



Use the PLCONTROL commands in Chapter 8 to set the background color of the graphicswindow.

1.11 Graphics

You can display and interact with graphics using the command-line interface (UNIX versionsonly). Before you can display graphics, you must issue a FRAME command (see Section5.1). The first FRAME command initializes a graphics window and the plotting surface. Successive FRAME commands clear the graphics window.

The contents of the graphics window are refreshed only when you are using a LOCATORcommand (see Section 4.2). For example, if you expose part of the graphics window, theexposed part is redrawn only when you issue a LOCATOR command. You can resize thegraphics window using the mouse, but the contents are repositioned only when you issue aLOCATOR command.

To exit a LOCATOR command, move the mouse cursor into the graphics window and press(lower-case) q.

Use the SNAPSHOT command (see Section 3.3) to dump displayed graphics to a file. Youcannot use the PLSYSTEM command to force all graphics output to be drawn to a file. Ifyou are using a batch file and do not want to display the graphics in a graphics window, youcan force the AUI to draw to the dummy plotting system NULL. For example, the commandsequence

PLSYSTEM NULLFRAMEMESHPLOTSNAPSHOT FILE=test.ps APPEND=NOFRAMEMESHPLOTBANDPLOT VAR=STRESS-XXSNAPSHOT FILE=test.ps END

can be submitted as a batch file to the AUI. It will not draw any graphics into a graphicswindow, but will dump the graphics to the file "test.ps". If you want to simultaneouslypreview the graphics, simply remove or comment out the PLSYSTEM NULL command.

If you want the AUI to pause between frames, you can either put READ END commandswhere you want the AUI to pause and then use the READ command to incrementally read thecommand file, or you can put PAUSE commands where you want the AUI to pause.

Sec. 1.12 Tips for writing batch files


1.12 Tips for writing batch files

Increasing execution speed: The AUI contains features that are useful when you entercommands using the dialog boxes, but are not useful when you read commands from a batchfile. These features are activated by default. You can deactivate the features to increase thespeed at which batch files are processed, and to reduce the memory requirements of the AUI. The features are

Undo/redo storage: To turn off storage of undo/redo information, use the commandCONTROL UNDO=-1.

Automatic model rebuilding: This feature is used in ADINA-IN only, but we describe it herefor completeness. After the AUI processes an ADINA-IN command, it updates various datastructures so that the updated model is plotted correctly. To turn off this feature, use thecommand CONTROL AUTOMREBUILD=NO. When this feature is turned off, if you want toplot the model, you must use the ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F commands to rebuild themodel beforehand. Note that batch files created by TRANSOR have this command setting. When you have completed the batch input, you can set AUTOMREBUILD back to YES andrebuild (and validate) the model using the ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F commands.

Session file creation: To turn off creation of the session file, use the commandFILESESSION NO. (Note that if you use the AUI in command-line mode, this is thedefault, but if you use the AUI in dialog box mode, the default is FILESESSIONOVERWRITE.)

Storage of session file information in the database: To turn off this feature, use the commandCONTROL SESSIONSTORAGE=NO.

Automatic zone rebuilding: The AUI automatically creates zones corresponding to elementgroups, geometry bodies, etc. When creating a model with many element groups or geometrybodies, this feature slows down the AUI. To turn off this feature, use the commandCONTROL AUTOZONE=NO

Stopping after an error or memory overflow is detected: The AUI includes a feature thatskips the remaining commands in a batch file after an error or memory overflow is detected. To activate this feature, use the command CONTROL ERRORACTION=SKIP.

Summary: Use the following commands to perform all of the above actions:

FILESESSION NOCONTROL UNDO=-1 AUTOMREBUILD=NO SESSIONSTORAGE=NO, ERRORACTION=SKIP AUTOZONE=NO



1.13 New features in AUI 8.3

The following new features are implemented in AUI 8.3 for display and postprocessing.

Updated commands/parameters

GSDEPICTION REMOVALCOLOR: This parameter gives the color of faces that aretargeted for removal by the BODY-CLEANUP and BODY-DEFEATURE commands.

MODELDEPICTION BDREP: This parameter controls whether the body discrete rep(discrete brep) of a body is plotted.

BANDPLOT and associated depiction commands

Band plots on line elements: Bands of nodal variables, element variables, section variablesand some element local node variables can be plotted on line elements, including trusselements, beam elements, iso-beam elements and pipe elements.

Notes:Line contours cannot be plotted onto line elements

Variables AXIAL_FORCE, SHEAR_FORCE-S, SHEAR_FORCE-T,TORSIONAL_MOMENT, BENDING_MOMENT-S, BENDING_MOMENT-T,AXIAL_STRAIN, PLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAIN can be plotted in truss elements and inbeam/iso-beam/pipe elements when element forces are saved.

The sign convention for bending moments and shear forces is that used in the ADINAoutput for section forces and for element local node 2. This sign convention is differentthan the sign convention used in the ELINEPLOT command.

Axial forces are positive in tension.

The thickness of lines used to draw bands on line elements can be changed using theBANDRENDERING LINEWIDTH parameter.

Band plots on contact surfaces: Band plots of contact surface variables (such asNORMAL_TRACTION) can be made on line (2D) contact surfaces and surface (3D) contactsurfaces.

When plotting bands on contact surfaces, it is possible for the graphical representation of thecontact segments to interfere with the graphical representation of the elements attached to thecontact segments. When this interference occurs, band plots on contact surfaces can beinadvertently hidden by the attached elements. In this case, new parameter

Sec. 1.13 New features in AUI 8.3


BANDRENDERING VIEWSHIFT can be used to graphically shift the bands towards theeye.

New band table option: It is now possible to construct a band table with smoothly varyingcolors between a minimum value and a specified value, then with smoothly varying colorsbetween the specified value and a maximum value. The typical use of this feature is asfollows: Assign saturated colors (such as blue and red) to the minimum and maximum values,and an unsaturated color (such as gray) to the specified value. The effect is to deemphasizethe values close to the specified value.

This feature is controlled by new parameter BANDTABLE AUTOMATICVALUEOPTION, see the BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC command.

CONTROL PSFILEVERSION: This parameter gives the Parasolid file version in whichParasolid files are saved.

Support for new features of the ADINA System

Additional variables for higher-order contact: The following additional variables are addedfor support of the new (higher-order) contact segments in version 8.3.

NODAL_CONTACT_GAPNODAL_CONTACT_STATUS (see note below)NODAL_NORMAL_TRACTION (magnitude of normal traction)NODAL_NORMAL_TRACTION-{XYZ}NODAL_TANGENTIAL_TRACTION (magnitude of tangential traction)NODAL_TANGENTIAL_TRACTION-{XYZ}NODAL_SLIP_VELOCITY (magnitude of slip velocity)NODAL_SLIP_VELOCITY-{XYZ}

All of these variables are output at the nodes. As a convenience, band plots still allow thevariable names

NORMAL_TRACTIONNORMAL_TRACTION-{XYZ}TANGENTIAL_TRACTIONTANGENTIAL_TRACTION-{XYZ}

to be used even for the higher-order contact segments.

The NODAL_CONTACT_STATUS has the following values: 1 = node is dead (on a dead contact segment)2 = node is open3 = node is closed, frictionless contact4 = node is closed, slipping frictional contact



5 = node is closed, sticking frictional contact

Additional variables

New variables for director vector components: Variables for the director vector componentsof shell nodes are now added.

DIRECTOR_VECTOR-{XYZ}_ORIGINALDIRECTOR_VECTOR-{XYZ}_CURRENT

1.14 ADINA System documentation

At the time of printing of this manual, the following documents are available with theADINA System:

Installation NotesDescribes the installation of the ADINA System on your computer.

ADINA User Interface Command Reference ManualVolume I: ADINA Solids & Structures Model Definition, Report ARD 05-2, October2005Volume II: ADINA Heat Transfer Model Definition, Report ARD 05-3, October2005Volume III: ADINA CFD Model Definition, Report ARD 05-4, October 2005Volume IV: Display Processing, Report ARD 05-5, October 2005These documents describe the AUI command language. You use the AUI commandlanguage to write batch files for the AUI.

ADINA User Interface Primer, Report ARD 05-6, October 2005Tutorial for the ADINA User Interface, presenting a sequence of worked examples whichprogressively instruct you how to effectively use the AUI.

Theory and Modeling GuideVolume I: ADINA Solids & Structures, Report ARD 05-7, October 2005Volume II: ADINA Heat Transfer, Report ARD 05-8, October 2005Volume III: ADINA CFD & FSI, Report ARD 05-9, October 2005Provides a concise summary and guide for the theoretical basis of the analysis programsADINA, ADINA-T, ADINA-F, ADINA-FSI and ADINA-TMC. The manuals alsoprovide references to other publications which contain further information, but the detailcontained in the manuals is usually sufficient for effective understanding and use of theprograms.

Sec. 1.14 ADINA System documentation


ADINA Verification Manual, Report ARD 05-10, October 2005Presents solutions to problems which verify and demonstrate the usage of the ADINASystem. Input files for these problems are distributed along with the ADINA Systemprograms.

TRANSOR for PATRAN Users Guide, Report ARD 05-14, October 2005Describes the interface between the ADINA System and MSC.Patran. The ADINAPreference, which allows you to perform pre-/post-processing and analysis within thePatran environment, is described.

TRANSOR for I-DEAS Users Guide, Report ARD 05-15, October 2005Describes the interface between the ADINA System and UGS I-deas. The fully integratedTRANSOR graphical interface is described, including the input of additional data notfully described in the I-deas database.

ADINA System 8.3 Release Notes, October 2005Provides a description of the new and modified features of the ADINA System 8.3.

You will also find the following book useful:

K. J. Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1996.Provides theoretical background to many of the solution techniques used in the ADINASystem..



This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 2

Quick index

Chap. 2 Quick index


The following index presents a quick overview of all AUI commands and their functions. The commands are presented in the order in which they appear in the manual.

Chapter 3: Input/output

Section 3.1: Database operations

DATABASE NEW, creates a newdatabase.

DATABASE OPEN, opens a database.DATABASE SAVE, saves the current

internal database as a permanentdatabase file.

DATABASE ATTACH, allows access tothe specified file as an AUI databasefile.

DATABASE DETACH, detaches thedatabase.

DATABASE MOVIESAVE, creates adatabase that contains only movies andrelated data.

Section 3.2: Porthole files

LOADPORTHOLE, loads an ADINA,ADINA-T or ADINA-F porthole fileinto the database.

Section 3.3: Auxiliary files

READ, reads AUI input commands froma file.

FILEREAD, controls the source of inputcommands to the AUI.

FILESESSION, controls the generationand output of a session file.

FILELIST, controls the format andoutput of listings.

FILEECHO, controls echoing of inputcommands

FILELOG, controls the output of logmessages.

SNAPSHOT, saves the currentlydisplayed graphics to a disk file.

MOVIESAVE, saves all of the graphicsof a movie to a disk file.

SAVEAVI, saves an animation as an AVIfile (Windows version only)

SAVEBMP, saves the screen in a bitmapformat

COMMANDFILE, writes commandsneeded to recreate the AUI database toa file.

Section 3.4: Auxiliary commands

MODE, switches between preprocessingand postprocessing mode.

FEPROGRAM, selects the current finiteelement program.

PAUSE, stops processing of command-line input until you press a key.

PARAMETER, defines a parameter thatcan be substituted in a later command.

ECHO, echos the given string.

Section 3.5: Program termination

END, terminates the program.

Chapter 4: Editing commandsand graphics interaction

Section 4.1: Editing

UNDO, cancels the effects of previouscommands.

REDO, cancels the effects of previousUNDO commands.

Chap. 2 Quick index


Section 4.2: Graphics interaction

PICKED DELETE, deletes all pickedgraphics.

PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL,sets the mesh viewing windows of allpicked mesh plots to normal.

RESET MESHWINDOW, sets the meshviewing windows of all displayedmesh plots to normal.

LOCATOR, controls the function of thelocator (mouse).

ZOOM, zooms into or out of thedisplayed image.

PAN, pans the displayed image.HIGHLIGHT, highlights entities such as

nodes and elements.

Chapter 5: Display Control

Section 5.1: Screen control

REGENERATE, reconstructs allmeshplots, bandplots, etc. displayedon the screen according to the currentdepiction settings of the meshplots,bandplots, etc. and according to thecurrent state of the model.

FRAME, defines a frame in the graphicswindow.

SUBFRAME, defines a subframe.

Section 5.2: Mesh plotting

MESHPLOT, creates a mesh plot.MESHSTYLE, groups depictions used

by MESHPLOT.GPDEPICTION, defines attributes used

by MESHPLOT when drawing thepoints in the model geometry.

GLDEPICTION, defines attributes usedby MESHPLOT when drawing thelines and edges in the model geometry.

GSDEPICTION, defines attributes usedby MESHPLOT when drawing thesurfaces and faces in the modelgeometry.

GVDEPICTION, defines attributes usedby MESHPLOT when labeling thegeometry volumes or geometry bodies.

MODELDEPICTION, defines someattributes used by MESHPLOT,including the displacementmagnification factor.

MESHRENDERING, defines someattributes used by MESHPLOT,including shading.

NODEDEPICTION, defines attributesused by MESHPLOT when drawingnodes.

ELDEPICTION, defines attributes usedby MESHPLOT when drawingelements.

VSDEPICTION, selects a virtual shiftdrawn by MESHPLOT.

MESHANNOTATION, selects optionaltext plotted by MESHPLOT.

BOUNDEPICTION, defines attributesused by MESHPLOT when drawingboundary conditions.

PLOTAREA, defines a plotareadepiction, used by MESHPLOT tospecify the area into which to draw themesh plot.

VIEW, defines a view depiction, used byMESHPLOT to specify the view.

MESHWINDOW, defines a meshviewing window depiction, used byMESHPLOT to specify the meshviewing window.

CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE, defines amesh plot cutting surface as a cuttingplane.

CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE, definesa mesh plot cutting surface as anisosurface of a result.

Chap. 2 Quick index


CUTSURFACE NONE, turns off meshplot cutting surface calculations.

GEDRAWING, defines the local nodesbetween which lines are drawn whenplotting general elements withMESHPLOT.

Section 5.3: Load plotting

LOADPLOT, plots the loads as vectors.LOADSTYLE, groups depictions used

by LOADPLOT.LOADRENDERING, defines drawing

attributes used by LOADPLOT,including which loads are plotted.

Section 5.4: Band plotting

BANDPLOT, plots results as a band plot.BANDSTYLE, groups depictions used

by BANDPLOT.BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC, defines

an automatic band table used byBANDPLOT.

BANDTABLE REPEATING, defines arepeating band table used byBANDPLOT.

BANDRENDERING, defines drawingattributes used by BANDPLOT,including the type of bands.

BANDANNOTATION selects optionaltext plotted by BANDPLOT.

Section 5.5: Vector plotting

EVECTORPLOT, plots the results as anelement vector plot.

EVECTORSTYLE, groups depictionsused by EVECTORPLOT.

EVECTORRENDERING, definesdrawing attributes used byEVECTORPLOT, including themaximum length of element vectors.

Section 5.6: Element line plotting

ELINEPLOT, plots results such asbending moment or shear force as anelement line plot.

ELINESTYLE, groups depictions usedby ELINEPLOT.

ELINERENDERING, defines drawingattributes used by ELINEPLOT,including the maximum length ofelement lines.

ELINEANNOTATION, selects optionaltext plotted by ELINEPLOT.

Section 5.7: Reaction plotting

REACTIONPLOT, plots reactions andcontact forces as vectors.

REACTIONSTYLE, groups depictionsused by REACTIONPLOT.

Section 5.8: Trace plotting

TRACEPLOT, creates particle traces.TRACESTYLE, groups depictions used

by TRACEPLOTTRACETYPE PARTICLE, sets the

colors and sizes of particle tracesdrawn by TRACEPLOT.

TRACETYPE RIBBON, sets the colorsand sizes of ribbon traces drawn byTRACEPLOT.

TRACERAKE COORDINATES,defines the locations of injectors usedby TRACEPLOT, using coordinates

TRACERAKE NODES, defines thelocations of injectors used byTRACEPLOT, using nodes

TRACERAKE GNODES, defines thelocations of injectors used byTRACEPLOT, using nodes selectedby geometry

Chap. 2 Quick index


TRACERAKE GRIDS, defines thelocations of injectors used byTRACEPLOT, using grids

TRACECALCULATION determinestrace calculation options used byTRACEPLOT.

TRACERENDERING, determinesplotting options used byTRACEPLOT.

TRACEANNOTATION, determinesoptional text plotted by TRACEPLOT.

TRACESTEP, updates quasi-steadyparticle traces.

Section 5.9: J-integral line contourplotting

LCPLOT, plots a J-integral line contour.LCSTYLE, groups depictions used by

LCPLOT.

Section 5.10: Graph plotting

MATERIALSHOW STRAIN, graphsstress-strain curves for a material.

MATERIALSHOW TIME, graphsmaterial response vs time curves for amaterial.

USERDATA, defines user-supplied XYdata (a userdata).

USERSHOW, graphs a userdata.RESPONSESHOW, graphs a curve

giving the response of two variables asfunctions of load step or mode shape.

LINESHOW, graphs a curve giving theresponse of two variables along a line.

SPECTRUMSHOW, graphs a responsespectrum.

SSPECTRUMSHOW, graphs a sweepspectrum.

RSPECTRUMSHOW, graphs a randomspectrum.

HARMONICSHOW, graphs theresponse due to a sweep spectrum.

RANDOMSHOW, graphs the responsedue to a random spectrum.

FSSHOW, graphs the response of anSDOF system as a function of theSDOF system natural frequency, whenthe structural loading is given asground motion response spectra.

FTSHOW, graphs the response of anSDOF system as a function of theSDOF system natural frequency, whenthe time history of the structure isknown.

FOURIERSHOW, graphs the results ofa Fourier analysis of the time historyof a variable.

TRACESHOW, graphs residence timedistribution data based on the data in atrace plot.

TFSHOW, graphs a time function. GRAPHPLOT, modifies a graph plot.GRAPHSTYLE, groups depictions used

by the graphing section of the SHOWcommands.

GRAPHLIST, lists the curves of a graphplot.

GRAPHDEPICTION, defines someattributes of a graph plot, including thegraph title.

AXIS, defines attributes of axes of agraph plot.

CURVEDEPICTION, defines attributesof curves within a graph plot.

Section 5.11: Movie frames andanimations

MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP, createsa movie by regenerating all mesh plotsand their attachments over a range ofsolution times.

Chap. 2 Quick index


MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE,creates a movie by regenerating allmesh plots and their attachments,varying the eigenvector scaling factorsinusoidally over a range of angles.

MOVIESHOOT ROTATE, creates amovie by rotating all mesh plots andtheir attachments.

MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE, creates amovie by regenerating all mesh plotsand their attachments, changing thepositions of cutting planes.

MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE,creates a movie by regenerating allmesh plots and their attachments,changing the threshold values of thecutting surface isosurface variables.

MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT, createsa movie by updating all quasi-steadytrace plots.

MOVIEFRAME, creates a movie framefrom the current graphics window.

ANIMATE, animates a movie.REFRESH, redraws the graphics

window, clearing any displayedanimation.

Section 5.12: User defined plotting

TEXT, draws text strings.USERTEXT, defines text strings (a

usertext) that can be plotted by TEXT.UDRAW, draws line segments.USERSEGMENT, defines line segments

(a usersegment) that can be plotted byUDRAW.

Section 5.13: Plotting definitions

COLORTABLE, defines colors in thecolor table.

Chapter 6: Display and post-processing definitions

Section 6.1: Settings

CONTROL, defines certain parametersthat control program behavior.

Section 6.2: Zones

ZONE, defines a zone as entities such aselements, geometry, etc.

BOXZONE, includes/deletes elementsthat lie in boxes in a zone.

CGZONE, selects contact surface groupsto include in or delete from a zone.

COMBZONE, selects zones to include inor delete from a zone.

CSZONE, selects contact surfaces toinclude in or delete from a zone.

EGZONE, selects element groups toinclude in or delete from a zone.

ELZONE, selects elements/layers toinclude in or delete from a zone.

RADGZONE, selects radiosity groups toinclude in or delete from a zone.

RADZONE, selects radiosity segments toinclude in or delete from a zone.

ACTIVEZONE, selects zones that theAUI updates when you change themodel definition.

COLORZONE, specifies colors ofzones.

Section 6.3: Response data

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP, names a loadstep (solution time) solution.

RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE, names amode shape solution.

RESPONSE RESIDUAL, names aresidual (static correction) solution.

Chap. 2 Quick index


RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM, names a responsespectrum solution.

RESPONSE HARMONIC, names aharmonic analysis solution.

RESPONSE RANDOM, names arandom analysis solution.

RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION, names acombination of previously definedresponses.

RESPONSE ENVELOPE, names aresponse calculation method in whichseveral responses are evaluated andthe most extreme value is returned.

Section 6.4: Response range data

RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP, names arange of load step solutions.

RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE, names arange of mode shape solutions.

Section 6.5: Spectrum definitions

SPECTRUM, defines a responsespectrum.

SSPECTRUM, defines a sweepspectrum.

RSPECTRUM, defines a randomspectrum.

DAMPINGTABLE, defines a dampingtable.

FREQCURVE, defines a frequencycurve.

FREQTABLE, defines a frequency table,which is a list of frequencies and peakbroadening factors.

Section 6.6: Result control definitions

SMOOTHING, defines a smoothingtechnique.

RESULTCONTROL, controls the waythe AUI computes results.

MASS-SELECT, determines whichelements and nodes contribute to thetotal mass/volume calculations.

RESULTGRID, controls the locations atwhich the AUI computes results.

Section 6.7: Model points

NODEPOINT, names a node point.ELPOINT, names a point within an

element or element layer.SECTPOINT, names a point within an

element section.CSPOINT, names a contact segment.RADPOINT, names a point within a

radiosity surface segment.VSPOINT, names a virtual shift.LCPOINT, names a J-integral line

contour.DBPOINT, names a drawbead segmentNODECOMBINATION, names a

combination of node points.ELCOMBINATION, names a

combination of element points.SECTCOMBINATION, names a

combination of section points.CSCOMBINATION, names a

combination of contact segmentpoints.

RADCOMBINATION, names acombination of radiosity segmentpoints.

VSCOMBINATION, names acombination of virtual shift points.

LCCOMBINATION, names acombination of line contour points.

DBCOMBINATION, names acombination of drawbead points.

POINTCOMBINATION, creates amodel point from previously definedmodel points.

Chap. 2 Quick index


GNCOMBINATION, names acombination of node points selectedby general selections.

MESHINTEGRATION, creates a modelpoint, based upon a mesh plot, that isan integration domain.

MESHMAX, creates a model point,based upon a mesh plot, that is asearching domain.

REACTIONSUM, names a combinationof node points at which reactions werecomputed.

Section 6.8: Model lines

NODELINE, names a line (sequence) ofnode points.

ELLINE, names a line (sequence) ofelement points.

SECTLINE, names a line (sequence) ofelement section points.

CSLINE, names a line (sequence) ofcontact segments.

RADLINE, names a line (sequence) ofradiosity surface points.

VSLINE, names a line (sequence) ofvirtual shifts.

LCLINE, names a line (sequence) of J-integral line contours.

DBLINE, names a line of drawbeadsegments

GNLINE, names a line of node pointsselected by general selections.

Section 6.9: Variables

ALIAS, assigns an alternate name to avariable.

CONSTANT, defines a variable to have aconstant value.

RESULTANT, defines a variable as anarithmetic expression.

Chapter 7: Results listingcommands

Section 7.1: Model information

MODELINFO, lists information aboutthe finite element model loaded intothe database.

RESPONSEINFO, lists informationabout the response solutions for thefinite element model loaded into thedatabase.

VARIABLEINFO, lists informationabout the variables used to plot andlist results.

MASSINFO, lists the total mass, volumeand other related information for thatpart of the model selected by MASS-SELECT.

MPFINFO, lists information associatedwith ground motion modalparticipation factors.

CGINFO, lists information about thespecified contact group.

CPINFO, lists information about thespecified contact pair.

CSINFO, lists information about thespecified contact surface.

DRAWBEADINFO, lists informationabout the specified drawbead.

EGINFO, lists information about thespecified element group.

ELINFO, lists information about thespecified element.

NODEINFO, lists information about thespecified node.

Section 7.2: Variables listing

POINTMAX, scans the values of up tosix variables at the specified point andlists the most extreme values.

Chap. 2 Quick index


LINEMAX, scans the values of up to sixvariables along the specified line andlists the most extreme values.

ZONEMAX, scans the values of up to sixvariables in the specified zone andlists the most extreme values.

POINTEXCEED, scans the values of upto six variables at the specified pointand lists the values that exceed aprespecified value.

LINEEXCEED, scans the values of up tosix variables along the specified lineand lists the values that exceed aprespecified value.

ZONEEXCEED, scans the values of upto six variables in the specified zoneand lists the values that exceed aprespecified value.

POINTLIST, lists the values of up to sixvariables at the specified point.

LINELIST, lists the values of up to sixvariables at points within the specifiedline.

ZONELIST, lists the values of up to sixvariables at points in a zone.

Chapter 8: Graphics devices

PLSYSTEM, specifies the plottingsystem used to draw to the graphicswindow.

PLCONTROL AI, specifies theparameters associated with the AdobeIllustrator plotting system driver.

PLCONTROL GDI, specifies theparameters associated with theWindows GDI plotting system driver.

PLCONTROL HPGL, specifies theparameters associated with the HP-GLplotting system driver.

PLCONTROL HPGL2, specifies theparameters associated with theHP-GL/2 plotting system driver.

PLCONTROL NULL, specifies theparameters associated with the NULLplotting system.

PLCONTROL OPENGL, specifies theparameters associated with theOpenGL plotting system driver.

PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT, specifiesthe parameters associated with thePostScript plotting system driver.

PLCONTROL XWINDOW, specifiesthe parameters associated with the XWindow plotting system driver.

Chapter 3

Input/output

DATABASE NEW Sec. 3.1 Database operations


DATABASE NEW SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE NEW creates a new database. The new database is initially empty. Beforecreating the new database, you have the option of saving any current internal database to disk. This option is controlled by parameters SAVE and PERMFILE.

SAVE [UNKNOWN]Parameter SAVE is used only when a database has been modified. If you specify YES, theprogram will save the current internal database to disk using the filename specified byparameter PERMFILE. Then the program will create a new internal database. If you specifyNO, the program will not save the current internal database before creating a new internaldatabase. If you specify UNKNOWN, the program will ask you if you want to save thedatabase. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}

PERMFILE [the current permanent database filename]PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent database file when saving the current databasefile to disk. You will be prompted for this name if you do not enter a value for this parameterand no permanent database name was previously specified.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]When saving a permanent database file, you will be prompted "Ready to save permanentdatabase file?" if PROMPT is set to YES. You will be prompted "Permanent database filealready exists" if the database file already exists and PROMPT is set to UNKNOWN. You willnot receive a prompt if PROMPT is set to NO. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}

Chap. 3 Input/output DATABASE OPEN


DATABASE OPEN FILE SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE OPEN opens a database. Before the AUI opens the database, you have theoption of saving the current internal database to disk.

Also see DATABASE ATTACH in this section for another way to access a permanentdatabase.

You can open a database that was created by earlier versions of the AUI. In this case,however, the AUI deletes and reinitializes all graphics and model display definitions in theworking copy of the opened database.

FILE [the current permanent database filename]The filename of the permanent database file to be opened. If you do not enter a filename andthere is no default value, the program will prompt you for the filename.

SAVE [UNKNOWN]Used only when a database has been modified. If you specify YES, the program will save thecurrent internal database to disk using the filename specified by parameter PERMFILE. Thenthe program will open the database specified by FILE. If you specify NO, the program willnot save the current internal database before opening the specified database. If you specifyUNKNOWN, the program will ask you if you want to save the database. {YES / NO /UNKNOWN}

PERMFILE [the current permanent database filename]PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent database file when saving the current databasefile to disk. The program will prompt you if you do not enter a value for PERMFILE and ifno permanent database filename has previously been specified.


DATABASE SAVE Sec. 3.1 Database operations


DATABASE SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE SAVE saves the current internal database as a permanent database file.

Also see DATABASE DETACH in this section for another way to save the current internaldatabase.

PERMFILE [the current permanent database filename]Specifies the filename of the permanent database file. The program will prompt you if you donot enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previously beenspecified.


Chap. 3 Input/output DATABASE ATTACH


DATABASE ATTACH FILE

DATABASE ATTACH allows access to the specified file as an AUI database file. UnlikeDATABASE OPEN (described in this section), DATABASE ATTACH does not make aworking copy of the database file prior to opening it. Instead you work directly with thespecified file as you use the AUI, possibly modifying the file's contents.

The advantages of DATABASE ATTACH as compared to DATABASE OPEN are: diskrequirements are reduced because the AUI does not create a copy of the database file, and theCPU time to attach a database is much less than the CPU time required to open it.

The disadvantages of DATABASE ATTACH are: (1) important information can beinadvertently modified or deleted from an attached database file, (2) the attached databasecannot shrink, but can only grow as the AUI is used and (3) an attached database file cannotbe saved, but can only be detached using DATABASE DETACH (described in this section).

Before you can use DATABASE ATTACH, you must first save any current database, andthen use DATABASE NEW (described in this section) to create a new database. You canuse DATABASE ATTACH only if the current database is new and unmodified.

DATABASE ATTACH clears the permanent database filename.

You can attach a database that was created by earlier versions of the AUI. In this case,however, the AUI deletes and reinitializes all graphics and model display definitions in theattached database.

Exiting the AUI when a database is attached automatically detaches the database.

FILEThe filename of the permanent database file to be attached. If no filename is entered, theAUI will prompt you for the filename.

DATABASE DETACH Sec. 3.1 Database operations


DATABASE DETACH PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE DETACH creates a permanent database file by detaching the working copy ofthe database file. Unlike DATABASE SAVE (described in this section), DATABASEDETACH does not create a new permanent database file.

The advantages of DATABASE DETACH as compared to DATABASE SAVE are: diskrequirements are reduced because the AUI does not create a copy of the database file, and theCPU time to detach a database is much less than the CPU time required to save it.

The disadvantage of DATABASE DETACH is: the AUI does not compress the database fileby removing unused records.

After the database is detached, the AUI creates a new empty internal database.

A database can be detached at any time whether or not it was attached using DATABASEATTACH (described in this section).

PERMFILEThe working copy of the database file is renamed to PERMFILE.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]You will be prompted "Ready to rename permanent database file?" if PROMPT is set to YES. You will be prompted "Permanent database file already exists" if the database file alreadyexists and PROMPT is set to UNKNOWN. You will not receive a prompt if PROMPT is set toNO. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}

Chap. 3 Input/output DATABASE MOVIESAVE


DATABASE MOVIESAVE FILE PROMPT

DATABASE MOVIESAVE allows you to create a database that contains only movies. Youcan open the database at a later time and show the movies, either as animations or as stillimages. The size of the database file created using DATABASE MOVIESAVE is typicallymuch smaller than the size of the database file created using DATABASE SAVE (describedin this section) because no finite element information is saved when using DATABASEMOVIESAVE.

This command is provided for convenience in preparing demonstrations in which you willshow animations or still images. For information about creating movies, see Section 5.11.

DATABASE MOVIESAVE does not modify the existing temporary database. You can, at alater time, use DATABASE SAVE or DATABASE DETACH (both described in thissection) to save or detach the entire database.

FILEThe filename of the database file. If no filename is entered, the AUI will prompt you for thefilename.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]You will be prompted "Ready to save database file?" if PROMPT is set to YES. You will beprompted "Database file already exists" if the database file already exists and PROMPT is setto UNKNOWN. You will not receive a prompt if PROMPT is set to NO. {YES / NO /UNKNOWN}

LOADPORTHOLE Sec. 3.2 Porthole files


LOADPORTHOLE OPERATION FILE PRESCAN RANGE TIMESTART TIMEEND STEPSTART STEPEND STEPINCREMENT ZOOM-MODEL

LOADPORTHOLE loads an ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F porthole file into the database.

The porthole file can be created by any of the ADINA system programs version 7.0 andhigher.

You can load the porthole files from two different finite element programs into the database. For example, you can load the ADINA and the ADINA-F porthole files created byADINA-FSI into the database. When the results from two different finite element programsare stored in the database, use the FEPROGRAM command (described in Section 3.4) to setthe current finite element program. Some commands require that you set the current finiteelement program.

You can load the porthole file into a database file created by ADINA-IN. The data from theporthole file does not overwrite the ADINA-IN information because the AUI keepsADINA-IN and ADINA-PLOT information separate. The advantage of loading the portholefile into an ADINA-IN database is that you can then access geometry information duringpostprocessing. For example, you can plot the deformed mesh and the geometry in the samemesh plot. You can also use the postprocessing commands that require geometricalinformation, such as GNCOMBINATION (described in Section 6.7).

You can load porthole files that were split using the MAX-STEPS parameter in thePORTHOLE command (ADINA-IN for ADINA). Load the first porthole file usingLOADPORTHOLE CREATE and any successive porthole files using LOADPORTHOLERESTART or LOADPORTHOLE APPEND (it doesn’t matter which command you use).

When you load a porthole file, the AUI automatically sets the mode to POSTPROCESSING(see the MODE command described in Section 3.4) and sets the current finite elementprogram (see the FEPROGRAM command).

OPERATIONCREATE Overwrites any existing postprocessing information from ADINA,

ADINA-T or ADINA-F and loads the database with information from theporthole file. Any preprocessing information from these programs is notaffected.

RESTART Appends information from the porthole file to information stored in thedatabase. This option is only applicable when the porthole file correspondsto a restart run and when the results preceding the restart run are already inthe database.

Chap. 3 Input/output LOADPORTHOLE


APPEND Appends information from the porthole file to information stored in thedatabase. The appended porthole file need not be a restart run for whichresults are already in the database. The appended porthole file and theresults already in the database must have the same number of nodes,elements, element groups, etc. Only the loads, time functions and numberof steps can be different.

The AUI shifts the load step numbers and solution times in the appendedporthole file so that the load step numbers and solution times do not conflictwith load step numbers and solution times previously loaded. The AUIoutputs the load step number shift and solution time shift after loading theappended porthole file.

After loading the appended porthole file, you can access results from theappended porthole using the shifted solution times. See the example belowfor more details.

FILEThe porthole file to be loaded in this command. The file can be formatted or unformatted;this command automatically determines whether the file is formatted or unformatted.

PRESCAN [NO]Specifies whether the AUI reads the porthole file twice, the first time to determine how manytime steps, mode shapes, etc are in the porthole file, and the second time to actually load theporthole file. The first read of the porthole file is called the prescan. When the AUI reads theporthole file twice, then the AUI uses information learned during the prescan to update theprogress bar when loading the porthole file. But the AUI does not use the prescaninformation for any other purpose. In particular, the AUI can load the porthole file whetherPRESCAN=YES or NO.

RANGE [ALL]Specifies whether the AUI should skip time steps while loading the porthole file.

ALL The AUI loads all time stepsTIME The AUI loads time steps with solution times in the range TIMESTART to

TIMEEND (including time steps with solution times TIMESTART andTIMEEND)

STEP The AUI loads time steps with step numbers in the sequence STEPSTART,STEPSTART+STEPINCREMENT, ..., STEPEND.



TIMESTARTTIMEENDThe range of solution times used when RANGE=TIME.

STEPSTARTSTEPENDSTEPINCREMENTThe range of step numbers used when RANGE=STEP.

ZOOM-MODEL [0]This parameter is used to force the AUI to load a normal porthole file (that is, a porthole filefrom a model that is not a zoom-model) as a zoom-model. The number of the zoom-model isthe value of the ZOOM-MODEL parameter. If ZOOM-MODEL=0, the porthole is notloaded as a zoom-model.

Note, when loading a zoom-model porthole file, the AUI automatically detects that theporthole file is a zoom-model porthole file, and there is no need to use parameter ZOOM-MODEL. So parameter ZOOM-MODEL is typically not used.

Example for splitting porthole files

ADINA-IN for ADINA:

...PORTHOLE MAX-STEPS=2...ADINA FILE=ex.dat

ADINA:

Runs for 100 time steps, creating files ex_1.port to ex_20.port (ADINA creates a maximumof 20 split porthole files; the last split porthole file contains all of the remaining solutionsteps).

ADINA-PLOT:

LOADPORTHOLE CREATE ex_1.portLOADPORTHOLE RESTART ex_2.port...LOADPORTHOLE RESTART ex_20.port

ex_1.port must always be the first porthole file loaded. All of the other porthole files neednot be loaded; for example, the following ADINA-PLOT commands will also work:

Chap. 3 Input/output LOADPORTHOLE


LOADPORTHOLE CREATE ex_1.portLOADPORTHOLE RESTART ex_3.portLOADPORTHOLE RESTART ex_20.port

Example for LOADPORTHOLE APPEND

Suppose that there are two porthole files (runa.por and runb.por) corresponding to the samefinite element model, but with different loadings. runa.por contains results for run A andrunb.por contains results for run B. Both porthole files contain information from steps 0 to10, solution times 0.0 to 3.0. Now suppose that you load runa.por into the AUI usingLOADPORTHOLE CREATE and runb.por into the AUI using LOADPORTHOLEAPPEND. Then the AUI outputs the time shift as 4.0 (4.0 = 3.0 + 1.0) and the load step shiftas 11 (10 +1).

You can select any solution from either run by setting the time appropriately. For example,time 1.0 corresponds to run A, solution time 1.0; time 3.0 corresponds to run A, solution time3.0; time 4.0 corresponds to run B, solution time 0.0; time 7.0 corresponds to run B, solutiontime 3.0. In a listing, results for times 0.0 to 3.0 correspond to run A and results for times 4.0to 7.0 correspond to run B.

Notes for the RANGE options

1) Initial conditions are always loaded.

2) All load steps are always loaded under the following conditions:ADINA model, linearized buckling analysis.ADINA model, ground motion modal participation factors are computed.ADINA-T model, porthole file from ADINA-T 7.5 and lower.

3) When loading a porthole file from a restart analysis, the step numbers are those in therestart analysis. For example, if there are 10 steps in the restart analysis, then STEPSTARTand STEPEND should be between 1 and 10.

4) There is no way at present to load only the last computed time step.

5) There is no way at present to load only the first few mode shapes.

Notes for the ZOOM-MODEL parameter and zoom-models

A porthole file that is a zoom-model is loaded as a zoom-model when there is already data inthe database for ADINA. For example

LOADPORTHOLE CREATE main.port // loads main.portLOADPORTHOLE CREATE zoom.port // loads zoom.port



main.port and zoom.port are loaded “side-by-side”. zoom.port is assigned a zoom-modelnumber, for example 1. Then, to postprocess the results from the zoom-model, the zoommodel is considered to be a substructure of the ADINA model. For example, to label nodepoint 5 in zoom-model 1, use

NODEPOINT TEST SUBSTRUCTURE=1 NODE=5

Exceptions are the ZONE and HIGHLIGHT commands. For these commands, use thekeyword ‘ZOOM-MODEL’, for example

ZONE TEST‘ELEMENT GROUP 1 OF ZOOM-MODEL 1'DATAEND

Chap. 3 Input/output READ


READ FILE REWIND SCANDATA

READ reads AUI input commands from the file specified by parameter FILE until the end ofthe file is reached or the READ END command is encountered in the file. After the READcommand is executed, subsequent input is read from the previous command input source (thatis, the input source from which the READ command was entered).

READ commands can be nested (that is, a file processed by the READ command can includea READ command).

FILEThe name of the file from which AUI commands are read. Note that the name END is notallowed.

REWIND [NO]If the file pointer is at end-of-file or if the file is not currently open, the read file is rewoundbefore beginning to read commands regardless of the value of this parameter. {YES / NO}

SCANDATA [' ']If SCANDATA is specified, the file is scanned until the SCANDATA string (1 - 80characters) is found anywhere within an input record. Reading of input data from the filestarts at the beginning of the record that contains the string.

FILEREAD Sec. 3.3 Auxiliary files


FILEREAD OPTION FILE

FILEREAD controls the source of input commands to the AUI.

OPTION [INTERFACE]

INTERFACE Commands are read from the terminal or window from which you invokedthe AUI.

FILE Commands are read from the file specified by the FILE parameter.

FILEUsed only if OPTION = FILE. The filename of the file from which commands are read.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILEREAD

Chap. 3 Input/output FILESESSION


FILESESSION OPTION FILE

FILESESSION controls the generation and output of a session file. The session file containsthe commands needed to repeat an AUI session.

Use the COMMANDFILE command (described in this section) to create a file that containsthe commands needed to reconstruct an AUI database.

OPTION [NO]

NO No session file is created.

OVERWRITE A session file is generated and overwrites any existing contents of thespecified file.

APPEND A session file is generated and is appended to any existing contents of thespecified file.

REACTIVATE = NO if no file is specified= APPEND if a file is specified

FILE [the current session filename, if any]The filename of the session file.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILESESSION

FILELIST Sec. 3.3 Auxiliary files


FILELIST OPTION FILE LINPAG EJECT

FILELIST controls the format and output of listings.

OPTION [INTERFACE]

INTERFACE Listings are output at the terminal or window from which you invoked theAUI. Listings are buffered using a "UNIX more"-like interface that allowsyou to scroll through listings.

FILE Listings are output to the file specified by the FILE parameter.

TEMPFILE Listings are output to temporary files. Each listing is placed in a separatefile. The filenames are of the form ‘tmpXX_YYYY.lst’, where XX is anumber between 00 and 99 and YYYY is a number between 0000 and9999. XX is the same number for all listings produced in a single run, andYYYY is incremented for each listing produced in the run.

FILEUsed only if OPTION = FILE. The filename of the file to which listings are written. Thiscan be the same file used for command echoing or logging.

LINPAG [0]The maximum of lines output between list headings. You can suppress list headings (exceptfor the first list heading) by specifying LINPAG = 0.

EJECT [NO]Specifies whether page ejects are placed before headings. {YES / NO}

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILELIST

Chap. 3 Input/output FILEECHO


FILEECHO OPTION FILE

FILEECHO controls the echoing of your input commands.

OPTION [INTERFACE]NO no echoing of input commands.

INTERFACE input commands are echoed back to the terminal or window from whichyou invoked the AUI.

FILE input commands are echoed back to the file specified by the FILEparameter.

FILEUsed only if OPTION = FILE. The filename of the file to which input commands areechoed back. This can be the same file for logs or listings.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILEECHO

FILELOG Sec. 3.3 Auxiliary files


FILELOG OPTION FILE

FILELOG controls the output of log messages.

OPTION [INTERFACE]

INTERFACE Log messages are written to the terminal or window from which youinvoked the AUI.

FILE Log messages are written to the file specified by the FILE parameter.

FILEUsed only if OPTION = FILE. The filename of the file to which log messages are written. This can be the same file used for echoed commands or listings.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILELOG

Chap. 3 Input/output SNAPSHOT


SNAPSHOT FILENAME APPEND SYSTEM RESIZE ROTATION SURFACE PROMPT UPDATE

SNAPSHOT creates a graphics file that corresponds to the currently displayed graphicswindow. The graphics file is formatted according to the settings of the specified plottingsystem.

Only that part of the graphics window that is currently visible is output to the graphics file. Therefore you can zoom into the picture and make a snapshot of the zoomed portion. Conversely, if you want to make a snapshot of the entire graphics window, you must zoomout.

When SNAPSHOT creates the graphics file, it can optionally transform the graphics, forexample, to make the graphics fit in the plotting surface defined by the specified plottingsystem.

Parameters of the plotting systems are defined using the corresponding PLCONTROLcommands (see Chapter 8).

See the SAVEBMP command (in this section) for additional options.

FILENAMESpecifies the disk file to which the snapshot will be stored. This parameter must be entered.

APPEND [YES]Used when the specified disk file already exists. If APPEND = NO, the existing disk file willbe overwritten; if APPEND = YES, the new plotting information will be appended to the endof the existing disk file. {YES / NO}

SYSTEM [POSTSCRIPT]Specifies which plotting system (file format) to use. Choices are

AI Adobe Illustrator file format HP-GL HP-GL file formatHP-GL/2 HP-GL/2 file formatPOSTSCRIPT PostScript file format

RESIZE [YES]Controls whether the snapshot of the graphics window is resized to fill the area defined by theplotting system. {YES / NO}

SNAPSHOT Sec. 3.3 Auxiliary files


ROTATION [0]The snapshot of the graphics window can be rotated into the area defined by the plottingsystem. The amount of rotation is controlled by the ROTATION parameter. If you specifyROTATION = NONE, then the snapshot is not rotated.

If you specify ROTATION = 0, ±90, ±180, ±270, then the snapshot is rotated in twosteps. First the program computes the amount of rotation needed to make the long edge of thesnapshot be aligned with the long edge of the plotting surface. After the snapshot is rotatedby this amount, it is then rotated by the angle given by the ROTATION parameter. {NONE/ 0 / ±90 / ±180 / ±270}

SURFACE <not currently active> [CURRENT]

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]You will be prompted "Ready to write to snapshot file?" if PROMPT = YES. You will beprompted "The snapshot file already exists" if the snapshot file already exists and PROMPT= UNKNOWN. You will not receive a prompt if PROMPT = NO. {YES / NO /UNKNOWN}

UPDATE [NO]Controls whether the initial values of command parameters are updated. If UPDATE = NO,the initial values are not updated and the command is run. If UPDATE = YES, the initialvalues are updated and the command is run. {YES / NO}

Auxiliary commands

LIST SNAPSHOTLists the current default values of the SNAPSHOT parameters.

UPDATE SNAPSHOT FILENAME APPEND SYSTEM RESIZE ROTATION SURFACE PROMPT UPDATE

Updates the initial values for the SNAPSHOT command, but does not run theSNAPSHOT command. (Note that the UPDATE parameter of the SNAPSHOTcommand can be used to update the initial values and immediately run the SNAPSHOTcommand.)

RESET SNAPSHOTResets the default values for the SNAPSHOT command to their initial values (which aregiven above).

Chap. 3 Input/output MOVIESAVE


MOVIESAVE MOVIENUMBER FIRST LAST FILENAME APPEND SYSTEM RESIZE ROTATION

MOVIESAVE creates a graphics file that corresponds to the movie frames of a movie. Thefile is formatted according to the settings of the specified plotting system. This command canbe used, for example, to save an animation that was created by a MOVIESHOOT commandto disk. See Section 5.11 for information about creating movies and animations.

The movie frames are chosen by specifying a movie number and a range of frames within thatmovie.

When MOVIESAVE creates the graphics file, it can optionally transform the graphics, forexample, to fit in the plotting surface defined by the specified plotting system. Parameters ofthe plotting systems are defined using the corresponding PLCONTROL commands (seeChapter 8).

Once you have saved the graphics file, you can convert it into commonly used PC formatsusing the instructions given in AUI Primer problem 7.

See the SAVEAVI command (in this section) for additional options. Note that theSAVEAVI command is only available for the Windows version of the AUI, and the AUImust be run in user interface mode.

MOVIENUMBER [last defined movie number]The movie number from which the movie frames are saved.

FIRST [FIRST]LAST [LAST]The first and last movie frames in the movie to save. {ALL / FIRST / LAST/ or aninteger}

FILENAME [' ']Specifies the disk file to which the movie frames will be output. This parameter must beentered.

APPEND [NO]Used when the specified disk file already exists. If APPEND = NO, the existing disk file willbe overwritten; if APPEND = YES, the new plotting information will be appended to the endof the existing disk file. {YES / NO}

SYSTEM [POSTSCRIPT]Specifies which plotting system (file format) to use. Choices are

AI Adobe Illustrator file format

MOVIESAVE Sec. 3.3 Auxiliary files


HP-GL HP-GL file formatHP-GL/2 HP-GL/2 file formatPOSTSCRIPT PostScript file format

RESIZE [YES]Controls whether the movie frames are resized into the area defined by the plotting surface. {YES / NO}

ROTATION [NONE]The movie frames can be rotated when saved. The amount of rotation is controlled by theROTATION parameter.

If you specify ROTATION = NONE, the movie frames are not rotated.

If you specify ROTATION = 0, ±90, ±180, ±270, then each movie frame is rotated intwo steps. First the program computes the amount of rotation needed to make the long edgeof the movie frame align with the long edge of the plotting surface. After the movie frame isrotated by this amount, it is then rotated by the angle given by the ROTATION parameter.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]You will be prompted "Ready to write to moviesave file?" if PROMPT = YES. You will beprompted "The moviesave file already exists" if the moviesave file already exists andPROMPT = UNKNOWN. If PROMPT = NO, you will not receive a prompt. {YES / NO/UNKNOWN}

Auxiliary commands

LIST MOVIESAVELists the current default values of the MOVIESAVE parameters.

UPDATE MOVIESAVE FILENAME APPEND SYSTEM RESIZEROTATION

Updates the initial values of some of the MOVIESAVE parameters, but does not run theMOVIESAVE command.

RESET MOVIESAVEResets the default values for the MOVIESAVE command to their initial values.

Chap. 3 Input/output SAVEAVI


SAVEAVI FILENAME SPEED XSIZE YSIZE MOVIENUMBER SIZE SCALE COLORBITS

The SAVEAVI command creates an AVI file from the frames of a movie. See Section 5.11for information about creating movies and animations.

This command is implemented only for Windows versions of the AUI. The AUI must be runin user interface mode for this command to work. For UNIX versions of the AUI, use theMOVIESAVE command (described in this section) to save the movie to PostScript format,then convert the PostScript file to AVI format as described in AUI Primer problem 7.

FILENAME [' ']Specifies the name of the AVI file to which the movie frames will be output. This parametermust be entered.

SPEED [15]The number of frames per second at which the AVI file will play back.

XSIZE [640]YSIZE [480]The size of each frame in the AVI file, in pixels. This parameter is used only if SIZE=SPECIFIED, see below.

MOVIENUMBER [last defined movie number]The movie number of the animation to save to the AVI file.

SIZE [FRAME]If SIZE=FRAME, the size of each frame in the AVI file is the size of each frame in the moviewhen the movie was created (in pixels), multiplied by parameter SCALE. If SIZE=SPECIFIED, the size of each frame in the AVI file is that specified by parameters XSIZEand YSIZE.

SCALE [1.0]The scale factor used to obtain the size of each frame in the AVI file, if SIZE=FRAME.SCALE must be between 0.2 and 1.0.

COLORBITS [16]The number of color bits per pixel used in the AVI file {8 / 16 / 24}.

SAVEBMP Sec. 3.3 Auxiliary files


SAVEBMP FILENAME SIZE SCALE XSIZE YSIZE

The SAVEBMP command creates a bitmap file from the currently displayed graphicswindow. The format of the bitmap file can be BMP, DIB or JPEG for the Windows version,and can be BMP or JPEG for UNIX versions.

The AUI must be run in user interface mode for this command to work. For UNIX versionsof the AUI, the plotting system must be X Window (see the PLSYSTEM command in Section8.1 to set the plotting system).

As an alternative to the SAVEBMP command, use the SNAPSHOT command (described inthis section) to save the currently displayed graphics window to a vector format such asPostScript or Adobe Illustrator, then use a PC program such as CorelDraw or AdobeIllustrator to convert the file to a bitmap file.

FILENAME [' ']Specifies the name of the bitmap file. This parameter must be entered. The extension thatyou give the filename determines the format of the file: .BMP for a BMP file, .DIB for a DIBfile, .JPG, .JPEG, .JPE for a JPEG file. (The case of the letters used in the extension doesn’tmatter.)

SIZE [FRAME]If SIZE=FRAME, the size of the bitmap file is the size of the currently displayed graphicswindow (in pixels), multiplied by parameter SCALE. If SIZE=SPECIFIED, the size of thebitmap file is that specified by parameters XSIZE and YSIZE.

SCALE [1.0]The scale factor used to obtain the size of the bitmap file, if SIZE=FRAME. SCALE must bebetween 0.2 and 1.0.

XSIZE [640]YSIZE [480]The size of the bitmap file, in pixels. This parameter is used only if SIZE=SPECIFIED.

Chap. 3 Input/output COMMANDFILE


COMMANDFILE FILENAME PROMPT OPTION

The COMMANDFILE command creates a file containing the commands needed to recreatethe model stored in the current database.

Use the FILESESSION command (described in this section) to create a file containing thecommands needed to repeat an AUI session.

FILENAMEThe name of the file to be created. This parameter must be entered.

PROMPT [from CONTROL PROMPT]You will be prompted “Ready to write command file?” if PROMPT = YES. You will beprompted "The command file already exists" if the specified file already exists and PROMPT= UNKNOWN. You will not be prompted if PROMPT = NO.

OPTION [SESSION]If OPTION = SESSION, the command file produced is a record of all commands issuedwhen this database file is in use. The command file contains model modifications anddeletions as well as model additions. Commands in the command file can contain referencesto other files; for example, when a porthole file is loaded, the command file contains aLOADPORTHOLE command (described in Section 3.2).

Commands that you issue while CONTROL SESSIONSTORAGE=NO are not stored in thecommand file. See Section 6.1 for a description of the CONTROL command.

Currently OPTION must be set to SESSION. This parameter is provided for futuredevelopments of the AUI.

GRAPHICS [NO]This parameter is used when OPTION = SESSION to control whether graphics commandssuch as FRAME, MESHPLOT, VIEW, etc. are written to the command file. If GRAPHICS= YES, graphics commands are written to the command file, otherwise they are not written.

MODE Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary commands


MODE MODE

The database can contain both ADINA-IN data and ADINA-PLOT data. Use this commandto specify which kind of data to display.

This command is active only if read by the command-line interface. It is ignored when usingthe user interfaces (UNIX or Windows).

When you load a porthole file, the AUI automatically sets the mode to POSTPROCESSING.

When working with a database created with AUI 7.2 or below, it is necessary to setMODE=PREPROCESSING to display ADINA-PLOT data.

MODE [PREPROCESSING]PREPROCESSING The AUI will display ADINA-IN data.

POSTPROCESSING The AUI will display ADINA-PLOT data.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MODELists the current mode of operation.

Chap. 3 Input/output FEPROGRAM


FEPROGRAM PROGRAM

FEPROGRAM specifies the current finite element program.

You need to use this command only when you have loaded the results from more than onefinite element program into the database.

PROGRAM [ADINA]The finite element analysis program name {ADINA / ADINA-T / ADINA-F}.

PAUSE Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary commands


PAUSE

When the AUI reads the PAUSE command, it stops processing commands until you hit a key.

Chap. 3 Input/output PARAMETER


PARAMETER NAME EXPRESSION

Defines a parameter that can be substituted in a later command. The parameter can either bean arbitrary string or a numeric expression. If the parameter is a numeric expression, the AUIevaluates it and stores the resulting number as the value of the parameter.

Parameter definitions and values are not stored in the database.

Parameter substitution is described in the examples at the end of this command.

NAMEThe name of the parameter (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters). The name is not case sensitive. If the parameter is not already defined, a new parameter is created, otherwise the existingparameter is modified.

Note that the name cannot contain a - (to avoid confusion with minus signs).

EXPRESSIONA string (up to 256 characters long) that contains a numeric expression or an arbitrary textstring. The numeric expression string can contain the following items:

The arithmetic operators +, -, *, /, ** (exponentiation)

Numbers (either real numbers or integers)

The following functions:

ABS(x) absolute valueAINT(x) truncationANINT(x) nearest whole numberACOS(x) arccosineASIN(x) arcsineATAN(x) arctangentATAN2(x,y) arctangent(x/y)COS(x) cosineCOSH(x) hyperbolic cosineDIM(x,y) positive differenceEXP(x) exponentialLOG(x) natural logarithm LOG10(x) common logarithmMAX(x,y,...) largest valueMIN(x,y,...) smallest valueMOD(x,y) remainderingSIGN(x,y) transfer of sign

PARAMETER Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary commands


SIN(x) sineSINH(x) hyperbolic sineSQRT(x) square rootSTEP(x) the unit step function:

TAN(x) tangentTANH(x) hyperbolic tangent

All trigonometric functions operate on or return angles in radians.

Use an initial backslash \ to prevent the string from being interpreted as a numeric expression.

Examples

PARAMETER A '3.0' // A = 3PARAMETER B '5 + 7' // B = 12PARAMETER C '6 * \ // The string can be entered on several

5 ' // command lines as in this example; C = 30PARAMETER D ‘\My string’// The initial backslash signals the start of

// a text string.

Parameter substitution

When the command-line parser finds a token value that starts with a $, the parser finds theparameter name with that token value and substitutes the parameter value. For example, inthe commands PARAMETER X1 '2.0/3.0'PARAMETER X2 'SQRT(5.0)'PARAMETER X3 'SIN(2.0)' BODY BLOCK DX1=$X1 DX2=$X2 DX3=$X3

the parser looks for the values of X1, X2 and X3 and substitutes the values (e.g. thecharacters '0.666666666666667') for the names (e.g. the characters 'X1'). Hence theabove commands are exactly equivalent to the command

BODY BLOCK DX1=0.666666666666667 DX2=2.23606797749979, DX3=0.909297426825682

The token values need not be in upper-case:

BODY BLOCK DX1=$x1 DX2=$x2 DX3=$x3

Chap. 3 Input/output PARAMETER


Parameter substitution occurs before command execution, so the following is allowed:

PARAMETER A '2.0'PARAMETER A '$A + 1' // A = 3

Now you may want to put the symbol $ into a string without parameter substitution occuring. The rule is: if the next character after the $ is a letter [a-z], the command-line parser attemptsparameter substitution. So

PARAMETER A '3.0'USERTEXT ABC'The cost is $2000.00''The size is $A'DATAEND

is equivalent to

USERTEXT ABC'The cost is $2000.00''The size is 3.0'DATAEND

A convenient way to output the value of a single parameter is with the ECHO command(described in this section):

PARAMETER X1 '2.0/3.0'ECHO $X1ECHO 'The value of X1 is $X1'

You can also use parameter substitution with parameters that are not numeric expressions:

PARAMETER GROUPTYPE '\THREEDSOLID'EGROUP $GROUPTYPE

is equivalent to

EGROUP THREEDSOLID

Auxiliary command

LIST PARAMETERLists the values of all parameters.

ECHO Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary commands


ECHO STRING

Outputs the given string. This command can be used to output the value of a parameter, seethe examples given in the PARAMETER command description (in this section).

The output of the ECHO command goes either to the terminal or window from which youinvoked the AUI, or to the file specified in the FILELOG command (which is described inSection 3.3).

STRINGA string (up to 256 characters long).

Chap. 3 Input/output END


END SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDIATE

END terminates the program.

If the program is reading data from a file specified by the FILEREAD command and the endof the file is reached, the END command is executed automatically.

SAVE [UNKNOWN]Used only when you have modified the internal database. If you specify SAVE = YES, theprogram will save the current internal database to disk using the filename specified byparameter PERMFILE. If you specify SAVE = NO, the program will ask you forconfirmation. If you confirm by answering YES, then the program will not save the internaldatabase. If you specify SAVE = UNKNOWN, the program will ask you if you want to savethe internal database. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}

PERMFILE [the current permanent database filename]PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent database file when saving the current databasefile to disk. If you do not enter a value for PERMFILE and no previously specifiedpermanent database filename was specified, the program will prompt you for the value ofPERMFILE.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]When saving a permanent database file, you will be prompted "Ready to save permanentdatabase file?" if PROMPT = YES. You will be prompted "Permanent database file alreadyexists" if that is the case and PROMPT = UNKNOWN. You will not be prompted if PROMPTis set to NO. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}

IMMEDIATE [NO]If IMMEDIATE=YES, the program immediately stops execution without saving the databaseor prompting you. This option is most useful when writing batch scripts to force the programto terminate.{YES / NO}

Auxiliary commands

EXIT SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDIATE

QUIT SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDIATE

STOP SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDATEEXIT, QUIT and STOP are equivalent to END.

Chapter 4

Editing commands and graphicsinteraction

UNDO Sec. 4.1 Editing


UNDO NUMBER

UNDO cancels the effects of previous commands.

UNDO is possible only if CONTROL UNDO is greater than zero. See Section 6.1 for adescription of the CONTROL command.

The UNDO command can itself be undone by REDO (described in this section).

NUMBER [1]The number of previous commands to be undone. The maximum possible number ofprevious commands that can be undone is set by CONTROL UNDO. However, the actualnumber of previous commands that can be undone may be less than this.

Chap. 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction REDO


REDO NUMBER

REDO cancels the effects of previous UNDO commands (described in this section). It can beused only if the previous command was either UNDO or REDO.

A REDO command can be followed by an UNDO command to cancel the REDO.

NUMBER [1]The number of previous UNDO commands to be undone.

PICKED DELETE Sec. 4.2 Graphics interaction


PICKED DELETE

PICKED DELETE deletes all picked graphics. Use LOCATOR PICK (described in thissection) to pick graphics.

See the AUI Primer for information about picking graphics.

Chap. 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL


PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL

PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL resets the mesh viewing window to normal for allpicked mesh plots, or for the current mesh plot if there are no picked mesh plots.

The normal mesh viewing window is the smallest box in the view projection plane thatcontains the projections of all mesh plot coordinates. See the MESHWINDOW command inSection 5.2 for a description of mesh viewing windows.

Use LOCATOR PICK (described in this section) to pick graphics.

RESET MESHWINDOW Sec. 4.2 Graphics interaction


RESET MESHWINDOW

RESET MESHWINDOW resets the mesh viewing window to normal for all mesh plots. Seethe MESHWINDOW command in Section 5.2 for a description of mesh viewing windows.

Chap. 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction LOCATOR


LOCATOR ACTION

LOCATOR activates or deactivates the locator and specifies the locator action.

A locator is used to point to a location on the graphics window. Usually the locator is themouse.

When the locator is active, the program does not read commands from the command-lineinterface. If the program reads the LOCATOR command from a file, the program stopsreading commands until you deactivate the locator. Deactivate the locator by moving thecursor into the graphics window and typing (lower-case) q.

When the locator is active you can point to items on the graphics window with it. You canalso perform some locator action, such as picking or dragging. You specify the action usingthe ACTION parameter of this command.

See the AUI Primer for more information about using the mouse to manipulate graphicsobjects, inquire graphics objects, zoom and zoom mesh plots.

ACTION [OFF]OFF Deactivates the locator.

PICK Places the locator in PICK mode. You use PICK mode to highlightsomething. You can either highlight whatever is at the locator positionor you can create a box and highlight whatever is in the box. Pick modeallows you to manipulate (move, resize, rotate) the highlighted graphics.

DRAW Places the locator in DRAW mode, i.e., freehand drawing using thelocator.

INQUIRE Places the locator in INQUIRE mode, i.e., the locator will respond byidentifying objects at the locator position. Multiple objects may beinquired on by repeated use of the locator button.

ZOOM Places the locator in ZOOM mode, i.e., the locator is used to input a"rubber-band" rectangle, the contents of which are scaled to fit thegraphics window. After the zoom, the locator action is reset to theprevious locator action.

MESHWINDOW Similar to ZOOM, except a mesh plot is scaled to fit its prior boundingrectangle, leaving other graphics in the graphics window intact.

MZOOM Similar to ZOOM, except that the locator action is not reset.

LOCATOR Sec. 4.2 Graphics interaction


Auxiliary commands

LIST LOCATOR Writes the current locator action.

Chap. 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction ZOOM


ZOOM TYPE FACTOR WINDOW UPDATE

ZOOM allows you to specify the magnification of the image on the graphics window. Thismagnification can either be specified as an absolute number (relative to the unzoomed image)or as a relative number (relative to the current image).

TYPE [ABSOLUTE]If TYPE = ABSOLUTE, the scale factor is the magnification factor relative to the unzoomedimage. If TYPE = RELATIVE, the scale factor is the magnification factor relative to thecurrent image.

FACTOR [1.0]The zoom scale factor. Scale factors greater than 1.0 enlarge the image; scale factorssmaller than 1.0 shrink the image. Note that when TYPE = ABSOLUTE, the factor must notbe smaller than 1.0.

WINDOW <not currently active> [CURRENT]

UPDATE [NO]This parameter controls whether the initial values of command parameters are updated. IfUPDATE = NO, the initial values are not updated and the command is run. If UPDATE =YES, the initial values are updated and the command is run.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ZOOMLists the current default values of the ZOOM parameters.

UPDATE ZOOM TYPE FACTOR WINDOW UPDATEUpdates the initial values for the ZOOM command, but does not run the ZOOMcommand. (Note that the UPDATE parameter of the ZOOM command can be used toupdate the initial values and immediately run the ZOOM command.)

RESET ZOOMResets the default values for the ZOOM command to their initial values (which are givenabove).

PAN Sec. 4.2 Graphics interaction


PAN XMOTION YMOTION WINDOW UNITXMOTION UNITYMOTION UPDATE

PAN allows you to pan the image in the graphics window. Panning is only useful when theimage in the graphics window has been zoomed.

XMOTION [0.0]The image is shifted by an amount XMOTION in the X direction. A positive value ofXMOTION moves the panning window to the right and the image appears to shift to the left. A negative value of XMOTION moves the panning window to the left and the image appearsto shift to the right. If XMOTION = LEFT, the panning window is moved as far as possibleto the left and the image appears to move as far as possible to the right. If XMOTION =RIGHT, the panning window is moved as far as possible to the right and the image appears tomove as far as possible to the left.

YMOTION [0.0]The image is shifted by an amount YMOTION in the Y direction. A positive value ofYMOTION moves the panning window to the top and the image appears to shift to thebottom. A negative value of YMOTION moves the panning window to the bottom and theimage appears to shift to the top. If YMOTION = TOP, the panning window is moved as faras possible to the top and the image appears to move as far as possible to the bottom. IfYMOTION = BOTTOM, the panning window is moved as far as possible to the bottom andthe image appears to move as far as possible to the top.

WINDOW <not currently active> [CURRENT]

UNITXMOTION, UNITYMOTION [PERCENT]The unit of parameters XMOTION and YMOTION. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS}

UPDATE [NO]Controls whether the initial values of command parameters are updated. {YES / NO}

Auxiliary commands

LIST PANLists the current default values of the PAN parameters.

UPDATE PAN XMOTION YMOTION WINDOW UNITXMOTION UNITYMOTION UPDATE

Updates the initial values for the PAN command, but does not run the PAN command. (Note that the UPDATE parameter of the PAN command can be used to update the initialvalues and immediately run the PAN command.)

Chap. 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction PAN


RESET PANResets the default values for the PAN command to their initial values (which are givenabove).

HIGHLIGHT Sec. 4.2 Graphics interaction


HIGHLIGHT

selectioni

HIGHLIGHT highlights the specified selections in all currently displayed mesh plots.

Each selection is a string of the form

object1 OF object2 OF ...

where the objects are

NODEELEMENTCONTACT SURFACECONTACT SEGMENTLAYERELEMENT LAYERELEMENT FACERIGID LINKCONSTRAINT EQUATIONNODE-NODE CONTACT PAIRCRACK FRONTLINE CONTOURGEOMETRY POINT or POINTGEOMETRY LINE or LINEGEOMETRY SURFACE or SURFACEGEOMETRY VOLUME or VOLUMEGEOMETRY EDGE or EDGEGEOMETRY FACE or FACEGEOMETRY BODY or BODYGEOMETRY SHEET or SHEETPROGRAMSUBSTRUCTUREREUSECYCLIC PARTELEMENT GROUPCONTACT GROUPRADIOSITY GROUPRADIOSITY SURFACERADIOSITY SEGMENTCONTACT PAIRINTERFACE ELEMENTBOUNDARY SURFACE ELEMENT

Chap. 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction HIGHLIGHT


BOUNDARY SURFACEPOTENTIAL-INTERFACEZOOM-MODEL BCELL

The characters needed to uniquely specify the object are indicated in bold.

You use “OF” to completely specify the object.

For example

'ELEMENT 1'

is an acceptable selection if there is only one element group in the model. But if there is morethan one element group, then you must use

'ELEMENT 1 OF ELEMENT GROUP 1'

to specify the first element of element group 1.

Object keywords can be abbreviated. For example

'EL 1 OF EL GR 1'

Object keywords can be upper, lower or mixed case. Keywords can be separated usingspaces.

The quotes are necessary so that the selection string is not interpreted as a command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST HIGHLIGHTLists the current selections.

Chapter 5

Display control

REGENERATE Sec. 5.1 Screen control


REGENERATE

REGENERATE reconstructs all meshplots, bandplots, etc. currently displayed on the screenaccording to the current depiction settings of the meshplots, bandplots, etc. and according tothe current state of the model.

This command is useful when you have updated the model and want to update the graphics.

Notice that if CONTROL AUTOREGENERATE=YES, then the AUI automaticallyregenerates the graphics after every change to the model (see Section 6.1 for the CONTROLcommand).

Chap. 5 Display control FRAME


FRAME LOWER UPPER ROTATION LINE SIZE ISOSIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFFSET YOFFSET INDEX CUTMARK WINDOW UNITLOWER UNITUPPER UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFFSET UNITYOFFSET UPDATE ASPECT CHARSIZE UNITCHARSIZE HSTRING ADINATEXT

FRAME defines a frame in the graphics window.

LOWER [0.0]The plotting frame can contain a lower margin. If LOWER = 0.0, then no lower margin isdrawn. If LOWER > 0.0, then the size of the lower margin is given by LOWER and nothingis drawn below the lower margin. If LOWER is the word HEADING, then the lower marginis sized to contain the program name, version number and heading, and this information isdrawn below the lower margin. {HEADING / number � 0.0}

UPPER [0.0]The plotting frame can contain an upper margin. If UPPER = 0.0, then no upper margin isdrawn. If UPPER > 0.0, then the size of the upper margin is given by UPPER and nothingis drawn above the upper margin. If UPPER is the word HEADING, then the upper margin issized to contain the program name, version number and heading, and this information isdrawn above the upper margin. {HEADING / number � 0.0}

ROTATION [0]The plotting frame can be rotated relative to the graphics window. The ROTATIONparameter specifies the amount of rotation in degrees. {0 / ±90 / ±180 / ±270}

LINE [YES]Specifies whether or not to draw the boundary of the plotting frame, and the boundaries ofany subframes in the plotting frame. {YES / NO}

SIZE [SURFACE]ISOSIZEWIDTHHEIGHTThe size of the plotting frame can be specified in several ways.

SIZE = SURFACE: the plotting frame completely fills the graphics window and ISOSIZE,WIDTH and HEIGHT are not used.

SIZE = ISO: parameter ISOSIZE specifies the size of the plotting frame as follows:Integer values of �ISOSIZE� produce frames with sizes ISO A1, ISO A2, etc. IfISOSIZE > 0, the longer side of the frame is parallel to the horizontal side of the graphics

FRAME Sec. 5.1 Screen control


window; if ISOSIZE < 0, the longer side of the frame is parallel to the vertical side of thegraphics window; parameters WIDTH and HEIGHT are not used.

SIZE = DIRECT: parameters WIDTH and HEIGHT specify the width and height of theplotting frame; parameter ISOSIZE is not used.

SIZE = ASPECT: parameter ASPECT specifies the aspect ratio of the frame andparameters WIDTH, HEIGHT and ISOSIZE are not used.

XOFFSET [0.0]YOFFSET [0.0]The location of the lower left-hand corner of the plotting frame can be specified usingparameters XOFFSET and YOFFSET. These parameters are not used when SIZE =SURFACE or ASPECT.

INDEX [YES]Clear the graphics window before drawing a new frame. {YES / NO}

CUTMARK [NO]Draw cut marks at the corners of the graphics window. {YES / NO}

WINDOW [PREVIOUS]If WINDOW=PREVIOUS, then the new frame uses the previous window. IfWINDOW=NEW, then the AUI opens a new window and puts the frame into the newwindow. If WINDOW=BITMAP, the AUI opens a new window (as a static bitmap) and putsthe frame into the new window (this option is added only for support of the user interfacesand is not intended to be used in command-line mode).

UNITLOWER [PERCENT]UNITUPPER [PERCENT]UNITWIDTH [PERCENT]UNITHEIGHT [PERCENT]UNITXOFFSET [PERCENT]UNITYOFFSET [PERCENT]These parameters specify the units for parameters LOWER, UPPER, WIDTH, HEIGHT,XOFFSET and YOFFSET. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

UPDATE [NO]Controls whether the initial values of command parameters are updated. UPDATE specifieswhether or not the initial values are updated before the command is run. {YES / NO}

Chap. 5 Display control FRAME


ASPECT [1.33]The aspect ratio of the frame (width/height), used if SIZE=ASPECT. The frame is centeredwithin the graphics window.

CHARSIZE [0.25]UNITCHARSIZE [CM]The size of the characters used to draw the heading, and its unit, if LOWER=HEADING orUPPER=HEADING. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

HSTRING [’’]A string containing the heading text plotted in the frame heading. The heading text can bespecified in several ways:

HSTRING = ’ ’: The heading text is taken from the problem heading.HSTRING = ’(a string)’: The heading text is taken from parameter HSTRING.

ADINATEXT [VERTICAL]The FRAME command writes the word “ADINA” into the upper left-hand corner accordingto the following options:

NONE The FRAME command does not write the word “ADINA”HORIZONTAL The FRAME command writes the word “ADINA” horizontally, as in

AUI 7.5.VERTICAL The FRAME command writes the word “ADINA” vertically, as in our

company logo.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FRAME Lists the current values of the FRAME parameters.

UPDATE FRAME (frame command parameters)Updates the initial values for the FRAME command, but does not run the FRAMEcommand. Note that the UPDATE parameter of the FRAME command can be used toupdate the initial values and immediately run the FRAME command.

RESET FRAME Resets the default values for the FRAME command to their initial values.

DELETE FRAMEDeletes the frame along with the window that contains the frame.

FRAME Sec. 5.1 Screen control


Chap. 5 Display control SUBFRAME


SUBFRAME NAME SIZE XOFFSET UNITXOFFSET YOFFSET UNITYOFFSET WIDTH UNITWIDTH HEIGHT UNITHEIGHT

SUBFRAME defines a subframe depiction. The subframe specifies the portion of the framein which a graphics entity such as a mesh plot is drawn.

The subframe is always defined within the current frame.

The subframe boundary is drawn if the frame itself is drawn, see the FRAME command,parameter LINE.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the subframe depiction. If there is a previously defined subframe depiction withthis name, data entered in this command is appended to that subframe depiction. If there is nopreviously defined subframe depiction with this name, a new subframe depiction is created bythis command.

SIZE [FRAME]Specifies how the subframe size is specified:

FRAME the subframe coincides with the plotting frame

DIRECT the subframe is defined using the remaining parameters

You can also enter a 4 digit integer ABCD (see Figure) to quickly define a subframe. Thedigits are interpreted as follows:

A The total number of equal partitions of the plotting frame in the horizontal direction.

B The selected partition in the horizontal direction.

C The total number of equal partitions in the vertical direction.

D The selected partition in the vertical direction.

SUBFRAME Sec. 5.1 Screen control


XOFFSET [0.0]UNITXOFFSET [PERCENT]YOFFSET [0.0]UNITYOFFSET [PERCENT]WIDTH [100.0]UNITWIDTH [PERCENT]HEIGHT [100.0]UNITHEIGHT [PERCENT]Used only if size = DIRECT. See the figure for parameter definitions. Parameters withPERCENT units are interpreted as percentages of the frame. {CM / INCHES /PERCENTS / PIXELS / POINTS}

Chap. 5 Display control SUBFRAME



Mesh plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


Mesh plotting – Introduction

You draw a mesh using the MESHPLOT command. You can also modify an existing meshplot using this command.

The mesh plot can contain geometry, the mesh in its original configuration and the mesh in itsdeformed configuration.

If you have loaded the results from more than one finite element program into the database, the mesh plot can display the meshes from all of the loaded finite element program results.

Every mesh plot has a name, which you can specify when you create the mesh plot. You referto the mesh plot by name when modifying or deleting it.

The appearance of the mesh plot is governed by the mesh plot depictions. The mesh plotdepictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the mesh plot'sappearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the MESHPLOT command to referto the depiction.

The depictions used by the MESHPLOT command are:

ZONE: specifies what to plot (for example, nodes, elements, geometry, etc.). See thezone commands in Section 6.2.

RESPONSE: specifies the solution time, mode-shape, etc. for the mesh plot. See theresponse commands in Section 6.3.

MODELDEPICTION: specifies whether to draw the geometry, mesh in original and/ordeformed configurations, and the displacement magnification factor. See theMODELDEPICTION command in this section.

VIEW: specifies the view. See the VIEW command in this section.

MESHWINDOW: specifies the mesh viewing window. See the MESHWINDOWcommand in this section.

PLOTAREA: specifies the location in the graphics window where the mesh plot isdrawn. See the PLOTAREA command in this section.

SUBFRAME: the subframe in which the mesh plot is drawn. See the SUBFRAMEcommand in Section 5.1.

Chap. 5 Display control Mesh plotting – Introduction


ELDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing elements. See the ELDEPICTIONcommand in this section.

NODEDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing nodes. See the NODEDEPICTIONcommand in this section.

BOUNDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing boundary conditions. See theBOUNDEPICTION command in this section.

GPDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing geometry points. See theGPDEPICTION command in this section.

GLDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing geometry lines and edges. See theGLDEPICTION command in this section.

GSDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing geometry surfaces and faces. See the GSDEPICTION command in this section.

GVDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing geometry volumes and bodies. See theGVDEPICTION command in this section.

MESHRENDERING: specifies hidden line removal, shading and related items. See theMESHRENDERING command in this section.

MESHANNOTATION: attributes of optional text drawn with the mesh. See theMESHANNOTATION command in this section.

FRONDEPCTION: controls the appearance of frontiers. The following predefinednames can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.

CONDEPICTION: controls the appearance of constraint equations and rigid links. Thefollowing predefined names can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.

VSDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing fracture mechanics virtual shifts. See theVSDEPICTION command in this section.

CRACKDEPICTION: controls the appearance of fracture mechanics crack fronts. Thefollowing predefined names can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.

RESULTCONTROL: specifies the mode shape amplification factor. See theRESULTCONTROL command in Section 6.6.



CUTSURFACE: controls cutting surfaces, see the CUTSURFACE commands in thissection.

You can group depiction names into a style using the MESHSTYLE command. Then youcan specify the mesh style in the MESHPLOT command. It is not necessary to useMESHSTYLE in order to use MESHPLOT. The mesh style simply provides a way to groupmesh plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions to another.

When you create a mesh plot, the depictions that you specify (except for the zone) are copiedand given the same name as the mesh plot. So if you create a mesh plot M1, the AUI willcreate a subframe M1, an element depiction M1, etc.

You can modify an existing mesh plot in several ways:

1) Alter the depictions with the mesh plot name, using the depiction commands, thenregenerate the mesh plot using the REGENERATE command. For example:

MESHPLOT M1Creates mesh plot M1.

NODEDEPICTION M1 SYMBOLS=YESTurns on plotting of node symbols for mesh plot M1.

REGENERATERegenerates the mesh plot.

2) Use the MESHPLOT command to substitute depictions. For example:


MESHPLOT M1 BOUNDEP=ALLSubstitutes boundary depiction ALL for the boundary depiction used during thecreation of mesh plot M1, then regenerates the mesh plot.

You can delete a mesh plot using the DELETE MESHPLOT command, by picking the meshplot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing thegraphics window using the FRAME command.

When you delete a mesh plot, all of the depictions with the name of the mesh plot areautomatically deleted as well. Therefore, if you want to create several mesh plots with thesame attributes, you may want to create a mesh style with those attributes, then use the meshstyle when creating mesh plots. For example:

Chap. 5 Display control Mesh plotting – Introduction


MESHSTYLE MS1 NODEDEP=SYMBOLS BOUNDEP=ALLCreates a mesh style in which nodes are marked with symbols and boundaryconditions are plotted.

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP TIME=1.0Prepare to plot the results at time 1.0.

MESHPLOT MESHSTYLE=MS1 RESPONSE=DEFAULTCreates mesh plot MESHPLOT00001 using this mesh style.

FRAMEClears the graphics window.

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP TIME=2.0Prepare to plot the results at time 2.0.

MESHPLOT MESHSTYLE=MS1 RESPONSE=DEFAULTCreates the mesh plot MESHPLOT00001 using this mesh style.

An additional command, that does not define a depiction, is also used by MESHPLOT.

GEDRAWING: specifies how to draw general mass/stiffness/damping elements. See theGEDRAWING command in this section.

Also note that the COLORZONE command (in Section 6.2) can be used to change the colorsof objects such as elements and geometry in the mesh plot.

Auxiliary commands

The MESHPLOT command has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST MESHPLOTLists all mesh plots.

LIST MESHPLOT NAMELists the depictions for the specified mesh plot.

DELETE MESHPLOT NAMEDeletes the specified mesh plot.

The MESHSTYLE command has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST MESHSTYLELists all mesh styles.



LIST MESHSTYLE NAMELists the depictions for the specified mesh style.

DELETE MESHSTYLE NAMEDeletes the specified mesh style.

COPY MESHSTYLE NAME1 NAME2Copies the mesh style specified by NAME1 to NAME2.

Each of the depiction commands has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST (depiction)Lists all names for the specified depiction type.

LIST (depiction) NAMELists the attributes for the specified depiction.

DELETE (depiction) NAMEDeletes the attributes for the specified depiction.

COPY (depiction) NAME1 NAME2Copies the depiction specified by NAME1 to NAME2.

Chap. 5 Display control MESHPLOT


MESHPLOT NAME MESHSTYLE ZONENAME RESPONSE MODELDEPICTION VIEW MESHWINDOW PLOTAREA SUBFRAME ELDEPICTION NODEDEPICTION BOUNDEPICTION GPDEPICTION GLDEPICTION GSDEPICTION GVDEPICTION MESHRENDERING MESHANNOTATION FRONDEPICTION CONDEPICTION VSDEPICTION CRACKDEPICTION RESULTCONTROL CUTSURFACE

MESHPLOT creates a mesh plot according to the attributes given by the specified depictions.

NAME [MESHPLOTnnnnn]The name of the mesh plot. The name is used by commands that draw upon the mesh plot,such as BANDPLOT. If no name is given, one is automatically generated, in the formMESHPLOTnnnnn, where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999.

MESHSTYLE [DEFAULT]The name of the mesh style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of thiscommand. A mesh style is defined by the MESHSTYLE command (in this section).

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies what (for example, nodes, elements, geometry, etc.)appears in the meshplot. A zone is defined by a zone command (see Section 6.2).

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used when drawingthe mesh plot. A response is defined by a response command (see Section 6.3).

MODELDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the model depiction that specifies how the model appears. A model depiction isdefined by the MODELDEPICTION command (in this section).

VIEW [DEFAULT]The name of the view depiction that gives the view used to draw the mesh plot. A viewdepiction is defined by the VIEW command (in this section).

MESHWINDOW [DEFAULT]The name of the window that gives the viewing window used to draw the meshplot. Ameshwindow is defined by the MESHWINDOW command (in this section).

PLOTAREA [DEFAULT]The name of the plotarea that gives the location within the subframe for the meshplot. Aplotarea is defined by the PLOTAREA command (in this section).

MESHPLOT Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


SUBFRAME [DEFAULT]The name of the subframe that gives the location within the frame for the meshplot. Asubframe is defined by the SUBFRAME command (in Section 5.1).

ELDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the element depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing elements. Anelement depiction is defined by the ELDEPICTION command (in this section).

NODEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the node depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing nodes. A nodedepiction is defined by the NODEDEPICTION command (in this section).

BOUNDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the boundary conditions depiction that gives the attributes used for drawingnodal boundary conditions. A boundary conditions depiction is defined by theBOUNDEPICTION command (in this section).

GPDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry point depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing thegeometry points. A geometry point depiction is defined by the GPDEPICTION command (inthis section).

GLDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry line depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing geometrylines and edges. A geometry line depiction is defined by the GLDEPICTION command (inthis section).

GSDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry surface depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing thegeometry surfaces and faces. A geometry surface depiction is defined by the GSDEPICTIONcommand (in this section).

GVDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry volume depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing thegeometry volumes and bodies. A geometry volume depiction is defined by theGVDEPICTION command (in this section).

MESHRENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the rendering depiction that specifies how the meshplot is drawn. A renderingdepiction is specified by a MESHRENDERING command (in this section).

Chap. 5 Display control MESHPLOT


MESHANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the mesh annotation depiction that specifies what additional text and meshaxes appear along with the meshplot. A mesh annotation depiction is specified by aMESHANNOTATION command (in this section).

FRONDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the frontier depiction, used to determine how frontiers are displayed. Currentlythere is no corresponding frontier depiction command, but the following predefined frontierdepictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.

CONDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the constraint depiction, used to determine how constraint equations and rigidlinks are displayed. Currently there is no corresponding constraint depiction command, butthe following predefined constraint depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF,ON.

VSDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the virtual shift depiction that specifies which virtual shift to plot in fracturemechanics analysis. A virtual shift depiction is specified by the VSDEPICTION command(in this section).

CRACKDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the crack depiction that specifies whether or not to plot the crack front in afracture mechanics analysis. Currently there is no corresponding crack depiction command,but the following predefined crack depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF,ON.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. The MESHPLOT command uses theMODEFACTOR parameter of the result control depiction to determine the scaling of modeshapes. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (inSection 6.6).

CUTSURFACE [DEFAULT]The name of the cutting surface depiction. Cutting surfaces are controlled by theCUTSURFACE commands (in this section).

MESHSTYLE Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


MESHSTYLE NAME ZONENAME RESPONSE MODELDEPICTION VIEW MESHWINDOW PLOTAREA SUBFRAME ELDEPICTION NODEDEPICTION BOUNDEPICTION GPDEPICTION GLDEPICTION GSDEPICTION GVDEPICTION MESHRENDERING MESHANNOTATION FRONDEPICTION CONDEPICTION VSDEPICTION CRACKDEPICTION RESULTCONTROL CUTSURFACE

MESHSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing a mesh using MESHPLOT.

NAMEThe name of the mesh style. If there is a previously defined mesh style with this name, dataentered in this command modifies that mesh style. If there is no previously defined meshstyle with this name, a new mesh style is created by this command.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies what (for example, nodes, elements, geometry, etc.)appear in the meshplot. A zone is defined by a zone command (in Section 6.2).

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the response (solution time, mode shape, etc.) used whendrawing the mesh plot. A response is defined by a response command (in Section 6.3).

MODELDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the model depiction that specifies how the model appears. A model depiction isdefined by the MODELDEPICTION command (in this section).

VIEW [DEFAULT]The name of the view depiction that gives the view used to draw the meshplot. A viewdepiction is defined by the VIEW command (in this section).

MESHWINDOW [DEFAULT]The name of the window that gives the viewing window used to draw the meshplot. Ameshwindow is defined by the MESHWINDOW command (in this section).

PLOTAREA [DEFAULT]The name of the plotarea that gives the location within the subframe for the meshplot. Aplotarea is defined by the PLOTAREA command (in this section).

SUBFRAME [DEFAULT]The name of the subframe that gives the location within the frame for the meshplot. Asubframe is defined by the SUBFRAME command (in Section 5.1).

Chap. 5 Display control MESHSTYLE


ELDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the element depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing elements. Anelement depiction is defined by the ELDEPICTION command (in this section).

NODEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the node depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing nodes. A nodedepiction is defined by the NODEDEPICTION command (in this section).

BOUNDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the boundary condition depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing nodalboundary conditions. A boundary condition depiction is defined by the BOUNDEPICTIONcommand (in this section).

GPDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry point depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing thegeometry points. A geometry point depiction is defined by the GPDEPICTION command (inthis section).

GLDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry line depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing thegeometry lines and edges. A geometry line depiction is defined by the GLDEPICTIONcommand (in this section).

GSDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry surface depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing thegeometry surfaces and faces. A geometry surface depiction is defined by the GSDEPICTIONcommand (in this section).

GVDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry volume depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing thegeometry volumes and bodies. A geometry volume depiction is defined by theGVDEPICTION command (in this section).

MESHRENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the rendering depiction that specifies how the meshplot is drawn. A renderingdepiction is specified by the MESHRENDERING command (in this section).

MESHANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the mesh annotation depiction that specifies what additional text and mesh axesappear along with the meshplot. A mesh annotation depiction is specified by theMESHANNOTATION command (in this section).

MESHSTYLE Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


FRONDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the frontier depiction, used to determine how frontiers are displayed. Currentlythere is no corresponding frontier depiction command, but the following predefined frontierdepictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.

CONDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the constraint depiction, used to determine how constraint equations and rigidlinks are displayed. Currently there is no corresponding constraint depiction command, butthe following predefined constraint depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF,ON.

VSDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the virtual shift depiction that specifies which virtual shift to plot in fracturemechanics analysis. A virtual shift depiction is specified by the VSDEPICTION command(in this section).

CRACKDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the crack depiction that specifies whether or not to plot the crack front in afracture mechanics analysis. Currently there is no corresponding crack depiction command,but the following predefined crack depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF,ON.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. The MESHPLOT command uses theMODEFACTOR parameter of the result control depiction to determine the scaling of modeshapes. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (inSection 6.6).

CUTSURFACE [DEFAULT]The name of the cutting surface depiction. Cutting surfaces are controlled by theCUTSURFACE commands (in this section).

Chap. 5 Display control GPDEPICTION


GPDEPICTION NAME STATUS SYMBOLPLOT SYMBOL SYMBOLCOLOR SYMBOLSIZE UNITSYMBOLSIZE NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE

GPDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing the points in the model geometry usingthe MESHPLOT command. The attributes can be grouped as follows:

1) Point symbol attributes2) Point numbering attributes

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry point depiction. If there is a previously defined geometry pointdepiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that geometry pointdepiction. If there is no previously defined geometry point depiction with this name, a newgeometry point depiction is created by this command.

STATUS [ON]If STATUS = ON, geometry points are plotted using the attributes given by the remainingstyle attribute parameters. If STATUS = OFF, geometry points are not plotted. {ON /OFF}

SYMBOLPLOT [YES]Enter NO for no symbol plotting at geometry points and YES to plot symbols at geometrypoints. If NO is entered, the values of parameters SYMBOL, SYMBOLCOLOR,SYMBOLSIZE and UNITSYMBOLSIZE are ignored.

SYMBOL ['@C[1,23]']The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each geometry point. Use theextended character convention to enter a special symbol. See the TEXT command in Section5.12 for the extended character convention.

SYMBOLCOLOR [ORANGE]The color of the symbol.

SYMBOLSIZE [0.10]UNITSYMBOLSIZE [CM]The size of the symbol and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS/POINTS}

NUMBER [NO]Specifies whether the label numbers of geometry points are plotted. {YES / NO}

GPDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


NUMBERCOLOR [ORANGE]The color of geometry point numbers.

NUMBERSIZE [0.25]UNITNUMBERSIZE [CM]The size of geometry point numbers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

Chap. 5 Display control GLDEPICTION


GLDEPICTION NAME STATUS LINESTYLE LINECOLOR LINEWIDTH UNITLINEWIDTH NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE LINESEGMENT CURVEANGLE SUBDIVISION SUBDCOLOR SUBDSIZE UNITSUBDSIZE PCCANG REMOVALCOLOR

GLDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing the lines and edges in the modelgeometry using the MESHPLOT command. The attributes can be grouped as follows:

1) Line attributes2) Line numbering attributes3) Line approximation attributes4) Line subdivision attributes5) Parasolid edge approximation attributes

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry line depiction. If there is a previously defined geometry linedepiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that geometry line depiction. If there is no previously defined geometry line depiction with this name, a new geometry linedepiction is created by this command.

STATUS [ON]If STATUS = ON, geometry lines are plotted using the attributes given by the remaining styleattribute parameters. If STATUS = OFF, geometry lines are not plotted (except for thoselines needed to draw surfaces). {ON / OFF}

LINESTYLE [SOLID]The style of the lines. {SOLID / DASHED}

LINECOLOR [ORANGE]The color of the lines.

LINEWIDTH [0.0]UNITLINEWIDTH [CM]The width of the line and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS} If LINEWIDTH = 0.0, the thinnest possible line is used.

NUMBER [NO]Specifies whether or not the label numbers of geometry lines are plotted. {YES / NO}

NUMBERCOLOR [ORANGE]The color of geometry line numbers.

GLDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


NUMBERSIZE [0.25]UNITNUMBERSIZE [CM]The size of geometry line numbers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

LINESEGMENT [1]The minimum number of straight line segments used to draw each curved line. The actualnumber of straight line segments used is dependent upon the value of parameterCURVEANGLE.

CURVEANGLE [5.0]The number of straight line segments used to draw each curved line is chosen so that theangle between successive straight line segments is less than CURVEANGLE. Hence,decreasing CURVEANGLE increases the number of straight line segments used to draw eachcurved line. CURVEANGLE is entered in degrees.

SUBDIVISION [YES]Indicates whether line subdivisions (as used by mesh generation) are to be plotted. {YES /NO}

SUBDCOLOR [ORANGE]The color of the line subdivision markers.

SUBDSIZE [0.1]UNITSUBDSIZE [CM]The size of the line subdivision markers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

PCCANG [0.2]The maximum chord angle used for plotting Parasolid edges, entered in radians. DecreasingPCCANG improves the appearance of curved Parasolid edges.

REMOVALCOLOR [YELLOW]The colors of edges that are targeted for removal by the BODY-CLEANUP and BODY-DEFEATURE commands.

Chap. 5 Display control GSDEPICTION


GSDEPICTION NAME STATUS LINESTYLE LINECOLOR LINEWIDTH UNITLINEWIDTH NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE UGRID VGRID USEGMENT VSEGMENT PCCANG REMOVALCOLOR

GSDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing the surfaces and faces in the modelgeometry using the MESHPLOT command. The attributes can be grouped as follows:

1) Surface attributes2) Surface numbering attributes3) Surface line approximations4) Parasolid face approximation attributes

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry surface depiction. If there is a previously defined geometrysurface depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that geometrysurface depiction. If there is no previously defined geometry surface depiction with thisname, a new geometry surface depiction is created by this command.

STATUS [ON]If STATUS = ON, geometry surfaces are plotted using the attributes given by the remainingstyle attribute parameters. If STATUS = OFF, geometry surfaces are not plotted (except forthose needed to draw volumes). {ON / OFF}

LINESTYLE [SOLID]The style of the visible intermediate lines used when drawing the surface. {SOLID /DASHED} Note that LINESTYLE, LINECOLOR, LINEWIDTH and UNITLINEWIDTHare not used for the bounding lines of the surface. The style of the bounding lines of thesurface is controlled by the GLDEPICTION command.

LINECOLOR [ORANGE]The color of the visible intermediate lines.

LINEWIDTH [0.0]UNITLINEWIDTH [CM]The width of the visible intermediate lines and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS} If LINEWIDTH = 0.0, the thinnest possible lines are used.

NUMBER [NO]Specifies whether the label numbers of geometry surfaces are plotted. {YES / NO}

GSDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


NUMBERCOLOR [ORANGE]The color of geometry surface numbers.

NUMBERSIZE [0.25]UNITNUMBERSIZE [CM]The size of geometry surface numbers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

UGRID [0]VGRID [0]The number of visible intermediate lines used to represent the surface in the U and Vdirections. {UGRID, VGRID � 0}

USEGMENT [0]VSEGMENT [0]These parameters affect the quality of the surface approximation in the U and V directions. Increasing these values improves the quality of the approximation. A value of 0 means thatthe parameter is automatically set when it is used. {USEGMENT, VSEGMENT � 0}

PCCANG [0.2]The maximum chord angle used for plotting Parasolid faces, entered in radians. DecreasingPCCANG improves the appearance of curved Parasolid faces.

REMOVALCOLOR [YELLOW]The colors of faces that are targeted for removal by the BODY-CLEANUP and BODY-DEFEATURE commands.

Chap. 5 Display control GVDEPICTION


GVDEPICTION NAME STATUS NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE

GVDEPICTION defines attributes used when labeling the geometry volumes or geometrybodies in a mesh plot.

Geometry volumes and geometry bodies are indicated in a mesh plot by their bounding lines,edges, surfaces and faces. Use the GLDEPICTION and GSDEPICTION commands (in thissection) to alter the appearances of the bounding lines, edges, surfaces and faces.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the geometry volume depiction. If there is a previously defined geometryvolume depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that geometryvolume depiction. If there is no previously defined geometry volume depiction with thisname, a new geometry volume depiction is created by this command.

STATUS <not currently active> [ON]

NUMBER [NO]Specifies whether the label numbers of geometry volumes are plotted. {YES / NO}

NUMBERCOLOR [ORANGE]The color of geometry volume numbers.

NUMBERSIZE [0.25]UNITNUMBERSIZE [CM]The size of geometry volume numbers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

MODELDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


MODELDEPICTION NAME ORIGINAL DEFORMED GEOMETRY DISPOPTION DISPFACTOR UNITDISPFACTOR REFOPTION REFTIME BDREP

MODELDEPICTION defines some attributes used by MESHPLOT. The attributes can begrouped as follows:

1) Whether to plot the mesh in the original or reference configuration2) Whether to plot the mesh in the deformed configuration3) Whether to plot the model geometry4) The displacement magnification factor5) The reference configuration about which displacements are magnified6) Whether to plot the body discrete reps (discrete breps) of geometry bodies.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the model depiction. If there is a previously defined model depiction with thisname, data entered in this command modifies that model depiction. If there is no previouslydefined model depiction with this name, a new model depiction is created by this command.

ORIGINAL[YES if in preprocessing mode, NO if in postprocessing mode ]

Specifies whether the mesh is plotted in the original (or reference) configuration. If there isno finite element data stored in the database, this parameter is ignored. {YES / NO} DEFORMED

[NO if in preprocessing mode, YES if in postprocessing mode]Specifies whether the mesh is plotted in the deformed configuration. (The actual deformedconfiguration is specified by the RESPONSE parameter in the MESHPLOT command.) Ifthere is no finite element data stored in the database, this parameter is ignored. {YES /NO}

Note: ORIGINAL=YES plots all elements, regardless of any birth-death information storedfor the elements. DEFORMED=YES plots only those elements that are active at the givensolution time. You can use DEFORMED=YES during preprocessing to check the elementbirth-death information. GEOMETRY [YES]Specifies whether the geometry is plotted. If there is no geometry data stored in the database,this parameter is ignored. {YES / NO}

Chap. 5 Display control MODELDEPICTION


DISPOPTION [AUTOMATIC]DISPFACTOR [1.0]UNITDISPFACTORThese parameters control the magnification factor used to plot the displacements whenplotting the deformed mesh. These parameters are ignored if DEFORMED = NO.

If you specify DISPOPTION = MAGNIFICATION, then DISPFACTOR is interpreted as adisplacement magnification factor (1.0 = no magnification) and UNITDISPFACTOR isignored.

If you specify DISPOPTION = LENGTH, then DISPFACTOR is interpreted as the length onthe plotting surface of the maximum displacement and UNITDISPFACTOR gives the lengthunit of DISPFACTOR {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}. In thiscase, the program automatically determines the displacement magnification factor.

If you specify DISPOPTION = AUTOMATIC, then the program automatically determines thedisplacement magnification factor as follows: If the mesh plot displacements are actualdisplacements, then the programs sets the displacement magnification factor to 1.0 (nomagnification). If the mesh plot displacements are eigenvectors or response spectrumresidual solutions, the program determines the displacement magnification factor to cause themaximum plotted displacement to be 10% of the plotted length of the subframe, times thevalue of RESULTCONTROL MODEFACTOR. DISPFACTOR and UNITDISPFACTORare ignored when DISPOPTION = AUTOMATIC.

REFOPTION [ORIGINAL]REFTIME [0.0]These parameters are applicable when plotting a mesh using a response of type load-step (thatis, when plotting a load-step solution).

If REFOPTION=ORIGINAL, the original mesh is plotted using the original configuration ofthe model. All elements are drawn in the original mesh, including those elements that aredead at the start of the program solution. The deformed mesh is plotted using thedisplacements, and, if the displacements are magnified, the total displacements are magnified. REFTIME is ignored in this case.

If REFOPTION=REFTIME, the original mesh is plotted using the configuration of the modelat time REFTIME (in other words, the displacements at REFTIME are used to calculate thecoordinates of the original mesh). Only those elements alive at time REFTIME are drawn. The deformed mesh is plotted using the displacements, and, if the displacements aremagnified, only the incremental displacements between the current solution time andREFTIME are magnified.

MODELDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


It is an error if REFTIME is less than the earliest solution time, or greater than the latestsolution time. However REFTIME can lie between two solution times. REFTIME can belarger or smaller than the current solution time.

A typical use of REFOPTION=REFTIME is in suspension bridge analysis. This type ofmodel is solved in two analyses, a static analysis to determine the initial shape of the bridgedue to gravity, than a restart to dynamic analysis to perform an earthquake analysis. If you setREFOPTION=REFTIME and REFTIME=the solution time for the static analysis, the AUIwill magnify only the displacements due to the earthquake.

BDREP [YES]If the body discrete rep (discrete brep) of a geometry body is available, the body discrete repis plotted if BDREP=YES, otherwise the body discrete rep is not plotted.

Chap. 5 Display control MESHRENDERING


MESHRENDERING NAME LINESOPTION LINES HIDDEN OUTLINE LINESSOURCE TOLHIDDEN SHADING AMBIENT DIFFUSE QUANTIZATION COLORZONE ELLINE ELLINEANGLE GEOMLINE VOLINSIDE DBPROJECTION DBOFFSET FRONTTRIANGLES BACKTRIANGLES CSOPAQUE

MESHRENDERING defines attributes used when drawing a mesh plot. The attributes thatyou can control using this command include:

1) Criteria used to determine which element lines and geometry lines are drawn.2) Whether hidden lines are removed or dashed.3) Whether outline generation is used to complete the outline of the model. 4) Shading attributes.5) Colors of zones.6) Drawbead plotting options

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the mesh rendering depiction. If there is a previously defined mesh renderingdepiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that mesh renderingdepiction. If there is no previously defined mesh rendering depiction with this name, a newmesh rendering depiction is created by this command.

LINESOPTION [ALL]LINESThese parameters are obsolete and replaced by ELLINE, ELLINEANGLE and GEOMLINE.

HIDDEN [REMOVED]If this parameter is NO, hidden lines and surfaces are not removed. If this parameter isREMOVED, hidden lines and surfaces are removed. If this parameter is DASHED, hidden linesare dashed.

Hidden node symbols are removed only if this parameter is REMOVED. Hidden bands fromband plots are removed if this parameter is REMOVED or DASHED. Hidden loads from loadplots are removed if this parameter is REMOVED.

If all of the points of the model lie in one of the global coordinate system planes, the programautomatically deactivates the hidden line removal algorithm and the value of this parameter isignored.

MESHRENDERING Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


OUTLINE [GEOMETRY]Controls whether outline generation is used to complete the outline of the model. {YES /NO / GEOMETRY}. If OUTLINE=GEOMETRY, outline generation is used for the geometrymodel, but not for the finite element model.

If all of the points of the model lie in one of the global coordinate system planes, the programautomatically deactivates the outline generation algorithm and the value of this parameter isignored.

LINESSOURCE [AUTOMATIC]This parameter is obsolete, and is replaced by parameter VOLINSIDE.

TOLHIDDEN [0.0]Tolerance for hidden line removal.

SHADING [NO]Controls whether element and geometry faces are shaded. {NO / YES}

AMBIENT [0.25]DIFFUSE [0.7]QUANTIZATION [0]Control how element and geometry faces are shaded, when SHADING = YES. AMBIENT isthe intensity of ambient light illuminating the model, and DIFFUSE is the intensity of diffuselight radiating from a light source placed at the eye point. The total intensity of a face isequal to the ambient light intensity plus a fraction of the diffuse light intensity, the fractionbeing calculated using the angle between the face and the screen. The effect is to mostbrightly illuminate faces that are parallel to the screen and to least brightly illuminate facesthat are perpendicular to the screen. Both AMBIENT and DIFFUSE can be between 0.0 (nointensity), and 1.0 (maximum intensity), but the program treats all faces with intensitygreater than 1.0 alike.

To set the intensity of all faces to be equal, set DIFFUSE = 0.0. This option is intermediatein rendering time between no shading and full shading.

QUANTIZATION is the number of discrete intensities used by the AUI, between the lowestintensity and the highest intensity. The purpose of this parameter is to limit the number ofcolors used in a shaded color image. You can set QUANTIZATION to 0 to allow the AUI touse any intensity.

COLORZONE [YES]Indicates whether or not the colors of entities drawn in the meshplot are overridden by colorsselected within the COLORZONE command (in Section 6.2). {YES / NO}

Chap. 5 Display control MESHRENDERING


ELLINE [ALL]This parameter controls which element lines are drawn.

ALL All element lines are drawn.GROUP Only those element lines on group boundaries are drawn.MODEL Only those element lines on model boundaries are drawn.NONE No element lines are drawn.

ELLINEANGLE [10.0]This parameter is used when drawing volume elements and non-planar surface elements (suchas shell elements), when ELLINE=GROUP or MODEL. For these elements, a line is on theboundary if either the line is attached to only one element face, or if the dihedral angle createdby all element faces attached to the line is greater than ELLINEANGLE. ELLINEANGLE isspecified in degrees.

GEOMLINE [ALL]This parameter controls which geometry lines are drawn {ALL / NONE}.

VOLINSIDE [NO]This parameter is used when plotting volume elements. If VOLINSIDE=NO, the AUI onlyplots the “skin” of volume element meshes (that is, the visible faces of the volume elements)and does not plot the inside lines of the meshes. If VOLINSIDE=YES, the AUI plots theinside lines of the meshes.

If VOLINSIDE=YES, the AUI plots dashed hidden lines if HIDDEN=REMOVED, the AUIturns off shading if SHADING=YES, and the AUI plots all element lines (if ELLINE=MODEL or GROUP). In addition, the AUI plots all nodes, even nodes that are not attached toelements.

DBPROJECTION [NO]Specifies whether to plot drawbeads as projections onto their contact surfaces. {YES/NO}

DBOFFSET [0.0]The drawbead z coordinates (after projection) are adjusted by a factor DBOFFSET. Theintent for parameter DBOFFSET is to move the projected drawbead relative to its contactsurface so that the contact surface does not interfere with the drawbead, as far as hidden lineremoval is concerned.

MESHRENDERING Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


FRONTTRIANGLES [YES]BACKTRIANGLES [YES]FRONTTRIANGLES controls whether front-facing triangles are plotted {NO / YES}. BACKTRIANGLES controls whether back-facing triangles are plotted {NO / YES}. These parameters are used for special plotting effects, as follows:

Shaded element and geometry faces are converted into triangles before plotting. Front-facingtriangles are triangles with outwards normal pointing towards the eye, back-facing trianglesare triangles with outwards normal pointing away from the eye. As you change the view ofthe meshplot, triangles that were front-facing become back-facing, and vice versa.

Normally, you want to plot all shaded triangles. But there are two special display effects inwhich you want to plot only front- or back-facing triangles:

1) If FRONTTRIANGLES=NO, BACKTRIANGLES=YES, only back-facing triangles aredisplayed. This creates a plot in which you can “see through” the mesh. These parametersettings are best used along with the settings ELLINE=MODEL or NONE, SHADING=YES.

When you use this combination of options, any incompatibility in the meshing becomesvisible. In addition, you can plot vectors and particle traces within the mesh.

2) If FRONTTRIANGLES=YES, BACKTRIANGLES=NO, only front-facing triangles aredisplayed. This speeds up the display somewhat when there are only solid elements or solidgeometry entities (such as bodies or volumes) within the meshplot. (The reason is that back-facing triangles cannot be seen, and do not contribute to hidden line removal, whenvisualizing solid objects.)

CSOPAQUE [AUTOMATIC]CSOPAQUE controls whether 3D contact surfaces are plotted opaque:

AUTOMATIC: The program chooses which 3D contact surfaces are plotted opaque. A3D contact surface is opaque if it is not attached to any element.

NO: No 3D contact surface is plotted opaque.

YES: All 3D contact surfaces are plotted opaque.

Note that an opaque contact surface can hide graphics behind it (if hidden lines are removed),and that an opaque contact surface is shaded when shading is on.

Chap. 5 Display control NODEDEPICTION


NODEDEPICTION NAME SYMBOLPLOT SYMBOL SYMBOLCOLOR SYMBOLSIZE UNITSYMBOLSIZE NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE

selectori statusi symbolploti symboli symbolcolori symbolsizei unitsymbolsizei numberi numbercolori numbersizei unitnumbersizei

NODEDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing nodes using the MESHPLOTcommand. The attributes can be grouped as follows:

1) Node symbol attributes2) Node number attributes

The attributes are assigned using selectors. Each data input line of this command assigns thegiven attributes to a selector. Those nodes not in any selector given in this command areassigned the attributes of the command parameters.

Selectors specified in the data input lines must be disjoint, see table.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the node depiction. If there is a previously defined node depiction with thisname, data entered in this command modifies that node depiction. If there is no previouslydefined node depiction with this name, a new node depiction is created by this command.

SYMBOLPLOT [YES]Enter NO for no symbol plotting at nodes and YES to plot symbols at nodes. If NO is entered,the values of parameters SYMBOL, SYMBOLCOLOR, SYMBOLSIZE andUNITSYMBOLSIZE are ignored.

SYMBOL ['@C[1,5]']The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each node. Use the extendedcharacter convention to enter a special symbol. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12 forthe extended character convention.

SYMBOLCOLOR [INVERSE]The color of the symbol.

SYMBOLSIZE [0.25]UNITSYMBOLSIZE [CM]The size of the symbol and its unit. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

NODEDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


NUMBER [NO]Determines whether node numbers are plotted (with main structure node numbers above thenodal points and substructure node numbers below the nodal points). {YES / NO}

NUMBERCOLOR [INVERSE]The color of node numbers, used only when NUMBER = YES.

NUMBERSIZE [0.25]UNITNUMBERSIZE [CM]The size of node numbers, used only when NUMBER = YES, and its unit. {CM / INCH PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

selectori The name of a node selector (see table below). All selector names specified in the data inputlines must be disjoint.

statusi

The node selector is active only if its status is ON. If you specify statusi = OFF, the nodeselector is not used. If you do not specify the status, the default status is ON. {ON / OFF}

symbolploti symboli symbolcolori symbolsizei unitsymbolsizei,numberi numbercolori numbersizei unitnumbersizei

The attributes used when drawing nodes that match the selector. If an attribute is notspecified in the data input line, it is copied from the corresponding command line attribute.

Node selectors:

Selector name Matches Is disjoint to

MAIN nodes in the main structure SUBSTRUCTURESUBSTRUCTURE nodes in any substructure MAINTRANSGLOBAL nodes with translational DOFs referenced

to the global systemTRANSSKEW

TRANSSKEW nodes with translational DOFs referencedto any skew system

TRANSGLOBAL

ROTGLOBAL nodes with rotational DOFs referenced to the global system

ROTSKEW,ROTMIDSURFACE

ROTSKEW nodes with rotational DOFs referenced to any skew system

ROTGLOBAL,ROTSKEW

ROTMIDSURFACE nodes with rotational DOFs referenced toa shell mid-surface system

ROTGLOBAL,ROTSKEW

Chap. 5 Display control NODEDEPICTION


FRONT nodes on a fracture mechanics crack front UNRELEASED,RELEASED

UNRELEASED nodes on a fracture mechanics crackpropagation surface that are not on the crack front and are not released

FRONT,RELEASED

RELEASED nodes on a fracture mechanics crackpropagation surface that are released

FRONT,UNRELEASED

ELDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


ELDEPICTION NAME ORCOLOR DECOLOR ORLSTYLE DELSTYLE SHELLSTYLE SHFAC1 SHFAC2 CSLINE UNITCSLINE RSLINE UNITRSLINE SYMBOLPLOT SYMBOL SYMBOLCOLOR SYMBOLSIZE UNITSYMBOLSIZE SUBNUMBER REUNUMBER GRONUMBER ELENUMBER LAYNUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE TRIAD TRIADCOLOR TRIADSIZE UNITTRIADSIZE NNCSIZE UNITNNCSIZE NNCLINE TRIADTYPE SEGNORMAL SEGNSIZE UNITSNSIZE DBHFACTOR SPRINGSIZE UNITSPRING

zonenamei orcolori decolori orlstylei delstylei shellstylei shfac1i shfac2i cslinei unitcslinei rslinei unitrslinei symbolploti symboli symbolcolori symbolsizei unitsymbolsizei subnumberi reunumberi gronumberi elenumberi laynumberi numbercolori numbersizei unitnumbersizei triadi triadcolori triadsizei unittriadsizei nncsizei unitnncsizei nnclinei triadtypei segnormali segnsizei unitsnsizei dbhfactori springsizei unitspringi

DELETE zonenamei

ELDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing elements using MESHPLOT. Theattributes include element colors, element shape attributes, element symbol attributes, elementnumber attributes and element triads.

The element attributes are assigned using zonenames. Each data input line assigns the givenelement attributes to a zone. Those elements not in any zone specified in the data input linesare assigned the attributes given by the command line parameters.

If zonenames are specified on the data input lines, they must be disjoint, that is, if an elementis in a zone, it cannot be in any other zone given in the data input lines.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the element depiction. If there is a previously defined element depiction withthis name, data entered in this command modifies that element depiction. If there is nopreviously defined element depiction, a new element depiction is created by this command.

ORCOLOR [BLUE]The color of elements when drawing the original configuration of the mesh.

DECOLOR [CYAN]The color of elements when drawing the deformed configuration of the mesh.

Chap. 5 Display control ELDEPICTION


ORLSTYLE [SOLID]The style of the lines of elements when drawing the original configuration of the mesh.{SOLID / DASHED}

DELSTYLE [SOLID]The style of the lines of elements when drawing the deformed configuration of the mesh.{SOLID / DASHED}

SHELLSTYLE [MIDSURFACE]Controls whether SHELL elements are drawn using a midsurface or topbottom depiction.{MIDSURFACE / TOPBOTTOM}

SHFAC1 [1.0]SHFAC2 [1.0]These attributes affect SHELL elements drawn in the topbottom depiction only. They alterthe layer thicknesses and placement of the layer from the midsurface. (See figure.)

CSLINE [0.1]UNITCSLINE [CM]The width of thick plotted lines used to draw contact surface elements, and its unit. Theseparameters also control the width of thick plotted lines used to draw fluid-structure interfaceelements (used with ADINA potential-based fluid elements). {CM / INCH / PERCENT/ PIXELS / POINTS}

RSLINE [0.1]UNITRSLINE [CM]The width of thick plotted lines used to draw radiosity surface elements, and its unit. {CM /INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

SYMBOLPLOT [YES]Enter NO for no symbol plotting at elements and YES to plot symbols at elements. If NO isentered, the values of parameters SYMBOL, SYMBOLCOLOR, SYMBOLSIZE andUNITSYMBOLSIZE are ignored.

SYMBOL ['@C[1,6]']The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each element. Use the extendedcharacter convention to enter a special symbol. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12 forthe extended character convention.

SYMBOLCOLOR [INVERSE]The color of element symbols.



SYMBOLSIZE [0.25]UNITSYMBOLSIZE [CM]The size of element symbols and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

SUBNUMBER [NO]Controls whether substructure numbers are plotted. {YES / NO}

REUNUMBER [NO]Controls whether reuse numbers are plotted. {YES / NO}

GRONUMBER [NO]Controls whether element group / contact surface group / radiosity surface group numbers areplotted. {YES / NO}

ELENUMBER [NO]Controls whether element / contact surface / radiosity surface numbers are plotted. {YES /NO}

LAYNUMBER [NO]Controls whether element layer / contact segment numbers are plotted. {YES / NO}

NUMBERCOLOR [INVERSE]The color of element numbers, used only when at least one of SUBNUMBER,REUNUMBER, GRONUMBER, ELENUMBER, LAYNUMBER is YES.

NUMBERSIZE [0.25]UNITNUMBERSIZE [CM]The size of element numbers, used only when at least one of SUBNUMBER,REUNUMBER, GRONUMBER, ELENUMBER, LAYNUMBER is YES, and its unit. {CM/ INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

TRIAD [NO]Enter NO for no triad plotting at elements and YES for triad plotting. If NO is entered, thevalues of parameters TRIADCOLOR, TRIADSIZE and UNITTRIADSIZE are ignored.

TRIADCOLOR [VIOLET]The color of element triads.



TRIADSIZE [0.25]UNITTRIADSIZE [CM]The size of element triads, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

NNCSIZE [0.25]UNITNNCSIZE [CM]The size of symbols plotted at target nodes in node-node contact surface groups and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

NNCLINE [YES]If NNCLINE = NO, no lines are plotted between contactor and target nodes in node-nodecontact surface groups. If NNCLINE = YES, lines are plotted between contactor and targetnodes.

TRIADTYPE [ELEMENTCS]The type of triad.

ELEMENTCS The triad indicates the element local coordinate system. For brickvolume elements, the AUI plots the symbols “+r”, “-r”, etc. to indicatethe volume element faces. For tetrahedral volume elements, the AUIplots the symbols “r=0”, etc. to indicate the volume element faces.

RESULTTR The triad indicates the local coordinate system used to calculatetransformed stresses and strains. The local coordinate system is thesystem given in the result control depiction used in the MESHPLOTcommand (see RESULTCONTROL RESULTSYSTEM in Section 6.6)

MATERIALAXESThe triad indicates the material axes for those elements that useorthotropic materials.

INITIALSTRAINAXESThe triad indicates the initial strain axes for those elements with initialstrains.

SEGNORMAL [YES]Enter NO for no plotting of contact segment normals and YES for plotting of contact segmentnormals. If NO is entered, the values of parameters SEGNSIZE and UNITSNSIZE areignored.

Note: SEGNORMAL, SEGNSIZE and UNITSNSIZE also control the plotting of radiositysegment normals and fluid-structure interface element normals (used with ADINA potential-based fluid elements).



SEGNSIZE [0.75]UNITSNSIZE [CM]The size of contact segment normals, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

DBHFACTOR [1.0]The plotted line width for drawbeads is equal to DBHFACTOR × the input drawbead height,where DBHFACTOR × the input drawbead height is measured in the coordinate system ofthe model. Hence DBHFACTOR can be used to magnify the plotted width of drawbeads.

SPRINGSIZE [0.25]UNITSPRING [CM]The plotted size of 1 DOF spring elements, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

zonenamei

The name of a zone. All zonenames specified in the data input lines must be disjoint. Theconnection between a zone and its attributes can be removed using the DELETE zonenamei

option.

zonenamei orcolori decolori orlstylei delstylei shellstylei shfac1i shfac2i cslinei unitcslinei rslinei unitrslinei symbolploti symboli symbolcolori symbolsizei unitsymbolsizei subnumberi reunumberi gronumberi elenumberi laynumberi numbercolori numbersizei unitnumbersizei triadi triadcolori triadsizei unittriadsizei nncsizei unitnncsizei nnclinei triadtypei segnormali segnsizei unitsnsizei springsizei unitspringi

The attributes to be used when drawing elements in zone zonenamei. If an attribute is notspecified, it is copied from the corresponding command-line parameter.

VSDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


VSDEPICTION NAME PLOTSHIFT SHIFTNUMBER

VSDEPICTION defines information used when plotting virtual shifts on mesh plots. Virtualshifts are defined in fracture mechanics analysis.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the virtual shift depiction. If there is a previously defined virtual shift depictionwith this name, data entered in this command modifies that virtual shift depiction. If there isno previously defined virtual shift depiction, a new virtual shift depiction is created by thiscommand.

PLOTSHIFT [NO]Plots the virtual shift. When PLOTSHIFT = YES, the deformed mesh plot is formed usingthe virtual shifts of the specified virtual shift number instead of the displacements. {NO /YES} SHIFTNUMBER [1]The label number of the virtual shift to plot.

Chap. 5 Display control MESHANNOTATION


MESHANNOTATION NAME COLOR CHARSIZE UNITCHARSIZE BOXSIZE UNITBOXSIZE WIDTH UNITWIDTH PLACEMENT XSTART UNITXSTART YSTART UNITYSTART SCALE

labeltypei statusi colori charsizei unitcharsizei boxsizei unitboxsizei widthi unitwidthi placementi xstarti unitxstarti ystarti unitystarti scalei

MESHANNOTATION defines which optional text to plot along with the MESHPLOTcommand. It also defines the attributes of the optional text.

Optional text is as follows:

MAGNIFICATION: The displacement magnification factor is plotted, if it is not equalto 1.0.

RESPONSE: Information about the response (for example, the solution time or the modenumber) is plotted.

SCALES: A scaling factor, that gives the number of model length units corresponding toa plotted distance, is plotted

MESHWINDOW: The current mesh viewing window limits are plotted.

AXES: The coordinate axes are plotted

CUTSURFACE: Information about the cutting surface (for example, the variable used ina cutting surface of type isosurface) is plotted.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the mesh annotation depiction. If there is a previously defined mesh annotationdepiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that mesh annotationdepiction. If there is no previously defined mesh annotation depiction with this name, a newmesh annotation depiction is created by this command.

COLOR [INVERSE]The color of the selected annotation.

CHARSIZE [24]UNITCHARSIZE [POINTS]The size of the characters of the selected annotation, and its unit. {CM / INCHES /PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

MESHANNOTATION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


BOXSIZE [2.0]UNITBOXSIZE [CM]The size of the box of the selected annotation, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT/ PIXELS / POINTS}

WIDTH [0.1]UNITWIDTH [CM]The width of the selected annotation, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

PLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]XSTART [0.0]UNITXSTART [PERCENT]YSTART [0.0]UNITYSTART [PERCENT]If PLACEMENT is AUTOMATIC, then the placement of the annotation text is doneautomatically by the program. If PLACEMENT is CUSTOM, then the annotation textplacement is specified by XSTART, UNITXSTART, YSTART, UNITYSTART. XSTARTand YSTART specify the subframe X and Y coordinates of the selected annotation and theirunits are given by UNITXSTART and UNITYSTART respectively.

SCALE [1.0]A scale factor applied to the entire annotation.

labeltypei

The name of an annotation label. {MAGNIFICATION / RESPONSE / SCALES /MESHWINDOW / AXES / CUTSURFACE}

statusi [ON]If statusi is set to ON, the annotation is used; if statusi is set to OFF, the annotation is not used. {ON / OFF}

colori charsizei unitcharsizei boxsizei unitboxsizei

widthi unitwidthi placementi

xstarti unitxstarti ystarti unitystarti scalei

The attributes used when drawing the selected annotation. Some attributes are ignored forsome of the annotations. Their descriptions are the same as for the corresponding commandline parameters. If an attribute is not specified on the data input line, its value is taken fromthe corresponding command line parameter.

Note: The color of the plotting scales is taken from the default original and deformed colorsdefined in ELDEPICTION (in this section).

Chap. 5 Display control BOUNDEPICTION


BOUNDEPICTION NAME BCODE SYMBOL SYMBOLCOLOR SYMBOLSIZE UNITSYMBOLSIZE BTABLE PLACEMENT XSTART UNITXSTART YSTART UNITYSTART SCALE

BOUNDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing boundary conditions with theMESHPLOT command.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the boundary depiction. If there is a previously defined boundary depiction withthis name, data entered in this command is appended to that boundary depiction. If there isno previously defined boundary depiction with this name, a new boundary depiction iscreated by this command.

BCODE [NO]All nodes having boundary conditions matched by the BCODE parameter are marked by asymbol derived from SYMBOL.

For ADINA meshes, BCODE can be one of the following:

1) Six digit integer2) The word OVALIZATION3) The word SLAVES4) The word DIR followed by 1 to 6 digits5) The word ALL6) The word NO

For ADINA-T or ADINA-F meshes, BCODE can be either ALL or NO. See the notes at theend of this command for more information.

SYMBOL [B]The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each node with the specifiedboundary condition. Use the extended character convention to enter a special symbol. Seethe TEXT command in Section 5.12 for the extended character convention.

When BCODE = ALL, SYMBOL must be a character from A to Z.

SYMBOLCOLOR [GREEN]The color of the symbol.

SYMBOLSIZE [0.25]UNITSYMBOLSIZE [CM]The size of the symbol and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

BOUNDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


BTABLE [YES]Indicates whether to plot a table of symbols and the corresponding degrees of freedom. Thistable is created when BCODE = ALL. {YES / NO}

PLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]XSTART [0.0]UNITXSTART [CM]YSTART [0.0]UNITYSTART [CM]These parameters are used only when BCODE = ALL. They control the location of theboundary condition code table.

If PLACEMENT = AUTOMATIC, then the program decides where to put the boundarycondition code table automatically. If PLACEMENT = CUSTOM, then you use parametersXSTART, UNITXSTART, YSTART, UNITYSTART to position the upper left-hand cornerof the boundary condition code table.

SCALE [1.0]This parameter is used only when BCODE = ALL. The boundary condition code table isscaled by SCALE.

Note:

The boundary conditions plotted onto the geometry correspond to those defined for thecurrent finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command in Section 3.4).

Description of parameter BCODE:

The following list gives the available options:

1. Six digit integer. Each digit can be:

0 free degree of freedom1 fixed (deleted) degree of freedom2 slave degree of freedom9 either free, fixed or slave degree of freedom

The position of each digit corresponds to a degree of freedom as follows:

1st digit: X-translation (A-translation if skew-system)2nd digit: Y-translation (B-translation if skew-system)3rd digit: Z-translation (C-translation if skew-system)4th digit: X-rotation (A-rotation if skew-system)

Chap. 5 Display control BOUNDEPICTION


5th digit: Y-rotation (B-rotation if skew-system)6th digit: Z-rotation (C-rotation if skew-system)

(Note that the directions of the rotational degrees of freedom for a shell elementmidsurface node depend on the number of degrees of freedom assigned to the node.)

All nodes with degrees of freedom that match the degrees of freedom specified in the six-digit integer are marked with the boundary code character BCHARACTER.

Example: 100999 specifies that nodes with fixed X-translations (or A-translations) andfree Y- and Z-translations (or B- and C-translations) shall be marked with theboundary code character.

2. The word OVALIZATION:

Nodes with fixed ovalization degrees of freedom are marked with the boundary codesymbol.

3. The word SLAVES:

Nodes with one or more slave degrees of freedom are marked with the boundary codesymbol.

4. The word DIR followed by 1 - 6 digits:

Nodes with fixed degrees of freedom in one or more of the specified directions aremarked with the boundary code symbol. The directions are specified using digits asfollows:

1 X-translation (A-translation if skew system)2 Y-translation (B-translation if skew system)3 Z-translation (C-translation if skew system)4 X-rotation (A-rotation if skew system)5 Y-rotation (B-rotation if skew system)6 Z-rotation (C-rotation if skew system)

(Note that the directions of the rotational degrees of freedom for a shell elementmidsurface node depend on the number of degrees of freedom assigned to that node.)

Examples:

DIR5 specifies that nodes with fixed Y-rotations (or B-rotations) shall be marked withthe boundary code symbol.

BOUNDEPICTION Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


DIR316 specifies that nodes with fixed Z-translations (or C-translations), fixed X-translations (or A-translations) or fixed Z-rotations (or C-rotations) shall be markedwith the boundary code symbol.

5. The word ALL:

Nodes with any fixed, slave, ovalization or fluid boundary conditions are marked with aboundary code character. Each different boundary condition is marked with a different boundary code character. A table can be plotted showing the boundary conditionassociated with each letter.

6. The word NO:

Boundary codes are not checked or marked.

Note that only the options ALL and NO are applicable for the finite element programsADINA-T and ADINA-F.

Chap. 5 Display control PLOTAREA


PLOTAREA NAME SIZE XOFFSET UNITXOFFSET YOFFSET UNITYOFFSET WIDTH UNITWIDTH HEIGHT UNITHEIGHT ROTATION

PLOTAREA defines a plotarea depiction. The plotarea can be used in the MESHPLOTcommand to specify the exact area within the subframe into which a meshplot is drawn.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the plotarea depiction. If there is a previously defined plotarea depiction withthis name, data entered in this command modifies that plotarea depiction. If there is nopreviously defined plotarea depiction with this name, a new plotarea depiction is created bythis command.

SIZE [AUTOMATIC]Specifies how the plotarea size is specified:

AUTOMATIC Size chosen automatically by the command that uses the plotarea.

DIRECT Size defined using the remaining parameters.

MARGIN Size chosen automatically, including a margin at the right-hand side.

XOFFSET [0.0]UNITXOFFSET [PERCENT]YOFFSET [0.0]UNITYOFFSET [PERCENT]WIDTH [100.0]UNITWIDTH [PERCENT]HEIGHT [100.0]UNITHEIGHT [PERCENT]These parameters are used only if size = DIRECT. See the figure for their definitions.Unit parameters can take the values CM, INCHES, PERCENT, PIXELS, POINTS. Parameters with PERCENT units are interpreted as percentages of the subframe.

ROTATION [0.0]The plot can be rotated with respect to the subframe. The rotation angle is entered in degrees.

PLOTAREA Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


Chap. 5 Display control VIEW


VIEW NAME TYPE XVIEW YVIEW ZVIEW ROTATION XREFERENCE YREFERENCE ZREFERENCE SXV SYV SZV DZVV

VIEW defines a view depiction. The view can be used in the MESHPLOT command.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the view depiction. If there is a previously defined view depiction with thisname, data entered in this command modifies that view depiction. If there is no previouslydefined view depiction with this name, a new view depiction is created by this command.

TYPE [AUTOMATIC]The type of view depiction.

AUTOMATIC the view is automatically chosen by the command that uses the viewdepiction. Currently the view is a parallel projection.

PARALLEL a parallel projection is defined using the remaining parameters of thiscommand.

XVIEW [1.0]YVIEW [1.0]ZVIEW [1.0]These parameters specify the direction from the view reference point to the eye point (seefigure).

ROTATION [0.0]This parameter specifies the clockwise rotation in degrees of the view projection planecoordinate system about the view vector, as observed looking at the view reference point. Note that when the view projection plane coordinate system rotates clockwise, the modelrotates counterclockwise relative to the view projection plane coordinate system and hencewith respect to the subframe.

XREFERENCE [0.0]YREFERENCE [0.0]ZREFERENCE [0.0]These parameters specify the view reference point.

SXV [1.0]SYV [1.0]SZV [1.0]These stretch factors are applied to the coordinates of points in the model after viewing. They are used for special effects, such as stretching a thin model so that results can moreeasily be plotted onto it.

VIEW Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


DZVV [0.0]This parameter is used when viewing zoom-models. The zoom-model is shifted by an amountDZVV (DZVV > 0) in the ZV direction. In this way, the zoom-model always appears infront of the main structure. If DZVV=0.0, the AUI automatically computes the shift based onthe size of the model.

Chap. 5 Display control VIEW


MESHWINDOW Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


MESHWINDOW NAME SIZE XVMIN YVMIN ZVMIN XVMAX YVMAX ZVMAX CLIP

MESHWINDOW defines a mesh viewing window depiction.

After the mesh coordinates are projected by the specified view, they are (optionally) clippedby the mesh viewing window; therefore only that part of the model that can be seen throughthe mesh viewing window is displayed. As a consequence, decreasing the size of the meshviewing window has the effect of zooming into a region of the model.

The mesh viewing window is defined as a rectangular box in the view projection plane.

The mesh viewing window can either be chosen automatically by the program or can bedirectly specified by this command. It is also possible to use the mouse to interactivelychange the viewing window of a displayed mesh plot (see LOCATOR MESHWINDOW inSection 4.2).

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the mesh viewing window depiction. If there is a previously defined meshviewing window depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that meshviewing window depiction. If there is no previously defined mesh viewing window depictionwith this name, a new mesh viewing window depiction is created by this command.

SIZE [AUTOMATIC]This parameter specifies the size of the mesh viewing window.

AUTOMATIC the mesh viewing window is chosen to be the smallest viewing window thatcontains all of the mesh coordinates.

DIRECT the mesh viewing window is directly chosen using the remaining parametersof this command.

XVMIN [-1.0]YVMIN [-1.0]ZVMIN [-1.0]XVMAX [1.0]YVMAX [1.0]ZVMAX [1.0]These parameters are used only when SIZE = DIRECT. They give the bounding boxcoordinates of the mesh viewing window, see figure.

CLIP [YES]The AUI can clip the mesh coordinates to the viewing window {YES / NO}.

Chap. 5 Display control MESHWINDOW


CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE NAME OPTION X Y Z PROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE1 NODE2 NODE3 NX NY NZ COORDINATE SPACING PLOTPLANE PLANECOLOR LINEWIDTH UNITLWIDTH UNDERMESH OVERMESH OPAQUEOPTION

Defines a cutsurface depiction of type CUTPLANE. When used in a meshplot, thiscutsurface depiction causes the meshplot to be cut by cutting planes according to theattributes of this command. The attributes include:

• Origin and direction of cutting planes• Number of cutting planes (all parallel to each other)• Plotting attributes of cutting planes• Plotting of mesh above and below cutting planes

When a meshplot is cut by cutting planes, you can plot bands and element vectors onto the cutsurfaces.

You can have several parallel cutting planes with the same normal and different origin. Inthis case you specify the cutting plane as usual and also the spacing between successivecutting planes. The cutting plane that you specify is termed the base cutting plane.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the cutsurface depiction. If there is a previously defined cutsurface depictionwith this name, data entered in this command modifies that cutsurface depiction. If there isno previously defined cutsurface depiction, a new cutsurface depiction is created by thiscommand.

OPTION [XPLANE]This controls the origin and direction of the base cutting plane as follows:

POINTNORMAL You specify the origin and normal direction for the base cutting planeusing parameters X, Y, Z, NX, NY, NZ.

THREENODE You specify the base cutting plane using three nodes. The nodenumbers are specified using parameters PROGRAM,SUBSTRUCTURE, REUSE, NODE1, NODE2, NODE3.

NODENORMAL You specify the base cutting plane using a node and a normal direction. The node number is specified using parameters PROGRAM,SUBSTRUCTURE, REUSE, N1 and the normal direction is specifiedusing parameters NX, NY, NZ.

Chap. 5 Display control CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE


XPLANEYPLANEZPLANE The base cutting plane has normal in the specified direction. The origin

of the base cutting plane is specified by parameter COORDINATEalong the specified direction.

X [0.0]Y [0.0]Z [0.0]The origin of the base cutting plane, used when OPTION = POINTNORMAL.

PROGRAM [current FE program]SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]The finite element program, substructure number, and reuse number for the node(s) used tospecify the base cutting plane, used only if OPTION = THREENODE or NODENORMAL andonly when there is more than one node with the same node number in the model (this canoccur if the model contains substructures, reuses or cyclic parts, or if the results from morethan one finite element program are loaded).

NODE1 [1]NODE2 [1]NODE3 [1]The node numbers used to specify the base cutting plane when OPTION = THREENODE orNODENORMAL. When OPTION = THREENODE, the nodes cannot be collinear. WhenOPTION = NODENORMAL, only node NODE1 is used, and its position specifies the origin of the base cutting plane. NX [1.0]NY [0.0]NZ [0.0]The outwards normal of the base cutting plane, used when OPTION = POINTNORMAL orNODENORMAL.

COORDINATE [0.0]The position of the base cutting plane along the specified coordinate direction, used whenOPTION = XPLANE, YPLANE or ZPLANE.

SPACING [0.0]The distance between cutting planes as measured in the direction of the cutting plane normal. If SPACING = 0.0, only one cutting plane is used, otherwise as many parallel cutting planeswith distance SPACING as are necessary to cut the entire meshplot are used.



PLOTPLANE [YES]If PLOTPLANE = YES, cutting planes are plotted, otherwise they are not plotted.

PLANECOLOR [INVERSE]The color of plotted cutting planes, used if PLOTPLANE = YES.

LINEWIDTH [0.0]UNITLWIDTH [CM]The plotted width of lines used to draw cutting planes, used if PLOTPLANE = YES.UNITLWIDTH can be CM, INCHES, PERCENT, POINTS or PIXELS.

UNDERMESH [TRANSPARENT]This parameter specifies how the part of the meshplot that lies underneath all cutting planes isdrawn (underneath means opposite the direction of the cutting plane normal).

OPAQUE The part of the meshplot that lies underneath all cutting planes isdrawn as usual.

TRANSPARENT Only the outline of the part of the meshplot that lies underneath allcutting planes is drawn.

NONE The part of the meshplot that lies underneath all cutting planes is notdrawn.

OVERMESH [TRANSPARENT]This parameter specifies how the part of the meshplot that lies over at least one cutting planeis drawn (over means in the direction of the cutting plane normal).

OPAQUE The part of the meshplot that lies over at least one cutting plane isdrawn as usual.

TRANSPARENT Only the outline of the part of the meshplot that lies over at least onecutting plane is drawn.

NONE The part of the meshplot that lies over at least one cutting plane isnot drawn.

OPAQUEOPTION [ALL]This parameter specifies if bands and vectors are plotted on the opaque part of the meshplot:

NONE Bands and vectors are not plotted on the opaque part of themeshplot.

Chap. 5 Display control CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE


ALL Bands and vectors are plotted on the opaque part of the meshplot.

Bands and vectors are always plotted on the cutting plane intersection.

Note:

The following graphical items are processed by cutting planes:

Graphical item Processed bycutting plane

Truss and other 1D elements Yes

2D elements, planar and nonplanar Yes

3D elements Yes

Beam, iso-beam, pipe elements Yes

Plate elements Yes

ADINA shell elements, defined bymidsurface, plotted in midsurface depiction

Yes

ADINA shell elements, some topbottomnodes, or plotted in topbottom depiction

Yes1

ADINA-T shell elements Yes1

Spring elements Yes

General elements Yes

Potential-based fluid interface elements Yes

2D contact segments Yes

3D contact segments Yes

Drawbeads Yes

2D boundary surfaces Yes

3D boundary surfaces Yes

Bcells Yes

Crack front lines Yes

2D fluid-structure boundaries Yes

3D fluid-structure boundaries Yes

Constraint equations/rigid links Yes



ADINA-T convection and radiationelements

Yes

2D radiosity surfaces Yes

3D radiosity surfaces Yes

Load vectors Yes

Element line vectors Yes

Element vectors Yes

Bands Yes

Reaction vectors Yes

Geometry points, lines, surfaces, etc. No

1) Non-midsurface shell elements are processed “approximately”. An element is plotted onlyif all of the nodes of the element are visible. Partial elements are not plotted.

Chap. 5 Display control CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE


CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE NAME VARIABLE THRESHOLD SMOOTHINGRESULTCONTROL UNDERMESH OVERMESH OPAQUEOPTION

Defines a cutsurface depiction of type ISOSURFACE. When used in a meshplot, thiscutsurface depiction causes the meshplot to be cut by a surface determined by the value of avariable (an isosurface).

When a meshplot is cut by an isosurface, you can plot bands and element vectors onto the cutsurfaces.


VARIABLEThe name of the variable used to create the isosurface. The variable can be a predefinedvariable, an alias or a resultant. See Section 6.9 for information about variables.

THRESHOLDThe value of the variable used to determine the isosurface.

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how the variable is smoothed. Asmoothing technique is specified by the SMOOTHING command in Section 6.6.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. This depiction, along with the smoothing technique,controls how the variable is evaluated. A result control depiction is specified by theRESULTCONTROL command in Section 6.6.

UNDERMESH [TRANSPARENT]This parameter specifies how the part of the meshplot in which the variable is less than thethreshold value is drawn.

OPAQUE The part of the meshplot in which the variable is less than thethreshold value is drawn as usual.

TRANSPARENT Only the outline of the part of the meshplot in which the variable isless than the threshold value is drawn.

CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


NONE The part of the meshplot in which the variable is less than thethreshold value is not drawn.

OVERMESH [TRANSPARENT]This parameter specifies how the part of the meshplot in which the variable is greater than thethreshold value is drawn.

OPAQUE The part of the meshplot in which the variable is greater than thethreshold value is drawn as usual.

TRANSPARENT Only the outline of the part of the meshplot in which thevariable is greater than the threshold value is drawn.

NONE The part of the meshplot in which the variable is greater than thethreshold value is not drawn.

OPAQUEOPTION [ALL]This parameter specifies if bands and vectors are plotted on the opaque part of the meshplot:

NONE Bands and vectors are not plotted on the opaque part of themeshplot.

ALL Bands and vectors are plotted on the opaque part of the meshplot.

Bands and vectors are always plotted on the cutting plane intersection.

Note:

The following graphical items are processed by cutting isosurfaces:

Graphical item Processed bycutting isosurface

Truss and other 1D elements No

2D elements, planar and nonplanar Yes

3D elements Yes

Beam, iso-beam, pipe elements No

Plate elements Yes

ADINA shell elements, defined bymidsurface, plotted in midsurface depiction

Yes

Chap. 5 Display control CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE


ADINA shell elements, some topbottomnodes, or plotted in topbottom depiction

No

ADINA-T shell elements No

Spring elements No

General elements No

Potential-based fluid interface elements No

2D contact segments No

3D contact segments No

Drawbeads No

2D boundary surfaces No

3D boundary surfaces No

Bcells No

Crack front lines No

2D fluid-structure boundaries No

3D fluid-structure boundaries No

Constraint equations/rigid links No

ADINA-T convection and radiationelements

No

2D radiosity surfaces No

3D radiosity surfaces No

Load vectors No

Element line vectors No

Element vectors No1

Bands No

Reaction vectors No

Geometry points, lines, surfaces, etc. No

1) Element vectors are plotted on element faces. Element vectors that are interior in themodel are not plotted (these vectors are produced when the meshplot rendering istransparent).

CUTSURFACE NONE Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting


CUTSURFACE NONE NAME

Defines a cutsurface depiction of type NONE. When used in a meshplot, this cutsurfacedepiction turns off all cutting surface calculations.


Chap. 5 Display control GEDRAWING


GEDRAWING SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP MATRIXSET

lni lnj

GEDRAWING is used to define the local nodes between which lines are drawn when plottinggeneral mass/stiffness/damping elements in an ADINA model. This information is referred toas "local node plotting connectivity data". All general elements that use the same matrix setare drawn using the same local node plotting connectivity data.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]GROUP [1]The substructure number and element group number of the general elements.

MATRIXSET [1]The matrix set number of the general elements.

lni lnj

Local node numbers within the general element to be connected by a straight line duringplotting.

Example:

The above figures show a structure with two general elements having the same matrix set. The following GEDRAWING command can be used to define the local node plottingconnectivity data for the general element:

GEDRAWING MATRIXSET=21 22 33 44 1DATAEND

Load plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.3 Load plotting


Load plotting – Introduction

You draw loads onto an existing mesh plot using the LOADPLOT command. The resultingplot is called a load plot. You can also modify an existing load plot using this command.

If you have loaded the results from more than one finite element program into the database, the load plot can display the loads from all of the loaded finite element program results.

A load plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been defined beforeyou create the load plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.

Every load plot has a name, which you specify when you create the load plot. You refer tothe load plot by name when modifying or deleting the load plot.

The appearance of the load plot is governed by the load plot depictions. The load plotdepictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the load plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used by the LOADPLOT command to refer to thedepiction.

The depictions used by LOADPLOT are:


LOADSEARCH: specifies the nodes and elements onto which loads are plotted. Currently this cannot be changed.

LOADRENDERING: specifies which loads to plot and how they are drawn. See theLOADRENDERING command in this section.

LOADANNOTATION: specifies which optional text should be drawn along with theload plot. Currently this cannot be changed.

You can group depiction names into a style using the LOADSTYLE command. Then youcan specify the load style name in the LOADPLOT command. It is not necessary to useLOADSTYLE in order to use LOADPLOT. The load style simply provides a way to groupload plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions to another setby specifying a load style name.

When you create a load plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the samename as the load plot.

Chap. 5 Display control Load plotting – Introduction


You can modify an existing load plot in several ways:

1) Alter the depictions with the load plot name using the depiction commands, thenregenerate the load plot using the REGENERATE command. For example:


LOADPLOT L1Creates load plot L1

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP L1 TIME=2.0Redefines the solution time for L1 to be 2.0.

REGENERATERegenerates the load plot.

2) Use the LOADPLOT command to substitute depictions. For example;


LOADPLOT L1Creates load plot L1.

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP MAX_RESP TIME=3.0Defines a response.

LOADPLOT L1 RESPONSE=MAX_RESPSubstitutes response MAX_RESP for the response depiction used during thecreation of load plot L1, then regenerates the load plot.

You can delete a load plot using the DELETE LOADPLOT command, by picking the meshplot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command, or by clearing thegraphics window using the FRAME command.

When you delete a load plot, all of the depictions with the name of the load plot areautomatically deleted as well.

Auxiliary commands

The LOADPLOT command has the following auxiliary commands:

Load plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.3 Load plotting


LIST LOADPLOTLists all load plots.

LIST LOADPLOT NAMELists the depictions for the specified load plot.

DELETE LOADPLOT NAMEDeletes the specified load plot.

The LOADSTYLE command has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST LOADSTYLELists all load styles.

LIST LOADSTYLE NAMELists the depictions for the specified load style.

DELETE LOADSTYLE NAMEDeletes the specified load style.

COPY LOADSTYLE NAME1 NAME2Copies the load style specified by NAME1 to NAME2.

Each of the depiction commands has auxiliary commands, see the discussion in Section 5.2regarding the mesh plot depiction auxiliary commands.

Chap. 5 Display control LOADPLOT


LOADPLOT NAME LOADSTYLE MESHNAME LOADSEARCH RESPONSE LOADRENDERING LOADANNOTATION

LOADPLOT allows you to draw loads as vectors onto a mesh plot. The loads are drawnaccording to the attributes within the depictions that you specify via this command.

NAME [LOADPLOTnnnnn]The name of the load plot. If you do not enter a name, the program will automaticallygenerate a name of the form LOADPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and99999.

LOADSTYLE [DEFAULT]The name of the load style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of thiscommand. A load style is defined by the LOADSTYLE command (in this section).

MESHNAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the mesh plot upon which the load vectors are drawn. You can also enter thespecial name PREVIOUS to plot onto the last created mesh plot. See Section 5.2 forinformation about mesh plots.

LOADSEARCHThe name of the load search depiction. You can specify onto which nodes, elements andgeometry entities to plot loads with this depiction. Currently there is no correspondingdepiction command.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape or other responsedescription. A response is defined by the response commands (see Section 6.3).

LOADRENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the load rendering depiction. You specify which types of loads to plot and theirstyle attributes with this depiction. A load rendering depiction is defined by theLOADRENDERING command (in this section).

LOADANNOTATIONThe name of the load annotation depiction. You specify the legends used to plot load scalefactors with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.

LOADSTYLE Sec. 5.3 Load plotting


LOADSTYLE NAME MESHPLOTNAME LOADSEARCH RESPONSE LOADRENDERING LOADANNOTATION

LOADSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing loads using LOADPLOT.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the load style. If there is a previously defined load style with this name, dataentered in this command modifies that load style. If there is no previously defined load stylewith this name, a new load style is created by this command.

MESHPLOTNAME [PREVIOUS]This parameter is currently unused.

LOADSEARCHThe name of the load search depiction. You can specify onto which nodes, elements andgeometry entities to plot loads with this depiction.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response. You specify the load step, mode shape or other responsedescription with this depiction. The load vectors are plotted according to the specifiedresponse. See the RESPONSE command.

LOADRENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the load rendering depiction. You specify which types of loads to plot and theirstyle attributes with this depiction. A load rendering depiction is defined by theLOADRENDERING command (in this section).

LOADANNOTATIONThe name of the load annotation depiction. You specify the legends used to plot load scalefactors with this depiction.

Chap. 5 Display control LOADRENDERING


LOADRENDERING NAME COLOR LENGTHOPTION MAXLENGTH UNITMAXLENGTH SCALEOPTION SCALEFACTOR COMBINE THETA SITELOCATION SITEMARKER HEADMARKER TAILMARKER TAILFLAG TAILSIZE UNITTAIL MINLENGTH UNITMINLENGTH

loadtypei statusi colori lengthoptioni maxlengthi unitmaxlengthi scaleoptioni scalefactori combinei thetai sitelocationi sitemarkeri headmarkeri tailmarkeri tailflagi tailsizei unittaili minlengthi unitminlengthi

LOADRENDERING defines attributes used when drawing a load plot with the LOADPLOTcommand.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the load rendering depiction. If there is a previously defined load renderingdepiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that load renderingdepiction. If there is no previously defined load rendering depiction with this name, a newload rendering depiction is created by this command.

COLORLENGTHOPTIONMAXLENGTHUNITMAXLENGTHSCALEOPTIONSCALEFACTORCOMBINETHETASITELOCATIONSITEMARKERHEADMARKERTAILMARKERTAILFLAGTAILSIZEUNITTAILMINLENGTHUNITMINLENGTHThe default values of the data input lines.

loadtypei

The type of load. This can beACCELERATIONANGULAR_ACCELERATIONCONVECTION (the convection environmental temperature)

LOADRENDERING Sec. 5.3 Load plotting


CURRENT-DENSITYDISPLACEMENTELECTRIC-POTENTIALFORCE (concentrated translational forces)HEAD (used in ADINA-T seepage flow analysis)HEATFLUXLINEMASSFLUX_I (substitute the species number for I, for example MASSFLUX_1)MASS-RATIO_I (substitute the species number for I)MOMENT (concentrated rotational moments)NODAL-CURRENTNODAL-PHIFLUX (used in potential-based fluid flow analysis)NODAL-PRESSURENODAL-HEATFLOWNODAL-SEEPAGEFLOWNORMAL-TRACTIONPHIFLUX (used in potential-based fluid flow analysis)PORE-PRESSUREPOREFLOWPRESSURERADIATION (the radiation environmental temperature)ROTATIONSEEPAGEFLUXTEMPERATURETGRADIENT (temperature gradient)TURBULENCE_KTURBULENCE_EPSILONTURBULENCE_WVELOCITYVOF_I (substitute the VOF species number for I)

The remaining data for this data input line gives the plotting attributes for this type of load. Defaults depend on this type of load.

statusi

If statusi = OFF, this load type is not plotted; if statusi = ON, this load type is plotted.

colori

The color used to plot this load type.

lengthoptioni

If lengthoptioni = SCALED, the load vector lengths are scaled according to their magnitude,using parameters scaleoptioni and scalefactori. If lengthoptioni = FIXED, all load vectors areplotted with the same length.



maxlengthi

unitmaxlengthi

The length of the longest plotted load vector and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT/ PIXELS / POINTS}

scaleoptioni

scalefactori

These parameters are used only when lengthoptioni = SCALED. When scaleoptioni =AUTOMATIC, the program scales the load vectors so that the longest load vector has lengthmaxlengthi. In this case, scalefactori is not used. When scaleoptioni = CUSTOM, you enter thescaling factor scalefactori used to determine the vector length from the vector magnitude. Seethe notes at the end of this command description.

combinei

If there are several loads with this type acting at the same location, they can be vectoriallycombined. {YES / NO} For example, a concentrated load acting in the y direction can bevectorially summed with a concentrated load acting in the z direction.

thetai

Some load types are scalar in nature, for example, TEMPERATURE. The program plots scalarloads as vectors in a direction given by thetai.

sitelocationi

Each load acts onto a site, for example, node points or geometry points. You can choosewhether the head of the load vector is placed at the site, or whether the tail of the load vectoris placed at the site. {HEAD / TAIL}

sitemarkeri

The site can be marked with a marker, as follows: 0 = no marker; 1 = outline circle ; 2 = filledcircle; 3 = outline square.

headmarkeri

tailmarkeri

The load vector head and tail can be marked with markers, as follows: 0 = no marker; 1 =single arrowhead; 2 = double arrowhead; 3 = single line; 4 = double line; 5 = inverted V; 6 =square; 7 = E with open side pointing towards other end of arrow; 8 = E with open sidepointing towards this end of arrow; 9 = X; 10 = crossed arrowhead.

tailflagi

The load vector tail can be marked with a tail flag, as follows: 0 = no tail flag; 1000*I + J =character J in character set I (see the TEXT command in Section 5.12); 10000 + I = M(I) (forexample 10234 = M234); 20000 + I = V(I) (for example 20234=V234). The tail flag is

LOADRENDERING Sec. 5.3 Load plotting


mainly used for mass flux and mass ratio load vectors, in which the species number is writteninto the tail flag.

tailsizei

unittaili

The size of the tail flag, if any, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

minlengthi

unitminlengthi

Load vectors shorter than minlengthi are not plotted.

Notes:

Suppressing loads: A typical use of the LOADRENDERING command is to suppressplotting of temperatures and temperature gradients.. To suppress plotting of temperatures andtemperature gradients for all successive loadplots, use the following command:

LOADRENDERINGENTRIES LOADTYPE STATUSTEMPERATURE OFFTGRADIENT OFFDATAEND

scalefactor: The plotted load vector length (in cm) = SCALEFACTOR × (result value)|For example, suppose that a load vector has magnitude 1234.0, that scaleoptioni = CUSTOMand that scalefactori = 1E-4. Then the plotted load vector length is 1E-4 × 1234 = 0.12 cm.

Band plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.4 Band plotting


Band plotting – Introduction

You draw bands, either filled contours or line contours, onto an existing mesh plot using theBANDPLOT command. The bands represent the value of a variable in truss, 2-D, 3-D, beam,iso-beam, plate, shell and pipe elements. You can optionally mark the extreme values withsymbols. The resulting plot is called a band plot. You can also modify an existing band plotusing this command.

If you have loaded the results from more than one finite element program into the database, the band plot can display the results from all of the loaded finite element program results.

A band plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been defined beforeyou create the band plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.

Every band plot has a name, which you specify when you create the band plot. You refer tothe band plot by name when modifying or deleting it.

The appearance of the band plot is governed by the band plot depictions. The band plotdepictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the band plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the BANDPLOT command to refer to thedepiction.

The depictions used by the BANDPLOT command are:


ZONE: specifies the nodes and elements onto which bands are plotted. See the zonecommands in Section 6.2.

SMOOTHING: specifies how the plotted variable is smoothed. See the SMOOTHINGcommand in Section 6.6.

RESULTCONTROL: specifies how the plotted variable is calculated. See theRESULTCONTROL command in Section 6.6.

BANDTABLE: specifies how colors are associated with values of the variable. Thereare two BANDTABLE commands, BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC and BANDTABLEREPEATING; see the descriptions in this section.

BANDRENDERING: specifies how bands are drawn. See the BANDRENDERINGcommand in this section.

Chap. 5 Display control Band plotting – Introduction


BANDANNOTATION: specifies which optional text is drawn along with the band plot. See the BANDANNOTATION command in this section.

You can group depiction names into a style using the BANDSTYLE command. Then youcan specify the band style name in the BANDPLOT command. It is not necessary to useBANDSTYLE in order to use BANDPLOT. The band style simply provides a way to groupband plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions to another setby specifying a band style name.

When you create a band plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the samename as the band plot.

You can modify an existing band plot in several ways:

1) Alter the depictions with the band plot name using the depiction commands, thenregenerate the band plot using the REGENERATE command. For example:


BANDPLOT B1Creates band plot B1

BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC B1 MINVALUE=5.0Sets the minimum value in the band table.

REGENERATERegenerates the band plot.

2) Use the BANDPLOT command to substitute depictions. For example;


BANDPLOT B1Creates band plot B1.

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP MAX_RESP TIME=3.0Defines a response.

BANDPLOT B1 RESPONSE=MAX_RESPSubstitutes response MAX_RESP for the response depiction used during thecreation of band plot B1, then regenerates the band plot.

Band plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.4 Band plotting


You can delete a band plot using the DELETE BANDPLOT command, by picking the meshplot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command, or by clearing thegraphics window using the FRAME command.

When you delete a band plot, all of the depictions with the name of the band plot areautomatically deleted as well.

Auxiliary commands

The BANDPLOT command has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST BANDPLOTLists all band plots.

LIST BANDPLOT NAMELists the depictions for the specified band plot.

DELETE BANDPLOT NAMEDeletes the specified band plot.

The BANDSTYLE command has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST BANDSTYLELists all band styles.

LIST BANDSTYLE NAMELists the depictions for the specified band style.

DELETE BANDSTYLE NAMEDeletes the specified band style.

COPY BANDSTYLE NAME1 NAME2Copies the band style specified by NAME1 to NAME2.


Chap. 5 Display control BANDPLOT


BANDPLOT NAME BANDSTYLE VARIABLE MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE SMOOTHING BANDTABLE BANDRENDERINGBANDANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL

BANDPLOT creates a band plot according to the attributes specified by the specifieddepictions.

NAME [BANDPLOTnnnnn]The name of the band plot. If no name is given, one is automatically generated in the formBANDPLOTnnnnn, when nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999.

BANDSTYLE [DEFAULT]The name of the band style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of thiscommand. A band style is defined by the BANDSTYLE command (in this section).

VARIABLEThe name of the variable to be plotted. The VARIABLE can be a predefined variable, aconstant, an alias or a resultant. See Section 6.9 for information about defining variables.

MESHNAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the meshplot onto which the bands are plotted. This meshplot is termed theunderlying meshplot for these bands. A meshplot is defined by the MESHPLOT command(in Section 5.2). A meshplot can hold the results from more than one BANDPLOTcommand. You can specify the special meshname PREVIOUS to plot on the last createdmeshplot.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies at which elements to compute the variable. A zone isdefined by a zone command (see Section 6.2). Note that BANDPLOT evaluates the variableonly in those elements selected by ZONENAME that were also plotted in the underlyingmesh plot.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used when drawingthe band plot. A response is defined by a response command (see Section 6.3). The responsename specified here can be different than the response name specified in the underlying meshplot.

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how to smooth the variables. Asmoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).

BANDPLOT Sec. 5.4 Band plotting


BANDTABLE [DEFAULT]The name of the band table used to associate colors with values of the variable. A band tableis defined by the BANDTABLE command (in this section).

BANDRENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the band rendering depiction that specifies how the band plot is drawn. A rendering depiction is specified by the BANDRENDERING command (in this section).

BANDANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the band annotation depiction that specifies what additional text appears alongwith the band plot. A band annotation depiction is specified by the BANDANNOTATIONcommand (in this section).

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. This depiction, along with the smoothing technique,controls how the results are calculated. A result control depiction is specified by theRESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

Chap. 5 Display control BANDSTYLE


BANDSTYLE NAME VARIABLE MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE SMOOTHING BANDTABLE BANDRENDERING BANDANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL

BANDSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing bands using the BANDPLOTcommand.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the band style. If there is a previously defined band style with this name, dataentered in this command overwrites information for that band style. If there is no previouslydefined band style with this name, a new band style is created by this command.

VARIABLEThe name of the variable to be plotted. The VARIABLE can be a predefined variable, aconstant, an alias or a resultant. See Section 6.9 for information about defining variables.

MESHNAME [PREVIOUS]This parameter is currently unused.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies at which elements to compute the variable. A zone isdefined by a zone command (see Section 6.2). Note that BANDPLOT evaluates the variableonly in those elements selected by ZONENAME that were also plotted in the underlyingmesh plot.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used when drawingthe band plot. A response is defined by a response command (see Section 6.3). The responsename specified here can be different than the response name specified in the underlying meshplot.

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how to smooth certain variables and howthey are smoothed. A smoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHING command (seeSection 6.6).

BANDTABLE [DEFAULT]The name of the band table used to associate colors with values of the variable. A band tableis defined by the BANDTABLE command (in this section).

BANDRENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the band rendering depiction that specifies how the band plot is drawn. A bandrendering depiction is specified by the BANDRENDERING command (in this section).

BANDSTYLE Sec. 5.4 Band plotting


BANDANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the band annotation depiction that specifies what additional text appears alongwith the band plot. A band annotation depiction is specified by the BANDANNOTATION command (in this section).


Chap. 5 Display control BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC


BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC NAME MINIMUM MAXIMUM COLORMAX MINCOLOR MAXCOLOR VALUEOPTION VALUECOLOR VALUE

BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC defines an automatic band table. This name can be used in theBANDPLOT command to specify the band table.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the band table. If there is a previously defined band table oftype automatic with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously definedband table. Otherwise, a new band table of type automatic is created by this command.

MINIMUM [AUTOMATIC]The minimum value to be contained in the band table. If you specify AUTOMATIC, theprogram calculates the minimum value when the band table is used.

MAXIMUM [AUTOMATIC]The maximum value to be contained in the band table. If you specify AUTOMATIC, theprogram calculates the maximum value when the band table is used.

COLORMAX [16]The number of colors or gray shades within the band table.

MINCOLOR [BLUE_MAGENTA_50]MAXCOLOR [MAGENTA_RED_50]The colors corresponding to the minimum and maximum values in the band table. Intermediate colors are constructed by interpolation between these colors. If gray-scale bandsare desired, use MINCOLOR = BLACK, MAXCOLOR = WHITE, or vice-versa.

VALUEOPTION [NONE]VALUECOLOR [GRAY]VALUEWhen VALUEOPTION=VALUECOLOR, then the band table is constructed with smoothlyvarying colors between values MINIMUM and VALUE, and with smoothly varying colorsbetween values VALUE and MAXIMUM. The color assigned to VALUE isVALUECOLOR. When VALUEOPTION=NONE, this feature is not used.

Note: When the band table DEFAULT is updated using the BANDTABLE AUTOMATICcommand, the band table DEFAULT_AUTOMATIC is set equal to band tableDEFAULT.

BANDTABLE REPEATING Sec. 5.4 Band plotting


BANDTABLE REPEATING NAME START WIDTH COLOR1 COLOR2

BANDTABLE REPEATING defines a repeating band table. This name can be used in theBANDPLOT command to specify the band table.

When a repeating band table and solid area fills are specified, values from START to START+ WIDTH are drawn in color 1 and values from START + WIDTH to START + 2×WIDTHare drawn in color 2.

When a repeating band table and line contours are specified, value START is drawn in color1 and value START + WIDTH is drawn in color 2.

In both cases the band table is repeated downward and upward for values lower than STARTand higher than START + 2×WIDTH.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the band table. If there is a previously defined band table oftype repeating with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously definedband table. Otherwise, a new band table of type repeating is created by this command.

START [AUTOMATIC]WIDTH [AUTOMATIC]The start and width for the repeating band table. If you specify AUTOMATIC, the programcalculates the parameter value. If you specify a numeric value for width, the value must begreater than zero.

COLOR1 [INVERSE]COLOR2 [NONE]The colors associated with the band table. NONE specifies no color (but you cannot useNONE for both COLOR1 and COLOR2).

Note: When the band table DEFAULT is updated using the BANDTABLE REPEATINGcommand, the band table DEFAULT_REPEATING is set equal to band tableDEFAULT.

Chap. 5 Display control BANDRENDERING


BANDRENDERING NAME BANDTYPE LINEWIDTH UNITLINEWIDTH EXTREMES SHELLTOPFACES SHELLBOTTOMFACES SHELLMIDSURFACEFACES SHELLSIDEFACES OTHERFACES TOLERANCE HIDDEN COORDCALC VIEWSHIFT

BANDRENDERING defines attributes used when drawing a band plot with the BANDPLOTcommand.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the band rendering depiction. If there is a previously defined band renderingdepiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that band renderingdepiction. If there is no previously defined band rendering depiction with this name, a newband rendering depiction is created by this command.

BANDTYPE [SOLID]Specifies the type of bandplot:

SOLID bands are drawn with solid area fills

LINE bands are drawn with line contours

LINEWIDTH [0.0]UNITLINEWIDTH [CM]The width of lines and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS} These parameters are used in two cases: plotting bands as line contours, and plotting solidbands onto line elements. Enter 0.0 for the thinnest possible lines.

EXTREMES [NONE]The extreme values in the band plot can be plotted using special symbols. This parametercontrols which extremes, if any, are plotted:

NONE extremes are not plotted

MINIMUM the minimum is plotted

MAXIMUM the maximum is plotted

ALL both the minimum and maximum are plotted

The symbols used to plot extremes can be specified using a bandannotation depiction, see theBANDANNOTATION command in this section.

BANDRENDERING Sec. 5.4 Band plotting


SHELLTOPFACES [YES]SHELLBOTTOMFACES [YES]SHELLMIDSURFACEFACES [YES]SHELLSIDEFACES [YES]OTHERFACES [YES]The bands can be drawn on all faces or on selected faces. If parameter SHELLTOPFACES =YES, bands are drawn on shell top faces, otherwise bands are not drawn on shell top faces. Ifparameter SHELLBOTTOMFACES = YES, bands are drawn on shell bottom faces,otherwise bands are not drawn on shell bottom faces. If parameterSHELLMIDSURFACEFACES = YES, bands are drawn on shell midsurface faces, otherwisebands are not drawn on shell midsurface faces. If parameter SHELLSIDEFACES = YES,bands are drawn on shell side faces, otherwise bands are not drawn on shell side faces. Ifparameter OTHERFACES = YES, bands are drawn on all other faces (that is, nonshell faces),otherwise bands are not drawn on these faces.

TOLERANCE [0.0]The band plot tolerance, between 0.0 (most accurate) and 1.0 (least accurate).

HIDDEN [YES]Controls whether hidden bands and line contours are removed. {YES / NO}

COORDCALC [GRAPHICAL]Controls how band coordinates are calculated:

GRAPHICAL Band coordinates are calculated so as to lie on the graphicalrepresentation of the meshplot. This can cause a slight “wavyness”of the bands.

THEORETICAL Band coordinates are calculated so as to lie on the theoreticalrepresentation of the meshplot. This can cause the bands to lie“underneath” the graphical representation of the meshplot; in thiscase, the bands are hidden by the meshplot.

VIEWSHIFT [0.0]The graphical representation of the bands is shifted by an amount VIEWSHIFT towards theeye. The typical use of this feature is when plotting bands on contact surfaces. It is possiblefor the graphical representation of contact surfaces to interfere with the graphicalrepresentation of the attached element faces. When this interference occurs, the band plotscan be inadvertently hidden by the attached element faces. Then setting VIEWSHIFT > 0.0causes the bands to be no longer hidden by the attached element faces.

The unit of VIEWSHIFT is the model length unit.

Chap. 5 Display control BANDANNOTATION


BANDANNOTATION NAME TABLE TCOLOR TCHARSIZE UNITTCHARSIZE TLENGTH UNITTLENGTH TWIDTH UNITTWIDTH TPLACEMENT TXSTART UNITTXSTART TYSTART UNITTYSTART TSCALE EXTREMES EMINSYMBOL EMINCOLOR EMINSIZE UNITEMINSIZE EMAXSYMBOL EMAXCOLOR EMAXSIZE UNITEMAXSIZE ECHARSIZE UNITECHARSIZE EPLACEMENT EXSTART UNITEXSTART EYSTART UNITEYSTART ESCALE

BANDANNOTATION defines which optional text to plot along with the BANDPLOTcommand. It also defines the attributes of the optional text.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the BANDANNOTATION depiction. If there is a previously definedBANDANNOTATION depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies thatBANDANNOTATION depiction. If there is no previously defined BANDANNOTATIONdepiction with this name, a new BANDANNOTATION depiction is created by thiscommand.

TABLE [YES]Determines whether or not the band table is plotted. {YES / NO}

TCOLOR [INVERSE]The color of text in the band table.

TCHARSIZE [.25]UNITTCHARSIZE [CM]The size of the characters in the band table, before scaling, and its unit.

TLENGTH [0.0]UNITTLENGTH [CM]The length of the band table, before scaling, and its unit. A value of 0.0 will result in theprogram choosing a length.

TWIDTH [0.0]UNITTWIDTH [CM]The width of the band table, before scaling, and its unit. A value of 0.0 will result in theprogram choosing a width.

BANDANNOTATION Sec. 5.4 Band plotting


TPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]TXSTART [0.0]UNITTXSTART [CM]TYSTART [0.0]UNITTYSTART [CM]If TPLACEMENT is AUTOMATIC, then the placement of the band table text is doneautomatically by the program. If TPLACEMENT is CUSTOM, then the band table textplacement is specified by TXSTART, UNITTXSTART, TYSTART, UNITTYSTART.TXSTART and TYSTART specify the subframe X and Y coordinates of the band table. Their units are given by UNITTXSTART and UNITTYSTART respectively.

TSCALE [1.0]A scale factor applied to the entire band table.

EXTREMES [YES]If EXTREMES = NO, the extreme value table is not plotted. If EXTREMES = YES, theextreme value table is plotted. This parameter does not affect the plotting of extreme valueson the band plot – this is controlled in the BANDRENDERING command.

EMINSYMBOL [@C[1,11]]The symbol used to mark the minimum band value. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12for the conventions used.

EMINCOLOR [INVERSE]The color used to draw the symbol used to mark the minimum band value.

EMINSIZE [0.25]UNITEMINSIZE [CM]The size of the symbol used to mark the minimum band value and its unit.

EMAXSYMBOL [@C[1,2]]The symbol used to mark the maximum band value. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12for the conventions used.

EMAXCOLOR [INVERSE]The color used to draw the symbol used to mark the maximum band value.

EMAXSIZE [0.25]UNITEMAXSIZE [CM]The size of the symbol used to mark the maximum band value and its unit.

Chap. 5 Display control BANDANNOTATION


ECHARSIZE [0.25]UNITECHARSIZE [CM]The size of the characters in the extremes annotation, before scaling, and its unit.

EPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]EXSTART [0.0]UNITEXSTART [CM]EYSTART [0.0]UNITEYSTART [CM]If EPLACEMENT is AUTOMATIC, then the placement of the extremes text is doneautomatically by the program. If EPLACEMENT is CUSTOM, then the extremes placement isspecified by EXSTART, UNITEXSTART, EYSTART, UNITEYSTART. EXSTART andEYSTART specify the subframe X and Y coordinates of the extremes annotation. Their unitsare given by UNITEXSTART and UNITEYSTART respectively.

ESCALE [1.0]A scale factor applied to the entire extremes annotation.

Vector plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.5 Vector plotting


Vector plotting – Introduction

You draw element vectors onto an existing mesh plot using the EVECTORPLOT command. The resulting plot is called an element vector plot. You can also modify an existing elementvector using this command.

The element vectors you can draw areSTRESS principal stressesSTRAIN principal strainsCREEP_STRAIN principal creep strainsPLASTIC_STRAIN principal plastic strainsHEAT_FLUX heat flux vectorsSEEPAGE_FLUX seepage flux vectorsVELOCITY velocity vectorsV_STRETCH the principal values of the left stretch tensor V, see the

ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 3.1.2.CRACK_STRESS stresses in the crack directionsCRACKS open and closed cracks and crushing symbolsOPENCRACKS open cracksCLOSEDCRACKS closed cracksCRUSHED crushing symbolsCURRENT_DENSITY current densityINPLANE_STRESS in-plane stresses in shell elementsINPLANE_STRAIN in-plane strains in shell elements

(For INPLANE_STRESS, INPLANE_STRAIN, the results must have been calculated in themidsurface coordinate system.)

If you have loaded the results from more than one finite element program into the database, the element vector plot can display the element vectors from all of the loaded finite elementprogram results.

An element vector plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have beendefined before you create the element vector plot. See Section 5.2 for information regardingmesh plots.

Every element vector plot has a name, which you specify when you create the element vectorplot. You refer to the element vector plot by name when modifying or deleting it.

The appearance of the element vector plot is governed by the element vector plot depictions. The element vector plot depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part ofthe element vector plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in theEVECTORPLOT command to refer to the depiction.

Chap. 5 Display control Vector plotting – Introduction


The depictions used by the EVECTORPLOT command are:

RESPONSE: specifies the solution time, mode-shape, etc. for the element vector plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3.

ZONE: specifies the elements onto which element vectors are plotted. See the zonecommands in Section 6.2.

SMOOTHING: specifies how the plotted variable is smoothed. See the SMOOTHINGcommand in Section 6.6.

RESULTCONTROL: specifies how the plotted variable is calculated. See theRESULTCONTROL command in Section 6.6.

EVECTORRENDERING: specifies how the plotted quantity is drawn. See theEVECTORRENDERING command in this section.

You can group depiction names into a style using the EVECTORSTYLE command. Thenyou can specify the element vector style name in the EVECTORPLOT command. It is notnecessary to use EVECTORSTYLE in order to use EVECTORPLOT. The element vectorstyle simply provides a way to group element vector plot depictions together so that you canswitch from one set of depictions to another set by specifying a element vector style name.

When you create a element vector plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and giventhe same name as the element vector plot.

You can modify an existing element vector plot either by using the REGENERATE commandor by substituting depiction names using the EVECTORPLOT command. The techniques areanalogous to those used in the BANDPLOT command, see the introduction to Section 5.4 forexamples.

You can delete an element vector plot using the DELETE EVECTORPLOT command, bypicking the mesh plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or byclearing the graphics window using the FRAME command.

When you delete an element vector plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of theelement vector plot are automatically deleted as well.

Auxiliary commands

The EVECTORPLOT and EVECTORSTYLE commands have auxiliary commandsanalogous to those of BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.

Vector plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.5 Vector plotting


Each of the depiction commands has auxiliary commands, see the introduction to Section 5.2regarding the mesh plot depiction auxiliary commands.

Chap. 5 Display control EVECTORPLOT


EVECTORPLOT NAME EVECTORSTYLE QUANTITY MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE SMOOTHING EVECTORGRID EVECTORTABLE EVECTORVECTORTYPE EVECTORCOORDINATESYSTEM EVECTORRENDERING EVECTORANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL MULTIPLIER

EVECTORPLOT allows you to draw results within elements as vectors onto a mesh plot. The element vectors are drawn according to the attributes within the depictions that youspecify via this command.

NAME [EVECTORPLOTnnnnn]The name of the element vector plot. If you do not enter a name, the program willautomatically generate a name in the form EVECTORPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a numberbetween 00001 and 99999.

EVECTORSTYLE [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters ofthis command. An element vector style is defined by the EVECTORSTYLE command (inthis section).

QUANTITYYou can draw vectors of several types of result. Depending on the finite element analysis,you can choose from the following list:

STRESSSTRAINCREEP_STRAINPLASTIC_STRAINHEAT_FLUXSEEPAGE_FLUXVELOCITYV_STRETCHCRACK_STRESSCRACKSOPENCRACKSCLOSEDCRACKSCRUSHEDCURRENT_DENSITYINPLANE_STRESSINPLANE_STRAIN

You only need to enter the characters indicated in bold.

EVECTORPLOT Sec. 5.5 Vector plotting


MESHNAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the meshplot upon which the load vectors are drawn. See Section 5.2 forinformation about meshplots. You can also enter the special name PREVIOUS to plot ontothe last created mesh plot.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements vectors will be plotted. See the zonecommands in Section 6.2.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used when drawingthe element vector plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3.

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how to smooth the results. A smoothingtechnique is defined by the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).

EVECTORGRID [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector grid depiction. You specify the number and location of gridpoints within each element or element face with this depiction. Currently there is nocorresponding depiction command. However there are four predefined depictions:DEFAULT, FACTORY, INTEGRATION_POINTS, CENTROID, which have thefollowing meanings:

DEFAULT, FACTORY EVECTORPLOT chooses evenly spaced grid points (not atthe integration point locations).

INTEGRATION_POINTS EVECTORPLOT chooses the element integration pointsCENTROID EVECTORPLOT chooses the element centroids, or the

centers of the element faces.

For ADINA postprocessing, if QUANTITY=CRACK_STRESS, CRACKS,OPENCRACKS, CLOSEDCRACKS or CRUSHED, then EVECTORPLOT chooses theintegration points as the sampling points, and EVECTORGRID is not used.. For ADINA-Fpostprocessing, if QUANTITY=VELOCITY, and if cutting planes are not used, thenEVECTORPLOT chooses the node points as the sampling points, and EVECTORGRID isnot used.

EVECTORTABLE [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector table depiction. You specify the colors of the elementvectors with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.

Chap. 5 Display control EVECTORPLOT


EVECTORVECTORTYPE [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector type depiction. You specify the way in which elementvectors are drawn (for example, the vector head and tail) with this depiction. Currently thereis no corresponding depiction command.

EVECTORCOORDINATESYSTEM [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector coordinate system depiction. You specify the coordinatesystem in which the element vectors are displayed, and also the components of the elementvectors that are plotted with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depictioncommand.

EVECTORRENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector rendering depiction. You specify the lengths and scaling ofthe element vectors with this depiction. An element vector rendering depiction is specified bythe EVECTORRENDERING command in this section.

EVECTORANNOTATIONThe name of the element vector annotation depiction. You specify attributes of the legendused to plot the element vector information with this depiction. Currently there is nocorresponding depiction command.


MULTIPLIER [1.0]The quantity can be multiplied by MULTIPLIER before plotting. Quantities CRACKS,OPENCRACKS, CLOSEDCRACKS and CRUSHED are not affected by the value of thisparameter.

EVECTORSTYLE Sec. 5.5 Vector plotting


EVECTORSTYLE NAME QUANTITY MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE SMOOTHING EVECTORGRID EVECTORTABLE EVECTORVECTORTYPE EVECTORCOORDINATESYSTEM EVECTORRENDERING EVECTORANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL MULTIPLIER

EVECTORSTYLE groups style depictions used by EVECTORPLOT.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector style. If there is a previously defined element vector stylewith this name, data entered in this command modifies that element vector style. If there isno previously defined element vector style with this name, a new element vector style iscreated by this command.

QUANTITYThe name of the quantity to be plotted. Depending upon the finite element analysis, you canchoose from the following list:

STRESSSTRAINCREEP_STRAINPLASTIC_STRAINHEAT_FLUXSEEPAGE_FLUXVELOCITYV_STRETCHCRACK_STRESSCRACKSOPENCRACKSCLOSEDCRACKSCRUSHEDCURRENT_DENSITYINPLANE_STRESSINPLANE_STRAIN


ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements of the model the element vector plotcommand will plot. See the zone commands in Section 6.2.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used when drawingthe element vector plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3.

Chap. 5 Display control EVECTORSTYLE


SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how to smooth the specified quantity. Asmoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).

EVECTORGRID [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector grid, used to specify the number and location of grid pointswithin each element or element face. Currently there is no corresponding depictioncommand, but there are four predefined depictions: DEFAULT, FACTORY,INTEGRATION_POINTS, CENTROID.

EVECTORTABLE [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector table used to associate colors with values of the quantity.

EVECTORVECTORTYPE [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector vector type, used to specify the way in which element vectorsare drawn (for example, the vector head and tail).

EVECTORCOORDINATESYSTEM [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector coordinate system depiction, used to specify the coordinatesystem in which element vectors are displayed and the components of the element vector thatare displayed.

EVECTORRENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector rendering depiction, used to specify the lengths and scaling ofthe element vectors. An element vector rendering depiction is defined by theEVECTORRENDERING command (in this section).

EVECTORANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the element vector annotation depiction that specifies what additional textappears with the element vector plot.


MULTIPLIER [1.0]The quantity can be multiplied by MULTIPLIER before plotting.

EVECTORRENDERING Sec. 5.5 Vector plotting


EVECTORRENDERING NAME LENGTHOPTION MAXLENGTH UNITMAXLENGTH MINLENGTH UNITMINLENGTHSCALEOPTION SCALEFACTOR EPSMIN COORDCALC

Defines drawing attributes used when drawing element vectors with the EVECTORPLOTcommand.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the EVECTORRENDERING depiction. If there is a previously definedEVECTORRENDERING depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifiesthe depiction, otherwise data entered in this command defines a new depiction.

LENGTHOPTION [SCALED]If LENGTHOPTION = SCALED, the vector lengths are scaled according to their magnitude,using parameters SCALEOPTION and SCALEFACTOR. If LENGTHOPTION = FIXED, allvectors are plotted with the same length.

MAXLENGTH [1.0]UNITMAXLENGTH [CM]The length of the longest plotted element vector and its unit. {CM / INCHES /PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

MINLENGTH [0.01]UNITMINLENGTH [CM]Element vectors shorter than MINLENGTH are not plotted.

SCALEOPTION [AUTOMATIC]SCALEFACTOR [1.0]These parameters are used only when LENGTHOPTION = SCALED. WhenSCALEOPTION = AUTOMATIC, the program scales the element vectors so that the longestelement vector has length MAXLENGTH. In this case, SCALEFACTOR is not used. WhenSCALEOPTION = CUSTOM, you enter the scaling factor SCALEFACTOR used to determinethe vector length from the vector magnitude. See the notes at the end of this commanddescription.

EPSMIN [0.0]When plotting cracks, open cracks with normal mechanical strain less than EPSMIN are notplotted. The strain is measured in the direction of the open crack. If closed cracks andcrushed points are requested to be plotted, they are plotted regardless of the value ofEPSMIN.

Chap. 5 Display control EVECTORRENDERING


COORDCALC [GRAPHICAL]Controls how the coordinates of the element vector locations are calculated:

GRAPHICAL Coordinates are calculated so as to lie on the graphicalrepresentation of the meshplot. This can cause the vectors to benonsymmetric even if the meshplot is symmetric..

THEORETICAL Coordinates are calculated so as to lie on the theoreticalrepresentation of the meshplot. This can cause the vectors to lie“underneath” the graphical representation of the meshplot; in thiscase, the vectors are hidden by the meshplot.

Notes:

The plotted element vector length (in cm) = |SCALEFACTOR × (result value)|

For example, suppose that, at a point in the element, the principal stress magnitude = 1234,the MULTIPLIER used in EVECTORPLOT is 3.4, SCALEOPTION = CUSTOM and theSCALEFACTOR is 1E-4. Then the plotted element vector length at that element point is 1E-4 × 3.4 × 1234 = 0.42 cm.

Element line plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.6 Element line plotting


Element line plotting - Introduction

You draw element lines onto an existing mesh plot using the ELINEPLOT command. Theresulting plot is called an element line plot. You can also modify an existing element line plotusing this command.

Element lines depict the intensity and direction of a quantity within line elements. Currentlythe only elements supported are ADINA beam elements.

For example, you can draw shear force and bending moment diagrams using an element lineplot.

The quantities that you can plot using element lines are

AXIAL_FORCESHEAR_FORCE-S SHEAR_FORCE-TTORSIONAL_MOMENTBENDING_MOMENT-SBENDING_MOMENT-TAXIAL_STRAINTWISTCURVATURE-SCURVATURE-TPLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAINPLASTIC_TWISTPLASTIC_CURVATURE-SPLASTIC_CURVATURE-TACCUM_PLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAINACCUM_PLASTIC_TWISTACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-SACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-TYIELD_AXIAL_FORCEYIELD_TORSIONAL_MOMENTYIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-SYIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-T

In elements in which only local node results are saved, only the first six of these quantitiescan be plotted. In moment-curvature elements in which section results are saved, thequantities depend upon the material model.

Chap. 5 Display control Element line plotting – Introduction


An element line plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have beendefined before you create the element line plot. See Section 5.2 for information regardingmesh plots.

Every element line plot has a name, which you specify when you create the element line plot.You refer to the element line plot by name when modifying or deleting it.

The appearance of the element line plot is governed by the element line plot depictions. Theelement line plot depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of theelement line plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the ELINEPLOTcommand to refer to the depiction.

The depictions used by the ELINEPLOT command are:

RESPONSE: Specifies the solution time, mode shape, etc., for the line plot. See theresponse commands in Section 6.3.

ZONE: Specifies the elements onto which element lines are plotted. See the zonecommands in Section 6.2.

RESULTCONTROL: Specifies how the quantity is calculated. See theRESULTCONTROL command in Section 6.6.

ELINERENDERING: Specifies how the element lines are drawn. See theELINERENDERING command in this section.

ELINEANNOTATION: Specifies which optional information is drawn along with theelement line plot. See the ELINEANNOTATION command in this section.

You can group depiction names into a style using the ELINESTYLE command. Then you canspecify the element line style name in the ELINEPLOT command. It is not necessary to useELINESTYLE in order to use ELINEPLOT. The element line style simply provides a way togroup element line plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictionsto another set by specifying a element line style name.

When you create an element line plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given thesame name as the element line plot.

You can modify an existing element line plot by using the REGENERATE command or bysubstituting depiction names using the ELINEPLOT command. The techniques areanalogous to those used in the BANDPLOT command, see the introduction to Section 5.4 forexamples.

Element line plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.6 Element line plotting


You can delete an element line plot using the DELETE ELINEPLOT command, by pickingthe mesh plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command, or by clearingthe graphics window using the FRAME command.

When you delete an element line plot, all of the depictions with the name of the element lineplot are deleted as well.

Auxiliary commands

The ELINEPLOT and ELINESTYLE commands have auxiliary commands analogous tothose of BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.


Chap. 5 Display control ELINEPLOT


ELINEPLOT NAME ELINESTYLE QUANTITY MULTIPLIER MESHNAMEZONENAME RESPONSE RESULTCONTROL ELINERENDERING ELINEANNOTATION

Creates an element line plot according to the attributes of the specified depictions.

NAME [ELINEPLOTnnnnn]The name of the element line plot. If no name is given, one is automatically generated in theform ELINEPLOTnnnnn, when nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999.

ELINESTYLE [DEFAULT]The name of the element line style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters ofthis command. An element line style is defined by the ELINESTYLE command (in thissection).

QUANTITYThe name of the quantity to be plotted. Depending upon the analysis, you can choose fromthe following list:

AXIAL_FORCESHEAR_FORCE-SSHEAR_FORCE-TTORSIONAL_MOMENTBENDING_MOMENT-SBENDING_MOMENT-TAXIAL_STRAINTWISTCURVATURE-SCURVATURE-TPLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAINPLASTIC_TWISTPLASTIC_CURVATURE-SPLASTIC_CURVATURE-TACCUM_PLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAINACCUM_PLASTIC_TWISTACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-SACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-TYIELD_AXIAL_FORCEYIELD_TORSIONAL_MOMENTYIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-SYIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-T


ELINEPLOT Sec. 5.6 Element line plotting



MESHNAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the mesh plot upon which the element line vectors are drawn. See Section 5.2for information about mesh plots. You can also enter the special name PREVIOUS to plotonto the last created mesh plot.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements the lines will be drawn. See thezone commands in Section 6.2.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used when drawingthe element line plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. This depiction controls how the results arecalculated. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (seeSection 6.6).

ELINERENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the element line rendering depiction. You specify the lengths, scaling and otherdrawing attributes of the element lines using this depiction. An element line renderingdepiction is specified by the ELINERENDERING command in this section.

ELINEANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the element line annotation depiction. You specify the attributes of the legendplotted along with the element lines using this depiction. An element line annotationdepiction is specified by the ELINEANNOTATION command in this section.

Chap. 5 Display control ELINESTYLE


ELINESTYLE NAME QUANTITY MULTIPLIER MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE RESULTCONTROL ELINERENDERING ELINEANNOTATION

ELINESTYLE groups depictions used when drawing element lines using the ELINEPLOTcommand.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the element line style. If there is a previously defined element line style withthis name, data entered in this command overwrites information for that element line style. Ifthere is no previously defined element line style with this name, a new element line style iscreated.

QUANTITYThe name of the quantity to be plotted. Depending upon the analysis, you can choose fromthe following list:

AXIAL_FORCESHEAR_FORCE-SSHEAR_FORCE-TTORSIONAL_MOMENTBENDING_MOMENT-SBENDING_MOMENT-TAXIAL_STRAINTWISTCURVATURE-SCURVATURE-TPLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAINPLASTIC_TWISTPLASTIC_CURVATURE-SPLASTIC_CURVATURE-TACCUM_PLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAINACCUM_PLASTIC_TWISTACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-SACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-TYIELD_AXIAL_FORCEYIELD_TORSIONAL_MOMENTYIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-SYIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-T



ELINESTYLE Sec. 5.6 Element line plotting


ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements the lines will be drawn. See thezone commands in Section 6.2.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used to draw theelement lines. See the response commands in Section 6.3.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. This depiction controls how the results arecalculated. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (seeSection 6.6).

ELINERENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the element line rendering depiction. You specify the lengths, scaling and otherdrawing attributes of the element lines using this depiction. An element line renderingdepiction is specified by the ELINERENDERING command in this section.

ELINEANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the element line annotation depiction. You specify the attributes of the legendplotted along with the element lines using this depiction. An element line annotation depictionis specified by the ELINEANNOTATION command in this section.

Chap. 5 Display control ELINERENDERING


ELINERENDERING NAME MAXLENGTH UNITMAXLENGTH MINLENGTH UNITMINLENGTH SCALEOPTION SCALEFACTOR COLOR AXIALDIRECTION AXIALCONVENTION SHEARCONVENTION MOMENTCONVENTION

Defines drawing attributes used when drawing element lines with the ELINEPLOTcommand.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the ELINERENDERING depiction. If there is a previously definedELINERENDERING depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies thedepiction, otherwise data entered in this command defines a new depiction.

MAXLENGTH [1.0]UNITMAXLENGTH [CM]The length of the longest plotted element line and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT/ PIXELS / POINTS}

MINLENGTH [0.01]UNITMINLENGTH [CM]Element lines shorter than MINLENGTH are not plotted.

SCALEOPTION [AUTOMATIC]SCALEFACTOR [1.0]When SCALEOPTION = AUTOMATIC, the program scales the element lines so that thelongest element line has length MAXLENGTH. In this case, SCALEFACTOR is not used. When SCALEOPTION = CUSTOM, you enter the scaling factor SCALEFACTOR used todetermine the line length from the result value. See the notes at the end of this commanddescription.

COLOR [RED]The color of the plotted element lines.

AXIALDIRECTION [S]Element line quantities that represent axial results are plotted in the element plane specifiedby this parameter. { S / T }. Note: when plotting results in truss elements, parameterAXIALDIRECTION is not used, instead parameter TRUSSPLANE is used.

AXIALCONVENTION [TENSION]If AXIALCONVENTION = TENSION, positive axial quantities represent tensile quantities;if AXIALCONVENTION = COMPRESSION, positive axial quantities represent compressivequantities.

ELINERENDERING Sec. 5.6 Element line plotting


SHEARCONVENTION [DOWNWARDS]If SHEARCONVENTION = DOWNWARDS, positive shear quantities act downwards on thepositive face of the element; if SHEARCONVENTION = UPWARDS, positive shearquantities act upwards on the positive face of the element.

MOMENTCONVENTION [COUNTERCLOCKWISE]If MOMENTCONVENTION = CLOCKWISE, positive moment quantities act in a clockwisedirection on the positive face of the element; if MOMENTCONVENTION =COUNTERCLOCKWISE, positive moment quantities act in a counterclockwise direction onthe positive face of the element.

TRUSSPLANE [XP]This parameter determines the plane in which positive axial quantities are plotted in trusselements. If TRUSSPLANE=XP, the AUI plots positive axial quantities in a plane parallel tothe y-z plane, if TRUSSPLANE=YP, the AUI plots positive axial quantities in a planeparallel to the x-z plane, if TRUSSPLANE=ZP, the AUI plots positive axial quantities in aplane parallel to the x-y plane. You can reverse the direction of positive axial quantities byusing XN instead of XP, YN instead of YP, ZN instead of ZP.

If the truss axis is parallel to the axis specified by TRUSSPLANE, the AUI chooses anothervalue for TRUSSPLANE.

COLORNEGATIVE [GREEN]This parameter specifies the color of element lines used to draw negative axial quantities.

Notes:

The plotted element line length (in cm) = |SCALEFACTOR × (result value)|

For example, suppose that, at a point in the element, the bending moment = 1234, theMULTIPLIER used in ELINEPLOT is 3.4, SCALEOPTION = CUSTOM and theSCALEFACTOR is 1E-4. Then the plotted element line length at that element point is1E-4 × 3.4 × 1234 = 0.42 cm.

Chap. 5 Display control ELINEANNOTATION


ELINEANNOTATION NAME LEGEND COLOR CHARSIZE UNITCHARSIZEPLACEMENT XSTART UNITXSTART YSTARTUNITYSTART SCALE

Defines the attributes of the optional legend plotted by ELINEPLOT.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the ELINEANNOTATION depiction. If there is a previously definedELINEANNOTATION depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies thedepiction, otherwise data entered in this command defines a new depiction.

LEGEND [YES]Determines whether the legend will be plotted. { YES / NO }.

COLOR [INVERSE]The color of the legend. Note that the element lines drawn in the legend are always the colorof the plotted element lines.

CHARSIZE [0.25]UNITCHARSIZE [CM]The size of the characters in the legend, before scaling, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

PLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]XSTART [0.0]UNITXSTART [CM]YSTART [0.0]UNITYSTART [CM]If PLACEMENT is AUTOMATIC, then the placement of the legend is done automatically bythe program. If PLACEMENT is CUSTOM, then the legend placement is specified byXSTART, UNITXSTART, YSTART, UNITYSTART. XSTART and YSTART specify thesubframe coordinates of the legend. Their units are given by UNITXSTART andUNITYSTART respectively. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

SCALE [1.0]A scale factor applied to the entire legend.

Reaction plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.7 Reaction plotting


Reaction plotting – Introduction

You draw reactions and contact forces onto an existing mesh plot using theREACTIONPLOT command. The resulting plot is called a reaction plot. You can alsomodify an existing reaction using this command.

The reactions you can draw areREACTION translational reactions (forces)

MOMENT_REACTION rotational reactions (moments)

CONSISTENT_CONTACT_FORCEthe contact forces presented as nodal point forces, acting uponnodes of contactor and target contact surfaces

DISTRIBUTED_CONTACT_FORCE the contact forces presented as tractions, acting upon contactorcontact surfaces

SOLITARY_CONTACT_FORCEScontact forces that act on nodal points of contactor contactsurfaces but do not act on the contact segments

RESTRAINING_FORCErestraining forces on drawbeads, presented as nodal point forces

UPLIFTING_FORCEuplifting forces on drawbeads, presented as nodal point forces

RESTRAINING_TRACTIONrestraining forces on drawbeads, presented as distributedtractions

UPLIFTING_TRACTIONuplifting forces on drawbeads, presented as distributed tractions

When you request plotting of distributed contact tractions, any solitary contact forces are nolonger automatically plotted (they were automatically plotted in previous versions of theAUI).

See the Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 4.1.2, for more information about consistent,distributed and solitary contact forces.

Chap. 5 Display control Reaction plotting – Introduction


If you have loaded the results from more than one finite element program into the database, the reaction plot can display the reactions from all of the loaded finite element programresults.

A reaction plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been definedbefore you create the reaction plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.

Every reaction plot has a name, which you specify when you create the reaction plot. Yourefer to the reaction plot by name when modifying or deleting it.

The appearance of the reaction plot is governed by the reaction plot depictions. The reactionplot depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the reaction plotappearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the REACTIONPLOT command torefer to the depiction.

The depictions used by the REACTIONPLOT command are:

RESPONSE: specifies the solution time, mode-shape, etc. for the reaction plot. See theresponse commands in Section 6.3.

ZONE: specifies the nodes and elements onto which reactions are plotted. See the zonecommands in Section 6.2.

RESULTCONTROL: specifies how the reactions are calculated. See theRESULTCONTROL command in Section 6.6.

You can group depiction names into a style using the REACTIONSTYLE command. Thenyou can specify the reaction style name in the REACTIONPLOT command. It is notnecessary to use REACTIONSTYLE in order to use REACTIONPLOT. The reaction stylesimply provides a way to group reaction plot depictions together so that you can switch fromone set of depictions to another set by specifying a reaction style name.

When you create a reaction plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given thesame name as the reaction plot.

You can modify an existing reaction plot either by using the REGENERATE command or bysubstituting depiction names using the REACTIONPLOT command. The techniques areanalogous to those used in the BANDPLOT command, see the introduction to Section 5.4 forexamples.

You can delete a reaction plot using the DELETE REACTIONPLOT command by pickingthe mesh plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearingthe graphics window using the FRAME command.

Reaction plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.7 Reaction plotting


When you delete a reaction plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the reactionplot are automatically deleted as well.

Auxiliary commands

The REACTIONPLOT and REACTIONSTYLE commands have auxiliary commandsanalogous to those of BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.


Chap. 5 Display control REACTIONPLOT


REACTIONPLOT NAME REACTSTYLE QUANTITY MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE REACTTABLE REACTVECTORTYPE REACTCOORDINATESYSTEM REACTRENDERING REACTANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL MULTIPLIER

REACTIONPLOT allows you to draw reactions and contact forces as vectors onto a meshplot.

NAME [REACTIONPLOTnnnnn]The name of the reaction plot. If you do not enter a name, the program will automaticallygenerate a name of the form REACTIONPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between00001 and 99999.

REACTSTYLE [DEFAULT]The name of the reaction style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of thiscommand. A reaction style is defined by the REACTIONSTYLE command (in this section).

QUANTITYYou can draw reaction vectors of several types of result. Depending on the finite elementanalysis, you can choose from the following list:

REACTIONMOMENT_REACTIONCONSISTENT_CONTACT_FORCEDISTRIBUTED_CONTACT_FORCESOLITARY_CONTACT_FORCERESTRAINING_FORCEUPLIFTING_FORCERESTRAINING_TRACTIONUPLIFTING_TRACTION


Note that if you choose DISTRIBUTED_CONTACT_FORCE, the program will not plot anysolitary contact forces.

MESHNAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the mesh plot upon which the reaction vectors are drawn. A mesh plot isdefined by the MESHPLOT command (see Section 5.2). You can also enter the special namePREVIOUS to plot onto the last created mesh plot.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies onto which nodes and contact surfaces vectors will beplotted. See the zone commands in Section 6.2.

REACTIONPLOT Sec. 5.7 Reaction plotting


RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used to draw thereactions. See the response commands in Section 6.3.

REACTTABLEThe name of the reaction table depiction. You specify the colors of the reactions with thisdepiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.

REACTVECTORTYPEThe name of the reaction vector type depiction. You specify the way in which reactions aredrawn (for example, the vector head and tail) with this depiction. Currently there is nocorresponding depiction command.

REACTCOORDINATESYSTEMThe name of the reaction coordinate system depiction. You specify the coordinate system inwhich the reactions are displayed, and also the components of the reactions that are plottedwith this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.

REACTRENDERINGThe name of the reaction rendering depiction. You specify the lengths and scaling of thereactions with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.

REACTANNOTATIONThe name of the reaction annotation depiction. You specify attributes of the legends used toplot the reaction information with this depiction. Currently there is no correspondingdepiction command.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. The REACTIONPLOT command uses theMODEFACTOR parameter in the result control depiction to determine the scaling of modalreactions. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (seeSection 6.6).


Chap. 5 Display control REACTIONSTYLE


REACTIONSTYLE NAME QUANTITY MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE RESULTCONTROL REACTTABLE REACTVECTORTYPE REACTCOORDINATESYSTEM REACTRENDERING REACTANNOTATION MULTIPLIER

REACTIONSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing reactions using theREACTIONPLOT command.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the reaction style. If there is a previously defined reaction style with this name,data entered in this command modifies that reaction style. If there is no previously definedreaction style with this name, a new reaction style is created by this command.

QUANTITYThe vector quantity to be plotted. Depending upon the finite element program, you canchoose from the following list:

REACTIONMOMENT_REACTIONCONSISTENT_CONTACT_FORCEDISTRIBUTED_CONTACT_FORCESOLITARY_CONTACT_FORCERESTRAINING_FORCEUPLIFTING_FORCERESTRAINING_TRACTIONUPLIFTING_TRACTION


ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies the elements and contact surfaces of the model ontowhich the reaction plot command will plot. See the zone commands in Section 6.2.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used when drawingthe reaction plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction that controls how the results are calculated. A resultcontrol depiction is defined using the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

REACTTABLEThe name of the reaction table used to associate colors with values of the quantity. Currentlythere is no corresponding depiction command.

REACTIONSTYLE Sec. 5.7 Reaction plotting


REACTVECTORTYPEThe name of the reaction vector type, used to specify the way in which reaction vectors aredrawn. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.

REACTRENDERINGThe name of the reaction rendering depiction, used to specify the lengths and scaling of thereaction vectors. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.

REACTANNOTATIONThe name of the reaction annotation depiction, used to specify the additional text that appearswith the reaction plot. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.


Chap. 5 Display control REACTIONSTYLE



Trace plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


Trace plotting – Introduction

You draw particle traces onto an existing mesh plot using the TRACEPLOT command. Theresulting plot is called a trace plot. You can also modify an existing trace plot using thiscommand.

A trace plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been defined beforeyou create the trace plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.

Every trace plot has a name, which you specify when you create the trace plot. You refer tothe trace plot by name when modifying or deleting it.

Fundamental concepts

Particle traces are used in fluid flow analysis to visualize the motions of massless particlesthat are placed into the flow field. There are many options available, which are summarizedin the following.

Quasi-steady flow

Quasi-steady flow particle tracing is always used when the flow field is steady. Quasi-steadyflow particle tracing can also be used when the flow is unsteady (transient). In both cases,the flow field is taken from the flow solution at a single solution time (actually, from theresponse of the mesh plot to which the particle traces are attached).

Since the particle motion is dynamic, the particle location is determined by the time. However, since the solution time is fixed in quasi-steady flow, we use the term "particle time"instead of the term "time" when discussing the determination of particle traces.

As a specific example, consider quasi-steady flow particle tracing based on a mesh plot inwhich the response is set to time 18.0. Time 18.0 may or may not actually correspond to asolution time in ADINA-F for which velocities were calculated. If time 18.0 corresponds to asolution time in ADINA-F for which velocities were calculated, then the flow field used inparticle tracing is the flow field at time 18.0. If time 18.0 is not a solution time in ADINA-Ffor which velocities were calculated, then the flow field used in particle tracing is interpolatedfrom the two closest solution times for which velocities were calculated (for example,solution times 17.0 and 19.0).

Now consider one particle injector. At particle time , the particle is emitted from the

injector and is at the location of the particle injector . The particle has velocity , where is the velocity of the flow field at the injector (calculated at time 18.0). During the first stepof numerical integration, the particle moves roughly an amount where is the

Chap. 5 Display control Trace plotting – Introduction


particle time step size, so that we know the particle location at particle time . To begin

the next step of numerical integration, the flow field velocity at location is

determined (again, at time 18.0). This numerical integration can be repeated, so that theparticle location at all positive particle times can be determined.

(Note, although in the example, we use the Euler forward method of time integration forclarity of explanation, we actually use a Runge-Kutta method in the TRACEPLOTcommand.)

This integration is “downstream”, since the particle moves with the flow. The integration canalso be performed “upstream”, in which the particle moves against the flow. In the first stepof upstream numerical integration, the particle moves roughly , so that we have the

particle location at particle time . Again, the numerical integration can be repeated, so

that the particle location at all negative particle times can be determined.

So, to summarize, for positive particle times, the particle moves downstream; for negativeparticle times, the particle moves upstream.

The TRACEPLOT command displays the completed particle traces corresponding to theparticle time given by TRACECALCULATION PTIME. By default PTIME=0.0; thereforeby default TRACEPLOT shows no particle traces. To actually calculate particle traces, youmust change the particle time, which you can do in several ways:

1) Change the value of TRACECALCULATION PTIME, or2) Use the TRACESTEP command to perform one step of particle tracing, or3) Use the MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT command to create a movie showing particle

traces.

In quasi-steady flow particle tracing, it is useful to define a particle time step size (notnecessarily the particle time step size used in numerical integration). You can define this timestep size using TRACECALCULATION PSTEP, or, if PSTEP=0.0, TRACEPLOT calculatesthe particle time step size such that the particle moves roughly one element in the first particletime step.

The particle time step size PSTEP is not used by the TRACEPLOT command itself, but isused in the TRACESTEP command.

Unsteady flow

Unsteady flow particle tracing can be used when the flow analysis is transient (unsteady). Inunsteady flow particle tracing, the flow field is taken from the actual solution time, and theparticle time concept used in quasi-steady flow particle tracing is not used.



When you define a trace plot for the first time, the trace plot records the solution time of theunderlying mesh plot. This solution time is used as the reference time . It is assumed that

all particles are at their injectors at time . So, in unsteady flow particle tracing, the

TRACEPLOT command by itself does no particle tracing. Particle tracing is done when thesolution time of the underlying mesh plot is altered. Then the displayed trace corresponds tothe solution time of the altered mesh plot.

As a specific example, consider unsteady flow particle tracing in which the solution time ofthe mesh plot is equal to 18.0 when TRACEPLOT is run. Now consider one particle injector. At analysis time , the particle is emitted from the injector and is at the

location of the particle injector . No particle trace is computed.

Now suppose that the solution time of the underlying mesh plot is changed to 19.0. ThenTRACEPLOT computes particle traces as follows.

At time 18.0, the particle has velocity , where is the velocity of the flow field at theinjector (calculated at time 18.0). During the first step of numerical integration, the particlemoves roughly an amount where is the time step size used in unsteady particle

tracing, so that we know the particle location at time . (Note that is not the

same as the time step size used by ADINA-F in the actual flow solution.) To begin the nextstep of numerical integration, the flow field velocity at location is determined

(now, at time ). This numerical integration is then repeated until the solution

time is greater than 19.0. The displayed particle traces correspond to solution time 19.0.

(We do not consider upstream particle tracing in unsteady flow particle tracing. It is assumedthat all particles are not present for solution times less than .)

There are several ways to change the solution time of the underlying mesh plot:

1) Change the response of the mesh plot, then regenerate:

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP MESHPLOT00001 TIME=...REGENERATE

or

2) Create a movie of type load-step:

MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP TEND=...



The TRACESTEP and MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT commands do not apply to unsteadyflow particle tracing.

Notice that it is not possible to change for a trace plot after the trace plot is created.

Therefore you must set the solution time for the mesh plot to the desired before creating

the trace plot. For example

FRAMERESPONSE LOAD-STEP TIME=0.0MESHPLOTTRACEPLOT ( = 0.0)RESPONSE LOAD-STEP MESHPLOT00001 TIME=LATESTREGENERATE (the traceplot now displays the particle traces for the entire range of

solution times)

Injectors and rakes

Particles are injected into the flow field by injectors, which are fixed in space. A collectionof injectors is called a rake. There are four ways to define rakes, each with its ownTRACERAKE command:

TRACERAKE COORDINATES Defines a rake in which each injector is at the specifiedcoordinate.

TRACERAKE NODES Defines a rake in which each injector is at the specifiednode.

TRACERAKE GNODES Defines a rake in which each injector is at a node attachedto the given geometry.

TRACERAKE GRIDS Defines a rake as a collection of grids; each grid containsan array of injectors.

An injector can either inject a single particle, or many particles, as discussed in detail below.

Each injector is assigned a different color, with the first injector given the colorTRACETYPE ... COLORFIRST and the last injector given the color TRACETYPE ...COLORLAST. The color of all particles emitted by an injector is the color of the injector.

By default, the rake has no injectors. Therefore you must explicitly define a rake beforeusing TRACEPLOT. For example



FRAMEMESHPLOTTRACERAKE COORDINATES1.0 2.0 3.0DATAENDTRACEPLOT

Particle / ribbon tracing

If the trace plot is created using TRACETYPE PARTICLE, then the trace plot will consist oftraced particles of the given colors and size. (This is the default.)

If the trace plot is created using TRACETYPE RIBBON, then the trace plot will consist oftraced ribbons of the given colors and size. The initial orientation of the ribbon is either user-specified, or the program computes it. The ribbon orientation is updated during the numericalintegration in such a way that the ribbon rotates with the flow field.

Single particle calculation option

If TRACECALCULATION OPTION=SINGLE, then each injector emits one particle orribbon at particle time 0.0 or time . The trace consists of a plot of the particle or ribbon at

particle time PTIME or the solution time of the underlying meshplot.

Multiple particle calculation option

If TRACECALCULATION OPTION=MULTIPLE, then each injector emits one particle orribbon at particle times ..., -2×EMITINTERVAL, -EMITINTERVAL, 0.0,EMITINTERVAL, 2×EMITINTERVAL, ...; or at solution times , +EMITINTERVAL,

+2×EMITINTERVAL, ... . (EMITINTERVAL is a parameter of the

TRACECALCULATION command.) The trace consists of a plot of all of the particles orribbons at particle time PTIME or the solution time of the underlying meshplot. The particlesor ribbons successively injected from an injector are not connected to each other. This is thedefault for unsteady flow.

Pathline calculation option

If TRACECALCULATION OPTION=PATHLINE, then each injector emits one particle orribbon at particle time 0.0 or time . The trace consists of a plot of all of the connected

positions of the particle or ribbon from particle times PTIMESTART to PTIME, or fromsolution times to the solution time of the underlying meshplot.



Pathline calculations are most useful in quasi-steady flow (and is the default in quasi-steadyflow).

Streakline calculation option

If TRACECALCULATION OPTION=STREAKLINE, then each injector emits one particleor ribbon at particle times ..., -2×EMITINTERVAL, -EMITINTERVAL, 0.0,EMITINTERVAL, 2×EMITINTERVAL, ...; or at solution times , +EMITINTERVAL,

+2×EMITINTERVAL, ... . The trace consists of a plot of all of the connected positions

of all of the particles or ribbons at particle time PTIME or the solution time of the underlyingmeshplot.

Streakline calculations are most useful in unsteady flow. Note that, in theory, in quasi-steadyflow, pathlines and streaklines are identical.

Depending upon the flow conditions in unsteady flow, two particles successively emittedfrom the same injector may separate during the numerical integration (for example, oneparticle might remain in a recirculating region and the other particle might remain in theprimary flow). Then connecting the two particles will lead to a confusing plot. In this case,you can use the TRACERENDERING STREAKDISTANCE parameter to specify themaximum distance between successive particles that are connected.

3-D particle traces

In order to visualize 3-D particle traces, you should create a transparent mesh plot. Forexample, you can use dashed hidden lines (MESHRENDERING HIDDEN=DASHED), oryou can remove the front-facing triangles (MESHRENDERING FRONTTRI=NO).

Residence time distribution graphs

Once you have created a trace plot, you can obtain residence time distribution graphs usingthe TRACESHOW command (described in Section 5.10).

Depictions

The appearance of the trace plot is governed by the trace plot depictions. The trace plotdepictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the trace plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the TRACEPLOT command to refer to thedepiction.

The depictions used by the TRACEPLOT command are:



ZONE: specifies the elements in which particle traces are computed. See the zonecommands in Section 6.2.

TRACETYPE: specifies the type of particle trace (particle or ribbon) and their colorsand sizes. There are two TRACETYPE commands, TRACETYPE PARTICLE andTRACETYPE RIBBON; see the TRACETYPE commands in this section.

TRACERAKE: specifies the locations of the particle injectors. There are fourTRACERAKE commands, TRACERAKE COORDINATES, TRACERAKE NODES,TRACERAKE GNODES and TRACERAKE GRIDS; see the TRACERAKE commandsin this section.

TRACECALCULATION: specifies the type of particle tracing (quasi-steady orunsteady), the particle emission option (single, multiple, pathline or streakline), and otherparameters used in the trace calculations. See the TRACECALCULATION command inthis section.

TRACERENDERING: specifies how the traces are drawn. See theTRACERENDERING command in this section.

TRACEANNOTATION: specifies optional text drawn along with the trace plot. See theTRACEANNOTATION command in this section.

You can group depiction names into a style using the TRACESTYLE command. Then youcan specify the trace style name in the TRACEPLOT command. It is not necessary to useTRACESTYLE in order to use TRACEPLOT. The trace style simply provides a way togroup trace plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions toanother set by specifying a trace style name.

When you create a trace plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the samename as the trace plot.

Modification and deletion of trace plots

You can modify an existing trace plot either by using the REGENERATE command or bysubstituting depiction names using the TRACEPLOT command. The techniques areanalogous to those used in the BANDPLOT command, see the introduction to Section 5.4 forexamples. You can also modify an existing trace plot using the TRACESTEP command(quasi-steady flows only).

You can delete a trace plot using the DELETE TRACEPLOT command by picking the meshplot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing thegraphics window using the FRAME command.



When you delete a trace plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the trace plotare automatically deleted as well.

Auxiliary commands

The TRACEPLOT and TRACESTYLE commands have auxiliary commands analogous tothose of BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.


TRACEPLOT Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


TRACEPLOT NAME TRACESTYLE MESHNAME ZONENAME TRACETYPE TRACERAKE TRACECALCULATION VARIABLE RESULTCONTROL SMOOTHING TRACETABLE TRACERENDERING TRACEANNOTATION

TRACEPLOT allows you to draw particle traces onto a mesh plot. See the introduction tothis section for a summary of features.

NAME [TRACEPLOTnnnnn]The name of the trace plot. If you do not enter a name, the program will automaticallygenerate a name of the form TRACEPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between 00001and 99999.

TRACESTYLE [DEFAULT]The name of the trace style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of thiscommand. A trace style is defined by the TRACESTYLE command (in this section).

MESHNAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the mesh plot upon which the particle traces are drawn. A mesh plot is definedby the MESHPLOT command (see Section 5.2). You can also enter the special namePREVIOUS to plot onto the last created mesh plot.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements particle traces are drawn. See thezone commands in Section 6.2.

TRACETYPE [DEFAULT]The name of the tracetype depiction that specifies whether particles or ribbons are traced, andthe color and sizes of the particles or ribbons. A tracetype depiction is defined by aTRACETYPE command (in this section).

TRACERAKE [DEFAULT]The name of the tracerake depiction that specifies the locations of the particle injectors. Atracerake depiction is defined by a TRACERAKE command (in this section).

TRACECALCULATION [DEFAULT]The name of the tracecalculation depiction that specifies the particle tracing flow assumption,the particle tracing option, and other parameters used in particle tracing. A tracecalculationdepiction is defined by the TRACECALCULATION command (in this section).

VARIABLE [‘ ’]Unused in this version of the AUI.

Chap. 5 Display control TRACEPLOT


RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]Unused in this version of the AUI. A result control depiction is specified by theRESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]Unused in this version of the AUI. A smoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHINGcommand (see Section 6.6).

TRACETABLE [DEFAULT]Unused in this version of the AUI.

TRACERENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the trace rendering depiction that specifies how the trace plot is drawn. A rendering depiction is specified by the TRACERENDERING command (in this section).

TRACEANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the trace annotation depiction that specifies what additional text appears alongwith the trace plot. A trace annotation depiction is specified by the TRACEANNOTATIONcommand (in this section).

TRACESTYLE Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


TRACESTYLE NAME ZONENAME TRACETYPE TRACERAKE TRACECALCULATION VARIABLE RESULTCONTROL SMOOTHING TRACETABLE TRACERENDERING TRACEANNOTATION

TRACESTYLE groups depictions used when drawing particle traces using the TRACEPLOTcommand.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the trace style. If there is a previously defined trace style with this name, dataentered in this command modifies that trace style. If there is no previously defined trace stylewith this name, a new trace style is created by this command.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies the elements of the model onto which the TRACEPLOTcommand will plot. See the zone commands in Section 6.2.

TRACETYPE [DEFAULT]The name of the tracetype depiction that specifies whether particles or ribbons are traced, andthe color and sizes of the particles or ribbons. A tracetype depiction is defined by aTRACETYPE command (in this section).

TRACERAKE [DEFAULT]The name of the tracerake depiction that specifies the locations of the particle injectors. Atracerake depiction is defined by a TRACERAKE command (in this section).

TRACECALCULATION [DEFAULT]The name of the tracecalculation depiction that specifies the particle tracing flow assumption,the particle tracing option, and other parameters used in particle tracing. A tracecalculationdepiction is defined by the TRACECALCULATION command (in this section).

VARIABLE [‘ ’]Unused in this version of the AUI.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]Unused in this version of the AUI. A result control depiction is specified by theRESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]Unused in this version of the AUI. A smoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHINGcommand (see Section 6.6).

Chap. 5 Display control TRACESTYLE


TRACETABLE [DEFAULT]Unused in this version of the AUI.

TRACERENDERING [DEFAULT]The name of the trace rendering depiction that specifies how the trace plot is drawn. A rendering depiction is specified by the TRACERENDERING command (in this section).

TRACEANNOTATION [DEFAULT]The name of the trace annotation depiction that specifies what additional text appears alongwith the trace plot. A trace annotation depiction is specified by the TRACEANNOTATIONcommand (in this section).

TRACETYPE PARTICLE Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


TRACETYPE PARTICLE NAME COLORFIRST COLORLAST WIDTH UNITWIDTH SIZE UNITSIZE

TRACETYPE PARTICLE defines a tracetype depiction of type particle. This name can beused in the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace type.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the tracetype. If there is a previously defined trace type oftype particle with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined tracetype. Otherwise, a new trace type of type particle is created by this command.

COLORFIRST [RED]COLORLAST [BLUE]The color of the first and last injectors in the rake. Colors of other injectors are constructedby interpolation. COLORFIRST and COLORLAST can be the same.

WIDTH [1.0]UNITWIDTH [PIXELS]The width of the particle trace when plotting pathlines or streaklines (seeTRACECALCULATION OPTION), and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

SIZE [3.0]UNITSIZE [PIXELS]The size of the plotted particles when plotting single or multiple particles (seeTRACECALCULATION OPTION), and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

Chap. 5 Display control TRACETYPE RIBBON


TRACETYPE RIBBON NAME COLORFIRST COLORLAST AX AY AZ WIDTH UNITWIDTH

TRACETYPE RIBBON defines a tracetype depiction of type ribbon. This name can be usedin the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace type.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the tracetype. If there is a previously defined trace type oftype ribbon with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined tracetype. Otherwise, a new trace type of type ribbon is created by this command.

COLORFIRST [RED]COLORLAST [BLUE]The color of the first and last injectors in the rake. Colors of other injectors are constructedby interpolation. COLORFIRST and COLORLAST can be the same.

AX [0.0]AY [0.0]AZ [0.0]The initial orientation of the ribbon. The program will automatically normalize the initialorientation to unit length if necessary. The program will calculate the initial orientation if it isof zero length.

WIDTH [6.0]UNITWIDTH [PIXELS]The width of the ribbon and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

TRACERAKE COORDINATES Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


TRACERAKE COORDINATES NAME

xi yi zi

TRACERAKE COORDINATES defines a tracerake depiction of type coordinates. Thisname can be used in the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rake.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the tracerake. If there is a previously defined trace rake oftype coordinates with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously definedtrace rake. Otherwise, a new trace rake of type coordinates is created by this command.

xi [0.0]yi [0.0]zi [0.0]The coordinates of the injector. The coordinates need not coincide with a node in the model.

Chap. 5 Display control TRACERAKE NODES


TRACERAKE NODES NAME

nodei

TRACERAKE NODES defines a tracerake depiction of type nodes. This name can be usedin the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rake.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the tracerake. If there is a previously defined trace rake oftype nodes with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined tracerake. Otherwise, a new trace rake of type nodes is created by this command.

nodei

The node number at which the injector is located. (The node is taken from the ADINA-Fmodel if more than one finite element model is loaded into the database.)

TRACERAKE GNODES Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


TRACERAKE GNODES NAME

selectioni

TRACERAKE NODES defines a tracerake depiction of type gnodes (geometry nodes). Thisname can be used in the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rake.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the tracerake. If there is a previously defined trace rake oftype gnodes with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined tracerake. Otherwise, a new trace rake of type gnodes is created by this command.

selectioni

A selection string used to select geometry. When using the command-line interface, you mustenclose the selection in quotes so that the AUI does not interpret the selection as a command. When using the dialog box, you do not need to enclose the selection in quotes.

The AUI chooses those nodes that belong to at least one of the geometry selections, andplaces injectors at each of the nodes.



where each object consists of a name and a number. Possible object names are:

GEOMETRY POINT or POINTGEOMETRY LINE or LINEGEOMETRY SURFACE or SURFACEGEOMETRY VOLUME or VOLUMEGEOMETRY EDGE or EDGEGEOMETRY FACE or FACEGEOMETRY BODY or BODYNODES

The characters needed to uniquely specify the object name are indicated in bold.

See the GNCOMBINATION command (in Section 6.7) for a very similar selection process. TRACERAKE GNODES uses the same conventions (regarding upper and lower case, forexample) that GNCOMBINATION uses. Note that TRACERAKE GNODES allows you touse the NODES object name, but GNCOMBINATION does not.

Chap. 5 Display control TRACERAKE GRIDS


TRACERAKE GRIDS NAME

xi yi zi planei e1xi e1yi e1zi e2xi e2yi e2zi , shapei side1lengthi nside1i side2lengthi nside2i

TRACERAKE GRIDS defines a tracerake depiction of type grids. This name can be used inthe TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rake.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the tracerake. If there is a previously defined trace rake oftype grids with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined tracerake. Otherwise, a new trace rake of type grids is created by this command.

xi [0.0]yi [0.0]zi [0.0]The coordinates of the center of the grid.

planei [XPLANE]The plane in which the grid lies {XPLANE / YPLANE / ZPLANE / CUSTOM}

e1xi [0.0]e1yi [1.0]e1zi [0.0]e2xi [0.0]e2yi [0.0]e2zi [1.0]The director vectors of the grid plane, used if planei = CUSTOM. The director vectors arenormalized to unit length if necessary. The director vectors need not be orthogonal. If thedirector vectors are not orthogonal, then the grid is skewed.

shapei [RECTANGULAR]The shape of the grid. {RECTANGULAR / ELLIPTICAL}

side1lengthi [0.0]nside1i [1]For a rectangular grid, the length of side 1 of the grid, and the number of injectors along side1. For an elliptical grid, the radius of the grid in the side 1 direction, and the number ofinjectors in the radial direction.

TRACERAKE GRIDS Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


side2lengthi [0.0]nside2i [1]For a rectangular grid, the length of side 2 of the grid, and the number of injectors along side2. For an elliptical grid, the radius of the grid in the side 2 direction, and the number ofinjectors in the tangential direction.

Notes

1) The side 1 and side 2 directions are as in the following table:

Plane Side 1 X Side 1 Y Side 1 Z Side 2 X Side 2 Y Side 2 Z

XPLANE 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0

YPLANE 0.0 0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0

ZPLANE 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0

CUSTOM E1X E1Y E1Z E2X E2Y E2Z

2) In 2-D problems, grids can also be used. In 2D, side 1 lies in the y-z plane, soSIDE1LENGTH and NSIDE1 are used, but SIDE2LENGTH and NSIDE2 are not used. Here are some examples:

Grid parallel to the Y axis:

TRACERAKE GRIDSENTRIES X Y Z PLANE SIDE1LENGTH NSIDE10.0 1.0 2.0 ZPLANE 2.0 2

Grid parallel to the Z axis:

TRACERAKE GRIDSENTRIES X Y Z PLANE SIDE1LENGTH NSIDE10.0 1.0 2.0 YPLANE 2.0 2

Inclined grid:

TRACERAKE GRIDSENTRIES X Y Z PLANE E1X E1Y E1Z E2X E2Y E2Z, SIDE1LENGTH NSIDE10.0 1.0 2.0 CUSTOM 0.0 0.866 0.500 1.0 0.0 0.0, 2.0 2

Chap. 5 Display control TRACERAKE GRIDS


TRACECALCULATION Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


TRACECALCULATION NAME FLOWTYPE OPTION EMITINTERVAL PTIMESTART PTIME LIFETIME DINCREMENT PSTEP VMIN VEL2D3 VEL2D4 VEL2DQ VEL3D4 VEL3D8 VEL3DQ

TRACECALCULATION defines a tracecalculation depiction. This name can be used in theTRACEPLOT command to specify the trace calculation parameters.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the trace calculation depiction. If there is a previouslydefined trace calculation depiction with this name, data entered in this command alters thepreviously defined trace calculation depiction. Otherwise, a new trace calculation depictionis created by this command.

FLOWTYPE [QUASI-STEADY if flow analysis is STEADY-STATE][UNSTEADY if flow analysis is TRANSIENT]

Specifies whether the particle tracing is performed using quasi-steady or unsteady flowassumptions. {QUASI-STEADY / UNSTEADY}

Quasi-steady flow assumptions can always be used; unsteady flow assumptions can be used ifthe flow analysis is transient.

OPTION [PATHLINE if flow analysis is STEADY-STATE][MULTIPLE if flow analysis is TRANSIENT]

Specifies the particle tracing option, as follows:

SINGLE Traces a single particle or ribbon and plots the particle or ribbon atparticle time PTIME or at the solution time of the underlying mesh plot.

MULTIPLE Traces multiple particles or ribbons and plots the particles or ribbons atparticle time PTIME or at the solution time of the underlying mesh plot. The particles or ribbons are emitted at an time intervalEMITINTERVAL. The particles or ribbons successively emitted fromthe same injector are not connected.

PATHLINE Traces a single particle or ribbon and plots the path of the particle orribbon from particle time PTIMESTART to particle time PTIME, orfrom the reference time to the solution time of the underlying mesh plot.

STREAKLINE Same as MULTIPLE, but particles or ribbons successively emitted fromthe same injector are connected.

Chap. 5 Display control TRACECALCULATION


EMITINTERVAL [0.0]Specifies the time interval between successive emissions of a particle, used whenOPTION=MULTIPLE or STREAKLINE. If EMITINTERVAL=0.0, then the programautomatically calculates it as 2*PSTEP (quasi-steady flow) or as the solution time step size(unsteady flow).

PTIMESTART [0.0]The start particle time used for pathline calculations, only used when FLOWTYPE=QUASI-STEADY and OPTION=PATHLINE. PTIMESTART can be less than or greater than 0.0.

PTIME [0.0]The current particle time, used when FLOWTYPE=QUASI-STEADY. PTIME can be lessthan or greater than 0.0.

LIFETIME [0.0]Not used in this version of the AUI.

DINCREMENT [0.5]The distance that a particle moves in one time step of particle tracing numerical integration(which is different than one solution time step). The unit of DINCREMENT is elementlength, so 0.5 means that the particle moves roughly 1/2 element length in one time step ofparticle tracing numerical integration.

Decreasing DINCREMENT increases the accuracy of the particle tracing; increasingDINCREMENT decreases the accuracy of the particle tracing.

PSTEP [0.0]The current particle time step size used by TRACESTEP, used when FLOWTYPE=QUASI-STEADY. If PSTEP = 0.0, the program automatically calculates it as the minimum of theratio (element size at injector / velocity at injector) over all the injectors in the rake. Theintent of the above formula is that the particle should move roughly one element each time theTRACESTEP command is run.

VMIN [0.0]Particle tracing is stopped if the particle velocity is less than VMIN. The intent of thisparameter is to prevent the program from tracing particles in regions of the mesh where thevelocities are very small. This is because it is thought that very small velocities might containround-off and other errors that prevent accurate velocity tracing.

VEL2D3 [LINEAR]VEL2D4 [LINEAR]VEL2DQ [LINEAR]

TRACECALCULATION Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


VEL3D4 [LINEAR]VEL3D8 [LINEAR]VEL3DQ [LINEAR]Using these parameters, you can control the velocity interpolations used within different typesof ADINA-F elements: VEL2D3 controls 2-D 3-node elements, VEL2D4 controls 2-D 4-node elements, VEL2DQ controls 2-D quadratic elements (6-node triangles, 8 and 9-nodequadrilaterals), VEL3D4 controls 3-D 4-node elements, VEL3D8 controls 3-D 8-nodeelements, VEL3DQ controls 3-D quadratic elements (10-node tetrahedrals, 27-nodehexahedrals). {LINEAR / CONSTANT}. Note that the program uses linear velocityinterpolations (from the corner nodes) for quadratic elements.

Chap. 5 Display control TRACERENDERING


TRACERENDERING NAME INJECTORS EXTREMES STREAKDISTANCE

TRACERENDERING defines a tracerendering depiction. This name can be used in theTRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rendering parameters.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the trace rendering depiction. If there is a previously definedtrace rendering depiction with this name, data entered in this command alters the previouslydefined trace rendering depiction. Otherwise, a new trace rendering depiction is created bythis command.

INJECTORS [YES]Specifies whether or not to plot symbols at the injector locations. {YES / NO}

EXTREMESNot used in this version of the AUI.

STREAKDISTANCE [0.0]STREAKDISTANCE is used only in streakline plotting (TRACECALCULATIONOPTION=STREAKLINE). If STREAKDISTANCE=0.0, then all successive particles orribbons emitted at the same injector are connected. If STREAKDISTANCE>0.0, then twosuccessive particles or ribbons emitted at the same injector are connected only if they arecloser together than STREAKDISTANCE. STREAKDISTANCE is measured in thecoordinate system of the model.

TRACEANNOTATION Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


TRACEANNOTATION NAME TABLE TCOLOR TCHARSIZE UNITTCHARSIZE TLENGTH UNITTLENGTH TWIDTH UNITTWIDTH TPLACEMENT TXSTART UNITTXSTART TYSTART UNITTYSTART TSCALE EXTREMES EMINSYMBOL EMINCOLOR EMINSIZE UNITEMINSIZE EMAXSYMBOL EMAXCOLOR EMAXSIZE UNITEMAXSIZE ECHARSIZE UNITECHARSIZE EPLACEMENT EXSTART UNITEXSTART EYSTART UNITEYSTART ESCALE

TRACEANNOTATION defines which optional text to plot along with the TRACEPLOTcommand. It also defines the attributes of the optional text.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the trace annotation depiction. If there is a previously defined trace annotationdepiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that trace annotationdepiction. If there is no previously defined trace annotation depiction with this name, a newtrace annotation depiction is created by this command.

TABLE [YES]Determines whether or not the trace table is plotted. {YES / NO}

TCOLOR [INVERSE]The color of text in the trace table.

TCHARSIZE [.25]UNITTCHARSIZE [CM]The size of the characters in the trace table, before scaling, and its unit.

TLENGTH [0.0]UNITTLENGTH [CM]TWIDTH [0.0]UNITTWIDTH [CM]TPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]TXSTART [0.0]UNITTXSTART [CM]TYSTART [0.0]UNITTYSTART [CM]TSCALE [1.0]EXTREMES [YES]EMINSYMBOL [@C[1,11]]EMINCOLOR [INVERSE]

Chap. 5 Display control TRACEANNOTATION


EMINSIZE [0.25]UNITEMINSIZE [CM]EMAXSYMBOL [@C[1,2]]EMAXCOLOR [INVERSE]EMAXSIZE [0.25]UNITEMAXSIZE [CM]ECHARSIZE [0.25]UNITECHARSIZE [CM]EPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]EXSTART [0.0]UNITEXSTART [CM]EYSTART [0.0]UNITEYSTART [CM]ESCALE [1.0]Not used in this version of the AUI.

TRACESTEP Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting


TRACESTEP NAME DIRECTION PSTEP

The TRACESTEP command is used to integrate particle traces in quasi-steady flow particletracing.

Using TRACESTEP is easier than using TRACECALCULATION to modify a trace plot. Typically you do not have to change the defaults.

NAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the trace plot. The trace plot must be defined and must be of type quasi-steady.You can enter the special name PREVIOUS to select the last trace plot that is of type quasi-steady.

DIRECTION [DOWNSTREAM]The direction of time integration. {DOWNSTREAM / UPSTREAM}

PSTEP [PSTEP from TRACEPLOT]The change in the particle time PTIME.

Chap. 5 Display control TRACESTEP



J-integral line contour plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.9 J-integral line contour plotting


J-integral line contour plotting – Introduction

You draw J-integral line contours onto an existing mesh plot using the LCPLOT command. The resulting plot is called a line contour plot. You can also modify an existing line contourplot using this command.

Each line contour plot is automatically assigned a name by the AUI. The names are of theform LINE_CONTOUR-*, where * is the line contour number, for exampleLINE_CONTOUR-1.

A line contour plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been definedbefore you create the line contour plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.

Every line contour plot has a name, which you specify when you create the line contour plot. You refer to the line contour plot by name when modifying or deleting it.

The appearance of the line contour plot is governed by the line contour plot depictions. Theline contour plot depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the linecontour plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the LCPLOT commandto refer to the depiction.

The depictions used by the LCPLOT command are:

ZONE: specifies the elements onto which line contours are plotted. See the zonecommands in Section 6.2.

You can group depiction names into a style using the LCSTYLE command. Then you canspecify the line contour style name in the LCPLOT command. It is not necessary to useLCSTYLE in order to use LCPLOT. The line contour style simply provides a way to groupline contour plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions toanother set by specifying a line contour style name.

When you create a line contour plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given thesame name as the line contour plot.

You can modify an existing line contour plot either by using the REGENERATE command orby substituting depiction names using the LCPLOT command. The techniques are analogousto those used in the BANDPLOT command, see the introduction to Section 5.4 for examples.

You can delete a line contour plot using the DELETE LCPLOT command by picking themesh plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing thegraphics window using the FRAME command.

Chap. 5 Display control J-integral line contour plotting – Introduction


When you delete a line contour plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the linecontour plot are automatically deleted as well.

Auxiliary commands

The LCPLOT and LCSTYLE commands have auxiliary commands analogous to those ofBANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.


LCPLOT Sec. 5.9 J-integral line contour plotting


LCPLOT NAME LCSTYLE CONTOUR MESHNAME ZONENAME LCRENDERING LCANNOTATION

LCPLOT plots a line contour onto a mesh plot, corresponding to the line contour used infracture mechanics analysis to evaluate J-integrals. The line contour is plotted according tothe attributes specified by the specified depictions.

More than one line contour can be plotted onto a mesh plot by issuing this command severaltimes.

NAME [LCPLOTnnnnn]The name of the line contour plot. If no name is given, one is automatically generated in theform LCPLOTnnnnn, when nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999.

LCSTYLE [DEFAULT]The name of the line contour style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters ofthis command. A line contour style is defined by the LCSTYLE command (in this section).

CONTOURThe line contour to plot. Each line contour is automatically assigned a name by the AUI. Thenames are of the form LINE_CONTOUR-*, where * is the line contour number, for example,LINE_CONTOUR-1. This parameter must be entered.

MESHNAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the mesh plot upon which the line contour is drawn. See Section 5.2 forinformation about mesh plots. You can also enter the special name PREVIOUS to plot ontothe last created mesh plot.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements line contours are plotted. A zone isdefined by a zone command (see Section 6.2).

LCRENDERINGThe name of the line contour rendering depiction. You specify the appearance of the linecontour with this depiction. Currently, this parameter cannot be altered.

LCANNOTATIONThe name of the line contour annotation depiction. You specify attributes of the legend thatis plotted along with the line contour. Currently, this parameter cannot be altered.

Chap. 5 Display control LCSTYLE


LCSTYLE NAME CONTOUR MESHNAME ZONENAME LCRENDERING LCANNOTATION

LCSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing line contours using the LCPLOT command.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the line contour style. If there is a previously defined line contour style with thisname, data entered in this command modifies that line contour style. If there is no previouslydefined line contour style with this name, a new line contour style is created by thiscommand.

CONTOURThe line contour to plot. Each line contour is automatically assigned a name by the AUI. Thenames are of the form LINE_CONTOUR-*, where * is the line contour number, for example,LINE_CONTOUR-1.


ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone that specifies the elements of the model onto which the line contourcommand will plot. See the zone commands in Section 6.2.

LCRENDERINGThe name of the line contour rendering depiction, used to specify the appearance of the linecontour. Currently, there is no corresponding depiction command.

LCANNOTATIONThe name of the line contour connotation depiction, used to specify the additional text thatappears with the line contour plot. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.

Graph plotting – Introduction Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


Graph plotting – Introduction

You can create graph plots, which represent x-y data in graphical form. A graph plot canhave a title, graph box, x and y axes and an arbitrary number of curves.

In this section we discuss the creation and modification of graph plots. First we discuss theSHOW commands, which create graph plots, then we discuss the graph plots themselves.

SHOW commands

There are several commands that create x-y curves:

MATERIALSHOW STRAIN: creates stress-strain curves from a material description

MATERIALSHOW TIME: creates stress-time curves from a material description

USERSHOW: creates a curve from user-supplied x-y data

RESPONSESHOW: creates a curve giving the response of two variables as functions ofload step (time) or mode shape.

LINESHOW: creates a curve giving the responses of two variables along a specified line.

SPECTRUMSHOW: creates curves corresponding to a response spectrum.

SSPECTRUMSHOW: creates curves corresponding to a sweep spectrum.

HARMONICSHOW: creates a curve of the response of a variable as a function ofloading frequency.

RSPECTRUMSHOW: creates a curve corresponding to a random spectrum.

RANDOMSHOW: creates a curve of the power-spectral-density of the response of thevariable.

FSSHOW: creates a curve giving the response of an SDOF system as a function ofnatural frequency when the structural loading is given by response spectra.

FTSHOW: creates a curve giving the response of an SDOF system as a function ofnatural frequency when the time history of the structure is known.

FOURIERSHOW: creates a curve based on a Fourier analysis of the time history of avariable.

Chap. 5 Display control Graph plotting – Introduction


These commands all end with the word SHOW, so they are referred to as the SHOWcommands. These commands are discussed in this section.

Graph plots

A graph plot is a collection of curves, x and y axes and a graph box, as shown:

The curves are produced by the SHOW commands, see above.

Each graph plot has a name, which you specify when you create the graph plot. You refer tothe graph plot by name when modifying or deleting it.

You add curves to a graph plot using one of the SHOW commands given above. You canmodify the appearance of the graph plot using the GRAPHPLOT command.

The appearance of the graph plot is governed by the graph plot depictions. The graph plotdepictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the graph plot



appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the graph plot command to refer tothe depiction.

The depictions used by graph plots are:

SUBFRAME: the subframe in which the graph plot is drawn. See the SUBFRAMEcommand in Section 5.1.

GRAPHDEPICTION: attributes of the graph box and graph title. Each graph plot usesone graph depiction. See the GRAPHDEPICTION command in this section.

AXIS: attributes of a graph plot axis. Each graph plot uses two axis depictions, one forthe X axis and the other for the Y axis. See the AXIS command in this section.

CURVEDEPICTION: attributes of a graph plot curve. Each graph plot uses a separatecurve depiction for each curve. See the CURVEDEPICTION command in this section.

You can group depiction names into a style using the GRAPHSTYLE command. Then youcan specify the graph style in the SHOW command.

Creating graph plots

Each of the SHOW commands has two functions. The first function is to create curves andthe second function is to present the curves, either as curves in a graph plot and/or as listings. For information about the curves created by the SHOW commands, see the SHOW commanddescriptions in this section.

The parameters common to all SHOW commands are GRAPH, GRAPHNAME,GRAPHSTYLE, CURVEDEPICTION, XAXIS, YAXIS, GRAPHDEPICTION,SUBFRAME and LIST. GRAPH through SUBFRAME are used when creating or modifyinga graph plot, LIST is used to specify whether or not to generate curve listings.

The SHOW commands create or add curves to graphs if GRAPH = YES. If you do not entera GRAPHNAME, the SHOW command generates a new graph name of the formGRAPHPLOTnnnnn, where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999. In this case, or ifyou enter a GRAPHNAME which does not exist, the SHOW command creates a new graphplot. If you enter a GRAPHNAME which exists, the SHOW command adds its curves to thatgraph plot.

The curves created by the SHOW command are plotted according to the curve depictionspecified by CURVEDEPICTION. The axes used are specified using the XAXIS andYAXIS parameters, each of which accepts an axis depiction name. The graph title and graph



box are specified using the GRAPHDEPICTION parameter, which accepts a graph depictionname, and the subframe is specified using the SUBFRAME parameter.

The default for the CURVEDEPICTION parameter is determined as follows: If a graphstylename is entered, the default is taken from the graphstyle; otherwise the default is that listed inthe SHOW command description.

The defaults for XAXIS, YAXIS, GRAPHDEPICTION and SUBFRAME are determined asfollows: if the graph name is defined, the default is taken from the graph name; otherwise, if agraph style name is entered, the default is taken from the graphstyle; otherwise the default isthat listed in the SHOW command description.

In all cases, the depiction names are copied and given names that are based on the name ofthe graph plot. The subframe and graph depiction names are the same as the name of thegraph plot. The axis names are the graph plot name with the extension _Xnnnnn (for an Xaxis) and _Ynnnnn (for a Y axis), where nnnnn is the axis number. The curve depictionnames are the graph plot name with the extensions _Cnnnnn, where nnnnn is the curvenumber.

Modifying graph plots

You can modify an existing graph plot in several ways:

1) Alter the depictions of the graph plot using the depiction commands, then regenerate thegraph plot using the REGENERATE commands. For example:

USERSHOW TEST GRAPHNAME=G1Creates a graph plot G1.

AXIS G1_X00001 MINVALUE=0.0Changes the minimum value of the X axis of the graph plot.

REGENERATERegenerates the graph plot.

2) Use the GRAPHPLOT command to substitute depictions. For example:

USERSHOW TEST GRAPHNAME=G1Creates a graph plot G1.

GRAPHPLOT G1 AXIS 1 AUTO_LOGSubstitutes axis depiction AUTO_LOG for the X axis of graph plot G1, thenregenerates the graph plot.



You can delete a graph plot using the DELETE GRAPHPLOT command, by picking thegraph plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing thegraphics window using the FRAME command.

When you delete a graph plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the graph plotare automatically deleted as well. Therefore, if you want to create several graph plots withthe same attributes, you may want to create a graph style with those attributes, then use thegraph style when creating the graph plots. For example:

GRAPHSTYLE GS1 XAXIS=AUTO_LOG YAXIS=AUTO_LOGCreates a graph style in which the X and Y axes are logarithmic.

USERSHOW TEST1 GRAPHSTYLE=GS1Creates a graph using this graph style.

FRAMEClears the graphics window.

USERSHOW TEST2 GRAPHSTYLE=GS1Creates another graph using this graph style.

Auxiliary commands

The GRAPHPLOT command has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST GRAPHPLOTLists all graph plots.

LIST GRAPHPLOT NAMELists the depictions for the specified graph plot.

DELETE GRAPHPLOT NAMEDeletes the specified graph plot.

The GRAPHSTYLE command has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST GRAPHSTYLELists all graph styles.

LIST GRAPHSTYLE NAMELists the depictions for the specified graph style.

DELETE GRAPHSTYLE NAMEDeletes the specified graph style.



COPY GRAPHSTYLE NAME1 NAME2Copies the graph style specified by NAME1 to NAME2.

Each of the depiction commands has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST (depiction)Lists all names for the specified depiction type.

LIST (depiction) NAMELists the attributes for the specified depiction name.

DELETE (depiction) NAMEDeletes the attributes for the specified depiction name.

COPY (depiction) NAME1 NAME2Copies the depiction specified by NAME1 to NAME2.

MATERIALSHOW STRAIN Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


MATERIALSHOW STRAIN NAME CURVETYPE STRAINTYPE STRAINF1 STRAINF2 STRESSTYPE STRESSF1 STRESSF2 STRAINRANGE MINSTRAIN MAXSTRAIN NPTS GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

MATERIALSHOW STRAIN produces stress-strain curves based on the material namesupplied to this command. These curves can be graphed or listed.

NAMEThe label number of the material.

CURVETYPE [material-dependent]Three types of stress-strain curves can be generated.

UNIAXIAL Uniaxial (simple tension or simple compression) curves.

BIAXIAL Equibiaxial curves.

SHEAR Shear curves.

STRAINTYPE [material-dependent]STRETCH Stretch.

ENGINEERING Engineering strain

TRUE True (logarithmic) strain.

STRAINF1 [1.0]STRAINF2 [0.0]The strain actually output (plotted or listed) is obtained from the material description strain inthe following way:

output strain = (STRAINF1) × (strain from material description) + (STRAINF2)

in which the strain from the material description is computed corresponding to the strain typeparameter.

STRESSTYPE [material-dependent]ENGINEERING Engineering stress (force per unit original area).

TRUE True stress (force per unit deformed area).

Chap. 5 Display control MATERIALSHOW STRAIN


STRESSF1 [1.0]STRESSF2 [0.0]The stress actually output (plotted or listed) is obtained from the material description stress inthe following way:

output stress = (STRESSF1) × (stress from material description) + (STRESSF2)

in which the stress from the material description is computed corresponding to the stress typeparameter.

STRAINRANGE [AUTOMATIC]MINSTRAINMAXSTRAINIf STRAINRANGE is AUTOMATIC, then the minimum and maximum strain to be includedin the stress-strain curve are determined automatically from the material description. Theparameters MINSTRAIN and MAXSTRAIN are not used in this case.

If STRAINRANGE is CUSTOM, you enter the minimum (MINSTRAIN) and maximum(MAXSTRAIN) strains to be included in the stress-strain curve. These numbers areinterpreted corresponding to the way in which strains are output. For example, if strain type =TRUE, these numbers are interpreted as true strains. The strain factors are also taken intoaccount. For example, if STRAINF1 = 3.0, these numbers are divided by 3.0 to obtainmaterial minimum and maximum strains. Note: MAXSTRAIN > MINSTRAIN.

NPTS [material-dependent]Some material descriptions are specified by piecewise linear stress-strain segments. Forthese, this parameter is used to display additional points for each segment. In this case youcan also specify that no additional points be computed by setting this parameter to 0.

Other material descriptions are defined as mathematical expressions. For these, NPTSdetermines the number of points to compute. In this case you must set this parameter to atleast 1.

GRAPH [YES]Creates or updates a graph with the stress-strain curves computed by this command. {YES /NO}. Currently GRAPH=NO is not implemented.

GRAPHNAME [GRAPHPLOTnnnnn]The name of the graph plot. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. If you do notenter a graphplot name, the program will automatically generate a name of the formGRAPHPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999. You can alsoenter the special name PREVIOUS to add graphs to the last created graph plot.

MATERIALSHOW STRAIN Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


GRAPHSTYLEThe name of the graph style, used to provide defaults for the depictions used by the graphplot. See the introduction to this section for more information.

CURVEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The names of the curve depiction used to describe the material curves produced by thiscommand. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the curve legend,symbols in the curve, etc with this depiction. The only curves that you can control using thecurve depiction name are the material curves themselves. Auxiliary curves plotted by thiscommand, for example experimental data points, are not controlled by the curve depictionname.

XAXIS [DEFAULT_X]YAXIS [DEFAULT_Y]The names of the axis depictions used to describe the X and Y axes of the graph plot. Theseparameters are used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axes attributes, for examplethe values contained in the axes, with these depictions.

GRAPHDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the graph depiction. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You canspecify the graph attributes, for example the graph title and graph size, with this depiction.

SUBFRAME [DEFAULT]The name of the subframe into which the graph is plotted. This parameter is used only ifGRAPH = YES.

LIST [NO]Specifies whether or not a listing is created with the stress-strain data. {YES / NO}

Chap. 5 Display control MATERIALSHOW TIME


MATERIALSHOW TIME NAME TIMEFAC1 TIMEFAC2 TIMERANGE MINTIME MAXTIME NPTS STRESS TEMPERATURE TEMPUNIT ORDINATE ORDFAC1 ORDFAC2 GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

MATERIALSHOW TIME produces curves of material response vs time based on thematerial name supplied to this command. These curves can be graphed or listed.

NAMEThe label number of the material.

TIMEFAC1 [1.0]TIMEFAC2 [0.0]The time actually output (plotted or listed) is determined from the actual time in the followingway:

output time = (TIMEFAC1) × (actual time) + (TIMEFAC2)

TIMERANGE [AUTOMATIC]MINTIMEMAXTIMEIf TIMERANGE is AUTOMATIC, then the minimum and maximum times to be included inthe material response curve are determined automatically from the material description. Theparameters MINTIME and MAXTIME are not used in this case. If TIMERANGE isCUSTOM, you enter the minimum (MINTIME) and maximum (MAXTIME) times to beincluded in the material response curve. These numbers are interpreted corresponding to theway in which times are output, taking the time factors into account. For example, ifTIMEFAC1 = 3.0, these numbers are divided by 3.0 to obtain the actual minimum andmaximum times. Note: (MAXTIME > MINTIME).

NPTS [material-dependent]Some material descriptions are specified by piecewise linear response-time segments. Forthese, this parameter is used to display additional points for each segment. In this case youcan also specify that no additional points be computed by setting this parameter to 0.

Other material descriptions are defined as mathematical expressions. For these, NPTSdetermines the number of points to compute. In this case you must set this parameter to atleast 1.

MATERIALSHOW TIME Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


STRESS [0.0]TEMPERATURE [0.0]TEMPUNIT [CELSIUS]The material response may be a function of the stress and/or temperature as well as the time. Use these parameters to enter the values of stress and temperature. {CELSIUS /FAHRENHEIT / KELVIN / RANKINE}

ORDINATE [CREEP_STRAIN]This is the quantity to be plotted as a function of time. {CREEP_STRAIN}

ORDFAC1 [1.0]ORDFAC2 [0.0]The ordinate value actually output (plotted or listed) is obtained from the material descriptionordinate in the following way:

output ordinate = (ORDFAC1) × (ordinate from material description) + (ORDFAC2)

GRAPH [YES]Specifies whether or not a graph will be created or updated with the material response vs timecurves computed by this command. {YES / NO} Currently GRAPH=NO is notimplemented.

GRAPHNAME [GRAPHPLOTnnnnn]The name of the graph plot. This parameter is used only if GRAPH is YES. If you do notenter a graphplot name, the program will automatically generate a name of the formGRAPHPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999. You can alsoenter the special name PREVIOUS to add graphs to the last created graph plot.

GRAPHSTYLEThe name of the graph style, used to provide the defaults for the depictions used by the graphplot. See the introduction to this section for more information.

CURVEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the curve depiction used to describe the curves produced by this command. Thisparameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the curve legend, symbols in thecurve, etc., with this depiction. Only the curves that actually show the material response arecontrolled by the curve depiction specified here. Other curves, such as experimental datapoints, are not controlled by this curve depiction.

XAXIS [DEFAULT_X]YAXIS [DEFAULT_Y]

Chap. 5 Display control MATERIALSHOW TIME


The names of the axis depictions used to describe the X and Y axes of the graph plot. Theseparameters are used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axes attributes, for examplethe values contained in the axes, with these depictions.



LIST [NO]Specifies whether or not a listing will be created with the stress-strain data. {YES / NO}

USERDATA Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


USERDATA NAME XLABEL YLABEL

xi yi

USERDATA reads a set of user-supplied XY data (a userdata) and stores the data in thedatabase. The userdata can be plotted by USERSHOW (in this section).

NAMEThe identifying name of the userdata (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters). If there is apreviously defined userdata with the same name, the data entered in this command modifiesthat userdata, otherwise a new userdata is created.

XLABEL, YLABEL [' ']Labels that specify the types of data represented by the x and y values of the data points. Each label can be up to 80 alphanumeric characters long. The labels are used only for userinput and output and hence can be arbitrary or blank.

xi yi

An xy point in the userdata. Notice that a userdata point cannot be deleted. If there is apreviously defined userdata with this name, the point xi, yi is appended to that userdata.

Chap. 5 Display control USERSHOW


USERSHOW NAME PSTART PEND GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

USERSHOW graphs or lists a curve that you entered using the USERDATA command.

NAMEThe name of the userdata. A userdata is defined by the USERDATA command (in thissection).

PSTARTPENDYou can specify a range of points in the selected userdata to be plotted. Start point is thenumber of the first point in the userdata and end point is the number of the last point in theuserdata. The default is to use all of the points in the userdata.

GRAPH [YES]Specifies whether or not a graph is created or updated with the stress-strain curves. {YES /NO} Currently GRAPH=NO is not implemented.



CURVEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The names of the curve depiction used to describe the curve produced by this command. Thisparameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the curve legend, symbols in thecurve, etc. with this depiction.

XAXIS [DEFAULT_X]YAXIS [DEFAULT_Y]The names of the axis depictions used to describe the X and Y axes of the graph plot. Theseparameters are used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axes attributes, forexample the values contained in the axes, with these depictions.

USERSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting




LIST [NO]Creates a listing of the userdata. {YES / NO}

Chap. 5 Display control RESPONSESHOW


RESPONSESHOW XVARIABLE XPOINT YVARIABLE YPOINT RESPRANGE XSMOOTHING YSMOOTHING XRESULTCONTROL YRESULTCONTROL GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

RESPONSESHOW produces a curve giving the response of two variables as functions ofload step or mode shape. This curve can be graphed or listed.

The first variable of the curve is referred to as the X variable and the second variable isreferred to as the Y variable. Any variable, whether predefined, a resultant, a constant or analias, can be used as either the X or Y variable.

To produce a time history curve, set the X variable to TIME.

XVARIABLE [TIME]XPOINTThe name of the variable associated with the X axis and the point at which the variable isevaluated. The variable can be a predefined variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant, seeSection 6.9. The point must have been defined with a model point definition command (seeSection 6.7), unless the X variable is location-independent, in which case the X point isignored. You must enter an XPOINT name unless the X variable is location-independent.

YVARIABLEYPOINTThe name of the variable associated with the Y axis and the point at which the variable isevaluated. The variable can be a predefined variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant. Thepoint must have been defined with a model point definition command, unless the Y variable islocation-independent, in which case the Y point is ignored. You must enter a YVARIABLEname. You must enter a YPOINT name unless the Y variable is location-independent.

Note: when results from more than one finite element program are stored in the database, theXPOINT and YPOINT must refer to the same finite element program. If both XVARIABLEand YVARIABLE are location independent and both XPOINT and YPOINT are notspecified, the current finite element program is used to evaluate the variables (see theFEPROGRAM command in Section 3.4).

RESPRANGE [DEFAULT]The name of the response range that specifies for which load steps, mode shapes, etc, thevariables are to be evaluated. See the response-range commands in Section 6.4.

RESPONSESHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


XSMOOTHING [DEFAULT]YSMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The names of the smoothing definitions used when evaluating the X variable and the Yvariable. You can smooth none, either or both of the variables by specifying smoothingdefinition names. Smoothing definitions are defined by the SMOOTHING command (seeSection 6.6).

XRESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]YRESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The names of the result control depictions for the X and Y variables. These depictions, alongwith the XSMOOTHING and YSMOOTHING definitions, control how the results arecalculated. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (seeSection 6.6).

GRAPH [YES]Specifies whether or not a graph is created or updated with the curve computed by thiscommand. {YES / NO} Currently GRAPH=NO is not implemented.



CURVEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the curve depiction used to describe the curve produced by this command. Thisparameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the curve legend, symbols in thecurve, etc., with this depiction.



Chap. 5 Display control RESPONSESHOW



LIST [NO]Specifies whether this command creates a listing with the response graph data. {YES /NO}

LINESHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


LINESHOW LINENAME XVARIABLE YVARIABLE RESPONSE XSMOOTHING YSMOOTHING XWEIGHT YWEIGHT XRESULTCONTROL YRESULTCONTROL GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

LINESHOW produces a curve giving the response of two variables along a specified line fora specified load step, mode shape or other response type. This curve can be graphed or listed.

The first variable of the curve is referred to as the X variable and the second variable isreferred to as the Y variable. Any variable, whether predefined, a resultant, a constant or analias, can be used as either the X or Y variable.

You can use either of the variables DISTANCE or DISTANCE_POSITION as one of thevariables to create a curve showing a variable as a function of distance along the line.

LINENAMEThe name of the line along with the X and Y variable are evaluated. The line name must havebeen defined by a model line definition command, see Section 6.8.

XVARIABLE [DISTANCE]YVARIABLEThe name of the variables associated with the X and Y axes. Each variable can be apredefined variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant. See Section 6.9 for information aboutvariables.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]The name of the response that specifies for which load step, mode shape, etc., the variablesare to be evaluated. See the response commands in Section 6.3.

XSMOOTHING [DEFAULT]YSMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The names of the smoothing definitions used when evaluating the X variable and the Yvariable. You can smooth none, either or both of the variables by specifying smoothingdefinition names. Smoothing definitions are defined by the SMOOTHING command (seeSection 6.6).

XWEIGHT [YES]YWEIGHT [YES]If X variable weighting is YES, the X variable values are multiplied by the line pointmultiplying factors, if Y variable weighting is YES, the Y variable values are multiplied bythe line point multiplying factors. You can define line point multiplying factors in the modelline definition. {YES / NO}

Chap. 5 Display control LINESHOW


XRESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]YRESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The names of the result control depiction for the X and Y variables. These depictions, alongwith the XSMOOTHING and YSMOOTHING depictions, control how the results arecalculated. Result control depictions are specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (seeSection 6.6).




CURVEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the curve depiction used to describe the curve produced by this command. Thisparameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the curve legend, symbols in thecurve, etc., with this depiction.




LIST [NO]Creates a listing for the line curve data. {YES / NO}

SPECTRUMSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


SPECTRUMSHOW NAME XPLOTTYPE YPLOTTYPE FACTOR NFREQUENCIES GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLECURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

SPECTRUMSHOW graphs or lists the values of a response spectrum.

You define a response spectrum using the SPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).

NAMEThe name of a response spectrum. The name must correspond to a currently defined responsespectrum.

XPLOTTYPE [from the response spectrum]Specifies whether to plot or list the response spectrum in terms of frequencies or periods. {FREQUENCY / PERIOD}

YPLOTTYPE [from the response spectrum]Specifies whether to plot or list the response spectrum values in terms of displacements,velocities or accelerations. {DISPLACEMENT / VELOCITY / ACCELERATION}

FACTOR [1.0/(response spectrum factor)]You can multiply the response spectrum values by FACTOR before plotting or listing them.

NFREQUENCIES [0]For the frequency curve in the response spectrum, the values that you input are graphed orlisted. In addition, the frequency curve is sampled at NFREQUENCIES equally spacedfrequencies and these values are also graphed or listed. This option is most useful when thegraph axes types differ from the axes specified with the INPUT-AXES parameter of theSPECTRUM command (recall that the frequency curve points are considered to be connectedwith straight lines in the coordinate system selected by the INPUT-AXES parameter).


GRAPHNAMEThe name of the graph plot. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. If you do notenter a graphplot name, the program will automatically generate a name of the formGRAPHPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999. You can alsoenter the special name PREVIOUS to add graphs to the last created graph plot.

Chap. 5 Display control SPECTRUMSHOW


GRAPHSTYLEThe name of the graph style, used to provide defaults for the depictions used by the graphplot. See the introduction to this section for more information.

CURVEDEPICTION [LINE]The name of the curve depiction used to determine how the curves produced by this commandare graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the curvelegend, symbols in the curve, etc. with this depiction.

XAXIS [AUTO_LINEAR or AUTO_LOG]YAXIS (depending upon the response spectrum)The names of the axis depictions used to determine how the axes produced by this commandare graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axisattributes, for example the range of values contained in the axes, with these depictions.

The defaults are chosen to agree with the value of the INPUT-AXES parameter of thespecified response spectrum.

GRAPHDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the graph depiction. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You canspecify the graph attributes, for example the graph title, with this depiction.


LIST [NO]Indicates whether to create listings for the response spectrum curves. {YES / NO}

SSPECTRUMSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


SSPECTRUMSHOW NAME YPLOTTYPE FACTOR NFREQUENCIES GRAPHGRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

SSPECTRUMSHOW graphs or lists the values of a sweep spectrum.

You define a sweep spectrum using the SSPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).

NAMEThe name of a sweep spectrum. The name must correspond to a currently defined sweepspectrum.

YPLOTTYPE [(from the sweep spectrum)]If the sweep spectrum defines ground motion amplitudes, use this parameter to specifywhether to plot or list the sweep spectrum values in terms of displacements, velocities oraccelerations. If the sweep spectrum defines applied load multipliers, then this parametermust be set to FORCE. {DISPLACEMENT / VELOCITY / ACCELERATION /FORCE}

FACTOR [1.0/(sweep spectrum factor)]You can multiply the sweep spectrum values by FACTOR before plotting or listing them.

NFREQUENCIES [0]For the frequency curve in the sweep spectrum, the values that you input are graphed orlisted. In addition, the frequency curve is sampled at NFREQUENCIES equally spacedfrequencies and these values are also graphed or listed. This option is most useful when thegraph axes types differ from the axes specified with the INPUT-AXES parameter of theSSPECTRUM command (recall that the frequency curve points are considered to beconnected with straight lines in the coordinate system selected by the INPUT-AXESparameter).



Chap. 5 Display control SSPECTRUMSHOW




XAXIS [AUTO_LINEAR or AUTO_LOG]YAXIS (depending upon the sweep spectrum)The names of the axis depictions used to determine how the axes produced by this commandare graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axisattributes, for example the range of values contained in the axes, with these depictions. Thedefaults are chosen to agree with the value of the INPUT-AXES parameter of the specifiedsweep spectrum.



LIST [NO]Indicates whether to create a listing for the sweep spectrum curve. {YES / NO}

RSPECTRUMSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


RSPECTRUMSHOW NAME YPLOTTYPE FACTOR NFREQUENCIES GRAPHGRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

RSPECTRUMSHOW graphs or lists the values of a random spectrum.

You define a random spectrum using the RSPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).

NAMEThe name of a random spectrum. The name must correspond to a currently defined randomspectrum.

YPLOTTYPE [from the random spectrum]If the random spectrum defines the power-spectral-density of ground motion amplitudes, usethis parameter to specify whether to plot or list the random spectrum values in terms ofdisplacements, velocities or accelerations. If the random spectrum defines the power-spectral-density of applied load multipliers, use this parameter to specify whether to graph orlist the random spectrum values in terms of force or decibels. {DISPLACEMENT /VELOCITY / ACCELERATION / FORCE / DB}

FACTOR [1.0/(random spectrum factor)]You can multiply the random spectrum values by FACTOR before plotting or listing them.

NFREQUENCIES [0]For the frequency curve in the random spectrum, the values that you input are graphed orlisted. In addition, the frequency curve is sampled at NFREQUENCIES equally spacedfrequencies and these values are also graphed or listed. This option is most useful when thegraph axes types differ from the axes specified with the INPUT-AXES parameter of theRRSPECTRUM command (recall that the frequency curve points are considered to beconnected with straight lines in the coordinate system selected by the INPUT-AXESparameter).



Chap. 5 Display control RSPECTRUMSHOW




XAXIS [AUTO_LINEAR or AUTO_LOG]YAXIS (depending upon the random spectrum)The names of the axis depictions used to determine how the axes produced by this commandare graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axisattributes, for example the range of values contained in the axes, with these depictions. Thedefaults are chosen to agree with the value of the INPUT-AXES parameter of the specifiedrandom spectrum.



LIST [NO]Indicates whether to create a listing for the random spectrum curve. {YES / NO}

HARMONICSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


HARMONICSHOW VARIABLE POINT SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL FORMULA RESPONSE FMIN FMAX NFREQUENCIES FSPACING FREQTABLE FACTOR1 FACTOR2 GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

HARMONICSHOW is used in harmonic analysis. It is used to compute the response of avariable at a point as a function of the loading frequency. The resulting curve is eithergraphed or listed.

See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 8.3, for the theory used in theHARMONICSHOW command.

VARIABLEPOINTThe name of the variable and the point at which the variable is evaluated. The variable can bea predefined variable, an alias or a resultant (see Section 6.9). The point must have beendefined with a model point definition command (see Section 6.7).

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing definition used when evaluating the variable. A smoothingdefinition is defined with the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control definition used when evaluating the variable. A result controldefinition is defined with the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

FORMULA [based on the variable]In order to perform the harmonic analysis calculations, this command must make anassumption about how the variable is related to the nodal quantities. Use this parameter tooverride the program default:

DISPLACEMENT The variable is proportional to the nodal displacements.

VELOCITY The variable is proportional to the nodal velocities.

ACCELERATION The variable is proportional to the nodal accelerations.

Note: this parameter is used only if RESPONSE HARMONIC RESULTANT=BEFORE andCONTROL FILEVERSION=V73.

RESPONSE The name of a harmonic response, used as a template in the harmonic analysis calculations. The following parameters of the harmonic response are used: METHOD, OMEGAT,

Chap. 5 Display control HARMONICSHOW


QUASISTATIC, DAMPINGTABLE, MSTART, MEND, REFTIME, RESULTANT and thedata input lines. See the RESPONSE HARMONIC command in Section 6.3.

FMINFMAXThe frequency range over which the harmonic response is evaluated, entered in cycles/sec.

NFREQUENCIES [11]FSPACING [LOGARITHMIC]NFREQUENCIES is the number of frequencies for which the harmonic response isevaluated, used if FSPACING is LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC. FSPACING can beLINEAR, LOGARITHMIC, USNRC or ASMEFLOOR. See the notes at the end of thiscommand for the USNRC and ASMEFLOOR frequency spacing guidelines.

FREQTABLE [DEFAULT]The name of a frequency table, used to evaluate the response for additional frequencies. Currently this parameter is ignored.

FACTOR1 [1.0]FACTOR2 [0.0]The result is multiplied by FACTOR1 and added to FACTOR2 before being graphed orlisted.





HARMONICSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


XAXIS [DEFAULT_X]YAXIS [DEFAULT_Y]The names of the axis depictions used to determine how the axes produced by this commandare graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axisattributes, for example the range of values contained in the axes, with these depictions.



LIST [NO]Indicates whether to create a listing for the curve. {YES / NO}

Notes:

The USNRC frequency intervals are (as reprinted from USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.122):

Frequency range(Hertz)

DF(Hertz)

0.0 - 3.0 0.10 3.0 - 3.6 0.15 3.6 - 5.0 0.20 5.0 - 8.0 0.25 8.0 - 15.0 0.50 15.0 - 18.0 1.0 18.0 - 22.0 2.0 22.0 - (infinity) 3.0

Chap. 5 Display control HARMONICSHOW


The ASMEFLOOR frequency intervals are (as reprinted from the 1992 ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code, Appendix N, Table N-1226-1):

Frequency range(Hertz)

DF(Hertz)

0.0 - 1.6 0.1 1.6 - 2.8 0.2 2.8 - 4.0 0.3 4.0 - 9.0 0.4 9.0 - 16.0 1.0 16.0 - 22.0 2.0 22.0 - infinity 3.0

RANDOMSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


RANDOMSHOW VARIABLE POINT SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL FORMULA RESPONSE FMIN FMAX NFREQUENCIES FSPACING FREQTABLE FACTOR1 FACTOR2 GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

RANDOMSHOW is used in random analysis. It is used to compute the power-spectral-density of a variable at a point as a function of the loading frequency. The resulting curve iseither graphed or listed.

See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 8.4, for the theory used in theRANDOMSHOW command.

VARIABLEPOINTThe name of the variable and the point at which the variable is evaluated. The variable can bea predefined variable, an alias or a resultant (see Section 6.9). The point must have beendefined with a model point definition command (see Section 6.7).

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing definition used when evaluating the variable. A smoothingdefinition is defined with the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control definition used when evaluating the variable. A result controldefinition is defined with the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

FORMULA [based on the variable]In order to perform the random analysis calculations, this command must make an assumptionabout how the variable is related to the nodal quantities. Use this parameter to override theprogram default:

DISPLACEMENT The variable is proportional to the nodal displacements.

VELOCITY The variable is proportional to the nodal velocities.

ACCELERATION The variable is proportional to the nodal accelerations.

Note: this parameter is used only if RESPONSE RANDOM RESULTANT=BEFORE andCONTROL FILEVERSION=V73.

RESPONSEThe name of a random response, used as a template in the random analysis calculations. Thefollowing parameters of the random response are used: CUTOFF, DAMPINGTABLE,

Chap. 5 Display control RANDOMSHOW


MSTART, MEND, REFTIME, RESULTANT and the data input lines. See the RESPONSERANDOM command in Section 6.3.

FMINFMAXThe frequency range over which the random response is evaluated, entered in cycles/sec.

NFREQUENCIES [11]FSPACING [LOGARITHMIC]NFREQUENCIES is the number of frequencies for which the random response is evaluated,used if FSPACING is LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC. FSPACING can be LINEAR,LOGARITHMIC, USNRC or ASMEFLOOR. See the notes at the end of theHARMONICSHOW command (in this section) for the USNRC and ASMEFLOORguidelines.

FREQTABLE [DEFAULT]The name of a frequency table, used to evaluate the response for additional frequencies. Currently this parameter is ignored.

FACTOR1 [1.0]FACTOR2 [0.0]The result is multiplied by FACTOR1 and added to FACTOR2 before being graphed orlisted.





RANDOMSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


XAXIS [AUTO_LOG]YAXIS [AUTO_LOG]The names of the axis depictions used to determine how the axes produced by this commandare graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axisattributes, for example the range of values contained in the axes, with these depictions.



LIST [NO]Indicates whether to create a listing for the curve. {YES / NO}

Chap. 5 Display control FSSHOW


FSSHOW TYPE POINT RESULTCONTROL FMIN FMAX NFREQUENCIESFSPACING FREQTABLE SDOFDAMPING ROPTION SMETHOD XPLOTTYPE PEAKBROADENING CURVESMOOTHING CURVERAISE RAISETOLERANCE FACTOR1 FACTOR2 DELTAF GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

responsei factori directioni

The FSSHOW command is used in response spectrum analysis to compute the response of asmall SDOF system connected to the structure, as a function of the SDOF system naturalfrequency, when the structural loading is given as ground motion response spectra.

The SDOF system is connected to the structure at a single node, called the connection point,and vibrates in one or more of the three coordinate directions.

The SDOF system natural frequencies can be chosen to be linearly spaced, logarithmicallyspaced or spaced according to USNRC or ASME guidelines. In addition, you can supplyadditional SDOF system natural frequencies, for example, to correspond to structuralnatural frequencies.

Each data input line specifies a load case. The load case defines the response spectrum andmultiplying factor giving the intensity of ground motion, and the direction of SDOF systemvibration. For each load case, the SDOF system response is calculated separately and thenthe results for the load cases are combined into a single result.

The curve giving the response as a function of the SDOF system frequency can be smoothedand the curve peaks broadened.

TYPE [ACCELERATION]The quantity that is plotted as a function of SDOF system frequency:

RDISPLACEMENT maximum relative displacement with respect to ground motionRVELOCITY maximum relative velocity with respect to ground motionACCELERATION maximum absolute acceleration

POINTThe name of the point to which the SDOF system is connected. Typically this pointcorresponds to a nodal point and is therefore defined using the NODEPOINT command (inSection 6.7). This parameter must be entered.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control definition used when evaluating the quantity. A result controldefinition is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

FSSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


FMINFMAXThe frequency range over which the system response is evaluated, entered in cycles/sec. Thefrequency range must be specified.

NFREQUENCIES [11]FSPACING [LOGARITHMIC]The number of SDOF system natural frequencies for which the response is computed, used ifFSPACING is LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC. FSPACING can be LINEAR, LOGARITHMIC,USNRC or ASMEFLOOR. See the notes at the end of the HARMONICSHOW command (inthis section) for the USNRC and ASMEFLOOR frequency spacing guidelines.

FREQTABLE [DEFAULT]The name of a frequency table, used to evaluate the system response for additionalfrequencies. The frequency table also specifies which response peaks are to be broadenedwhen you request that response peaks be broadened. A frequency table is defined by theFREQTABLE command (see Section 6.5).

SDOFDAMPING [DEFAULT]The name of the damping table used to specify the damping of the SDOF system as a functionof the SDOF system frequency. A damping table is defined by the DAMPINGTABLEcommand (see Section 6.5). It is necessary to define a damping table even if the SDOFsystem has damping independent of natural frequency.

ROPTION [D1]This parameter controls the technique used to avoid numerical difficulties when the SDOFsystem natural frequency is nearly equal to a structural natural frequency. See the Theory andModeling Guide for more details.

UN The SDOF system response is computed using the undamped transfer function. The SDOF system response can be very large when the SDOF system naturalfrequency is close to a structural natural frequency.

UR The SDOF system response is computed using the undamped transfer functionand also with resonance assumptions. The smaller of these two responses isused.

D1 The SDOF system response is computed using the damped transfer functionwith effective damping equal to the SDOF system damping, i.e.

�eff = �0

where �eff is the effective damping, and �0 is the SDOF system damping.

Chap. 5 Display control FSSHOW


D2 Same as D1, but the effective damping is equal to

�eff = �(�0(�0+�j))

where �j is the modal damping factor for mode j.

D3 Same as D1, but the effective damping is equal to

�eff = �(�02 + (�0 - �j)

2) [�0 � �j]

�eff = �(�02 - (�0 - �j)

2) [�0 > �j]

SMETHOD [SRSS]The method used to combine responses from different load cases, when more than one loadcase is specified, either SRSS (square root of the sum of the squares) or ABS (absolute summethod).

XPLOTTYPEPEAKBROADENING CURVESMOOTHINGCURVERAISE RAISETOL INPUT-AXESFACTOR1FACTOR2DELTAFGRAPHGRAPHNAMEGRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTIONXAXISYAXISGRAPHDEPICTIONSUBFRAMELIST

See the corresponding parameters of the FTSHOW command.

responsei

A response of type response-spectrum that provides a template for the response spectrumcalculations. All parameters of the response except for RESIDUAL are used. The responsemust be acting in the X, Y or Z directions. See the RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUMcommand in Section 6.3 for more details.

FSSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


factori [1.0]The response spectrum can be multiplied by this multiplying factor.

directioni [LOAD]The direction in which the SDOF system is vibrating, either X, Y, Z or LOAD. When direction= LOAD, the direction is taken from the direction of the loading given in the specifiedresponse.

Chap. 5 Display control FTSHOW


FTSHOW TYPE POINT RESULTCONTROL FMIN FMAX NFREQUENCIESFSPACING FREQTABLE SDOFDAMPING XGROUND YGROUNDZGROUND SMETHOD PEAKBROADENING CURVESMOOTHING CURVERAISE RAISETOLERANCE FACTOR1 FACTOR2XPLOTTYPE DELTAF GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLECURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAMELIST

resprangei factori directioni

The FTSHOW command is used in response spectrum analysis. It is used to compute theresponse of a small SDOF system connected to the structure as a function of the SDOFsystem natural frequency, when the time history of the structure is known.

The SDOF system is connected to the structure at a single node, called the connection point,and vibrates in one of the three global coordinate directions, or in one of the skew coordinatedirections if the connection point node has a skew system.

The SDOF system natural frequencies can be chosen to be linearly spaced, logarithmicallyspaced, or spaced according to USNRC or ASME guidelines. In addition, you can supplyadditional SDOF system natural frequencies, for example, to correspond to structural naturalfrequencies.

Each time interval and/or loading direction is specified by a data input line that contains theresponse-range and the loading direction. For each time interval, the SDOF systems areassumed to start from rest. The SDOF system responses during the time interval are computedusing numerical integration and the maximum responses are recorded. If several data inputlines are specified, the response is calculated separately for each data input line and then theresults are combined using the method specified by parameter SMETHOD.

The curve giving the response as a function of the SDOF system frequency can be smoothedand the curve peaks broadened.

TYPE [ACCELERATION]The quantity that is plotted as a function of SDOF system frequency:

DISPLACEMENT maximum absolute displacementVELOCITY maximum absolute velocityACCELERATION maximum absolute accelerationRDISPLACEMENT maximum relative displacement with respect to ground motionRVELOCITY maximum relative velocity with respect to ground motionRACCELERATION maximum relative acceleration with respect to ground motion

FTSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


CDISPLACEMENT maximum relative displacement with respect to the connectionpoint

CVELOCITY maximum relative velocity with respect to the connection pointCACCELERATION maximum relative acceleration with respect to the connection

point

POINT The name of the point to which the SDOF system is connected. Typically this pointcorresponds to a nodal point and is therefore defined using the NODEPOINT command (seeSection 6.7).

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control definition used when evaluating the quantity. A result controldepiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

FMINFMAXThe frequency range over which the system response is evaluated, entered in cycles/sec. Thefrequency range must be specified.

NFREQUENCIES [11]FSPACING [LOGARITHMIC]The number of SDOF system natural frequencies for which the response is computed, used ifFSPACING is LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC. FSPACING can be LINEAR, LOGARITHMIC,USNRC or ASMEFLOOR. See the notes at the end of the HARMONICSHOW command (inthis section) for the USNRC and ASMEFLOOR frequency spacing guidelines.

FREQTABLE [DEFAULT]The name of a frequency table, used to evaluate the system response for additionalfrequencies. The frequency table also specifies which response peaks are to be broaden whenyou request that response peaks be broadened. A frequency table is defined by theFREQTABLE command (see Section 6.5).

SDOFDAMPING [DEFAULT]The name of the damping table used to specify the damping of the SDOF system as a functionof the SDOF system frequency. It is necessary to define a damping table even if the SDOFsystem has damping independent of natural frequency. A damping table is defined by theDAMPINGTABLE command (see Section 6.5).



XGROUND [NO]YGROUND [NO]ZGROUND [NO]If XGROUND = NO, then model displacements in the global X direction are interpreted asabsolute displacements. If XGROUND = YES, then model displacements in the global Xdirection are interpreted as relative displacements to any ground motions specified by mass-proportional loads in the global X direction (if there is more than one ground motion in theglobal X direction, all of them are used). If XGROUND = an integer, then modeldisplacements in the global X direction are interpreted as relative displacements to the groundmotions with time function XGROUND. YGROUND and ZGROUND have analogousmeanings for the global Y and Z directions.

XGROUND, YGROUND and ZGROUND always control the interpretation of modeldisplacements in the global coordinate system, even when the SDOF system vibrates in one ofthe skew directions. For example, if there is a mass-proportional loading in the Y directioncorresponding to ground accelerations in the Y direction, set YGROUND=YES. The AUIwill then compute the ground acceleration in the Y direction, transform it into the SDOFsystem direction (global or skew) and add it to the ADINA-calculated connection pointacceleration to obtain the total absolute connection point acceleration.

SMETHOD [SRSS]The method used to combine responses from different time intervals, when more than onetime interval is specified, either SRSS (square root of the sum of the squares) or ABS(absolute sum method).

PEAKBROADENING [NO]This specifies whether the response peaks are to be broadened. If PEAKBROADENING isNO, peaks are not broadened. If PEAKBROADENING is YES, then the frequencies given inthe frequency table for which the response is at a local maximum are treated as peaks. Eachpeak is broadened by the amount specified in the frequency table. If PEAKBROADENINGis ALL, then all peaks are broadened by the amount specified by parameter DELTAF. See thefigures at the end of this command description.

The peak broadening is performed in the coordinate system given by the INPUT-AXESparameter.

Note that you can broaden peaks without smoothing the response curve, ifPEAKBROADENING=YES.



CURVESMOOTHING [NO]CURVERAISE [0.0]RAISETOL [1.E-5]This specifies whether the response curve is to be smoothed. If CURVESMOOTHING is NO,smoothing is not applied. If CURVESMOOTHING is YES, the response curve is smoothedby shifting responses upwards by an amount of at most CURVERAISE. RAISETOL is atolerance used in the smoothing procedure.

If CURVERAISE is small, the smoothed response curve will not be significantly differentthat the unsmoothed curve. Increasing CURVERAISE increases the chance that segmentswithin the smoothed curve will be straight.

If CURVERAISE = 0.0, then CURVERAISE is chosen to be 5% of the maximum responsevalue in the curve.

The smoothing is performed in the coordinate system given by the INPUT-AXES parameter.

Note that you can smooth the response curve without broadening peaks, but smoothing ismost effective when the peaks are broadened as well.

INPUT-AXES [LOGLOG]The broadening and smoothing operations take place on a graph in which the axes are eitherlogarithmic or linear as follows:

LINLIN Linear frequency axis, linear response axisLOGLIN Logarithmic frequency axis, linear response axisLINLOG Linear frequency axis, logarithmic response axisLOGLOG Logarithmic frequency axis, logarithmic response axis

FACTOR1 [1.0]FACTOR2 [0.0]The results are multiplied by FACTOR1 and added to FACTOR2 before being plotted orlisted.

XPLOTTYPE [FREQUENCY]This specifies whether the response is graphed or listed as a function of the frequency(cycles/sec) or period (sec). All input to this command is given in terms of frequenciesregardless of the value of this parameter. {FREQUENCY / PERIOD}

DELTAF [0.15]The peak broadening factor, used when PEAKBROADENING is ALL. This is interpreted asshown in the figure.



GRAPHGRAPHNAMEGRAPHSTYLESee the corresponding parameters of the RESPONSESHOW command (in this section).

CURVEDEPICTION [LINE]The name of the curve depiction used to determine how the curve produced by this commandis graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH=YES. You can specify the curve legend,symbols in the curve, etc. with this depiction.

XAXIS [AUTO_LOG]YAXIS [AUTO_LOG]The names of the axis depictions used to determine how the axes produced by this commandare graphed. These parameters are used only if GRAPH=YES and if this command iscreating a new graph plot. You can specify the axis attributes, for example the range ofvalues contained in the axes, with these depictions.

GRAPHDEPICTIONSUBFRAMELISTSee the corresponding parameters of the RESPONSESHOW command (in this section).

resprangei

The response-range that specifies the time interval over which the transient analysis isperformed. See the RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP command in Section 6.4 for informationabout response-ranges. This parameter must be specified. Note that, initially, response-rangeDEFAULT corresponds to a time interval containing all solution steps in the analysis.

factori [1.0]The model displacements, velocities, accelerations and mass-proportional loadings aremultiplied by factori.

directioni

The direction in which the SDOF system vibrates. {X / Y / Z / A / B / C}. Ifdirectioni = A, B or C, the model point given by the POINT parameter must be a node point.

Chap. 5 Display control FOURIERSHOW


FOURIERSHOW VARIABLE POINT SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPRANGE TGAP FMIN FMAX PRESENTATION FACTOR1 FACTOR2 GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTIONSUBFRAME LIST

The FOURIERSHOW command is used to perform a Fourier analysis of the time history of avariable evaluated at a point. Either the Fourier coefficients or the power-spectral-density iscomputed. The mean-square value of the variable over the time interval is printed in the logfile.

VARIABLEThe name of the variable, either a predefined variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant (seeSection 6.9). The variable name must be specified.

POINTThe name of the point at which the variable is evaluated. If the variable is not location-independent, POINT must be defined with a model point definition command (see Section6.7). If the variable is location-independent and POINT is not specified, then the variable isevaluated using the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4).

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing definition used when evaluating the variable. A smoothingdefinition is defined using the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control definition used when evaluating the variable. A result controldefinition is defined using the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).

RESPRANGE [DEFAULT]The name of the response-range that specifies the start and end time over which the variableis evaluated, along with the intermediate times at which the variable is evaluated. Theresponse-range must be of type load-step. See the RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP command inSection 6.4 for further details.

Initially, the default response-range corresponds to all solution times for which data is loaded.

TGAP [0.0]A time interval for which the variable has zero value can be appended to the variable timehistory. TGAP must be greater than or equal to zero.

FOURIERSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


FMIN [0.0]FMAX [CUTOFF]The lowest and highest frequencies for which the Fourier coefficients /power-spectral-density values are evaluated. FMIN cannot be less than zero and FMAXcannot be greater than the aliasing cut-off frequency. FMAX=CUTOFF is interpreted as thealiasing cut-off frequency.

PRESENTATION [AMPLITUDE]If PRESENTATION=AMPLITUDE, the amplitude of the Fourier coefficients is calculated; ifPRESENTATION=PSD, the power-spectral-density corresponding to the Fouriercoefficients is calculated.

FACTOR1 [1.0]FACTOR2 [0.0]The results are multiplied by FACTOR1 and added to FACTOR2 before being plotted orlisted.


CURVEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the curve depiction used to determine how the curve produced by this commandis graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH=YES. You can specify the curve legend,symbols in the curve, etc. with this depiction.

XAXIS [DEFAULT_X]YAXIS [DEFAULT_Y]The names of the axis depictions used to determine how the axes produced by this commandare graphed. These parameters are used only if GRAPH=YES and if this command iscreating a new graph plot. You can specify the axis attributes, for example the range ofvalues contained in the axes, with these depictions. GRAPHDEPICTIONSUBFRAMELISTSee the corresponding parameters of the RESPONSESHOW command (in this section).

Chap. 5 Display control TRACESHOW


TRACESHOW NAME ZONENAME YPLOTTYPE DELTAT GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

TRACESHOW produces a curve giving the residence time distribution data corresponding tothe particle traces in a trace plot. For more information about particle traces and trace plots,see Section 5.8.

In its simplest form, the residence time distribution is a plot of the number of particles in thefluid (or a fluid region) as a function of the time.

The x axis of the plot shows the particle time or solution time, depending upon whether thetrace plot uses quasi-steady flow assumptions or unsteady flow assumptions:

Quasi-steady flow assumptions: The x axis of the plot shows the particle time. Thelowest particle time is the lowest particle time used during any calculation for this traceplot, and the highest particle time is the highest particle time used during any calculationfor this trace plot. If DELTAT=0.0, the particle times are equally spaced usingTRACECALCULATION PSTEP, otherwise the particle times are equally spaced usingincrement DELTAT.

Unsteady flow assumptions: The x axis of the plot shows the actual solution time. Thelowest solution time is the lowest solution time used during any calculation for this traceplot, and the highest solution time is the highest solution time used during any calculationfor this trace plot. If DELTAT=0.0, the solution times are taken from the times at whichADINA-F calculated results; otherwise the solution times are equally spaced usingincrement DELTAT.

The y axis of the plot can show a variety of data items, see parameter YPLOTTYPE.

The trace plot must plot either single unconnected particles (TRACECALCULATIONOPTION=SINGLE) or pathlines (TRACECALCULATION OPTION=PATHLINE). Inaddition, the trace plot must have some particle traces computed; if just the injectors areplotted, the trace plot cannot be used for residence time distribution calculations.

Note that the trace plot must be displayed before TRACESHOW can be used. After you useTRACESHOW, then you can delete the mesh plot, so that the graphics window contains onlythe graph produced by TRACESHOW.

NAME [PREVIOUS]The name of the trace plot from which residence time distribution data is calculated.

TRACESHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]If ZONENAME=WHOLE_MODEL, then the residence time distribution data is calculatedbased on the entire fluid model (in other words, the fluid region is the entire fluid model). Otherwise, the residence time distribution data is calculated based on the elements in the zone(the fluid region is the elements in the zone).

The intent of ZONENAME is to allow you to choose a region of the fluid for calculatingresidence time distribution data.

YPLOTTYPE [TNI]Selects the data plotted on the Y axis.

TNI Total number of particles in the fluid regionTPI Percentage of particles in the fluid regionRNI Rate of change of total number of particles in the fluid regionRPI Rate of change of percentage of particles in the fluid regionVNI Total number of particles that have visited the fluid regionVPI Percentage of particles that have visited the fluid regionTNO Total number of particles not in the fluid regionTPO Percentage of particles not in the fluid regionRNO Rate of change of total number of particles not in the fluid regionRPO Rate of change of percentage of particles not in the fluid regionVNO Total number of particles that have not visited the fluid regionVPO Percentage of particles that have not visited the fluid region

The three letters have the following meanings: T=total quantity, R=rate of change, V=visited;N=number of particles, P=percentage of particles; I=in fluid region, O=not in fluid region.

When a percentage option is chosen, the denominator is the total number of particles that arein the entire fluid model at particle time 0.0 (for steady or quasi-steady flow) or at thereference time of the trace plot (for unsteady flow).

A particle has “visited” the fluid region if it has entered the fluid region at or before thecurrent particle time or solution time. Note that if the fluid region is the entire model, then allparticles immediately visit the fluid region; so the “visiting” options are useful only if thefluid region is a zone of the model.

DELTAT [0.0]The time increment (particle time increment for steady or quasi-steady trace plots) used on theX axis. If DELTAT=0.0, then the program chooses it automatically as described above.

Chap. 5 Display control TRACESHOW



CURVEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the curve depiction used to determine how the curve produced by this commandis graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH=YES. You can specify the curve legend,symbols in the curve, etc. with this depiction.


TFSHOW Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


TFSHOW NCUR ARTM FACTOR TSTART TEND TINCREMENT SOLUTIONTIME REFTIME GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST

TFSHOW produces a curve giving the values of the specified time function for various times. This command provides an easy way to plot a time function.

The time function is taken from the current finite element program, see the FEPROGRAMcommand (in Section 3.4).

NCUR [1]The time function number.

ARTM [0.0]The plotted time function can be shifted by an arrival time, in exactly the same way that thetime function can be shifted by an arrival time when the time function is used by a load.

FACTOR [1.0]The time function is multiplied by FACTOR before it is plotted.

TSTART [(earliest solution time)]TEND [(latest solution time)]The time function is plotted over the range of times given by TSTART and TEND. The rangeTSTART to TEND need not be in the range of solution times.

TINCREMENT [0.0]The time increment used to sample the time function. Note that when the time function doesnot use a time function multiplier, the time function consists of straight lines connectingsuccessive time function values, and TINCREMENT is not used.

SOLUTIONTIME [YES]If SOLUTIONTIME=YES, the time function is also sampled at the solution times, and thetime function sampled at the solution times is marked with a symbol if CURVEDEPICTION=LINE (the default). If SOLUTIONTIME=NO, the time function is only sampled at the timefunction values (and possible time increments selected by TINCREMENT).

REFTIME [(earliest solution time)]REFTIME is used only during post-processing, and is used only if there is more than oneporthole file loaded into the database. In that case, there may be more than one set of timefunctions loaded into the database (because the time functions can change during a restartanalysis). The time functions that are active at time REFTIME are chosen.

Chap. 5 Display control TFSHOW



CURVEDEPICTION [LINE]The name of the curve depiction used to determine how the curve produced by this commandis graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH=YES. You can specify the curve legend,symbols in the curve, etc. with this depiction.


Notes

The time function is sampled at times taken from the following three lists:

1) List of times in the time function itself, always used.

2) List of times with constant increment TINCREMENT, used is the time function has amultiplier function.

3) List of solution times, used if SOLUTIONTIME=YES. During pre-processing, the listis taken from the current time step information. During post-processing, the list is takenfrom the actual solution times.

GRAPHPLOT Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


GRAPHPLOT NAME TYPE NUMBER DEPICTION

GRAPHPLOT provides a way for you to modify the appearance of an existing graph plot. You do this by specifying a new depiction name for the graph depiction or one of the curvedepictions of the graph plot.

NAMEThe name of the graph plot. This parameter must be entered.

TYPEThe type of the depiction entered with the remaining parameters of this command. Thisparameter must be entered. {GRAPH / AXIS / CURVE}

NUMBERThe number of the axis or curve for which the depiction will be applied. You can determinethe number by using the LOCATOR INQUIRE feature (see Section 4.2) and clicking on thedesired axis or curve. This parameter must be entered if TYPE = AXIS or CURVE.

DEPICTION [the current depiction]The name of the depiction used to specify the desired graph, axis or curve attributes. IfTYPE = GRAPH, this must be a graph depiction, if TYPE = AXIS, this must be an axisdepiction, etc.

Chap. 5 Display control GRAPHSTYLE


GRAPHSTYLE NAME CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME

GRAPHSTYLE defines a style for the graphing section of the SHOW commands. A style isa group of depictions. When a style is used in a SHOW command, the depictions in the styleare the default depictions for the command.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the graph style. If there is a previously defined graph style with this name, dataentered in this command modifies the graph style, otherwise data entered in this commanddefines a new graph style.

CURVEDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the curve depiction, used to specify how the curves added by the SHOWcommand are graphed. A curve depiction is defined using the CURVEDEPICTIONcommand (in this section).

XAXIS [DEFAULT_X]YAXIS [DEFAULT_Y]The name of the axis depictions, used to specify how the axes added by the SHOWcommands are graphed. An axis depiction is defined using the AXIS command (in thissection).

GRAPHDEPICTION [DEFAULT]The name of the graph depiction, used to specify certain attributes of the graph itself. Agraph depiction is defined using the GRAPHDEPICTION command (in this section).

SUBFRAME [DEFAULT]The name of the subframe into which the graph is plotted. A subframe is defined using theSUBFRAME command (see Section 5.1).

GRAPHLIST Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


GRAPHLIST NAME

GRAPHLIST produces a listing from the curves of a graph plot. The listing is the same asthat produced using the LIST = YES feature of the SHOW commands.

NAMEThe name of the graph plot. This parameter must be entered.

Chap. 5 Display control GRAPHDEPICTION


GRAPHDEPICTION NAME TITLE TITLESIZE UNITTSIZE TITLECOLOR TITLEPLACEMENT TITLEXSTART UNITTXSTART TITLEYSTART UNITTYSTART TITLESCALE GRAPHSCALE BOX BOXLINEWIDTH UNITBLWIDTH BOXCOLOR BOXPLACEMENT BOXWIDTH UNITBWIDTH BOXHEIGHT UNITBHEIGHT BOXXOFFSET UNITBXOFF BOXYOFFSET UNITBYOFF

titlei

GRAPHDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing a graph. The attributes that youcan set in this command can be grouped as follows:

1) Graph box attributes2) Graph title attributes

You assign a name, the graph depiction name, to the attributes set by this command. Whenyou use a command that creates or modifies a graph plot, specify the graph depiction namecorresponding to the desired graph attributes within the command.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the graph depiction. If there is a previously defined graph depiction with thisname, data entered in this command modifies the graph depiction, otherwise data entered inthis command creates a new graph depiction.

TITLE [AUTOMATIC]NONE the graph will be drawn without a title.

AUTOMATIC the graph will be drawn with a title that is determined automatically whenthe graph is drawn.

CUSTOM the graph will be drawn with a title that is entered via the data input lines.

TITLESIZE [0.25]UNITTSIZE [CM]The size of characters in the title, used only when drawing a graph title. {CM / INCH /PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

TITLECOLOR [CYAN]The color of the title, used only when drawing a graph title.

GRAPHDEPICTION Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


TITLEPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]This parameter is used only when drawing a graph title.

AUTOMATIC Specifies that the title location be calculated automatically by the programwhen the graph is drawn.

CUSTOM Specifies the title location using the parameters described below.

TITLEXSTART [0.0]UNITTXSTART [CM]TITLEYSTART [0.0]UNITTYSTART [CM]The X and Y coordinates of the start of the title, specified within the subframe coordinatesystem. These parameters are used only when drawing a graph title and when the titleplacement parameter is CUSTOM. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

TITLESCALE [1.0]A scale factor applied to the title, used only when drawing a graph title. A scale factorgreater than 1.0 magnifies the graph title, a scale factor less than 1.0 shrinks the graph title.

GRAPHSCALE [1.0]A scale factor applied to the graph box. A scale factor greater than 1.0 magnifies the graphbox, a scale factor less than 1.0 shrinks the graph box.

BOX [YES]Specifies whether or not a graph box is drawn. Notice that the graph box is used to place theaxes even if the graph box is not drawn. {YES / NO}

BOXLINEWIDTH [0.0]UNITBLWIDTH [CM]The width of the graph box lines, used only when drawing the graph box. Unit: {CM /INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

BOXCOLOR [CYAN]The color of the graph box lines, used only when drawing graph box lines.

BOXPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]Governs how the graph box is placed within the subframe. If this parameter is AUTOMATIC,the program automatically places the graph box within the subframe. If this parameter isCUSTOM, the parameters BOXWIDTH, UNITBWIDTH, BOXHEIGHT, UNITBHEIGHT,BOXXOFFSET, UNITBXOFF, BOXYOFFSET, UNITBYOFF unit are used to place thegraph box.

Chap. 5 Display control GRAPHDEPICTION


BOXWIDTHUNITBWIDTH [PERCENT]BOXHEIGHTUNITBHEIGHT [PERCENT]The width and height of the graph box, used only if BOXPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. Unit:{CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

BOXXOFFSETUNITBXOFF [PERCENT]BOXYOFFSETUNITBYOFF [PERCENT]The X and Y offset of the graph box from the subframe origin, used only ifBOXPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. Unit: {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

titlei

Text input for title if TITLE = CUSTOM.

AXIS Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


AXIS NAME MINVALUE MAXVALUE AXISTYPE AXISCOLOR AXISLINEWIDTH UNITLWIDTH NUMBERSIZE UNITNSIZE ZEROLINE GRIDLINES MINORTICKS AXISPLACEMENT AXISXSTART UNITAXSTART AXISYSTART UNITAYSTART AXISLENGTH UNITALENGTH LABEL LABELCOLOR LABELSIZE UNITLSIZE LABELPLACEMENT LABELXSTART UNITLXSTART LABELYSTART UNITLYSTART LABELSCALE TICKDIRECTION RESCALING

labeli

AXIS defines attributes used when drawing axes (either X or Y axes) of a graph plot. Theattributes that you can set can be grouped as follows:

1) Axis range and type 2) Axis drawing attributes 3) Axis location and length 4) Axis label attributes

You assign a name, the axis depiction name, to the attributes set by this command. When youuse a command that creates or modifies a graph plot, specify the axis depiction namecorresponding to the desired axis attributes within the command.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the axis depiction. If there is a previously defined axis depiction with this name,data entered in this command modifies the axis depiction, otherwise data entered in thiscommand creates a new axis depiction.

MINVALUE [AUTOMATIC]MAXVALUE [AUTOMATIC]The minimum and maximum values that the axis must contain. For each value, you can eitherenter a number or AUTOMATIC to specify that the program will automatically calculate avalue whenever the axis is used.

AXISTYPE [LINEAR]Enter LINEAR for a linear axis or LOGARITHMIC for a logarithmic (base 10) axis.

AXISCOLOR [CYAN]The color of the axis.

AXISLINEWIDTH [0.0]UNITLWIDTH [CM]The width of axis lines, including tick marks, the axis zero line and the axis grid lines. {CM/ INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

Chap. 5 Display control AXIS


NUMBERSIZE [0.25]UNITNSIZE [CM]The size of the axis numbers. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

ZEROLINE [YES]Indicates whether to draw a line at the axis zero value, see figure at the beginning of thissection. {YES / NO}

GRIDLINES [NO]Indicates whether to draw lines at each major tick value, see figure at the beginning of thissection. {YES / NO}

MINORTICKS [AUTOMATIC]Between successive major ticks, minor ticks (unlabelled ticks) can be drawn. Enter 0 (zero)for no minor ticks, a positive number for the desired number of minor ticks or AUTOMATICto specify that the number of minor ticks be computed automatically when the axis is used.

AXISPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]Enter AUTOMATIC to specify that the axis location and length be calculated automatically bythe program when the axis is used. Enter CUSTOM to specify the axis location and lengthusing the parameters described below.

AXISXSTART [0.0]UNITAXSTART [PERCENT]AXISYSTART [0.0]UNITAYSTART [PERCENT]The X and Y coordinates of the start of the axis, specified relative to the graph box coordinatesystem. These parameters are used only if AXISPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. Note that ifeither unit is PERCENT, the corresponding coordinate is interpreted as a percentage withinthe graph box coordinate system. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

AXISLENGTH [100]UNITALENGTH [PERCENT]The length of the axis, specified relative to the graph box coordinate system. Theseparameters are used only if AXISPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. Note that if the unit isPERCENT, the length is interpreted as a percentage within the graph box coordinate system. For example, if the axis is used as an X axis, the length is interpreted as a percentage alongthe graph box X axis. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

LABEL [AUTOMATIC]If LABEL = NONE, the axis will be drawn without a label. If LABEL = AUTOMATIC, theaxis will be drawn with a label that is determined automatically when the axis is used. If

AXIS Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


LABEL = CUSTOM, the axis will be drawn with a label that is entered as input data lines tothis command.

LABELCOLOR [CYAN]The color of the label, used only when drawing an axis label.

LABELSIZE [0.25]UNITLSIZE [CM]The size of characters in the label, used only when drawing an axis label. {CM / INCH /PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

LABELPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]This parameter is used only when drawing an axis label. Enter AUTOMATIC to specify thatthe label location be calculated automatically by the program when the axis is used. EnterCUSTOM to specify the label location using the parameters described below.

LABELXSTART [0.0]UNITLXSTART [PERCENT]LABELYSTART [0.0]UNITLYSTART [PERCENT]The x and y coordinates of the start of the label, specified within the subframe coordinatesystem. These parameters are used only when drawing a label and whenLABELPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

LABELSCALE [1.0]A scale factor applied to the label, used only when drawing a label. A scale factor greaterthan 1.0 magnifies the axis label, a scale factor less than 1.0 shrinks the axis label.

TICKDIRECTION [OUT]The direction of the axis ticks, either IN (towards the graph curves) or OUT (away from thegraph curves).

RESCALING [YES]When MINVALUE or MAXVALUE is AUTOMATIC, the axis is rescaled if either: 1) this isthe first curve in the graph in which the axis is used or 2) RESCALING is YES.

Note that if RESCALING is YES, the axis scaling is based upon all curves in the graph, but ifRESCALING is NO, the axis scaling is based upon the first curve in the graph.

Chap. 5 Display control AXIS


The purpose of this parameter is to allow you to automatically set the axis scaling based onthe first curve in the graph and then have all remaining curves use the same axis scaling. Toachieve this, set MINVALUE and MAXVALUE to AUTOMATIC and RESCALING to NO.

labeli

Text input data lines for axis depiction label.

CURVEDEPICTION Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


CURVEDEPICTION NAME SYMBOLPLOT SYMBOL SYMBOLSIZE UNITSSIZE SYMBOLCOLOR SYMBOLSKIP LINETYPE LINECOLOR LINEWIDTH UNITLWIDTH XLINE XLINECOLOR XLINEWIDTH UNITXLWIDTH LEGEND LEGENDSIZE UNITLSIZE LEGENDCOLOR LEGENDSYMBOL LEGENDPLACEMENT LEGENDXSTART UNITLXSTART LEGENDYSTART UNITLYSTART LEGENDSCALE

legendi

CURVEDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing a curve within a graph plot. Theattributes that you can set can be grouped as follows:

1) Curve symbol attributes 2) Curve line attributes 3) Curve legend attributes

You assign a name, the curve depiction name, to the attributes set by this command. Whenyou use a command that creates or modifies a graph plot, specify the curve depiction namecorresponding to the desired curve attributes within the command.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the curve depiction. If there is a previously defined curve depiction with thisname, data entered in this command modifies the curve depiction, otherwise data entered inthis command creates a new curve depiction.

SYMBOLPLOT [YES]Enter NO for no symbol plotting or YES for symbol plotting. If NO is entered, the values ofparameters SYMBOL, UNITSSIZE, SYMBOLCOLOR and SYMBOLSKIP are ignored.

SYMBOL [CURVE]The string (up to 30 characters long) that specifies the symbol to plot at points on the curve. Use the extended character convention to enter a special symbol or CURVE to specify that thesymbol string is based on the curve number. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for theextended character convention.

SYMBOLSIZE [3]UNITSSIZE [PIXELS]The size of curve symbols. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

Chap. 5 Display control CURVEDEPICTION


SYMBOLCOLOR [' ']The color of curve symbols. You can enter a blank string ' ' to specify that the symbolcolor is based on the curve number.

SYMBOLSKIP [AUTOMATIC]The curve can be marked with the symbol at none, some or all of the curve points:

If SYMBOLSKIP = AUTOMATIC, those curve points designated by the command thatcreated the curve are marked with the symbol. If SYMBOLSKIP = 0, all curve points aremarked with the symbol. If SYMBOLSKIP is a positive integer, then between every pointmarked with the symbol, SYMBOLSKIP points are not marked with the symbol (for example,if SYMBOLSKIP = 3, then the first, fourth, seventh, ..., curve points are marked with thesymbol).

LINETYPE [SOLID]Enter NONE for no lines connecting curve points or SOLID for solid lines connecting curvepoints.

LINECOLOR [' ']The color of the curve lines, used only when drawing curve lines. You can enter a blankstring ' ' to specify that the curve line color is chosen from the curve number.

LINEWIDTH [0.0]UNITLWIDTH [CM]The width of the curve lines, used only when drawing curve lines. {CM / INCH /PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

XLINE [NO]Indicates whether to draw "X-Lines" between the curve points and the X axis (these lines areparallel to the Y axis). {YES / NO}

XLINECOLOR [' ']The color of the X-lines, used only when drawing X-lines. You can specify a blank string '' to specify that the X-line color is chosen from the curve number.

XLINEWIDTH [0.0]UNITXLWIDTH [CM]The width of the X-lines, used only when drawing X-lines. {CM / INCH / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

CURVEDEPICTION Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting


LEGEND [AUTOMATIC]If LEGEND = NONE, the curve will be drawn without a legend. If LEGEND =AUTOMATIC, the curve will be drawn with a legend that is determined automatically. IfLEGEND = CUSTOM, the curve will be drawn with a legend that is entered as data input linesto this command.

LEGENDSIZE [0.25]UNITLSIZE [CM]The size of characters in the legend, used only when drawing a curve legend. {CM / INCH/ PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}

LEGENDCOLOR [' ']The color of the legend, used only when drawing a curve legend. You can enter a blankstring ' ' to specify that the legend color is chosen using the curve number.

LEGENDSYMBOL [YES]Indicates whether the curve symbol should be automatically prepended to the curve legend. {YES / NO}

LEGENDPLACEMENT [AUTOMATIC]This parameter is used only when drawing a curve legend. Enter AUTOMATIC to specify thatthe legend location be calculated automatically by the program when the curve is drawn. Enter CUSTOM to specify the legend location using the parameters described below.

LEGENDXSTART [0.0]UNITLXSTART [PERCENT]LEGENDYSTART [0.0]UNITLYSTART [PERCENT]The X and Y coordinates of the start of the legend, specified within the subframe coordinatesystem. These parameters are used only when drawing a curve legend and when the legendplacement parameter is CUSTOM. Units: {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

LEGENDSCALE [1.0]A scale factor applied to the legend, used only when drawing a curve legend. A scale factorgreater than 1.0 magnifies the curve legend, a scale factor less than 1.0 shrinks the curvelegend.

legendi

Data input lines containing the legend, used only if LEGEND = CUSTOM.

Chap. 5 Display control CURVEDEPICTION



Movie frames and animations – Introduction Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations


Movie frames and animations – Introduction

The commands in this section are used to create and display animations.

An animation consists of a sequence of frames called a movie. Each movie is assigned anumber, called a movie number. Movie numbers are sequential starting from 1. Each framein the movie is called a movie frame. The frames are sequentially numbered starting from 1.

A movie frame can be thought of as a snapshot of the graphics window. Each movie frame isstored in device-independent form in the database. (Do not confuse a movie frame with asnapshot file produced by the SNAPSHOT command (in Section 3.3).)

Creating animations

To create an animation, first plot mesh plots, band plots, load plots, etc. You can use themouse to reposition and resize the mesh plots. The contents of the graphics window willbecome a single representative frame in the animation.

There are several commands that you can use to create the movie frames in an animation:MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP: animates the response of the model as a function oftime.

MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE: animates the model moving through a mode shape.

MOVIESHOOT ROTATE: animates the rotation of the model.

MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE: animates the motion of a cutting plane.

MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE: animates the motion of a cutting isosurface bychanging the cutting isosurface threshold value.

MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT: animates the motion of a quasi-steady particle trace bychanging the particle time.

These commands are described in detail later in this section.

In all cases, you specify the movie number of the animation. All of the movie frames createdby a MOVIESHOOT command belong to that movie number.

When you enter a MOVIESHOOT command, the AUI regenerates the graphics window foreach solution time, mode shape angle, rotation angle, etc. You will see each frame as theAUI regenerates it. (The time required by the AUI to create each movie frame is much longerthan the time required to play back the movie frame during the animation.)

Chap. 5 Display control Movie frames and animations – Introduction


It is also possible to create a single movie frame from the current graphics window using theMOVIEFRAME command, see the command description later in this section for details.

Playing back animations and saving animations to disk

Use the ANIMATE command to play back an animation. See the ANIMATE commanddescription later in this section for details.

When the ANIMATE command is invoked, the movie frames of the specified movie are readfrom the database and processed into device-dependent display lists. Once this initialprocessing is complete, the movie frames are drawn into the graphics window.

Animations can be performed at any computer terminal / PC / X terminal, although the speedand quality of animations is computer and graphics terminal dependent. Animations can beperformed over an X Window network.

After the animation is played back, the last movie frame remains in the graphics window untilyou use the REFRESH command (in this section) to redisplay the contents of the graphicswindow or until you use the FRAME command (in Section 5.1) to clear the graphics window.

Use the MOVIESAVE command (in Section 3.3) to save the frames in a movie to disk. Oncethe frames are saved to disk, you can convert the disk file to commonly used PC formats, seethe AUI Primer, problem 7, for an example.

Use the SHOW MOVIEFRAME command to dump each frame in a movie to an image file. See the MOVIEFRAME command description later in this section for details.

MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations


MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP TSTART TEND FRAMES MOVIENUMBER

MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots and theirattachments, such as band plots, over a range of solution times.

All movie frames created by this command are placed into the specified movie number. Anyexisting movie frames for the specified movie number are automatically deleted.

TSTART [EARLIEST]TEND [LATEST]The start and end times in the range of solution times. You can enter a solution time or thewords EARLIEST or LATEST for each of these parameters. LATEST means the latestsolution time for which there are displacements (ADINA model), temperatures (ADINA-Tmodel) or velocities (ADINA-F model) in the database.

FRAMES [AUTOMATIC]The total number of movie frames to create in this command. You can enter an integergreater than or equal to 2, in which case the AUI divides the solution time range into equalincrements and generates a movie frame for each increment. You can also enter the wordAUTOMATIC, in which case the AUI uses all solution times within the range of solution timesfor which results were computed.

MOVIENUMBER [highest defined movie number + 1]The movie number into which the generated movie frames are placed. Any existing movieframes are deleted. If you specify a movie number higher than the highest defined movienumber, the AUI creates a new movie number and places the generated movie frames withinit.

Chap. 5 Display control MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE


MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE ANGLESTART ANGLEEND FRAMES MOVIENUMBER

MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots andtheir attachments, such as band plots, varying the eigenvector scaling factor sinusoidally overa range of angles.

The typical use of MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE is to create movie frames that show oneperiod of the structural motion as the structure moves in one of its mode shapes.

For each displayed mesh plot, the mode shape that is animated is the mode shapecorresponding to the mesh plot. It is possible to generate movie frames showing severalmeshes moving in several mode shapes simultaneously by first displaying mesh plots forthese mode shapes, then using this command. (In this case, each mode shape will appear tohave the same natural frequency.)


The movie frames created by this command can be easily animated using the ANIMATEcommand (in this section). The CYCLES parameter of the ANIMATE command replays theanimation through an arbitrary number of cycles. The default values of the MOVIESHOOTMODE-SHAPE parameters are chosen so that the resulting animation shows the structuremoving through CYCLES periods in one of its mode shapes.

ANGLESTART [0.0]ANGLEEND [AUTOMATIC]The start and end angles in the angular range, entered in degrees. ANGLEEND can also bethe word AUTOMATIC, in which case ANGLEEND is computed using the formula

ANGLEEND = ANGLESTART + 360.0×(FRAMES - 1)/FRAMES

This choice of formula allows you to play back the animation using multiple cycles, as theangular increment between the last movie frame of a cycle and the first movie frame of thenext cycle is then the same as all of the other angular increments.

FRAMES [20]The total number of movie frames to create in this command. In all cases the angular range isdivided into equal increments and a movie frame is generated for each increment, as well asfor the angles ANGLESTART and ANGLEEND. FRAMES must be greater than or equal to2.

MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations


MOVIENUMBER [(highest defined movie number + 1)]The movie number into which the generated movie frames are placed. Any existing movieframes for this movie number are deleted. If you specify a movie number higher than thehighest defined movie number, the AUI creates a new movie number and places the generatedmovie frames within it.

Notes

1) The eigenvector scaling factor is computed as

FACTOR = COS(ANGLE), where

ANGLE = ANGLESTART, ANGLESTART + ANGINC, ... , ANGLEEND,

and ANGINC = (ANGLEEND - ANGLESTART)/(FRAMES - 1)

When ANGLEEND is chosen automatically, ANGINC = 360.0/FRAMES.

2) The scaling factor is applied to the eigenvectors and also to the modal stresses, forces andreactions.

Chap. 5 Display control MOVIESHOOT ROTATE


MOVIESHOOT ROTATE AXISROTATE ANGLESTART ANGLEEND ANGLESENSE FRAMES MOVIENUMBER

MOVIESHOOT ROTATE creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots and theirattachments, such as band plots, varying the view rotation of the mesh plots over a range ofangles.

The typical use of MOVIESHOOT ROTATE is to create movie frames showing the meshplots rotating completely around an axis.


When you use this command, the AUI regenerates the graphics window for each movieframe. The time required by the AUI to create each movie frame is much longer than the timerequired to play back the movie frame during animation.

The movie frames created by this command can be easily animated using the ANIMATEcommand (in this section). You can use the CYCLES parameter of the ANIMATE commandto replay the animation through an arbitrary number of cycles. The default values of theMOVIESHOOT ROTATE parameters are chosen so that the resulting animation shows thestructure rotating CYCLES times around an axis.

AXISROTATE [VIEWX]The axis about which the mesh plots are rotated.

VIEWX Horizontal axis of the mesh as currently plotted.

VIEWY Vertical axis of the mesh as currently plotted.

VIEWZ Axis perpendicular to the graphics window.

MODELX Axis parallel to the x axis of the model.

MODELY Axis parallel to the y axis of the model.

MODELZ Axis parallel to the z axis of the model.

ANGLESTART [AUTOMATIC]ANGLEEND [360.0]The start and end angles in the angular range, entered in degrees. ANGLESTART can alsobe the word AUTOMATIC, in which case ANGLESTART is computed using the formula

ANGLESTART = ANGLEEND - 360.0 * (FRAMES - 1)/FRAMES.

MOVIESHOOT ROTATE Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations


This choice of formula allows you to play back the animation using multiple cycles, as theangular increment between the last movie frame of a cycle and the first movie frame of thenext cycle is the same as the angular increment between each of the movie frames.

ANGLESENSE [POSITIVE]The sense of rotation around the axis. {POSITIVE / NEGATIVE}

FRAMES [20]The total number of movie frames to create in this command. In all cases the angular range isdivided into equal increments and a movie frame is generated for each increment, as well asfor the angles ANGLESTART and ANGLEEND. FRAMES must be greater than or equal to2.

MOVIENUMBER [(highest defined movie number) + 1]The movie number into which the generated movie frames are placed. Any existing movieframes for this movie number are deleted. If you specify a movie number higher than thehighest defined movie number, the AUI creates a new movie number and places the generatedmovie frames within it.

Chap. 5 Display control MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE


MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE START END FRAMES MOVIENUMBER

MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots and theirattachments, such as band plots, shifting the cutting plane along its normal in each frame.

Only those mesh plots in which a cutting surface of type cutplane is used are affected by thiscommand. See the CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE command in Section 5.2 for informationabout defining cutting surfaces of type cutplane.

All movie frames created by this command are placed into the specified movie number. Anyexisting movie frames for the specified movie are automatically deleted.

START [LOWEST]END [HIGHEST]The coordinates giving the first cutting plane and the last cutting plane location. Thecoordinate is measured from the origin of the cutting plane in the direction of the cuttingplane normal. LOWEST means the lowest coordinate for which the cutting plane intersectsthe mesh plot and HIGHEST means the highest coordinate for which the cutting planeintersects the mesh plot.

FRAMES [20]The total number of movie frames to create in this command. The cutting plane coordinate isdivided into equal increments between START and END and a movie frame is generated foreach increment, as well as for coordinates START and END. {� 2}

MOVIENUMBER [highest defined movie number + 1]The movie number into which the generated movie frames are placed. Any existing movieframes for this movie number are deleted. If you specify a movie number higher than thehighest defined movie number, the AUI creates a new movie number and places the generatedmovie frames into it.

MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations


MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE START END FRAMES MOVIENUMBER

MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots andtheir attachments, such as band plots, shifting the threshold value for the cutting isosurfacevalue in each frame.

Only those mesh plots in which a cutting surface of type isosurface is used are affected bythis command. See the CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE command in Section 5.2 forinformation about defining cutting surfaces of type isosurface.

All movie frames created by this command are placed into the specified movie number. Anyexisting movie frames for the specified movie are automatically deleted.

START [LOWEST]END [HIGHEST]The start and end threshold values. LOWEST means the lowest value in the meshplot andHIGHEST means the highest value in the meshplot.

FRAMES [20]The total number of movie frames to create in this command. The threshold value is dividedinto equal increments between START and END and a movie frame is generated for eachincrement, as well as for threshold values START and END. {� 2}.

MOVIENUMBER [highest defined movie number + 1]The movie number into which the generated movie frames are placed. Any existing movieframes for this movie number are deleted. If you specify a movie number higher than thehighest defined movie number, the AUI creates a new movie number and places the generatedmovie frames into it.

Chap. 5 Display control MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT


MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT PTIMESTART PTIMEEND FRAMES MOVIENUMBER

MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT creates movie frames by regenerating all quasi-steady traceplots, varying the particle time. See the introduction to Section 5.8 for information abouttrace plots. Using this command, you can animate the particle motions of quasi-steady traceplots.

PTIMESTART [lowest particle time of any traceplot]PTIMEEND [highest particle time of any traceplot]The start and end particle times. PTIMESTART can be greater than PTIMEEND to show theparticle traces evolving upstream.

FRAMES [21]The total number of movie frames to create in this command. In all cases the particle timerange is divided into equal increments and a movie frame is generated for each particle time. FRAMES must be greater than or equal to 2.

MOVIENUMBER [(highest defined movie number + 1)]The movie number into which the generated movie frames are placed. Any existing movieframes for this movie number are deleted. If you specify a movie number higher than thehighest defined movie number, the AUI creates a new movie number and places the generatedmovie frames within it.

MOVIEFRAME Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations


MOVIEFRAME MOVIENUMBER FRAMENUMBER

MOVIEFRAME creates a movie frame from the graphics displayed in the graphics window.

Movie frames are automatically renumbered when additional movie frames are inserted, orwhen movie frames are deleted, so that movie frames and movie numbers always havesequential numbering without gaps starting from 1.

MOVIENUMBER [highest defined movie number + 1]The movie number into which the movie frame is added. You can begin a new movie numberby specifying a number larger than the last defined movie number. {1 to (highest defined movie number + 1)}

FRAMENUMBER [highest defined frame number for the specified movie number]

The movie frame is inserted after the movie frame with number FRAMENUMBER. FRAMENUMBER can be between 0 and the highest defined frame number for the movie.

Auxiliary commands

SHOW MOVIEFRAME MOVIENUMBER FIRST LAST COMMANDPlots the movie frames of the specified movie number in the specified range onto thecurrent graphics window. To specify a single movie frame, do not specify a value forparameter LAST.

When you specify a range of movie frames, the AUI draws the movie frames rapidly insequence. The frames will appear to flicker and the result will not be as pleasing as whenthe ANIMATE command (in this section) is used.

Parameter COMMAND is used to submit a command to the operating system after eachframe is displayed. Typically the command is used to dump the graphics window to animage file. The command can include the special variables @W (which substitutes thewindow ID of the graphics window), @F (which substitutes the current frame number) or@[1-9]F (which substitutes the current frame number formatted using 1 to 9 digits). Note that @F and @5F are identical. The characters W and F can be either upper or lowercase.

Parameter COMMAND can only be used for UNIX versions of the AUI.

As an example showing the use of the COMMAND parameter, for UNIX versions of theAUI, the command

SHOW MOVIEFRAME COMMAND='xwd -id @w -out [email protected]'

Chap. 5 Display control MOVIEFRAME


shows the current movie, running the xwd command after each frame is shown. Theframes are saved in image files demo00001.xwd, demo00002.xwd, etc. in xwd format.

While the AUI is running the SHOW MOVIEFRAME command, you should ensure thatthe AUI graphics window remains visible at all times.

The resolution of the image files will be the same as the resolution of the AUI graphicswindow. You can resize the AUI graphics window before using SHOW MOVIEFRAMEif you want to adjust the image file resolution.

The last movie frame will remain on the graphics window until the REFRESH command(in this section) is used to redisplay the contents of the graphics window or the FRAMEcommand (in Section 5.1) is used to clear the graphics window.

LIST MOVIEFRAME MOVIENUMBER FIRST LASTLists information about the movie frames of a specified movie number. If nothing isspecified for MOVIENUMBER, the AUI lists summary information about all of thedefined movie numbers and movie frames.

DELETE MOVIEFRAME MOVIENUMBER FIRST LASTDeletes the specified movie frames of the specified movie number.

RESET MOVIEFRAMEDeletes all movie frames of all movie numbers.

ANIMATE Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations


ANIMATE MOVIENUMBER CYCLES METHOD METHODOPTION MINDELAY MAXDELAY SWAPINTERVAL

ANIMATE draws the movie frames of the specified movie very rapidly in the graphicswindow, producing an animation effect.

ANIMATE does not create movie frames. To create movie frames, see the MOVIEFRAMEand MOVIESHOOT commands in this section.

MOVIENUMBER [highest defined movie number]The number of the movie to animate.

CYCLES [1]The number of times to repeat the animation sequence.

METHOD [AUTOMATIC]METHODOPTION [plotting system dependent]The method that the AUI uses to perform the animation. If METHOD = AUTOMATIC, theAUI selects the method automatically. If METHOD = CUSTOM, the AUI uses the methodselected by METHODOPTION.

METHODOPTION can be DOUBLEBUFFER, BITBLIT or IMMEDIATEDRAW. DOUBLEBUFFER means that the graphics window memory is divided into two buffers, front(which is displayed) and back (which is not displayed); the AUI draws the movie frame intothe back buffer, then swaps buffers to display the movie frame. BITBLIT means that theAUI renders the movie frame into off-screen memory, then copies the memory to on-screenmemory (the copying process is a bitblit process). IMMEDIATEDRAW means that the AUIimmediately draws the movie frame into the graphics window; this process does not workvery well and should be used only when the other methods cannot be used for some reason.

The possible values for METHODOPTION depend on the plotting system. For the XWindow System, METHODOPTION can be DOUBLEBUFFER, BITBLIT andIMMEDIATEDRAW; the default is BITBLIT (DOUBLEBUFFER may not be available for allX Window implementations). For OpenGL, METHODOPTION can be DOUBLEBUFFER orIMMEDIATEDRAW; the default is DOUBLEBUFFER. For Windows GDI,METHODOPTION can be BITBLIT and IMMEDIATEDRAW; the default is BITBLIT.

MINDELAY [0]MAXDELAY [0]When the plotting system is the X Window System and METHOD = DOUBLEBUFFER,MINDELAY and MAXDELAY are interpreted as follows: MINDELAY is the minimumtime (in milliseconds) to delay before swapping buffers and MAXDELAY is the maximum

Chap. 5 Display control ANIMATE


time (in milliseconds) within which X Window swaps buffers after the time interval specifiedby MINDELAY.

When the plotting system is OpenGL or METHOD = BITBLIT, MINDELAY controls thespeed of animation playback, with 0 meaning the fastest possible playback speed and largervalues slowing down the playback speed.

Both MINDELAY and MAXDELAY are integer parameters.

SWAPINTERVAL [0]When OpenGL is used and METHOD=DOUBLEBUFFER, SWAPINTERVAL gives theminimum number of retraces between buffer swaps. SWAPINTERVAL = 0 andSWAPINTERVAL = 1 are the same and result in fastest possible animation playback. Higher numbers slow down the animation playback.

SWAPINTERVAL can be used only when both the client and server support theGLX_SGI_swap_control extension; SGI computers support this extension and othercomputers may support it as well. However, this extension is not available under MSWindows.

Note: After you run the ANIMATE command and before you create another movie, theparameter default values are replaced by the last entered values. For example

MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEPANIMATE CYCLES=5 (repeats the animation 5 times)ANIMATE (still repeats the animation 5 times)MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP (clears the last entered values for the parameters)ANIMATE (repeats the animation once)

REFRESH Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations


REFRESH

REFRESH redraws the graphics window. As a side effect, any currently displayed movieframe, either from the SHOW MOVIEFRAME command or from the ANIMATE command,is cleared (these commands are described in this section).

Chap. 5 Display control REFRESH



TEXT Sec. 5.12 User defined plotting


TEXT NAME XP YP HEIGHT ANGLE SPACING SCALE COLOR SUBFRAME BOX UNITXP UNITYP UNITHEIGHT UNITSPACING

stringi

TEXT draws strings of alphanumeric characters in a plotting subframe.

The text created by this command can be manipulated with the mouse (see Section 4.2).

NAMEThe name specifying the text. This name is defined by the USERTEXT command (in thissection). If no name is specified, the text is read from the data input lines of this command.

XP [50.0]YP [50.0]The coordinates of the first character in the first string. The coordinates are measured in theplotting subframe coordinate system.

HEIGHT [1.0]The height of the plotted characters.

ANGLE [0.0]The angle (in degrees) between the strings and the plotting subframe XP axis.

SPACING [1.5]The distance between two successive character baselines.

SCALE [1.0]The text is scaled by this scale factor before plotting. A scale factor greater than 1.0corresponds to an enlargement of the text; a scale factor less than 1.0 corresponds to ashrinking of the text. The scale factor must be greater than zero.

COLOR [INVERSE]The color of the plotted characters.

SUBFRAME [DEFAULT]The name of the subframe within which the text is plotted. A subframe is defined by theSUBFRAME command (see Section 5.1).

BOX [NO]Specifies whether or not a box is drawn around the plotting subframe. {YES / NO}

Chap. 5 Display control TEXT


UNITXP [PERCENT]UNITYP [PERCENT]The units associated with XP and YP. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

UNITHEIGHT [PERCENT]The unit associated with HEIGHT. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

UNITSPACING [HEIGHTS]The unit associated with SPACING. If UNITSPACING = HEIGHTS, SPACING = Xcorresponds to a distance of . {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS / HEIGHTS}

stringi

A string of at most 80 characters. The string can contain characters, character codes andcharacter functions. The string must be entered in single quotes, which are not treated as partof the string.

CharacterAny keyboard character, with the exception of @.

Character codeTwo numbers, the character set and the character number, that uniquely specify thecharacter. These are entered in the format

@C[(set),(number)]

For example:

@C[0,(number)]: ASCII character for the given number. For example, @C[0,65]draws an uppercase A and @C[0,64] draws @.

@C[1,(number)]: Special character. The number can be from 1 to 24, as shown inthe following table:

TEXT Sec. 5.12 User defined plotting


Character functionA function that modifies the characters that follow it. Functions are:

@F^ (superscript all following characters)@F_ (subscript all following characters)@FN (end of superscripting or subscripting)

Format codeA code that alters the placement of characters. Normally all characters on anentered line are drawn in order and characters on different input lines are plottedon different lines. You can use the following format codes to alter the placementof characters:

@N All characters after this code are placed on a new line.

@I[(heights)] The next character code is drawn at a distance of (heights)×HEIGHT fromthe beginning of the line. This code can be used to vertically aligncharacters. It is most useful when the plotting system uses aproportionally-spaced font. (Heights) can be a real number.

@,When this code is entered at the end of a line, the carriage return issuppressed.

You can enter an arbitrary number of strings.

Example 1

TEXT'abcABC''abc@C[1,3]''x@F_ij@FN = y@F^kl@FN''abc@,''ABC'DATAEND

plots

abcABCabc+xij = ykl

abcABC

Chap. 5 Display control TEXT


Example 2

TEXT‘This is a very long string @,’‘that goes on and on and on.’DATAEND

plots

This is a very long string that goes on and on and on.

USERTEXT Sec. 5.12 User defined plotting


USERTEXT NAME

stringi

USERTEXT defines text strings (a usertext) that can be plotted using the TEXT command (inthis section).

NAMEThe name of the usertext. If there is a previously defined usertext with this name, dataentered in this command is used to modify that usertext. If there is no previously definedusertext with this name, this command creates a new usertext.

stringi

A string of at most 80 characters. See the TEXT command in this section for further details. Auxiliary commands

LIST USERTEXTLists all usertext names.

LIST USERTEXT NAMELists the strings within the specified usertext.

DELETE USERTEXTDeletes the specified usertext.

Chap. 5 Display control UDRAW


UDRAW NAME XP YP ANGLE SCALE COLOR SUBFRAME BOX UNITXP UNITYP UNITCOORDINATES

xui yui

UDRAW draws line segments of the specified color in the specified subframe. The pointsdefining the line segments can come from either the USERSEGMENT command (in thissection) or the data input lines of this command.

The line segments can be either connected or unconnected, as described below.

One possible use of UDRAW is to draw a company logo in the graphics window.

All coordinates are in the usersegment coordinate system. The coordinates are transformed tothe plotting subframe coordinate system as shown in the figure.

The line segments created by this command can be manipulated with the mouse (see Section4.2).

NAMEThe name specifying a usersegment. This name is defined using the USERSEGMENTcommand (in this section). If no name is specified, the points are read from the data inputlines of this command.

XP [0.0]YP [0.0]The reference coordinate of the usersegment in the plotting subframe (see figure).

ANGLE [0.0]The angle of the usersegment coordinate system, relative to the plotting subframe coordinatesystem (see figure). The angle is entered in degrees.

SCALE [1.0]The usersegments are scaled by this scale factor before plotting. The scale factor modifiesthe unit associated with usersegment data. The scale factor must be greater than zero. COLOR [INVERSE]The color of the line segments.

SUBFRAME [DEFAULT]The name of the subframe depiction that specifies into which subframe to draw the linesegments. A subframe is defined by the SUBFRAME command (see Section 5.1).

UDRAW Sec. 5.12 User defined plotting


BOX [NO]Specifies whether or not the program draws a box around the plotting subframe. {YES /NO}

UNITXP [PERCENT]UNITYP [PERCENT]The units associated with XP and YP. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /POINTS}

UNITCOORDINATES [PERCENT]Specifies the unit associated with the coordinates. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /PIXELS / POINTS}

xui yui

The X and Y coordinates of point i. Notice that a point cannot be deleted. The coordinatesare interpreted in the usersegment coordinate system (see figure).

If both xi and yi are less than 1E10, a line segment is drawn from the current position to (xui,yui) and the current position is updated to (xui, yui).

If either xi or yi is greater than 1E10, no line segment is drawn and the current position isreplaced by the next coordinate for which xi and yi are both less than 1E10. This featureallows you to draw unconnected line segments.

Examples

1)USERSEGMENT TWOBOX0.5 0.5 / 1.5 0.5 / 1.5 1.5 / 0.5 1.5 / 0.5 0.51E10 1E102.0 0.5 / 3.0 0.5 / 3.0 1.5 / 2.0 1.5 / 2.0 0.5UDRAW TWOBOX

This example draws two boxes. The point (1E10, 1E10) is used to separate thesecond box from the first box.

2)UDRAW0.5 0.5 / 1.5 0.5 / 1.5 1.5 / 0.5 1.5 / 0.5 0.51E10 1E102.0 0.5 / 3.0 0.5 / 3.0 1.5 / 2.0 1.5 / 2.0 0.5DATAEND

Chap. 5 Display control UDRAW


This example draws the same line segments as the first. However, the points are notnamed (i.e., stored in a usersegment) and therefore must be reentered if you want to drawthese line segments in a future plot.

3)UDRAW SCALE=1.40.5 0.5 / 1.5 0.5 / 1.5 1.5 / 0.5 1.5 / 0.5 0.51E10 1E102.0 0.5 / 3.0 0.5 / 3.0 1.5 / 2.0 1.5 / 2.0 0.5DATAEND

This example draws boxes that are 1.4 times as large as those drawn in example 2.

USERSEGMENT Sec. 5.12 User defined plotting


USERSEGMENT NAME

xi yi

USERSEGMENT defines line segments (a usersegment) that can be plotted using theUDRAW command (in this section).

NAMEThe name of the usersegment. If there is a previously defined usersegment with this name,data entered in this command modifies that usersegment. If there is no previously definedusersegment with this name, a new usersegment is created by this command.

xi, yi

The X and Y coordinates of point i. Notice that a usersegment point cannot be deleted. Theunit of the x and y coordinates is set in the UDRAW command (in this section).

Auxiliary commands

LIST USERSEGMENTLists all usersegment names.

LIST USERSEGMENT NAMELists the points within the specified usersegment.

DELETE USERSEGMENTDeletes the specified usersegment.

Chap. 5 Display control USERSEGMENT



COLORTABLE Sec. 5.13 Plotting definitions


COLORTABLE

redi greeni bluei colori

DELETE colori

COLORTABLE allows you to manipulate the color table, which gives the red-green-blue(RGB) intensities corresponding to color names. All color names specified in othercommands must be listed in the color table.

The color table is stored in the database. When a database is initialized, a predefined colortable is initialized. The number of colors that you can specify in the color table is unlimited.

See Section 1.10 for more information about color names.

redi greeni bluei

The red-green-blue intensities corresponding to colori. The intensities must be between 0.0and 1.0.

colori

The name of colori (up to 30 alphanumeric characters). If colori is already present in the colortable, its definition is updated using the specified values of redi, greeni, bluei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST COLORTABLE Lists the current color definitions. The listing is sorted in ascending color name order.

Chap. 5 Display control COLORTABLE



Chapter 6

Display and post-processing definitions

CONTROL Sec. 6.1 Settings


CONTROL PLOTUNIT VERBOSE ERRORLIMIT LOGLIMIT UNDO PROMPT AUTOREPAINT DRAWMATTACH DRAWTEXT DRAWLINES DRAWFILLS AUTOMREBUILD ZONECOPY SWEEPCOINCIDE SESSIONSTORAGE DYNAMICTRANSFORM UPDATETHICKNESS AUTOREGENERATE ERRORACTION FILEVERSION INITFCHECK SIGDIGIT AUTOZONE PSFILEVERSION

CONTROL defines certain parameters that control program behavior.

Certain parameters of this command are used when maximum backwards compatibility withprevious versions of the AUI is required.

PLOTUNIT <not currently active> [PERCENT]

VERBOSE <not currently active> [YES]

ERRORLIMIT <not currently active> [0]

LOGLIMIT <not currently active> [0]

UNDO [5]The UNDO parameter controls the number of commands that can be undone using the UNDOcommand (see Section 4.1). If UNDO = -1, the UNDO command cannot be used and theAUI cannot recover from an error when a command runs, if UNDO = 0, the UNDOcommand cannot be used, but the AUI can recover from an error when a command runs, ifUNDO = 1, UNDO can be used to undo the effects of the previous command, if UNDO = 2,UNDO can be used to undo the effects of the previous two commands, etc. Setting UNDO =-1 can significantly speed up the processing of batch files.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]Controls the default behavior for prompts which may arise from various commands.

NO No command prompts will be issued – this is useful in batch mode –eliminating any interaction.

YES Command prompts are always issued.

UNKNOWN Command prompts are issued only when necessary.

AUTOREPAINT [YES]When AUTOREPAINT = YES, the AUI automatically repaints that area of the graphicswindow that is exposed to the removal or motion of overlapping windows or dialog boxes. You may want to set AUTOREPAINT to NO to suppress the repainting; in that case, you can

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions CONTROL


use the REFRESH command (in Section 5.11 whenever you want to repaint the graphicswindow.

DRAWMATTACH [YES]When DRAWMATTACH = YES, mesh plot attachments (such as band plots) are drawn. Otherwise, they are not drawn. One use of this option is to turn off drawing of mesh plotattachments before moving the mesh plots with the mouse.

DRAWTEXT [EXACT]DRAWLINES [EXACT]DRAWFILLS [EXACT]These options control the drawing of text, lines and fills:

EXACT Use the requested colors while drawing.

SATURATED Convert all colors to saturated colors before drawing.

GRAY Convert all colors to gray scales before drawing.

INVERSE Convert all colors to the INVERSE color before drawing (the INVERSEcolor is the opposite of the background color).

NO Do not draw.

AUTOMREBUILD [YES]When you enter a command that alters the geometry or finite element model, the AUI rebuildsall corresponding data structures so that the model can be replotted. This feature can bedeactivated by setting AUTOMREBUILD = NO (in this case, if you want to plot the model,you must use the ADINA-IN commands ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F to rebuild themodel beforehand).

Setting AUTOMREBUILD = NO can significantly speed up the processing of batch files.

ZONECOPY [NO]Controls whether the commands BANDPLOT, MESHPLOT, ELINEPLOT,EVECTORPLOT, LCPLOT, REACTIONPLOT, BANDSTYLE, MESHSTYLE,ELINESTYLE, EVECTORSTYLE, LCSTYLE, REACTIONSTYLE create copies of theinput zones. Zone copies are always created by these commands in AUI 7.0, but not in laterversions of the AUI. The preferred setting of ZONECOPY is NO, but YES may be necessaryto read input/session files produced for/by AUI 7.0. { YES / NO }.

Session files produced by the AUI 7.0 will probably not work unless ZONECOPY = YES,see note 4 for an example.



During model definition, when using active zones to keep geometry and finite element entitiesin functional parts, mesh plots are only updated properly when ZONECOPY = NO, see note 5for an example.

SWEEPCOINCIDE [YES]Controls whether the SURFACE/VOLUME REVOLVED/EXTRUDED geometry definitioncommands of ADINA-IN check for coincident lines and surfaces, as well as for coincidentvertices (points). AUI 7.0 did not attempt to connect adjacent surfaces/volumes, resulting induplicate lines and surfaces from such “sweep” geometry definitions. The default in AUI 7.1and higher is to connect adjacent surfaces/volumes whenever possible. However, AUI 7.0input/session files which contain such geometry definitions will probably not work, so it maybe necessary to set SWEEPCOINCIDE = NO to correctly process older input files.

SESSIONSTORAGE [YES]If SESSIONSTORAGE = YES, subsequent commands are stored in the AUI database. Youcan output these commands using the COMMANDFILE command (see Section 3.4). In theevent of a system crash, you can retrieve these commands by opening the AUI temporarydatabase, then by issuing the COMMANDFILE command.

If SESSIONSTORAGE = NO, commands are not stored and cannot be retrieved. You can setSESSIONSTORAGE to NO when you are reading the commands from a batch file toeliminate the overhead of storing the commands within the AUI database.

DYNAMICTRANSFORM [YES]Controls how the program indicates the transformation when you move, resize or rotategraphics using the mouse. If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=YES, the program redraws allpicked graphics completely and redraws all other graphics that overlap the picked graphics. IfDYNAMICTRANSFORM=PARTIAL, the program partially redraws all picked graphics anddoes not redraw overlapping graphics. If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=NO, the programindicates the transformation using a bounding box.

UPDATETHICKNESS [YES]When you change the thickness of geometry surfaces or faces, all elements generated onto thesurfaces or faces are automatically updated with the updated thickness. {YES / NO}

In AUI 7.2 and lower, elements are not automatically updated. Therefore you may need to setUPDATETHICKNESS=NO so that input files constructed for use with AUI 7.2 and lowerwork correctly.

AUTOREGENERATE [NO]If AUTOREGENERATE=YES, the program regenerates the graphics after you run acommand that changes the model definition. This parameter only applies to commands thatare run from the command-line (or read from a file); it does not apply to dialog box input



from the user interface. Note that the user interface always regenerates the graphics after youuse a dialog box that changes the model definition. {YES / NO}

ERRORACTION [CONTINUE]If ERRORACTION=CONTINUE, then, when the AUI detects an error, the AUI will continueto process commands. If ERRORACTION=SKIP, then, when the AUI detects an error, theAUI will skip the remaining commands, up to the next READ END command, if any. Anerror is defined as one of the following two events:

1) A message of one of the following types is written: INPUT ERROR, ERROR,SEVERE ERROR, INTERNAL ERROR, ALERT.

2) A memory overflow is detected.

The typical use of this feature is to prevent the AUI from creating a data file when there areerrors in the batch file, or when a memory overflow occurs while processing the batch file.

ERRORACTION only affects commands read from a batch command file. ERRORACTIONdoes not affect commands run from the dialog boxes or icons. It also does not affectcommands entered at the command window, or entered at the command-line prompt. FILEVERSION [V83]This parameter tells the AUI which algorithms to use during subsequent commands. Use thisflag to request algorithms from previous versions of the AUI. For example, if youconstructed a batch file in AUI 8.2, set FILEVERSION=V82 to specify that the AUI 8.2algorithms should be used in processing the file. {V73 / V74 / V75 / V80 / V81 /V82 / V83}.

INITFCHECK [NO]This parameter tells the AUI whether or not to consider subsequent commands as part of aninitialization file. If INITFCHECK=NO, subsequent commands are not considered part of aninitialization file, if INITFCHECK=YES, subsequent commands are considered part of aninitialization file.

When INITFCHECK=YES, the AUI does not check resultants and aliases for errors. Therefore resultants and aliases can be included in initialization files whenINITFCHECK=YES. Also the AUI always allows the use of the FEPROGRAM commandwhen INITFCHECK=YES.

SIGDIGITS [6]This parameter controls the number of significant digits used in listings. Between 1 and 16significant digits can be requested.



AUTOZONE [YES]When AUTOZONE=YES, the AUI automatically creates zones for many common parts ofthe model, such as element groups and contact surfaces. See the description in the Zones -Introduction section of this manual (Section 6.2.) { YES / NO }

For models with many element groups, you may want to turn off the AUTOZONE feature tosave storage and CPU time.

PSFILEVERSION [V0]This parameter gives the Parasolid version number used for saving Parasolid files. Forexample, V150 means to save in Parasolid version 15.0 format. V0 means the latest Parasolidversion. { V0 / V80 / V90 / V91 / V100 / V110 / V111 / V120 / V121/ V130 / V140 / V150 }

Notes1) One important use of parameters DRAWTEXT, DRAWLINES, DRAWFILLS is

when making plots in black and white for reports. In this case you might useDRAWTEXT = INVERSE, DRAWLINES = INVERSE, DRAWFILLS = GRAY.

2) The drawing parameters apply both to graphics as displayed on the screen and tographics as produced using SNAPSHOT or MOVIESAVE (see Section 3.3).

3) One use of DRAWFILLS = SATURATED is to speed up shaded color imagedrawing, especially using X Window System graphics; all shades of each color areconverted to the same color, resulting in significantly fewer color changes.

4) Example of a session file that will not work unless ZONECOPY = YES:

*LOADPORTHOLE OPERATIO=CREATE FILE=...*MESHPLOT MESHSTYL=DEFAULT ZONENAME=WHOLE_MODEL RESPONSE=DEFAULT,

MODELDEP=DEFAULT VIEW=DEFAULT MESHWIND=DEFAULTPLOTAREA=DEFAULT,

SUBFRAME=DEFAULT ELDEPICT=DEFAULT NODEDEPI=DEFAULT,BOUNDEPI=DEFAULT GPDEPICT=DEFAULT GLDEPICT=DEFAULT,GSDEPICT=DEFAULT GVDEPICT=DEFAULT MESHREND=DEFAULT,MESHANNO=DEFAULT FRONDEPI=DEFAULT CONDEPIC=DEFAULT,VSDEPICI=DEFAULT CRACKDEP=DEFAULT RESULTCO=DEFAULT

*NODEDEPICTIO NAME=MESHPLOT00001 SYMBOLPL=YES SYMBOL='@C[1,5]', SYMBOLCO=GREEN SYMBOLSI=0.150000005960000 UNITSYMB=CM NUMBER=NO, NUMBERCO=GREEN NUMBERSI=0.250000000000000 UNITNUMB=CM@STARTMODIFY@ENDMODIFY*MESHPLOT NAME=MESHPLOT00001 MESHSTYL=DEFAULT ZONENAME=MESHPLOT00001,



RESPONSE=MESHPLOT00001 MODELDEP=MESHPLOT00001 VIEW=MESHPLOT00001, MESHWIND=MESHPLOT00001 PLOTAREA=MESHPLOT00001, SUBFRAME=MESHPLOT00001 ELDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001, NODEDEPI=MESHPLOT00001 BOUNDEPI=MESHPLOT00001, GPDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001 GLDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001, GSDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001 GVDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001, MESHREND=MESHPLOT00001 MESHANNO=MESHPLOT00001, FRONDEPI=MESHPLOT00001 CONDEPIC=MESHPLOT00001, VSDEPICI=MESHPLOT00001 CRACKDEP=MESHPLOT00001, RESULTCO=MESHPLOT00001

The second mesh plot requires a zone name MESHPLOT00001; this zonename is produced by the first MESHPLOT command by a copy. Noticethat the initial mesh plot works regardless of the value of CONTROL ZONECOPY.

5) Example of commands that work unexpectedly unless ZONECOPY = NO:

MESHPLOT ZONE=PART1ACTIVEZONE CLEAR'PART1'DATAENDLINE STRAIGHT 1 1 2REGENERATE

We expect that the REGENERATE command will draw line 1, as line 1 has been added toactive zone PART1 and the mesh plot contains zone PART1. However the REGENERATEcommand will only draw line 1 if CONTROL ZONECOPY = NO.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONTROL Lists the values of the parameters set by the CONTROL command.

Zones – Introduction Sec. 6.2 Zones


Zones - Introduction

You can select parts of the model using zones. A zone is a collection of elements, nodes,contact segments, radiosity segments, geometry points, geometry lines, geometry surfaces,geometry volumes, geometry edges, geometry faces, geometry bodies, rigid links andconstraint equations.

There are two purposes for zones:

1) To specify the elements, nodes, geometry, etc., on which a specified command acts. For example, the MESHPLOT command (in Section 5.2) plots the contents of thespecified zone.

2) To organize the parts of the model into functional units. For example you can put allof the nodes, elements, geometry for a hinge within a model into a zone namedHINGE.

When you start the AUI, there is a zone, WHOLE_MODEL, which is defined to contain theentire model.

There are several commands that allow you to create or modify zones:

BOXZONE: Selects contents that lie within specified boxes.

CGZONE*: Selects contact groups.

COMBZONE: Combines previously defined zones.

CSZONE*: Selects contact surfaces.

EGZONE*: Selects element groups.

ELZONE*: Selects elements and element layers.

RADGZONE*: Selects radiosity surface groups.

RADZONE*: Selects radiosity surfaces and segments.

ZONE: Explicitly specifies the contents of a zone.

These commands are described in detail later in this section.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions Zones – Introduction


In each of these commands, you specify a zone name. Whatever you select in the zonecommand is either added to or subtracted from the specified zone. If the zone name does notexist, it is created, otherwise it is modified.

The commands marked with a * are retained for backwards compatibility with AUI version7.0. You may find it easier to use the ZONE command if you want to specify the elements,contact surfaces and radiosity segments in a zone.

Predefined zones

The predefined zone WHOLE_MODEL contains everything in the database. When you load a porthole file, the AUI creates a zone for the corresponding finite element program, with thename of the finite element program.

If CONTROL AUTOZONE=YES, the AUI creates predefined zones for each of theindicated items.

Element group: EG(N)Contact group: CG(N)Contact surface: CS(N)Substructure: S(N)Zoom-model: ZM(N)Main structure: MSReuse: R(N)Cyclic part: CP(N)Radiosity group: RG(N)Geometry body: GB(N)

where (N) is the element group, contact group, etc. number. For example, in a model with 10element groups, the AUI creates zones EG1, EG2, ..., EG10.

In a model with multiple cyclic parts, the element and contact group zones contain data for allcyclic parts; e.g. zone EG1 contains element group 1 of each cyclic part.

One important use of the AUTOZONE feature is to support the Color FE Model icon, so ifyou are going to use this icon, make sure that the AUTOZONE feature is turned on.

For models with many element groups, you may want to turn off the AUTOZONE feature tosave storage and CPU time.

Referenced zones and active zones

It is allowed for a zone to explicitly reference another zone by name.

Zones – Introduction Sec. 6.2 Zones


It is allowed to designate one or more zones as being "active". The AUI updates all activezones as you create or modify the model definition during preprocessing.

These features are implemented so that the AUI can emulate the "layer" concept of CADprograms. This is best illustrated by an example.

Suppose you are building a model that includes, among other parts, a spring and a hinge. Atthe beginning of the model definition, you can define empty zones SPRING and HINGE:

ZONE SPRING@CLEARDATAENDZONE HINGE@CLEARDATAEND

Before you start working on the spring, you designate zone SPRING to be active.

ACTIVEZONE@CLEAR'SPRING'DATAEND

Then, as you alter the model definition, zone SPRING is automatically updated. When youstart to work on the hinge, you designate zone HINGE to be active.

ACTIVEZONE@CLEAR'HINGE'DATAEND

Then, as you alter the model definition, zone SPRING doesn't change and zone HINGE isautomatically updated.

To plot just the spring, you can create a mesh plot using zone SPRING.

MESHPLOT ZONE=SPRING

As you continue to work on the spring, you can update the mesh plot using theREGENERATE command (see Section 5.1). Similarly, you can create a mesh plot usingzone HINGE, and as you continue to work on the hinge, you can update the mesh plot usingthe REGENERATE command. (Note: It is necessary for the ZONECOPY parameter of theCONTROL command in Section 6.1 to be set to NO for the mesh plots to be properlyupdated; ZONECOPY = NO is the default setting.)

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions Zones – Introduction


To plot both the spring and the hinge, you can create a zone SPRING_HINGE that referencesboth the spring and the hinge:

ZONE SPRING_HINGE'ZONE SPRING''ZONE HINGE'DATAENDMESHPLOT ZONE=SPRING_HINGE

Again, you can work on the spring and the hinge, and update the mesh plot using theREGENERATE command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ZONELists the names of all zones.

LIST ZONE NAMELists the contents of the specified zone.

DELETE ZONE NAMEDeletes the specified zone.

COPY ZONE NAME1 NAME2Copies the zone specified by NAME1 to NAME2. Any existing zone with name NAME2 isredefined.

See also

Commands that accept zone names:MESHPLOT (Section 5.2),BANDPLOT (Section 5.4)EVECTORPLOT (Section 5.5)ELINEPLOT (Section 5.6)REACTIONPLOT (Section 5.7)SMOOTHING (Section 6.6)MASS-SELECT (Section 6.6)MESHINTEGRATION (Section 6.7)MESHMAX (Section 6.7)ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX, ZONELIST (Section 7.2)

ZONE Sec. 6.2 Zones


ZONE NAME NODEATTACH GEOMATTACH

selectioni

'SUBTRACT' selectioni

Defines a zone as a list of selections. See below for the specification of selections.

NAMEThe name of the zone. If the zone does not exist, it will be created by this command. Thezone name must be specified.

NODEATTACH [YES]If NODEATTACH = YES, then specifying elements, contact surfaces or radiosity surfacesautomatically includes the attached nodes in the zone. If NODEATTACH = NO, then onlynodes that are explicitly specified as selections are included in the zone.

GEOMATTACH [YES]If GEOMATTACH = YES, then specifying geometry automatically includes the attachedgeometry in the zone. For example, specifying a geometry surface automatically includes theattached geometry lines and geometry points. If GEOMATTACH = NO, then only geometrythat are explicitly specified as selections are included in the zone.

selectioni

A selection string used to select an element or range of elements, a node or range of nodes,etc. By default, the selection is added to the zone. But you can also indicate that theselection be subtracted from the zone using the SUBTRACT keyword.

When using the command-line interface, it is necessary to enclose the selection (and theoptional SUBTRACT keyword) in quotes so that the selection is not interpreted as acommand. When using the dialog box, it is not necessary to enclose the selection in quotes.

Selections:




NODEELEMENTCONTACT SURFACE

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions ZONE


CONTACT SEGMENTLAYERELEMENT LAYERRIGID LINKCONSTRAINT EQUATIONGEOMETRY POINT or POINTGEOMETRY LINE or LINEGEOMETRY SURFACE or SURFACEGEOMETRY VOLUME or VOLUMEGEOMETRY EDGE or EDGEGEOMETRY FACE or FACEGEOMETRY BODY or BODYGEOMETRY SHEET or SHEETPROGRAMSUBSTRUCTUREREUSECYCLIC PARTELEMENT GROUPCONTACT GROUPRADIOSITY GROUPRADIOSITY SURFACERADIOSITY SEGMENTCONTACT PAIRGEOMETRY_MODEL or GEOMETRY MODELWHOLE_MODEL or WHOLE MODELINTERFACE ELEMENTBOUNDARY SURFACE ELEMENTBOUNDARY SURFACEPOTENTIAL-INTERFACEZOOM-MODELBCELL

The characters needed to uniquely specify an object name are indicated in bold.

The object number is the desired number or range of numbers. As examples, here are somevalid objects:

'ELEMENT 1''ELEMENTS 1 TO 10''PROGRAM ADINA''GEOMETRY FACE 2'

Notice that a range of numbers may be specified using the keyword TO.

ZONE Sec. 6.2 Zones


When a single object is not sufficient to entirely specify the desired selection, then theselection must be specified using the OF keyword. For example, if there is more than oneelement group in the model, then you use

'ELEMENT 1 OF ELEMENT GROUP 1'

to specify element 1 of element group 1. Other examples using the OF keyword are

'ELEMENT GROUP 10 OF CYCLIC PART 2''GEOMETRY EDGE 1 OF GEOMETRY BODY 2''ELEMENTS 2 TO 4 OF ELEMENT GROUP 5 OF PROGRAM ADINA-T'

You can type selections in either upper, lower or mixed-case and you can abbreviate objectnames.

To specify a rigid link, use the syntax S:M where S is the slave node number and M is themaster node number, for example

'RIGID LINK 4:7'

to specify the rigid link with slave node 4 and master node 7.

To specify a constraint equation, use the syntax N:I where N is the slave node number and I isthe degree of freedom, for example

'CONSTRAINT EQUATION 4:3'

to specify the constraint equation for ADINA slave node 4, z-translation. Degree of freedomnumbers are as follows:

ADINA: 1 = x-translation, 2 = y-translation, 3 = z-translation, 4 = x-rotation, 5 = y-rotation, 6 = z-rotation, 7 = fluid degree of freedom

ADINA-T:1 = temperature, 2 = radiosity

ADINA-F:1 = x-velocity, 2 = y-velocity, 3 = z-velocity, 4 = pressure, 5 = temperature

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions ZONE


Here are some examples in which the SUBTRACT keyword is used:

ZONE ABC'WHOLE_MODEL''SUBTRACT CONTACT GROUP 1'DATAEND

ZONE DEF'ELEMENT GROUP 1''SUBTRACT ELEMENTS 3 TO 5'DATAEND

BOXZONE Sec. 6.2 Zones


BOXZONE NAME POSITION

xmini xmaxi ymini ymaxi zmini zmaxi partiali operationi

BOXZONE selects entities such as elements, contact surfaces, etc. to be included in ordeleted from a zone. Those entities that lie partially or completely within boxes are selected. The boxes are defined in the model global coordinate system and are specified by the boxcoordinates. The boxes are aligned with the global coordinate system axes.

NAMEThe name of the zone which will be modified.

POSITIONThis parameter is currently unused.

xmini

xmaxi

ymini

ymaxi

zmini

zmaxi

Coordinates of the box defining the zone, in the model global system.

partiali [YES]Indicates whether entities that lie partially within the box are selected. {YES / NO}

operationi [ADD]Indicates whether entities selected are to be added to or subtracted from the zone definition. {ADD / SUBTRACT}

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions CGZONE


CGZONE NAME FEPROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE POSITION

groupi operationi

CGZONE selects contact surface groups to include in or delete from a zone.


FEPROGRAM [ADINA]The name of the finite element program to which the contact groups belong. Currently thisparameter must be set to ADINA.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]The number of the substructure to which the contact groups belong. Currently this parametermust be set to zero (0).

REUSE [1]The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the contact groups belong. Currently thisparameter must be set to one (1).


groupi

Label number of a contact surface group.

operationi [ADD]Indicates whether selected entities are to be added to or subtracted from the zone definition. {ADD / SUBTRACT}

COMBZONE Sec. 6.2 Zones


COMBZONE NAME POSITION

zonenamei operationi

COMBZONE selects zones to include in or delete from a zone.

NAMEThe name of the zone to be modified.


zonenamei

Name of a zone (other than parameter NAME).


Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions CSZONE


CSZONE NAME FEPROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP POSITION

surfacei operationi

CSZONE selects contact surfaces from a contact surface group to include in or delete from azone.


FEPROGRAM [ADINA]The name of the finite element program to which the contact surfaces belong. Currently thisparameter must be set to ADINA.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]The number of the substructure to which the contact surfaces belong. Currently thisparameter must be set to zero (0).

REUSE [1]The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the contact surfaces belong. Currently thisparameter must be set to one (1).

GROUPThe number of the contact surface group to which the contact groups belong.


surfacei

Label number of a contact surface within the contact surface group given by parameterGROUP. If the contact group is a node-node contact group, this parameter is the pairnumber.


EGZONE Sec. 6.2 Zones


EGZONE NAME FEPROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE POSITION

groupi operationi

EGZONE selects element groups to include in or subtract from a zone.


FEPROGRAM [current finite element program]The name of the finite element program to which the element groups belong.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]The number of the substructure (0 for the main structure) to which the element groups belong.

REUSE [1]The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the element groups belong.


groupi

Label number of an element group.


Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions ELZONE


ELZONE NAME FEPROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP POSITION

elementi layeri operationi

ELZONE selects elements/layers from an element group to include in or delete from a zone.


FEPROGRAM [current finite element program]The name of the finite element program to which the elements and layers belong.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]The number of the substructure (0 for the main structure) to which the elements and layersbelong.

REUSE [1]The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the elements and layers belong.

GROUPThe number of the element group to which the elements and layers belong.


elementi

Element label number.

layeri [1]Layer number within element. If the element does not have layers, this parameter is ignored.


RADGZONE Sec. 6.2 Zones


RADGZONE NAME FEPROGRAM POSITION

groupi operationi

RADGZONE selects radiosity surface groups to include in or subtract from a zone.


FEPROGRAM [ADINA-T]The name of the finite element program to which the radiosity surface groups belong. Notethat radiosity surfaces can currently only belong to ADINA-T.


groupi [1]Label number of a radiosity surface group.

operationi [ADD]Indicates whether this group is to be added to or subtracted from the zone definition. {ADD/ SUBTRACT}

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RADZONE


RADZONE NAME FEPROGRAM GROUP POSITION

surfacei segmenti operationi

RADZONE selects radiosity surface segments to include in or subtract from a zone.


FEPROGRAM [ADINA-T]The name of the finite element program to which the radiosity surface segments belong. Notethat radiosity surfaces can currently only belong to ADINA-T.

GROUP [1]The number of the radiosity surface group to which the radiosity surfaces and segmentsbelong.


surfacei [1]Label number of a radiosity surface.

segmenti [0]Label number of a radiosity segment. Enter 0 to specify all segments in the surface.

operationi [ADD]Indicates whether this surface/segment is to be added to or subtracted from the zonedefinition. {ADD / SUBTRACT}

ACTIVEZONE Sec. 6.2 Zones


ACTIVEZONE

zonei

Specifies that one or more zones are to be active. When a change is made to the model,corresponding changes are made in the active zones. See the discussion at the beginning ofthis section for an example of the use of this command.

zonei

The name of a zone. The zone must have been already defined, but may be empty.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ACTIVEZONELists the currently active zones.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions COLORZONE


COLORZONE

zonei colori

Specifies the colors of one or more zones. All currently displayed meshplots (except those forwhich MESHRENDERING COLORZONE=NO) are updated with the given colors. Allsuccessive meshplots with MESHRENDERING COLORZONE=YES are created using thegiven colors. See Section 5.2 for information about meshplots and the MESHRENDERINGcommand.

zonei

The name of a zone. The zone must exist, although it may be empty.

colori

The name of a color.

Notes:

The colors are first set using the attributes of the mesh plot, for example ELDEPICTIONORCOLOR, GSDEPICTION LINECOLOR, etc. Then all text, lines, fill areas, etc.,corresponding to each zone specified in the COLORZONE command are updated with thegiven color. Zones are processed in the order in which they appear in the data input lines.

For example, the command sequence:

ELDEPICTION ORCOLOR=BLUE DECOLOR=CYANMESHPLOT

draws the mesh plot with the original configuration in blue and the deformed configuration incyan. Then the commands

ZONE EG1'ELEMENT GROUP 1'DATAENDZONE EG2'ELEMENT GROUP 2'DATAENDCOLORZONE'EG1' RED'EG2' GREENDATAEND

update the mesh plot so that all text, lines, etc of element group 1 are drawn in red and all text,lines, etc., of element group 2 are drawn in green. Any text, lines, etc. that belong to both

COLORZONE Sec. 6.2 Zones


element groups are drawn in green. Both the original and deformed configurations of theelement groups are drawn in red and green.

Then the commands

FRAMEMESHPLOT

create a new mesh plot. Since there are zones specified in the COLORZONE command, text,lines, etc. of element group 1 are drawn in red and text, lines, etc. of element group 2 aredrawn in green.

Then the commands

MESHRENDERING COLORZONE=NOMESHPLOT

create a new mesh plot. Since MESHRENDERING COLORZONE=NO, the COLORZONEcommand is not used to determine the colors of the mesh plot.

Auxiliary commands

LIST COLORZONELists the currently assigned zone colors.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions COLORZONE



Response data – Introduction Sec. 6.3 Response data


Response data – Introduction

Responses are used to specify "when" or "for which solution" results are to be evaluated. There are currently eight types of response available in the AUI, each with its own command.

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP: load-step (time step) response

RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE: mode shape response

RESPONSE RESIDUAL: residual (static correction) response

RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM: response calculated using the responsespectrum method

RESPONSE HARMONIC: response calculated using the harmonic vibration analysismethod

RESPONSE RANDOM: response calculated using the random vibration analysismethod

RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION: response calculated as a combination ofother responses

RESPONSE ENVELOPE: response calculated by evaluating several responses andselecting the most extreme value

These commands are described in this section.

The results associated with LOAD-STEP, MODE-SHAPE and RESIDUAL responses arecalculated by the finite element solution program, and the RESPONSE command simplylabels the desired results. (But RESPONSE LOAD-STEP can also be used to performinterpolation in time between two solutions calculated by the finite element solutionprogram.)

The results associated with the remaining responses are calculated by the AUI frominformation calculated by the finite element solution program. The actual calculations aredone when the response is used by another command, not when the response is defined. TheRESPONSE command is used to specify the methods used for the calculations.

As with other depictions, there is a DEFAULT response and a FACTORY response. Theseare defined when finite element information is loaded into the AUI. There is also aDEFAULT_( ) response for each response type, for example DEFAULT_LOAD-STEP,DEFAULT_MODE-SHAPE, etc. These responses provide the defaults for the corresponding

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions Response data – Introduction


RESPONSE commands as described below. When you update the DEFAULT response, thecorresponding DEFAULT_( ) response is automatically updated.

Two responses cannot have the same name, even if the responses are of different types.

When using a response command, if the specified name is of the same type, the attributes ofthe name provide the defaults for the remaining command parameters. Otherwise the defaultsare taken from the corresponding DEFAULT_( ) response name.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RESPONSELists all response names currently stored in the database.

LIST RESPONSE NAMELists the attributes of the specified response.

DELETE RESPONSE NAMEDeletes the specified response name from the database. The solution data corresponding tothe response is, of course, not deleted.

COPY RESPONSE NAME1 NAME2Copies the response data of NAME1 to NAME2.

See alsoCommands that accept a response name of any type:

MESHPLOT (Section 5.2)LOADPLOT (Section 5.3)BANDPLOT (Section 5.4)EVECTORPLOT (Section 5.5)ELINEPLOT (Section 5.6)REACTIONPLOT (Section 5.7)LINESHOW (Section 5.10)POINTLIST, POINTEXCEED, POINTMAX, LINELIST, LINEEXCEED,LINEMAX, ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2).

Commands that accept a response name of type RESPONSE-SPECTRUM:FSSHOW (Section 5.10)

Commands that accept a response name of type HARMONIC: HARMONICSHOW (Section 5.10)

Response data – Introduction Sec. 6.3 Response data


Commands that accept a response name of type RANDOM:RANDOMSHOW (Section 5.10)

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE LOAD-STEP


RESPONSE LOAD-STEP NAME TIME

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP associates a name with a load step solution.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response. The same response can be associated with morethan one name. If there is a previously defined response of type load-step with this name,data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a newresponse of type load-step is created by this command.

TIME [LATEST]The solution time that specifies the solution response, or the word LATEST. If you specify asolution time then, when this response is used in a command, this time must lie between theearliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into the database. If youspecify the word LATEST then, when this response is used in a command, the command willuse the latest solution time for which there is displacement data (ADINA model), temperaturedata (ADINA-T model) or velocity data (ADINA-F model) loaded into the database.

If the solution time does not correspond to a solution time for which results were calculatedby the solution program, the AUI will interpolate the results in time to solution time TIMEusing data from the two closest bracketing solution times for which results were calculated bythe solution program.

RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE Sec. 6.3 Response data


RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE NAME MODE REFTIME

RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE associates a name with a mode shape solution.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response. The same response can be associated with morethan one name. If there is a previously defined response of type MODE-SHAPE with thisname, data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a newresponse of type MODE-SHAPE is created by this command.

MODE [1]The mode shape number corresponding to the response. When this response is used in acommand, there must be data for this mode shape loaded into the database.

REFTIME [LATEST]In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes corresponding to the structurecharacteristics at a reference time. For example, mode shapes from a linearized bucklinganalysis are calculated from the structure characteristics at a specified time. You specify thereference time using this parameter. Either enter the reference time directly or specify thereference time using the word LATEST.

If you specify the reference time directly then, when this response is used in a command,there must be mode shape data corresponding to this reference time in the database. If youspecify the word LATEST then, when this response is used in a command, mode shape datacorresponding to the last reference time for which there is data in the database is used.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE RESIDUAL


RESPONSE RESIDUAL NAME DIRECTION REFTIME

RESPONSE RESIDUAL associates a name with a residual (static correction) responsecomputed by ADINA. This response is computed by ADINA in response spectrum analysisand is used to approximate the structural response not included in any of the modes used inthe response spectrum analysis.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response. The same response can be associated with morethan one name. If there is a previously defined response of type residual with this name, dataentered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a new response oftype residual is created by this command.

DIRECTIONThe ground motion direction corresponding to this response. {X/Y/Z}

REFTIME [LATEST]In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes and residual responsescorresponding to the structure characteristics at a reference time. Either enter the referencetime directly or enter LATEST to request the last reference time for which data is stored.

RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM Sec. 6.3 Response data


RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM NAME METHOD SPECTRUM DAMPINGTABLE RESIDUAL MSTART MEND REFTIME DURATION CUTOFF AX AY AZ RESULTANT

RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM associates a name with a calculation method used bythe AUI to compute responses in response spectrum analysis.

Refer to the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 8.1, for the theory used inresponse spectrum analysis.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response. The same response can be associated with morethan one name. If there is a previously defined response of type response-spectrum with thisname, data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a newresponse of type response-spectrum is created by this command.

METHODThe method used for the combination of the modal responses.

SRSS Square root of the sum of the squares.

ABS Absolute sum method.

TENPERCENT Ten percent method.

DOUBLESUM Double sum method (with absolute value sign)

DSC Double sum combination method (without absolute value sign)

ALGEBRAIC Algebraic sum method.

CQC Complete-quadratic-combination method.

DIRECTIONThe direction in which the ground motion is acting {X / Y / Z / GENERAL}. IfDIRECTION=GENERAL, then use parameters AX, AY, AZ to specify the ground motiondirection.

SPECTRUMThe name of the loading response spectrum. The response spectrum must have been definedusing the SPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM


DAMPINGTABLEThe name of the damping table (which specifies the damping for the modes). The dampingtable must have been defined using the DAMPINGTABLE command (see Section 6.5).

RESIDUAL [NO]The method used in combining the residual responses with the modal responses.

NO Residual terms are not included.

SRSS The SRSS method is used.

ABS The absolute values of the residual terms are added to the modal response termswhen METHOD = SRSS, ABS, TENPERCENT, DOUBLESUM, DSC or CQC. Theresidual terms are added with the same signs as the modal response terms whenMETHOD = ALGEBRAIC.

When residual terms are included, all calculated modes must be included in the responsespectrum calculations (see parameters MSTART and MEND).

MSTART [LOWEST]MEND [HIGHEST]The first and last mode shapes included in the response spectrum calculations. You caneither enter the mode numbers directly or use the words LOWEST and HIGHEST to indicatethe lowest and highest modes available.

REFTIME [LATEST]In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes and residual responsescorresponding to the structure characteristics at a reference time. Either enter the referencetime directly or enter LATEST to request the last reference time for which data is stored.

DURATIONThe earthquake duration time, used only with METHOD = DOUBLESUM. DURATION mustbe greater than zero in this case.

CUTOFF [0.0]Factor used to determine which off-diagonal terms are included, used only with METHOD =CQC. CUTOFF must be between 0.0 and 1.0 inclusive in this case.

AX [1.0]AY [0.0]AZ [0.0]The direction of ground motion loading when DIRECTION=GENERAL. The vector (AX,AY, AZ) need not be normalized.

RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM Sec. 6.3 Response data


RESULTANT [BEFORE]If RESULTANT=BEFORE, the AUI computes resultants before performing response-spectrum calculations, if RESULTANT=AFTER, the AUI computes resultants afterperforming response-spectrum calculations. See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide,Chapter 11, for more information.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE HARMONIC


RESPONSE HARMONIC NAME METHOD FREQUENCY OMEGAT QUASISTATIC DAMPINGTABLE MSTART MEND REFTIME RESULTANT

loadcasei sspectrumi factori phaseanglei

RESPONSE HARMONIC associates a name with a calculation method used by the AUI tocompute responses in harmonic analysis.

Refer to the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 8.3, for the theory used inharmonic analysis.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response. The same response can be associated with morethan one name. If there is a previously defined response of type harmonic with this name,data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a newresponse of type harmonic is created by this command.

METHODThe method used in computing harmonic responses.

MAXIMUM The maximum amplitude of the response is computed.PHASEANGLE The phase angle (in degrees) of the response is computed.RMS The root-mean-square amplitude of the response is computed.AMPLITUDE The (signed) amplitude of the response for angle OMEGAT is

computed. OMEGAT is the quantity in the harmonic loadingformula , see the ADINA Theory and

Modeling Guide, equation (8.3-6).

FREQUENCYThe loading frequency used to compute harmonic responses (entered in cycles/unit time). Each sweep spectrum is sampled at this frequency. (Note that the FREQUENCY parameteris ignored when this response is used in the HARMONICSHOW command (see Section5.10)).

OMEGATThe angle used when METHOD = AMPLITUDE, entered in degrees.

QUASISTATIC [NO]The harmonic response can be normalized by the quasi-static response. {NO / YES}

RESPONSE HARMONIC Sec. 6.3 Response data



MSTART [LOWEST]MEND [HIGHEST]The numbers of the first and last mode shapes included in the harmonic analysis calculations. You can either enter the mode numbers directly or use the words LOWEST and HIGHEST toindicate the lowest and highest modes available.

REFTIME [LATEST]In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes corresponding to the structurecharacteristics at a reference time. Either enter the reference time directly or enter LATESTto request the last reference time for which data is stored.

RESULTANT [BEFORE]If RESULTANT=BEFORE, the AUI computes resultants before performing harmoniccalculations, if RESULTANT=AFTER, the AUI computes resultants after performingharmonic calculations. See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Chapter 11, for moreinformation.

loadcasei

If ground motion calculations were requested in ADINA, then loadcasei specifies thedirection of ground motion, either X, Y, or Z. If applied loading calculations were requestedin ADINA, then loadcasei specifies the ADINA load step number corresponding to the loadvector describing the applied load.

sspectrumi

The sweep spectrum name giving the amplitude of the ground motion or applied loading. Asweep spectrum is defined by the SSPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).

factori [1.0]The amplitude of the sweep spectrum can be multiplied by factori.

phaseanglei [0.0]The phase angle for this load, entered in degrees.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE RANDOM


RESPONSE RANDOM NAME METHOD FMIN FMAX FREQUENCY CUTOFF DAMPINGTABLE MSTART MEND REFTIME RESULTANT

loadcasei rspectrumi factori

RESPONSE RANDOM associates a name with a calculation method used by the AUI tocompute responses in random analysis.

Refer to the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 8.4, for the theory used in randomanalysis.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response. The same response can be associated with morethan one name. If there is a previously defined response of type random with this name, dataentered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a new response oftype random is created by this command.

METHODThe method used in computing random responses. This parameter must be specified.

RMS The root-mean-square amplitude of the response is computed.PSD The power-spectral-density of the response is computed for frequency

FREQUENCY.

(This parameter is ignored when this response is used in the RANDOMSHOW command (seeSection 5.10).)

FMINFMAXThe frequency limits used in computing the RMS response. Either enter the frequenciesdirectly (in cycles/unit time) or use the word INFINITY to specify an infinite frequency. (Inall cases, the actual frequency range used by this command is the intersection of thisfrequency range with the frequency ranges from the random spectra.) (Note that theseparameters are ignored when this response is used in the RANDOMSHOW command (seeSection 5.10).)

FREQUENCYThe loading frequency used to compute the power-spectral-density of the response (entered incycles/unit time). This parameter is only used when METHOD=PSD. Each randomspectrum is sampled at this frequency. (Note that the FREQUENCY parameter is ignoredwhen this response is used in the RANDOMSHOW command (see Section 5.10).)

RESPONSE RANDOM Sec. 6.3 Response data


CUTOFF [0.0]A factor used to control which off-diagonal terms are used in calculating the randomresponse, between 0.0 and 1.0 inclusive.


MSTART [LOWEST]MEND [HIGHEST]The numbers of the first and last mode shapes included in the harmonic analysis calculations. You can either enter the mode numbers directly or use the words LOWEST and HIGHEST toindicate the lowest and highest modes available.

REFTIME [LATEST]In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes corresponding to the structurecharacteristics at a reference time. Either enter the reference time directly or enter LATESTto request the last reference time for which data is stored.

RESULTANT [BEFORE]If RESULTANT=BEFORE, the AUI computes resultants before performing randomcalculations, if RESULTANT=AFTER, the AUI computes resultants after performing randomcalculations. See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Chapter 11, for moreinformation.

loadcasei

If ground motion calculations were requested in ADINA, then loadcasei specifies thedirection of ground motion, either X, Y, or Z. If applied loading calculations were requestedin ADINA, then loadcasei specifies the ADINA load step number corresponding to the loadvector describing the applied load.

rspectrumi

The random spectrum name giving the power-spectral-density of the amplitude of the groundmotion or applied loading. A random spectrum is defined using the RSPECTRUM command(see Section 6.5).

factori [1.0]The power-spectral-density of the amplitude of the random spectrum can be multiplied byfactori.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION


RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION NAME FACTOR METHOD RESULTANT

responsei factori methodi

RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION associates a name with a combination ofpreviously defined responses. The previously defined responses can be of type load-step,mode-shape, residual, response-spectrum, harmonic or random, but cannot be of typeresponse-combination or envelope. Any mixture of the allowed response types can be used.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response. The same response can be associated with morethan one name. If there is a previously defined response of type response-combination withthis name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise anew response of type response-combination is created by this command.

FACTOR [1.0]The default value of the factor data input line column.

METHOD [ALGEBRAIC]The default value of the method data input line column. {ALGEBRAIC / ABS / SRSS/ SIGNED1 / SIGNED2}

RESULTANT [BEFORE]If RESULTANT=BEFORE, the AUI computes resultants before performing response-combination calculations, if RESULTANT=AFTER, the AUI computes resultants afterperforming response-combination calculations. See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide,Chapter 11, for more information.

responsei

The name of a previously defined response, of type load-step, mode-shape, residual,response-spectrum, harmonic or random.

factori [FACTOR]The result is multiplied by factori after evaluation using responsei.

methodi

The method used to combine the result with the accumulated result. {ALGEBRAIC / ABS/ SRSS / SIGNED1 / SIGNED2}. See notes below.

RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION Sec. 6.3 Response data


Notes:

The algorithm used for the combinations is

accum=0.0for (each data input line) { value = (the result for responsei)*factori

if (methodi = algebraic) { accum=accum + value } else if (methodi = abs) { accum=abs(accum) + abs(value) } else if (methodi = srss) { accum=sqrt(accum**2 + value**2) } else if (methodi = signed1) { if (value >= 0.0) { accum=value + abs(accum) } else { accum=value - abs(accum) } } else if (methodi = signed2) { if (accum >= 0.0) { accum=accum + abs(value) } else { accum=accum - abs(value) } }}

Observe that the order of the data input line rows is important when you use differentmethods for the data input lines.

Examples showing the use of methods signed1 and signed2:

RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM XDIR ...RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM YDIR ...RESPONSE LOAD-STEP STATIC_STEP ...RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION'XDIR' 1.0 SRSS

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION


'YDIR' 1.0 SRSS'STATIC_STEP' 1.0 SIGNED1DATAEND

The responses XDIR and YDIR are combined using the SRSS method. The result is thencombined with the static response STATIC_STEP in such a way as to increase the magnitudeof the total response. But the sign of the response value is determined by the sign of the valuefor response STATIC_STEP.

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP XLOAD ...RESPONSE LOAD-STEP YLOAD ...RESPONSE RANDOM ACOUSTIC ...RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION'XLOAD' 1.0 ALGEBRAIC'YLOAD' 1.0 ALGEBRAIC'ACOUSTIC' 1.0 SIGNED2DATAEND

The responses XLOAD and YLOAD are combined algebraically. Response ACOUSTIC isadded to this in such a way as to increase the magnitude of the total response.

RESPONSE ENVELOPE Sec. 6.3 Response data


RESPONSE ENVELOPE NAME TYPE OPTION TSTART TEND INCREMENT TINCREMENT NSTEP INTERPOLATE NSKIP

responsei factori

RESPONSE ENVELOPE associates a name with a calculation method in which, for eachcalculated value, several responses are evaluated and the extreme one returned.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response. If there is a previously defined response of typeenvelope with this name, data entered in this command modifies the response. Otherwise anew response of type envelope is created by this command.

TYPEThe type of extreme value, either MAXIMUM, ABSMAX, MINIMUM or DIFFERENCE(difference between the maximum and minimum values).

OPTION [RANGE]RANGE The value is evaluated for a range of load-steps and the extreme value

returned. TSTART, TEND, INCREMENT, TINCREMENT, NSTEP,INTERPOLATE and NSKIP are used to specify the range. (These are thesame options as are used in the RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP command (seeSection 6.4).)

SELECTED The value is evaluated at each specified response and the extreme valuereturned. The data input lines are used to specify the responses.

TSTART [EARLIEST]Used when OPTION = RANGE. The solution time that specifies the first solution response inthe range, including EARLIEST, LATEST.

If you specify a solution time then, when this response is used, this time must lie between theearliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into the database.

If you specify EARLIEST then, when this response is used, the command will use the earliestsolution time for which there is data loaded into the database. If you specify LATEST then,when this response is used, the command will use the latest solution time for which there isdata loaded into the database.

TEND [LATEST]Used when OPTION = RANGE. The solution time that specifies the last solution response inthe range, including EARLIEST, LATEST and TSTART.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE ENVELOPE


If you specify a solution time then, when this response is used, this time must lie between theearliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into the database.

If you specify EARLIEST then, when this response is used, the command will use the earliestsolution time for which there is data loaded into the database. If you specify LATEST then,when this response is used, the command will use the latest solution time for which there isdata loaded into the database. If you specify (the word) TSTART, then TEND will be setequal to TSTART.

INCREMENT [AVAILABLE]Used when OPTION = RANGE. Specifies which solution responses between TSTART andTEND will be included in the response.

TINCREMENT The value will be evaluated at all solution times TSTART, TSTART +TINCREMENT, ..., TEND. TINCREMENT must be specified. Theprogram will interpolate the available solution results to the times givenby this formula.

NSTEP The value will be evaluated at all solution times TSTART, TSTART +DT, ..., TEND, in which DT = (TEND - TSTART)/NSTEP. NSTEPmust be specified. The program will interpolate the available solutionresults to the times given by this formula.

AVAILABLE The value will be evaluated at all solution times for which the value isavailable, as chosen using parameters INTERPOLATE and NSKIP.

TINCREMENTUsed when OPTION = RANGE and INCREMENT = TINCREMENT. The solution timeincrement for the range.

NSTEPUsed when OPTION = RANGE and INCREMENT = NSTEP. The number of steps for therange.

INTERPOLATE [NO]Used when OPTION = RANGE and INCREMENT = AVAILABLE. If INTERPOLATE =YES, the AUI uses interpolation when possible to compute results that were not saved by thesolution program. Otherwise the AUI does not use interpolation. See the example at the endof the RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP command in Section 6.4. {YES / NO}.

NSKIPUsed when OPTION = RANGE and INCREMENT = AVAILABLE. Controls the solutiontimes between TSTART and TEND for which the value is calculated as follows: between two

RESPONSE ENVELOPE Sec. 6.3 Response data


times for which the value is calculated, NSKIP times are skipped. For example, if NSKIP =1, the value is calculated for the first, third, fifth, ..., times for which it is available. NSKIP =0 means that no results are skipped.

responsei

Used when OPTION = SELECTED. The name of a previously defined response, of typeload-step, mode-shape, residual, response-spectrum, response-combination, harmonic orrandom Responses are defined by response commands in this section.

factori

The value is multiplied by factori after evaluation using responsei.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPONSE ENVELOPE



Response range data – Introduction Sec. 6.4 Response range data


Response range data – Introduction

For listings and some graphs, it is convenient to refer to a range of responses. The AUIprovides response-range definitions so that you can name and refer to ranges of responses.

There are currently two types of response-range available in the AUI, each with its owncommand.

RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP: range of load-step (time step) responses

RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE: range of mode shape responses

These commands are discussed in this section.

When there are results from more than one finite element program stored in the database, youmay need to set the current finite element program before you use one of the response-rangecommands using the FEPROGRAM command in Section 3.4.

As with other depictions, there is a DEFAULT response and a FACTORY response. Theseare defined when finite element information is loaded into the AUI. There is also aDEFAULT_( ) response for each response type, for example DEFAULT_LOAD-STEP,DEFAULT_MODE-SHAPE. These responses provide the defaults for the correspondingRESPRANGE commands as described below. When you update the DEFAULT response-range, the corresponding DEFAULT_( ) response-range is automatically updated.

Two response-ranges cannot have the same name, even if the response-ranges are of differenttypes.

When using a response-range command, if the specified name is of the same type, theattributes of the name provide the defaults for the remaining command parameters. Otherwise the defaults are taken from the corresponding DEFAULT_( ) response-rangename.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RESPRANGELists all response-range names.

LIST RESPRANGE NAMELists the attributes of the specified response-range.

DELETE RESPRANGE NAMEDeletes the specified response-range name.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions Response range data – Introduction


COPY RESPRANGE NAME1 NAME2Copies the response-range data of NAME1 to NAME2.

See alsoCommands that accept a response-range name:

RESPONSESHOW, FTSHOW, FOURIERSHOW (Section 5.10)POINTLIST, POINTEXCEED, POINTMAX, LINELIST, LINEEXCEED,LINEMAX, ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2)

RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP Sec. 6.4 Response range data


RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP NAME TSTART TEND INCREMENT TINCREMENT NSTEP INTERPOLATE NSKIP

RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP associates a name with a range of load step solutions.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response range. If there is a previously defined responserange of type load-step with this name, data entered in this command alters the previouslydefined response range. Otherwise a new response range of type load-step is created by thiscommand.

TSTART [EARLIEST]The solution time that specifies the first solution response in the response range, includingEARLIEST, LATEST.

If you specify a solution time then, when this response range is used in a command, this timemust lie between the earliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into thedatabase.

If you specify EARLIEST then, when this response range is used in a command, thecommand will use the earliest solution time for which there is data loaded into the database. If you specify LATEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the commandwill use the latest solution time for which there is displacement data (ADINA model),temperature data (ADINA-T model) or velocity data (ADINA-F model) loaded into thedatabase.

TEND [LATEST]The solution time that specifies the last solution response in the response range, includingEARLIEST, LATEST and TSTART.

If you specify a solution time, then, when this response range is used in a command, this timemust lie between the earliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into thedatabase.

If you specify EARLIEST, then, when this response range is used in a command, thecommand will use the earliest solution time for which there is data loaded into the database. If you specify LATEST, then, when this response range is used in a command, the commandwill use the latest solution time for which there is data loaded into the database. If youspecify the word TSTART, then TEND will be set to TSTART. In this case, the responserange will contain a single response, corresponding to time TSTART.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP


INCREMENT [AVAILABLE]Specifies which solution responses between TSTART and TEND will be included in theresponse range.

If INCREMENT = TINCREMENT, then the response range will be all solution times

TSTART, TSTART + TINCREMENT, ..., TEND

and TINCREMENT must be specified. The program will interpolate the available solutionresults to the times given by this formula.

If INCREMENT = NSTEP, then the response range will be all solution times

TSTART, TSTART + DT, ..., TEND ; DT=(TEND - TSTART)/NSTEP,

and NSTEP must be specified. The program will interpolate the available solution results tothe times given by this formula.

If INCREMENT = AVAILABLE, then the response range will be all solution times T(i) forwhich the requested results are available, as chosen using parameters INTERPOLATE andNSTEP. TINCREMENTThe solution time increment for the response-range. This is used only if INCREMENT =TINCREMENT.

NSTEPThe time step for the response-range. This is used only if INCREMENT = NSTEP.

INTERPOLATE [NO]Used when INCREMENT = AVAILABLE. If INTERPOLATE = YES the AUI usesinterpolation when possible to compute results that were not saved in the porthole. Otherwisethe AUI does not use interpolation. See the example at the end of this command.

Notice that this parameter has no effect if results are saved on the porthole for each solutiontime.

NSKIP [0]Used when INCREMENT = AVAILABLE. NSKIP controls the solution times betweenTSTART and TEND for which results are plotted and listed as follows: between two timesfor which the results are output, NSKIP times are skipped. For example, if NSKIP = 1, theresults are output for the first, third, fifth, . . . times for which they are available. NSKIP = 0means that no results are skipped.

RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP Sec. 6.4 Response range data


Notes for the INTERPOLATE parameterSuppose that in an ADINA run, the time step is 2.0 and nodal results were saved for steps 0,3 and 5, and element results were saved for steps 2 and 4. If stresses are listed withINTERPOLATE = NO, only results for times 4.0 and 8.0, corresponding to steps 2 and 4, willbe obtained. If stresses are listed with INTERPOLATE = YES, results for time 6.0corresponding to step 3 will also be obtained. If displacements are listed withINTERPOLATE = NO, only results for times 0.0, 6.0 and 10.0 will be obtained. Ifdisplacements are listed with INTERPOLATE = YES, results for times 2.0, 4.0 and 8.0 willalso be obtained.

Of course, the interpolated results are only estimates of the true computed solution.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE


RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE NAME MODESTART MODEEND REFTIME

RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE associates a name with a range of mode shape solutions.

The range of mode shape solutions are the mode shapes with numbers MODESTART,MODESTART+1, ..., MODEEND, where MODESTART and MODEEND are specified inthis command. All of the mode shapes have the reference time REFTIME, which is alsospecified in this command.

When this response range is used in a command, there must be data for each mode shape inthe response range loaded into the database.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the response range If there is a previously defined responserange of type mode-shape with this name, data entered in this command alters the previouslydefined response range. Otherwise a new response range of type mode-shape is created bythis command.

MODESTART [1]The first mode shape in the response range, including LOWEST and HIGHEST.

If you specify LOWEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the commandwill use the lowest mode shape for which there is data loaded into the database.

If you specify HIGHEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the commandwill use the highest mode shape for which there is data loaded into the database.

MODEEND [HIGHEST]The last mode shape in the response range, including LOWEST, HIGHEST and MODESTART.

If you specify LOWEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the commandwill use the lowest mode shape for which there is data loaded into the database.

If you specify HIGHEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the commandwill use the highest mode shape for which there is data loaded into the database.

If you specify MODESTART then MODEEND will be set to MODESTART.

REFTIME [LATEST]In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes corresponding to the structurecharacteristics at a reference time. For example, mode shapes from a linearized bucklinganalysis are calculated from the structure characteristics at a specified time.

RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE Sec. 6.4 Response range data


You specify the reference time for the response-range using this parameter. Either enter thereference time directly or specify the reference time LATEST.

If you specify the reference time directly then, when this response range is used in acommand, there must be mode shape data corresponding to this reference time in thedatabase.

If you specify LATEST then, when this response is used in a command, mode shape datacorresponding to the last reference time for which there is mode shape data in the database isused.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE



Spectrum definitions – Introduction Sec. 6.5 Spectrum definitions


Spectrum definitions – Introduction

This section describes commands used to define loading spectra:

SPECTRUM: defines a response spectrum

SSPECTRUM: defines a sweep spectrum

RSPECTRUM: defines a random spectrum

This section also describes commands used in the spectrum definitions and in spectrumanalysis:

DAMPINGTABLE: defines a damping table (which specifies the damping of modes)

FREQCURVE: defines a frequency curve (which provides amplitude vs. frequencyinformation)

FREQTABLE: defines a frequency table (which specifies frequencies and peakbroadening factors)

Auxiliary commands

The SPECTRUM command has the following auxiliary commands (there are similar auxiliarycommands for the other commands in this section):

LIST SPECTRUMLists all spectrum definitions.

LIST SPECTRUM NAMELists the attributes of the specified spectrum.

DELETE SPECTRUM NAMEDeletes the specified spectrum.

COPY SPECTRUM NAME1 NAME2Copies the spectrum definition from NAME1 to NAME2.

See alsoCommands that use a SPECTRUM definition:

SPECTRUMSHOW (Section 5.10)RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM (Section 6.3)

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions Spectrum definitions – Introduction


Commands that use an SSPECTRUM definition:SSPECTRUMSHOW (Section 5.10)RESPONSE HARMONIC (Section 6.3)

Commands that use an RSPECTRUM definition:RSPECTRUMSHOW (Section 5.10)RESPONSE RANDOM (Section 6.3)

Commands that use a DAMPINGTABLE definition:FSSHOW, FTSHOW (Section 5.10)RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM, RESPONSE HARMONIC,RESPONSE RANDOM (Section 6.3)

Commands that use a FREQCURVE definition:SPECTRUM, SSPECTRUM, RSPECTRUM, DAMPINGTABLE (this section)

Commands that use a FREQTABLE definition:FSSHOW, FTSHOW (Section 5.10)

SPECTRUM Sec. 6.5 Spectrum definitions


SPECTRUM NAME VALUETYPE FACTOR INPUT-AXES TITLE

freqcurvei dampingi factori

SPECTRUM defines a response spectrum, which gives the maximum responses of SDOFsystems to ground motions. The response spectrum is used by the RESPONSERESPONSE-SPECTRUM command in the definition of a response-spectrum response (seeSection 6.3).

A response spectrum is defined by providing the responses of SDOF systems at differentfrequencies and different damping values. The responses of all SDOF systems with the samedamping value is provided via a frequency curve. Thus the response spectrum is defined byseveral frequency curves, one for each damping value. Spectrum curves for intermediatedamping values are automatically calculated by linear interpolation when the responsespectrum is used.

You can plot a response spectrum using the SPECTRUMSHOW command (see Section5.10).

NAMEThe name of a response spectrum. If the response spectrum is already defined, data enteredin this command modifies the response spectrum, otherwise a new response spectrum isdefined.

VALUETYPE [ACCELERATION]DISPLACEMENT Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as displacements.

VELOCITY Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as velocities.

ACCELERATION Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as accelerations.

FACTOR [1.0]This command parameter provides a default for the data input line parameter factori, seebelow.

INPUT-AXES [LOGLOG]Successive values in the frequency curves are assumed to be connected with straight lineswhen they are plotted using the axis types specified by this parameter.

LINLIN Linear frequency axis, linear value axis.

LOGLIN Logarithmic frequency axis, linear value axis.

LINLOG Linear frequency axis, linear value axis.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions SPECTRUM


LOGLOG Logarithmic frequency axis, logarithmic value axis.

TITLE []The response spectrum can have a title (up to 80 characters) or no title. The title is used onlywhen the response spectrum is listed or plotted.

freqcurvei

The frequency curve giving the variation of the response value (either displacement, velocityor acceleration) with the frequency. Use the FREQCURVE command in this section todefine frequency curves.

dampingi

The damping value associated with the frequency curve (specified as percent of criticaldamping).

factori (from command parameter FACTOR)Values in frequency curve i are multiplied by factori to obtain the response spectrum values. For example, if the frequency curve has acceleration values specified in gs, specify factor =the numerical value of g.

Notes:

The ZPA value (zero-period acceleration value) for the defined spectrum is calculated as thespectrum acceleration for the highest frequency for which spectrum values are provided. Ifthe input highest frequencies differ, or if the spectrum accelerations differ for the highestfrequency, the ZPA value is not calculated, and residual calculations are not possible whenthis response spectrum is used.

SSPECTRUM Sec. 6.5 Spectrum definitions


SSPECTRUM NAME FREQCURVE VALUETYPE FACTOR INPUT-AXES TITLE

SSPECTRUM defines a sweep spectrum, which gives the amplitude of sinusoidal groundmotions or applied forces for given frequencies. The sweep spectrum is used by theRESPONSE HARMONIC command in the definition of a harmonic response (see Section6.3).

Ground motions can be considered only if ADINA computed the modal participation factorsfor ground motions, and applied forces can be considered only if ADINA computed themodal participation factors for applied forces (command ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS EXCITATION=GROUND-MOTION orAPPLIED-LOAD).

If the sweep spectrum is to be used to describe ground motions, the ground motions can bespecified in terms of displacements, velocities or accelerations.

You can plot a sweep spectrum using the SSPECTRUMSHOW command (see Section 5.10).

NAMEThe name of a sweep spectrum. If the sweep spectrum is already defined, data entered in thiscommand modifies the sweep spectrum, otherwise a new sweep spectrum is defined.

FREQCURVEThe frequency curve giving the variation of the response value (either displacement, velocity,acceleration or load) with the frequency. Use the FREQCURVE command in this section todefine frequency curves.

VALUETYPE [DISPLACEMENT or FORCE]If the sweep spectrum is to be used to describe ground motions, the following choices areallowed:

DISPLACEMENT Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as displacements.

VELOCITY Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as velocities.

ACCELERATION Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as accelerations.

If the sweep spectrum is to be used to describe applied loads, the following choice is allowed:

FORCE Values in the frequency curve are used to scale the applied loads.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions SSPECTRUM


FACTOR [1.0]Values in the frequency curve are multiplied by FACTOR to obtain the sweep spectrumvalues. For example, if the frequency curve has acceleration values specified in gs, specifyFACTOR = the numerical value of g.






TITLE []The sweep spectrum can have a title (up to 80 characters) or no title. The title is used onlywhen the sweep spectrum is listed or plotted.

RSPECTRUM Sec. 6.5 Spectrum definitions


RSPECTRUM NAME FREQCURVE VALUETYPE FACTOR REFDB INPUT-AXES TITLE

RSPECTRUM defines a random spectrum, which gives the power-spectral-density of theamplitude of random ground motions or applied loads. The random spectrum is used by theRESPONSE RANDOM command in the definition of a random response (see Section 6.3).

Ground motions can be considered only if ADINA computed the modal participation factorsfor ground motions, and applied forces can be considered only if ADINA computed themodal participation factors for applied forces (command ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS EXCITATION=GROUND-MOTION orAPPLIED-LOAD).

If the random spectrum is to be used to describe ground motions, the power-spectral-densityof the ground motion can be specified in terms of displacements, velocities or accelerations. If the random spectrum is to be used to describe applied loadings, the power-spectral-densityof the applied loading can be specified in terms of load or decibels (db). These options aredescribed in more detail in the notes at the end of this command.

You can plot a random spectrum using the RSPECTRUMSHOW command (see Section5.10).

NAMEThe name of a random spectrum. If the random spectrum is already defined, data entered inthis command modifies the random spectrum, otherwise a new random spectrum is defined.

FREQCURVEThe frequency curve giving the power-spectral-density of the response value (eitherdisplacement, velocity, acceleration load or db) as a function of frequency. Use theFREQCURVE command to define frequency curves.

VALUETYPE [DISPLACEMENT or FORCE]DISPLACEMENT / VELOCITY / ACCELERATION

The random spectrum can be used to describe ground motions.FORCE / DB

The random spectrum can be used to describe the intensity of applied loads.

See the notes at the end of this command for further details.

FACTOR [1.0]Values in the frequency curve are multiplied by FACTOR to obtain the random spectrumvalues. For example, if the frequency curve has acceleration values specified in (g**2/Hz),specify FACTOR = the numerical value of g**2.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RSPECTRUM


REFDB [2.E-5]The reference value used to compute the load multiplier power-spectral-density from a valuespecified in db. The default value corresponds to the value used for acoustical analysis in airwhen SI units are used.






This assumption is used when interpolating within the frequency curve.

TITLE []The random spectrum can have a title (up to 80 characters) or no title. The title is used onlywhen the random spectrum is listed or plotted.

Notes

When the random spectrum is used to describe ground motions, the acceleration power-spectral-density b(f) is calculated as

b(f) = v(f) × FACTOR (VALUETYPE = ACCELERATION)b(f) = v(f) × FACTOR × (2�f)**2 (VALUETYPE = VELOCITY)b(f) = v(f) × FACTOR × (2�f)**4 (VALUETYPE = DISPLACEMENT)

when v(f) is the value for frequency f in the frequency curve.

When the random spectrum is used to describe applied loads, the load multiplier power-spectral-density b(f) is calculated as

b(f) = v(f) × FACTOR (VALUETYPE = FORCE)b(f) = (REFDB**2 × 10.0**(0.1 × v(f))) × FACTOR (VALUETYPE = DB)

when v(f) is the value for frequency f in the frequency curve.

DAMPINGTABLE Sec. 6.5 Spectrum definitions


DAMPINGTABLE NAME OPTION FREQCURVE FACTOR

modei dampingi (if OPTION = MODE)

DAMPINGTABLE defines a damping table. A damping table associates a damping valuewith the frequency or mode number of a mode.

Damping tables are used by several commands, including RESPONSERESPONSE-SPECTRUM, RESPONSE HARMONIC, RESPONSE RANDOM (see Section6.3).

A damping table can be defined either by a frequency curve, in which case the damping is afunction of frequency, or by a list of modes, in which case the damping is assigned to eachmode individually.

NAMEThe name of the damping table. If there is a previously defined damping table with thisname, data entered in this command modifies the damping table, otherwise a new dampingtable is created.

OPTIONLINEAR Damping is defined by a frequency curve and the damping for

frequencies between two given frequencies in the frequency curve isdetermined by linear frequency interpolation.

LOGARITHMIC Damping is defined by a frequency curve and the damping forfrequencies between two given frequencies in the frequency curve isdetermined by logarithmic frequency interpolation.

MODE Damping is defined for each mode by the data input lines and thedamping is undefined for other frequencies.

FREQCURVEFACTOR [1.0]The name of the frequency curve giving the damping/frequency relationship. A frequencycurve is defined by the FREQCURVE command in this section. The values of the frequencycurve are multiplied by FACTOR to determine the damping values (entered as percent ofcritical damping). FREQCURVE and FACTOR are used only if OPTION = LINEAR orLOGARITHMIC.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions DAMPINGTABLE


modei

dampingi

The mode numbers and associated damping values (entered as percent of critical damping). These parameters are used only if OPTION = MODE.

FREQCURVE Sec. 6.5 Spectrum definitions


FREQCURVE NAME FREQOPTION FREQLABEL VALUELABEL TITLE

freqi valuei (if FREQOPTION = FREQUENCY)

periodi valuei (if FREQOPTION = PERIOD)

FREQCURVE defines a frequency curve. A frequency curve is a list of frequencies andvalues. Several commands require frequency curves as input; these commands areDAMPINGTABLE, RSPECTRUM, SPECTRUM, SSPECTRUM (in this section).

The values in a frequency table are interpreted by the command that uses the frequency table. For example, a value of 1.0 is interpreted by the DAMPINGTABLE command as 1% ofcritical damping and is interpreted by the SPECTRUM command as a displacement, velocityor acceleration of 1.0.

NAMEThe name of the frequency curve. If there is a previously defined frequency curve with thisname, data entered in this command alters the previously defined frequency curve. Otherwisea new frequency curve is created.

FREQOPTION [FREQUENCY]Frequencies in the frequency curve can be specified either in terms of frequencies (cycles/unittime) or in terms of periods (time/cycle). {FREQUENCY/PERIOD}

FREQLABEL []You can assign a label (up to 80 characters) to the frequencies, or you can assign no label. The label, if any, is used only when the frequency curve is listed or plotted; the label is notused by commands that use the frequency curve.

VALUELABEL []You can assign a label (up to 80 characters) to the values, or you can assign no label. Thelabel, if any, is used only when the frequency curve is listed or plotted; the label is not usedby commands that use the frequency curve.

TITLE []You can assign a title (up to 80 characters) to the frequency table, or you can assign no table. The title, if any, is used only when the frequency curve is listed or plotted; the title is not usedby commands that use the frequency curve.

frequencyi

periodi

valuei

A frequency (or period) and its associated value.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions FREQTABLE


FREQTABLE NAME MODES DELTAF

frequencyi deltafi

Defines a frequency table, which is a list of frequencies and peak broadening factors that isused by the FSSHOW and FTSHOW commands (see Section 5.10).

The frequencies listed in a frequency table are used in addition to frequencies given by thefrequency range parameters of the FSSHOW and FTSHOW commands. For example, youcan specify structural natural frequencies as frequencies in a frequency table to force theFSSHOW and FTSHOW commands to evaluate the SDOF system response at the structuralnatural frequencies.

In addition, if you select the option PEAKBROADENING=YES of these commands, thefrequencies in the frequency table are treated as peak frequencies and you also supply thepeak broadening factors in the frequency table. (Note that peak broadening is only applied tothose frequencies in the frequency table for which the response curve is at a local maximum.)

NAMEThe name of the frequency table. If there is a previously defined frequency table with thisname, data entered in this command modifies the frequency table, otherwise a new frequencytable is created.

MODES [YES]DELTAF [0.0]If MODES = YES, all structural modes, if any, are automatically included in the frequencytable, with peak broadening factor given by DELTAF. If MODES = NO, structural modesare not automatically included in the frequency table and DELTAF is ignored.

frequencyi

Frequency included in the frequency table. The dimensions of frequencyi are cycles/unittime.

deltafi [0.0]Used only for peak broadening, option YES. If deltafi is less than 0.0, then frequencyi is notconsidered to be a peak frequency (but the response is still evaluated for frequencyi). Ifdeltafi = 0.0, then frequencyi is considered to be a peak frequency but the minimum amount ofpeak broadening is used. If deltafi is greater than 0.0, then frequencyi is considered to be apeak frequency and the peak is broadened by an amount (deltafi×frequencyi) so that the peakextends from frequency frequencyi×(1.0 - deltafi) to frequencyi×(1.0 + deltafi). It is necessaryfor deltafi to be less than 1.0.

Result control definitions – Introduction Sec. 6.6 Result control definitions


Result control definitions – Introduction

This section describes the following commands:

SMOOTHING: specifies how to smooth results

RESULTCONTROL: specifies other options used in calculating results

MASS-SELECT: determines how total mass/volume calculations are performed

RESULTGRID: specifies where results are calculated when they are listed using zonelisting commands

The SMOOTHING, RESULTCONTROL and RESULTGRID commands control thecorresponding depictions. As with other depictions, each of these commands associates adepiction name with attributes.

The MASS-SELECT command directly controls the total mass/volume calculations and nodepiction name is involved.

Auxiliary commands

The SMOOTHING command has the following auxiliary commands (there are similarauxiliary commands for RESULTCONTROL and RESULTGRID):

LIST SMOOTHINGLists all smoothing names.

LIST SMOOTHING NAMELists the attributes of the specified smoothing depiction name.

DELETE SMOOTHING NAMEDeletes the specified smoothing depiction.

COPY SMOOTHING NAME1 NAME2Copies the smoothing depiction specified by NAME1 to NAME2.

The MASS-SELECT command has the following auxiliary command:

LIST MASS-SELECTLists the current settings of the MASS-SELECT command.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions Result control definitions – Introduction


See alsoCommands that use a smoothing depiction:

CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE (Section 5.2) BANDPLOT (Section 5.4)EVECTORPLOT (Section 5.5)RESPONSESHOW, LINESHOW, HARMONICSHOW, RANDOMSHOW,FOURIERSHOW (Section 5.10)POINTLIST, POINTEXCEED, POINTMAX, LINELIST, LINEEXCEED,LINEMAX, ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2)

Commands that use a result control depiction:MESHPLOT, CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE (Section 5.2)BANDPLOT (Section 5.4)EVECTORPLOT (Section 5.5)ELINEPLOT (Section 5.6)REACTIONPLOT (Section 5.7)RESPONSESHOW, LINESHOW, HARMONICSHOW, RANDOMSHOW,FSSHOW, FTSHOW, FOURIERSHOW (Section 5.10)POINTLIST, POINTEXCEED, POINTMAX, LINELIST, LINEEXCEED,LINEMAX, ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2)

Commands that use a result grid depiction: ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2)

SMOOTHING Sec. 6.6 Result control definitions


SMOOTHING NAME TYPE ERRORREF ZONENAME BLOCKING

SMOOTHING associates a name with a smoothing technique.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name to be associated with the smoothing technique. If there is a previously definedsmoothing technique with this name, data entered in this command modifies that smoothingtechnique, otherwise a new smoothing technique is created by this command.

TYPE [NONE]The type of smoothing to be performed. Within each element, a requested variable isextrapolated to the node points. At each node point, the extrapolated values are combinedinto a single value. The combination rule is controlled by the value of TYPE.

NONE No smoothing is performed.

AVERAGED The extrapolated values are averaged.

MINIMUM The minimum extrapolated value is taken.

MAXIMUM The maximum extrapolated value is taken.

DIFFERENCE The difference between the maximum and minimum extrapolated valuesis taken.

EXTREME The most extreme value (value furthest from 0.0) is taken.

ERROR The difference between the maximum and minimum extrapolated valuesis taken at the corner nodes and divided by ERRORREF. The resultingvariable values can be interpreted as error indicators.

ERRORREF [1.0]When TYPE = ERROR, the error difference is divided by the value of ERRORREF. ERRORREF cannot be equal to 0.0.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The smoothing technique is applied to all applicable elements and radiosity surfaces withinthe specified zone. The zone name must have been previously defined by a zone definitioncommand (see Section 6.2).

BLOCKING [0]The value of blocking influences the number of database records that are used duringsmoothing. In general, a larger value of BLOCKING causes the program to use fewerdatabase records; this means that the time needed to construct the smoothing data structures is

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions SMOOTHING


reduced, but that memory requirements are increased when commands that compute smootheddata run. A value of zero indicates that the program computes the blocking factorautomatically.

RESULTCONTROL Sec. 6.6 Result control definitions


RESULTCONTROL NAME EXTRAPOLATION SHELLMIDSURFACE SHELLLAYER SHELLT MODEFACTOR LEVERXREF LEVERYREF LEVERZREF LEVEREXPONENT LEVERCONFIGURATION RESULTSYSTEM ZEROREACTION

RESULTCONTROL allows you to control the way in which the AUI computes results. Theparameters of this command can be grouped as follows:

Rules for interpolating element data within elements:

EXTRAPOLATION

Calculation of shell element results onto midsurface:

SHELLMIDSURFACESHELLLAYERSHELLT

Scaling of modal results:

MODEFACTOR

Calculation of lever variables:

LEVERXREFLEVERYREFLEVERZREFLEVEREXPONENTLEVERCONFIGURATION

Transformation of stresses and strains to a user-defined coordinate system:

RESULTSYSTEM

Calculation of reactions

ZEROREACTION

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. If there is a previously defined result controldepiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that result control depiction,otherwise a new result control depiction is created by this command.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESULTCONTROL


EXTRAPOLATION [RST]If EXTRAPOLATION = RST, the AUI uses linear interpolation within elements to computestresses and other element quantities at a given point within the element.

If EXTRAPOLATION = FACE, the AUI uses the results at center of the nearest face.

If EXTRAPOLATION = CENTROID, the AUI uses the results at the element centroid.

If EXTRAPOLATION = INTPT, the AUI uses the results from the closest integration point.

SHELLMIDSURFACE [YES]If SHELLMIDSURFACE = YES, the AUI plots results from the specified shell layer andshell t value on the shell midsurface. If SHELLMIDSURFACE = NO, the AUI plots resultsevaluated at the shell midsurface on the shell midsurface.

This control is most useful when plotting bands or element vectors on a mesh plot in whichthe shells are drawn using a midsurface depiction.

SHELLLAYER [-1]SHELLT [1.0]Used only if SHELLMIDSURFACE = YES. These parameters specify the shell layer numberand t coordinate value within the shell layer from which results are extracted for plotting orlisting onto the shell midsurface. For example, for single layer shells, t = -1.0 corresponds tothe bottom surface of the shell, t = 0.0 corresponds to the shell midsurface and t = 1.0corresponds to the top surface of the shell. A shell layer number of -1 is interpreted to meanthe top layer of the shell.

MODEFACTOR [1.0]The scaling factor applied to all modal results, including eigenvectors, modal stresses andmodal reactions.

LEVERXREF [0.0]LEVERYREF [0.0]LEVERZREF [0.0]The reference values used in definition of the LEVER variables, see notes below.

LEVEREXPONENT [1]The exponent used in the definition of the LEVER variables, see notes below. Note that theexponent must be an integer greater than or equal to 1.

RESULTCONTROL Sec. 6.6 Result control definitions


LEVERCONFIGURATION [ORIGINAL]The lever variables either use the coordinates corresponding to the original configuration ofthe model or the coordinates corresponding to the current deformed configuration of themodel {ORIGINAL / DEFORMED}.

RESULTSYSTEM [0]The coordinate system used when computing transformed stress and strain variablesSTRESS-11, STRESS-22, STRESS-33, STRESS-12, STRESS-13, STRESS-23, STRAIN-11, STRAIN-22, STRAIN-33, STRAIN-12, STRAIN-13,STRAIN-23. Use the SYSTEM command to define a coordinate system (the SYSTEMcommand is described in the AUI Command Reference Manual, Volume I). Coordinatesystem 0 is the global Cartesian coordinate system.

ZEROREACTION [NO]Normally ADINA does not save reactions if they are numerically close to zero. WhenZEROREACTION=NO, ADINA-PLOT returns “not found” when a reaction is not saved. When ZEROREACTION=YES, ADINA-PLOT returns “0" when a reaction is not saved.

ZEROREACTION=YES is useful when making a graph in which one of the variables is areaction.

Notes

1) Parameters LEVERXREF, LEVERYREF, LEVERZREF, LEVEREXPONENT, LEVERCONFIGURATION control the evaluation of the variables X-LEVER, Y-LEVER,Z-LEVER. X-LEVER is defined as

X-LEVER = (X - LEVERXREF)**(LEVEREXPONENT)

with similar definitions for the other variables. X is a coordinate either in the original ordeformed configuration of the model.

2) Predefined resultants SURFACE_MOMENT-X, SURFACE_MOMENT-Y,SURFACE_MOMENT-Z, REACTION_MOMENT-X, REACTION_MOMENT-Y,REACTION_MOMENT-Z rely upon the LEVER variables.

3) Parameter RESULTSYSTEM is used to control the coordinate system used whenevaluating transformed variables STRESS-11, STRESS-22, STRAIN-11, STRAIN-22,etc. These variables can be used to obtain the stresses and strains in a local coordinate systemthat you choose.

You use the SYSTEM command to define the local coordinate system. The system can beCartesian, cylindrical or spherical. The origin of the system can be displaced from the originof the global coordinate system and the local coordinate system axes can be rotated from theglobal coordinate system axes.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESULTCONTROL


Directions 1, 2, 3 are interpreted as follows:

System type Direction 1 Direction 2 Direction 3Cartesian XL YL ZLCylindrical R THETA XLSpherical R THETA PHI

Thus, by default, STRESS-11 = STRESS-XX, STRESS-22 = STRESS-YY, etc.

Here is an example involving output of stresses and strains in a local coordinate system:

SYSTEM 1 TYPE=CYLINDRICALRESULTCONTROL RESULTSYSTEM=1ZONELIST VAR=STRESS-11 STRESS-22 STRESS-33, STRESS-12 STRESS-13 STRESS-23ZONELIST VAR=STRAIN-11 STRAIN-22 STRAIN-33, STRAIN-12 STRAIN-13 STRAIN-23

In this example, STRESS-11 is the radial stress, STRESS-22 is the tangential stress,STRESS-33 is the axial stress (equal to STRESS-XX) and STRAIN-33 is equal toSTRAIN-XX. Note that the off-diagonal strain components (STRAIN-12, STRAIN-13,STRAIN-23) are engineering quantities, not tensorial quantities. A convenient way to view the transformation corresponding to parameter RESULTSYSTEMis to plot the mesh with element triads and with ELDEPICTION TRIADTYPE=RESULTTR(see Section 5.2). Then the plotted triad directions correspond to the local coordinate systemchosen by parameter RESULTSYSTEM.

Note that the original (not the deformed) coordinates of the model are used in calculating thelocations of points, and therefore the local coordinate system directions.

4) RESULTSYSTEM controls STRESS-11, STRESS-22, etc through the special variableCOORDINATE_SYSTEM_NUMBER; the value of COORDINATE_SYSTEM_NUMBER is thevalue of parameter RESULTSYSTEM. The resultants STRESS-11, STRESS-22, etc alldepend upon variable COORDINATE_SYSTEM_NUMBER.

MASS-SELECT Sec. 6.6 Result control definitions


MASS-SELECT ELEMENTS NODES ZONE

MASS-SELECT determines which elements and nodes contribute to the total mass/volumecalculations performed when mass/volume variables are listed using, for example, theMASSINFO command (see Section 7.1).

Note that mass/volume calculations are possible only when requested in ADINA-IN.

Note: mass/volume calculations are performed by ADINA element group by element group,that is, only the mass/volume information for each element group is output by ADINA and isavailable to the AUI.

Hence, an element contributes to the total mass/volume calculations only if all elements in theelement’s element group are in the specified zone.

ELEMENTS [YES]The elements in the zone contribute to the total mass/volume calculations. {YES / NO}

NODES [YES]Concentrated masses for all nodes in the zone contribute to the total mass/volumecalculations. {YES / NO}

ZONE [WHOLE_MODEL]The zone used for determining which elements and/or nodes contribute to the totalmass/volume calculations. See the zone commands in Section 6.2.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESULTGRID


RESULTGRID NAME TYPE NGRIDR NGRIDS NGRIDT

RESULTGRID allows you to control the locations where the AUI computes results.

NAME [DEFAULT]The name of the result grid depiction. If there is a previously defined result grid depictionwith this name, data entered in this command modifies that result grid depiction. If there isno previously defined result grid depiction with this name, a new result grid depiction iscreated by this command.

TYPE [PORTHOLE]NGRIDR [1]NGRIDS [1]NGRIDT [1]The values of TYPE are:

PORTHOLE The AUI computes results where they were computed by the solutionprogram (and made available to the AUI in the porthole file). Forexample, element results are output at the integration points.

NODES The AUI computes results at the node points. Element and elementsection results are computed at the node points if smoothing is activated.

ELGRID Each element is conceptually divided into a grid with NGRIDR,NGRIDS and NGRIDT divisions and results are computed at theselocations. Lower-dimensional elements ignore NGRIDs for thecoordinates that the elements do not possess.

SECTGRID Each element section is conceptually divided into a gird with NGRIDR,NGRIDS and NGRIDT divisions, and results are computed at theselocations.

ELNODES The AUI computes results at the element local nodes.

SECTNODES The AUI computes results at the section local nodes.

NGRIDR, NGRIDS and NGRIDT must be less than 10.

Model points – Introduction Sec. 6.7 Model points


Model points – Introduction

The commands for associating a single point in the model with a model point areNODEPOINT node pointELPOINT element/layer pointSECTPOINT section pointCSPOINT contact segment pointRADPOINT radiosity segment pointVSPOINT virtual shift pointLCPOINT J-integral line contour pointDBPOINT drawbead point

The commands for associating several points in the model with a model point name areNODECOMBINATION node pointELCOMBINATION element/layer pointSECTCOMBINATION section pointCSCOMBINATION contact segment pointRADCOMBINATION radiosity segment pointVSCOMBINATION virtual shift pointLCCOMBINATION J-integral line contour pointDBCOMBINATION drawbead point

You can also define a model point in terms of other model points:POINTCOMBINATION

There are also several special commands that create model points:GNCOMBINATION all nodes on the specified general selectionMESHINTEGRATION faces of a mesh plot and rule for integrationMESHMAX faces of a mesh plot and rule for searching for extreme valueREACTIONSUM all nodes with reactions

These commands are described in detail in this section.

General information

Two result model points cannot have the same name, even if the result points are of differenttypes.

The SUBSTRUCTURE and REUSE parameters of these commands are used only for anADINA model as follows:

If the model has substructures, use these numbers to specify the desired substructure andreuse.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions Model points – Introduction


If the model has cyclic parts, use the reuse number to specify the desired cyclic part.

The value of a variable evaluated as a combination point is the sum of the variable's value ateach of the points in the combination multiplied by the weighting factor at each of the points.

Auxiliary commands

For each of these commands, the following auxiliary commands are available:

LIST ( )Lists all names of the specified type.

LIST ( ) NAMELists data for the specified name.

DELETE ( ) NAMEDeletes the name.

COPY ( ) NAME1 NAME2Copies the data for name NAME1 to name NAME2.

Here ( ) can be NODEPOINT, ELPOINT, SECTPOINT, CSPOINT, RADPOINT,VSPOINT, LCPOINT, DBPOINT, POINTCOMBINATION, GNCOMBINATION,MESHINTEGRATION, MESHMAX, REACTIONSUM.

For commands NODECOMBINATION, ELCOMBINATION, SECTCOMBINATION,CSCOMBINATION, RADCOMBINATION, VSCOMBINATION, LCCOMBINATION,DBCOMBINATION, use the corresponding POINT command, i.e., LIST NODEPOINT listsall model points defined using NODEPOINT or NODECOMBINATION.

See also

A model point name defined by any of these commands can be used by the followingcommands:

RESPONSESHOW, HARMONICSHOW, RANDOMSHOW, FSSHOW, FTSHOW,FOURIERSHOW (Section 5.10)POINTMAX, POINTEXCEED, POINTLIST (Section 7.2).

NODEPOINT Sec. 6.7 Model points


NODEPOINT NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE

NODEPOINT assigns a name to a node point.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). NODEPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the node point.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]The substructure and reuse numbers of the node point in the model.

NODE [1]The label number of the node.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions ELPOINT


ELPOINT NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT LAYER OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T

ELPOINT assigns a name to a point within an element or element layer.

The point can be specified in one of four ways:

Grid location The element (or element layer) is conceptually divided into an evenlyspaced grid, see figure. You select a location on the grid by giving atwo, four or six digit grid number.

Label location Results calculated by ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F are saved atlabel locations. You select a label location by giving a label locationnumber.

RST location You can choose a location by directly specifying the isoparametric rstcoordinates of the location, see figure.

Node location You can specify the number of one of the nodes in the element.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). ELPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the element point.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]The substructure and reuse numbers of the element point in the model.

GROUP [1]The label number of the element group that contains the element point.

ELEMENT [1]LAYER [1]The element label number. If the element is a multilayer element, the layer number must alsobe specified.

OPTION [GRID]The element point can be specified using one of four options. Each option requires additionalinput of at least one of the remaining parameters.

ELPOINT Sec. 6.7 Model points


GRID The parameter GRID is used to specify the element point within an evenlyspaced grid.

LABEL The parameter LABEL is used to specify the labelled element point.

NODE The parameter NODE is used to specify the global node number of a nodeattached to the element.

RST The parameters R, S and T are used to specify the isoparametric coordinates ofthe element point.

GRID [0]Used when OPTION = GRID. The element or element layer conceptually contains an evenlyspaced grid in the element's isoparametric system. The grid can be 1-D, 2-D or 3-Ddepending upon the element type. To specify a grid location using a 1-D grid, give a twodigit number AB: digit A gives the total number of grid divisions and digit B gives the desiredgrid location. To specify a grid location using a 2-D grid, give a four digit number ABCD:digit A gives the total number of grid divisions in the r direction, digit B gives the desiredgrid location in the r direction, digit C gives the total number of grid divisions in the sdirection and digit D gives the desired grid location in the s direction. To specify a gridlocation using a 3-D grid, give a six digit number ABCDEF: digit A gives the total number ofgrid divisions in the r direction, digit B gives the desired grid location in the r direction, digitC gives the total number of grid divisions in the s direction, digit D gives the desired gridlocation in the s direction, digit E gives the total number of grid divisions in the t directionand digit F gives the desired grid location in the t direction. You can also specify the elementcentroidal location by giving a grid value of 0.

LABEL [1]Used when OPTION = LABEL. The element or element layer contains various locationswhere ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F calculated the results. If the results were calculatedat integration points, then LABEL is a 1, 2 or 3 digit number giving the integration pointlocation, see table. If the results were calculated at the element local nodes, then LABEL isthe local node number.

NODE [1]Used when OPTION = NODE. You enter the label number (global node number) of a nodeconnected to the element. It is an error to specify a node that is not connected to the element.



R [0.0]S [0.0]T [0.0]Used when OPTION = RST. You directly enter the isoparametric coordinates r, s, t of thedesired location. If the element is 1-D, only R needs to be entered, if the element is 2-D, onlyR and S need to be entered.

Notes:

1) For an ADINA shell element, you can specify that the element point lies on the shellmidsurface using the following options:

• Specify the node number of a midsurface node• Specify a grid location of 0, or a grid location in which the 5th and 6th digits are

equal to 1.

When the element point lies on the shell midsurface, when results are evaluated at thepoint, the t coordinate and layer used for the evaluation are taken from the result controldepiction being used for the evaluation. See the RESULTCONTROL command inSection 6.6 for further details.

2) If the results were calculated at the integration points, then the label is a 1, 2, 3 or 4 digitnumber giving the integration point as shown in the following tables:

ADINA:

Element type Result location Label number

Truss Int. pts. (INR)2-D solid or fluid Int. pts. 10(INR) + (INS)*

3-D solid or fluid Int. pts. 100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)*

Hermitian beam Int. pts. 100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)Iso-beam (3-D) Int. pts. 100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)Iso-beam (2-D) Int. pts. 10(INR) + (INS)Plate Int. pts. (ITRI)Shell (rectangular) Int. pts. 100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)Shell (triangular) Int. pts. 10(ITRI) + (INT)Pipe Int. pts. 1000(INA) + 100(INB) + (INC)Spring ---- 1General Stress

transformation matrix

(J)

ELPOINT Sec. 6.7 Model points


ADINA-T:

Element typeResultlocation

Label number

1-D Int. pts. (INR)2-D conduction Int. pts. 10(INR) + (INS)*

3-D conduction Int. pts. 100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)*

Shell conduction Int. pts. 100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)

ADINA-F:

Element typeResultlocation

Label number

2-D fluid Int. pts. 10(INR) + (INS)*

3-D fluid Int. pts. 100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)*

Each quantity in parentheses represents one integer:

(ITRI) � integration point number in triangular integration

(ITET) - integration point number in tetrahedral integration

(INR), (INS), (INT) � integration point numbers for r, s and t coordinates

(INA), (INB), (INC) � integration point numbers for a, b and c coordinates

(J) � stress component number

*) If the element is triangular, the label number is (ITRI); if the element is tetrahedral, thelabel number is (ITET).

SECTPOINT Sec. 6.7 Model points


SECTPOINT NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T

SECTPOINT assigns a name to a point within an element section. Currently the only elementtypes with sections are the ADINA shell element when section results are saved and theADINA beam element when stress resultants are saved.

The element section point can be specified in one of four ways:

Grid location The element section is conceptually divided into an evenly spaced grid,see the figure in the ELPOINT command. You select a location on thegrid by giving a two or four digit grid number.

Label location Results calculated by the finite element programs are saved at labellocations. You select a label location by giving a label location number.

RST location You can choose a location by directly specifying the isoparametric rstcoordinates of the location.

Node location You can specify the number of one of the nodes in the element section.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). SECTPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the element section point.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]The substructure and reuse numbers of the element point.

GROUP [1]The label number of the element group that contains the element section point.

ELEMENT [1]The label number of the element.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions SECTPOINT


OPTION [GRID]The element section point can be specified using one of four options. Each option requiresadditional input of at least one of the remaining parameters.

GRID The parameter GRID is used to specify the element section within an evenlyspaced grid.

LABEL The parameter LABEL is used to specify the labelled element section point.

NODE The parameter NODE is used to specify the global node number of a nodeattached to the element section.

RST The parameters R, S and T are used to specify the isoparametric coordinates ofthe element section.

GRID [0]Used when OPTION = GRID. The element section conceptually contains an evenly spacedgrid in the section's isoparametric coordinate system. The grid can be 1-D or 2-D dependingupon the element section type. To specify a grid location using a 1-D grid, give a two digitnumber AB: digit A gives the total number of grid divisions and digit B gives the desired gridlocation. To specify a grid location using a 2-D grid, give a four digit number ABCD: digit Agives the total number of grid divisions in the r direction, digit B gives the desired gridlocation in the r direction, digit C gives the total number of grid divisions in the s directionand digit D gives the desired grid location in the s direction. You can also specify the sectioncentroidal location by giving a grid value of 0.

LABEL [1]Used when OPTION = LABEL. The element section contains integration point locationswhere the finite element program calculated the results. LABEL is a 1 or 2 digit numbergiving the integration point location.

NODE [1]Used when OPTION = NODE. You enter the label number (global node number) of a nodeconnected to the section. It is an error to specify a node that is not connected to the section.

R [0.0]S [0.0]T [0.0]Used when OPTION = RST. You directly enter the isoparametric coordinates r, s, t of thedesired location. If the element is 1-D, only R needs to be entered, if the element is 2-D, onlyR and S need to be entered. (T is not required in this version of the AUI but is present forpossible future updates.)

CSPOINT Sec. 6.7 Model points


CSPOINT NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT

CSPOINT assigns a name to a contact segment "point". It is possible to obtain results only atcontact segments attached to contactor contact surfaces.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). CSPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the contact segment point.

GROUP [1]The contact group label number of the contact segment.

SURFACE [1]The contact surface label number that contains the contact segment. This contact surfacemust be used as a contactor contact surface.

SEGMENT [1]The contact segment number.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RADPOINT


RADPOINT NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T

RADPOINT assigns a name to a point within a radiosity surface segment. The point can bespecified in one of 4 ways:

Grid location The segment is conceptually divided into an evenly spaced grid, see thefigure in the ELPOINT command. You select a location on the grid bygiving a two or four digit grid number.

Label location Results calculated by ADINA-T are saved at label locations. You selecta label location by giving a label location number.

RST location You can choose a location by directly specifying the isoparametric rstcoordinates of the location.

Node location You can specify the number of one of the nodes in the segment.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). RADPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the radiosity segment point.

GROUP [1]The label number of the radiosity surface group that contains the radiosity segment point.

SURFACE [1]SEGMENT [1]The label numbers of the radiosity surface and segment.

OPTION [GRID]The radiosity segment point can be specified using one of four options. Each option requiresadditional input of at least one of the remaining parameters.

GRID The parameter GRID is used to specify the radiosity segment point within anevenly spaced grid.

LABEL The parameter LABEL is used to specify the labelled radiosity segment point.

NODE The parameter NODE is used to specify the global node number of a nodeattached to the radiosity segment.

RADPOINT Sec. 6.7 Model points


RST The parameters R, S and T are used to specify the isoparametric coordinates ofthe radiosity segment point.

GRID [0]Used when OPTION = GRID. The radiosity segment conceptually contains an evenly spacedgrid in the segment's isoparametric system. The grid can be 1-D or 2-D depending upon thesegment type. To specify a grid location using a 1-D grid, give a two digit number AB: digitA gives the total number of grid divisions and digit B gives the desired grid location. Tospecify a grid location using a 2-D grid, give a four digit number ABCD: digit A gives thetotal number of grid divisions in the r direction, digit B gives the desired grid location in the rdirection, digit C gives the total number of grid divisions in the s direction and digit D givesthe desired grid location in the s direction. You can also specify the segment centroidallocation by giving a grid value of 0.

LABEL [1]Used when OPTION = LABEL. The radiosity segment contains integration point locationswhere ADINA-T calculated the results. LABEL is a 1 or 2 digit number giving theintegration point location.

NODE [1]Used when OPTION = NODE. You enter the label number (global node number) of a nodeconnected to the segment. It is an error to specify a node that is not connected to the segment.

R [0.0]S [0.0]T [0.0]Used when OPTION = RST. You directly enter the isoparametric coordinates r, s, t of thedesired location. If the segment is 1-D, only R needs to be entered, if the segment is 2-D,only R and S need to be entered. (T is not required in this version of the AUI, but is presentfor possible future updates.)

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions VSPOINT


VSPOINT NAME SHIFT

VSPOINT assigns a name to a virtual shift, used in fracture mechanics analysis when virtualshifts are defined for evaluation of the J-integral.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). VSPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the virtual shift point.

SHIFT [1]The label number of a virtual shift.

LCPOINT Sec. 6.7 Model points


LCPOINT NAME CONTOUR

LCPOINT assigns a name to a line contour, used in fracture mechanics analysis when linecontours are defined for evaluation of the J-integral.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). LCPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the line contour point.

CONTOUR [1]The label number of a line contour.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions DBPOINT


DBPOINT NAME GROUP DRAWBEAD SEGMENT

DBPOINT assigns a name to a drawbead segment.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). DBPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the drawbead point.

GROUP [1]The contact group label number of the drawbead segment.

DRAWBEAD [1]The drawbead label number that contains the drawbead segment.

SEGMENT [1]The drawbead segment number.

NODECOMBINATION Sec. 6.7 Model points


NODECOMBINATION NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE FACTOR


NODECOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of node points.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). NODECOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the currentfinite element program.

NAMEThe name of the node combination point.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]NODE [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

NODE [1]The label number of the node.

substructurei

reusei

nodei

A node point. See the NODEPOINT command in this section for the conventions used tospecify a node point.

factori

Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the node point.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions ELCOMBINATION


ELCOMBINATION NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT LAYER OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR

substructurei reusei groupi elementi layeri optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori

ELCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of element points.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). ELCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finiteelement program.

NAMEThe name of the element combination point.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]GROUP [1]ELEMENT [1]LAYER [1]OPTION [GRID]GRID [0]LABEL [1]NODE [1]R, S, T [0.0]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

substructurei

reusei

groupi

elementi

layeri

optioni

gridi

labeli

nodei

ri

si

ti

An element point. See the ELPOINT command in this section for the conventions used tospecify an element point.

ELCOMBINATION Sec. 6.7 Model points


factori

Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the element point.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions SECTCOMBINATION


SECTCOMBINATION NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR

substructurei reusei groupi elementi optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori

SECTCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of section points.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). SECTCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the currentfinite element program.

NAMEThe name of the section combination point.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]GROUP [1]ELEMENT [1]OPTION [GRID]GRID [0]NODE [1]R, S, T [0.0]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

substructurei

reusei

groupi

elementi

optioni

gridi

labeli

nodei

ri

si

ti

A section point. See the SECTPOINT command in this section for the conventions used tospecify a section point.

factori

Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the section point.

CSCOMBINATION Sec. 6.7 Model points


CSCOMBINATION NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT FACTOR

groupi surfacei segmenti factori

CSCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of contact segment points.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). CSCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finiteelement program.

NAMEThe name of the contact segment combination point.

GROUP [1]SURFACE [1]SEGMENT [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

groupi

surfacei

segmenti

A contact segment point. See the CSPOINT command in this section for the conventionsused to specify a contact segment point. Remember that it is possible to obtain results only atcontact segments attached to contactor contact surfaces.

factori

Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the contact segment point.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RADCOMBINATION


RADCOMBINATION NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR

groupi surfacei segmenti optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori

RADCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of radiosity segment points.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). RADCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the currentfinite element program.

NAMEThe name of the radiosity segment combination point.

GROUP [1]SURFACE [1]SEGMENT [1]OPTION [GRID]GRID [0]LABEL [1]NODE [1]R, S, T [0.0]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

groupi

surfacei

segmenti

optioni

gridi

labeli

nodei

ri

si

ti

A radiosity segment point. See the RADPOINT command in this section for the conventionsused to specify a radiosity segment point.

factori

Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the radiosity segment point.

VSCOMBINATION Sec. 6.7 Model points


VSCOMBINATION NAME SHIFT FACTOR

shifti factori

VSCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of virtual shift points. Virtual shiftpoints are used in fracture mechanics analysis when virtual shifts are used to evaluate the J-integral.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). VSCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finiteelement program.

NAMEThe name of the virtual shift combination point.

SHIFT [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

shifti

A virtual shift point. See the VSPOINT command in this section for the conventions used tospecify a virtual shift point.

factori

Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the virtual shift point.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions LCCOMBINATION


LCCOMBINATION NAME CONTOUR FACTOR

contouri factori

LCCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of line contour points. Line contourpoints are used in fracture mechanics analysis when line contours are used to evaluate the J-integral.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). LCCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finiteelement program.

NAMEThe name of the line contour combination point.

CONTOUR [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

contouri

A line contour point. See the LCPOINT command in this section for the conventions used tospecify a line contour point.

factori

Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the line contour point.

DBCOMBINATION Sec. 6.7 Model points


DBCOMBINATION NAME GROUP DRAWBEAD SEGMENT FACTOR

groupi drawbeadi segmenti factori

DBCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of drawbead segment points.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). DBCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finiteelement program.

NAMEThe name of the drawbead segment combination point.

GROUP [1]DRAWBEAD [1]SEGMENT [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

groupi

drawbeadi

segmenti

A drawbead segment point. See the DBPOINT command in this section for the conventionsused to specify a drawbead segment point.

factori

Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the drawbead segment point.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions POINTCOMBINATION


POINTCOMBINATION NAME FACTOR

pointnamei factori

The POINTCOMBINATION command creates a model point based upon previously definedmodel points. When the model point is used by another command, such as the POINTLISTcommand in Section 7.2, the AUI evaluates the results at each of the model points andoutputs the sum.

NAMEThe name of the pointcombination point.

FACTOR [1.0]The default value for the multiplying factor used to multiply the results from each of the datainput line model points.

pointnamei

The name of a model point to be included in the sum. The model point can be defined by anymodel point definition command except the POINTCOMBINATION command.

factori [value of command line parameter FACTOR]The result from the model point pointnamei are multiplied by factori before inclusion in thesum.

Notes

1) As an example, this command can be used to determine the difference in volume fluxbetween two sections in a pipe:

CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE SECTION_1 OPTION=XCOORD VALUE=1.0MESHPLOT SECTION_1MESHINTEGRATION SECTION_1CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE SECTION_2 OPTION=XCOORD VALUE=2.0MESHPLOT SECTION_2MESHINTEGRATION SECTION_2POINTCOMBINATION SECTION_DIFF'SECTION_1''SECTION_2' DATAENDPOINTLIST SECTION_DIFF VAR=VOLUME_FLUX_SURFACE

(since the normals to each surface point in the same direction, there is no need to negate theresults from SECTION_2).

GNCOMBINATION Sec. 6.7 Model points


GNCOMBINATION NAME PROGRAM

selectioni

GNCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of node points. You specify generalselections and the AUI chooses all nodes that belong to at least one of the general selections.

If the selections refer to geometry, the database must contain geometry information beforeyou use this command. See the example below for the typical usage of this command.

NAMEThe name of the gncombination point.

PROGRAM [current FE program]The AUI selects nodes from the PROGRAM that belong to the geometry that you specify.

selectioni

A selection string. When using the command-line interface, you must enclose the selection inquotes so that the AUI does not interpret the selection as a command. When using the dialogbox, you do not need to enclose the selection in quotes.




GEOMETRY POINT or POINTGEOMETRY LINE or LINEGEOMETRY SURFACE or SURFACEGEOMETRY VOLUME or VOLUMEGEOMETRY EDGE or EDGEGEOMETRY FACE or FACEGEOMETRY BODY or BODYCONTACT SURFACECONTACT GROUP



'LINE 1'

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions GNCOMBINATION


'LINES 2 TO 4'

Notice that you specify a range of numbers using the keyword TO.

When a single object is not sufficient to entirely specify the desired selection, use the OFkeyword. For example, if there is more than one body in the model, use

'EDGE 1 OF BODY 2'

to specify edge 1 of body 2.

You can type selections in either upper, lower or mixed case and you can abbreviate objectnames. For example

'line 1''Vol 2'

The AUI chooses those nodes that belong to at least one of the geometry selections.

Example

In the following example, we determine the total reaction force acting on the nodes ongeometry lines 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7.

ADINA-IN input:

(commands to define the model)ADINA FILE=test.datDATABASE SAVE test.idbQUIT

ADINA-PLOT input:

DATABASE OPEN test.idbLOADPORTHOLE CREATE test.portGNCOMBINATION TEST1'LINE 1 TO 5''LINE 7'DATAENDPOINTLIST TEST1 VAR=X-REACTION Y-REACTION Z-REACTIONQUIT

Note that you can achieve the same result using the NODECOMBINATION command in thissection, but then you would have to determine the nodes that lie on the geometry linesyourself.

MESHINTEGRATION Sec. 6.7 Model points


MESHINTEGRATION NAME MESHPLOT ZONENAME OPTION TYPE FACTOR ORDER CONFIGURATION

MESHINTEGRATION creates a model point based upon the element faces or element edgesof the given mesh plot. This model point represents the domain over which a numericalintegration will be performed. However MESHINTEGRATION does not actually performthe numerical integration. When the model point is used by another command, such as thePOINTLIST command in Section 7.2, the AUI performs a numerical integration over theselected element faces or element edges and outputs the integral.

NAMEThe name of the meshintegration point.

MESHPLOT [PREVIOUS]The name of the mesh plot from which the element faces or element edges are taken. SeeSection 5.2 for more information about mesh plots.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]An element face or edge is selected if it is present in the mesh plot as described in theMESHPLOT parameter description and if the element is present in the zone specified by thisparameter. The zone specified in this parameter need not be the same zone as was specifiedwhen creating the mesh plot. See Section 6.2 for more information about zones.

OPTION [SURFACES]If OPTION=SURFACES, then element faces are selected from the mesh plot. IfOPTION=LINES, then element edges are selected from the mesh plot. See the notes at theend of this command description for more information about which element faces/edges areselected.

TYPE [INTEGRAL]Various types of integrations can be performed when the meshintegration point is used. Theintegration type is specified by the TYPE parameter as follows:

INTEGRAL

AVERAGED

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions MESHINTEGRATION


MEAN-SQUARE

ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE

VARIANCE

STANDARD_DEVIATION

RVARIANCE (Relative variance)

RSTANDARD_DEVIATION (Relative standard deviation)

in which z is the integrand and S is the domain. Note that the relative standard deviation isalso sometimes referred to as the coefficient of variation.

FACTOR [1.0]After the indicated integration is performed, the result is multiplied by FACTOR.

ORDER [0]The numerical integration order used for the integrations. Rectangular element faces areintegrated using N × N Gauss integration where N is the order specified by this parametervalue. For ORDER = 0, the integration order is based on the element face order (2 for linearfaces, 3 for quadratic faces, etc.). For ORDER > 10, N = 10 is used.

MESHINTEGRATION Sec. 6.7 Model points


Triangular element faces are integrated as follows:

ORDER Number of sampling points0 4 for linear faces,

7 for quadratic faces,13 for cubic faces

1 12 43 7�4 13

When cutting surfaces are employed, the integration is performed over each facet generatedby the cutting surface calculation. For ORDER = 0, 2 × 2 Gauss integration is employed forrectangular facets and 4-point Gauss integration is employed for triangular facets.

CONFIGURATION [DEFORMED]The numerical integration is performed over either the original configuration of the model orover the deformed configuration of the model {ORIGINAL / DEFORMED}.

The time corresponding to the deformed configuration is determined when the meshintegration point is employed; the time is taken from the response used to evaluate theintegrand, as follows. For response type load-step, the time is the requested solution time. For response types mode-shape, residual, harmonic or random, the time is the reference time. For response type response-combination, the time is taken from the first response used in thedefinition of the response-combination.

Notes

1) When the domain of integration is SURFACES, and the mesh plot does not include anycutting surfaces, the element faces in the domain of integration are those that are potentiallyvisible. These are the element faces on the “skin” of the mesh plot.

2) When the domain of integration is SURFACES, and the mesh plot includes cuttingsurfaces, the element faces in the domain of integration are those that are

a) on the cutting surface intersection, orb) on the “skin” of any opaque part of the mesh plot (if CUTSURFACE CUTPLANEOPAQUEOPTION=ALL or CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE OPAQUEOPTION=ALL).

3) When the domain of integration is LINES, and the mesh plot does not include any cuttingsurfaces, the element edges in the domain of integration are those that are on the boundary ofthe mesh plot.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions MESHINTEGRATION


4) When the domain of integration is LINES, and the mesh plot includes cutting surfaces, theelement edges in the domain of integration are those that are

a) on the cutting surface intersection, orb) on the boundary of any opaque part of the mesh plot (if CUTSURFACE CUTPLANEOPAQUEOPTION=ALL or CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE OPAQUEOPTION=ALL).

5) When the domain of integration is SURFACES, the domain of integration can be checkedby plotting bands on the mesh plot. The colored part of the mesh plot is the domain ofintegration.

6) When the domain of integration is LINES, the element thickness is included. In otherwords, the differential surface area dS is equal to the differential edge length dl times theelement thickness.

For non-axisymmetric elements, the element thickness is the original element thickness.For axisymmetric elements, the element thickness is taken as the y coordinate. In this

way, the axisymmetric effect is included, in which one radian of the model is assumed.

7) The integrand ONE, which is a constant that is numerically equal to 1, can be used todetermine the surface area of the domain:

MESHINTEGRATION MODEL_SKINPOINTLIST MODEL_SKIN VAR=ONE

8) Variables SURFACE_NORMAL-X, SURFACE_NORMAL-Y, SURFACE_NORMAL-Z andresultants based upon these variables can be used in conjunction with mesh integration points. For example, to calculate the volume of a closed domain, the following commands can beused:

MESHINTEGRATION MODEL_SKINRESULTANT DVOL '<X-COORDINATE>*<SURFACE_NORMAL-X>'POINTLIST MODEL_SKIN VAR=DVOL

Here the divergence theorem provides the theory behind the choice of integrand.

9) When you use the mesh integration point to evaluate the results at a given load step, theintegration domain only includes elements that are alive for the load step.

MESHMAX Sec. 6.7 Model points


MESHMAX NAME MESHPLOT ZONENAME OPTION TYPE FACTOR ORDER CONFIGURATION

MESHMAX creates a model point based upon the element faces or element edges of thegiven mesh plot. This model point represents the domain over which a search for an extremevalue will be performed. However MESHMAX does not actually perform the search. Whenthe model point is used by another command, such as the POINTLIST command in Section7.2, the AUI performs a search for an extreme value over the selected element faces orelement edges and outputs the extreme value.

NAMEThe name of the meshmax point.

MESHPLOT [PREVIOUS]The name of the mesh plot from which the element faces or edges are taken. See Section 5.2for more information about mesh plots.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]An element face or edge is selected if it is present in the mesh plot as described in theMESHPLOT parameter description and if the element is present in the zone specified in thisparameter. The zone specified in this parameter need not be the same zone as was specifiedwhen creating the mesh plot. See Section 6.2 for more information about zones.

OPTION [SURFACES]If OPTION=SURFACES, then element faces are selected from the mesh plot. IfOPTION=LINES, then element edges are selected from the mesh plot. See the notes at theend of the MESHINTEGRATION command description for more information about whichelement faces/edges are selected.

TYPE [ABSMAX]Various types of extreme values can be searched for when the meshmax point is used. Theextreme value type is specified by the TYPE parameter as follows:

ABSMAX value with the largest absolute valueMAXIMUM value with the largest valueMINIMUM value with the smallest value

FACTOR [1.0]After the indicated search is performed, the result is multiplied by FACTOR.

ORDER [0]The number of sampling points in each element face is governed by ORDER.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions MESHMAX


For rectangular element faces, if ORDER = 1, the face is sampled at its centroid, if ORDER= 2, the face is sampled at the corners (2 points in each direction), if ORDER > 2, the face issampled at ORDER points in each direction (a total of ORDER×ORDER points).

For triangular element faces, if ORDER = 1, the face is sampled at its centroid, if ORDER =2, the face is sampled at the corners, if ORDER > 2, the face is sampled at ORDER points ineach direction (a total of ORDER×(ORDER + 1)/2 points).

In both cases, if ORDER = 0, ORDER = 2 is used for linear faces, ORDER = 3 is used forquadratic faces, etc.

When cutting surfaces are employed, the search is performed over each facet generated by thecutting surface calculation. For ORDER = 0, ORDER = 2 is used.

CONFIGURATION [DEFORMED]The search is performed over either the original configuration of the model or over thedeformed configuration of the model {ORIGINAL / DEFORMED}. The timecorresponding to the deformed configuration is determined when the mesh max point isemployed; it is the same time as is used to evaluate the integrand (see theCONFIGURATION parameter of the MESHINTEGRATION command for furtherinformation).

For searching, the value of CONFIGURATION is used only to evaluate the surface normalwhen the surface normal is part of the integrand.

Notes

1) The same variables and predefined resultants that can be used with theMESHINTEGRATION command can also be used with the MESHMAX command.

2) When you use the mesh max point to evaluate the results at a given load step, the searchdomain only includes elements that are alive for the load step.

REACTIONSUM Sec. 6.7 Model points


REACTIONSUM NAME ZONENAME FACTOR

REACTIONSUM creates a model point based upon the nodes at which reactions werecalculated. This model point represents the nodes over which model results, typicallyreactions, will be summed over. However REACTIONSUM does not actually perform thesummation. When the model point is used by another command, such as the POINTLISTcommand in Section 7.2, the AUI sums the results over all of the nodes selected within themodel point and outputs the sum.

NAMEThe name of the reaction sum point.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]A node is selected if it is in the given zone and if reactions were calculated by the solutionprogram during at least one time step. See the zone definition commands in Section 6.2.

FACTOR [1.0]After the summation is performed, the result is multiplied by FACTOR.

Notes

1) To obtain the total reaction forces over the entire model, the following commands can beused:

REACTIONSUM TOTAL_REACTION_SUMPOINTLIST TOTAL_REACTION_SUM,

VAR=X-REACTION Y-REACTION Z-REACTION

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions REACTIONSUM



Model lines – Introduction Sec. 6.8 Model lines


Model lines – Introduction

The commands for grouping several points in the model into a model point line areNODELINE line of node pointsELLINE line of element/layer pointsSECTLINE line of section pointsCSLINE line of contact segment pointsRADLINE line of radiosity segment pointsVSLINE line of virtual shift pointsLCLINE line of J-integral line contour pointsGNLINE line of node points selected by general selectionsDBLINE line of drawbead segment points

These commands are described in detail in this section.

General information

Two model lines cannot have the same name, even if the model lines are of different types.

All of these commands, except for GNLINE, have the same organization. Each row of thedata input lines is used to enter one point in each line. The default values of the data inputline columns are specified using the corresponding command parameters, for example thedefault value for the data input line column nodei is specified by the command parameterNODE.

The SUBSTRUCTURE and REUSE parameters of these commands are used only for anADINA model as follows:

If the model has substructures, use these numbers to specify the desired substructure andreuse.

If the model has cyclic parts, use the reuse number to specify the desired cyclic part.

The result at each point can be multiplied by a weighting factor, which you specify withinthese commands. Whether any entered weighting factor is actually used depends upon thecommand that uses the model line name. For example, the LINESHOW command in Section5.10 has parameters that allow you to choose whether the weighting factors are applied.

Auxiliary commands

For each of these commands, the following auxiliary commands are available:

LIST ( )

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions Model lines – Introduction


Lists all names of the specified type.

LIST ( ) NAMELists data for the specified name.

DELETE ( ) NAMEDeletes the name.

COPY ( ) NAME1 NAME2Copies the data for name NAME1 to name NAME2.

See also

A model line name defined by any of these commands can be used by the followingcommands:

LINESHOW (Section 5.10)LINEMAX, LINEEXCEED, LINELIST (Section 7.2)

NODELINE Sec. 6.8 Model lines


NODELINE NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE FACTOR


NODELINE assigns a name to a line of node points.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). NODELINE defines the model result line based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the node line.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]NODE [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input lines columns.

substructurei [SUBSTRUCTURE]Label number of the substructure for the node.

reusei [REUSE]Label number of the reuse for the node.

nodei [NODE]Label number of the node for the node.

factori [FACTOR]Multiplying factor, weighting the contribution from "nodei".

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions ELLINE


ELLINE NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT LAYER OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR

substructurei reusei groupi elementi layeri optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori

ELLINE assigns a name to a line of element points. The line can contain points fromdifferent layers within an element, different elements, element groups, substructures, reusesor cyclic parts.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). ELLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the element line.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]GROUP [1]ELEMENT [1]LAYER [1]OPTION [GRID]GRID [0]LABEL [1]NODE [1]R,S,T [0.0]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

substructurei [SUBSTRUCTURE]Label number of a substructure.

reusei [REUSE]Label number of a substructure reuse.

groupi [GROUP]Label number of an element group.

elementi [ELEMENT]Label number of an element.

ELLINE Sec. 6.8 Model lines


layeri [LAYER]Layer number within element.

optioni [OPTION]Point definition option – see command ELPOINT in Section 6.7.

gridi [GRID]Grid location of element point, if optioni = GRID.

labeli [LABEL]Label for element point, if optioni = LABEL.

nodei [NODE]Node number for element point, if optioni = NODE.

ri [R]si [S]ti [T]Parametric coordinates of element point, if optioni = RST.

factori [FACTOR]Multiplying factor, indicating weighting for the element result point.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions SECTLINE


SECTLINE NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR

substructurei reusei groupi elementi optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori

SECTLINE assigns a name to a line of element section points. The line can contain pointsfrom different segments, surfaces and groups. For details concerning the specification of anelement section point, see the SECTPOINT command in Section 6.7.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). SECTLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the element section line.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]REUSE [1]GROUP [1]ELEMENT [1]OPTION [GRID]GRID [0]LABEL [1]NODE [1]R,S,T [0.0]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input line columns.

substructurei [SUBSTRUCTURE]Label number of a substructure.

reusei [REUSE]Label number of a substructure reuse.

groupi [GROUP]Label number of an element group in which element section results are saved.

elementi [ELEMENT]Label number of an element.

SECTLINE Sec. 6.8 Model lines


optioni [OPTION]Point definition option. {GRID / LABEL / RST / NODE}

gridi [GRID]Grid location of element section point, if optioni = GRID.

labeli [LABEL]Label location of element section point, if optioni = LABEL.

nodei [NODE]Node number for element section point, if optioni = NODE.

ri [R]si [S]ti [T]Isoparametric coordinates of element section point, if optioni = RST.

factori [FACTOR]Multiplying factor, indicating weighting of the results from the element section point.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions CSLINE


CSLINE NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT FACTOR

groupi surfacei segmenti factori

CSLINE assigns a name to a line of contact segments. It is possible to obtain results only atcontact segments attached to contactor contact surfaces.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). CSLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the contact segment line.

GROUP [1]SURFACE [1]SEGMENT [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input lines.

groupi [GROUP]Contact group label number.

surfacei [SURFACE]Contact surface label number.

segmenti [SEGMENT]Contact surface segment number.

factori [FACTOR]Multiplying factor, indicating weighting for the contact segment result point.

RADLINE Sec. 6.8 Model lines


RADLINE NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR

groupi surfacei segmenti optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori

RADLINE assigns a name to a line of radiosity surface points. The line can contain pointsfrom different segments, surfaces and groups. For details concerning the specification of aradiosity segment point, see the RADPOINT command in Section 6.7.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). RADLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the radiosity segment line.

GROUP [1]SURFACE [1]SEGMENT [1]OPTION [GRID]GRID [0]LABEL [1]NODE [1]R,S,T [0.0]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input lines.

groupi [GROUP]Label number of a radiosity surface group.

surfacei [SURFACE]segmenti [SEGMENT]Label numbers of a radiosity surface and segment.

optioni [OPTION]Point definition option. {GRID / LABEL / NODE / RST}

gridi [GRID]Grid location of the radiosity segment point, if optioni = GRID.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RADLINE


labeli [LABEL]Label location of the radiosity segment point, if optioni = LABEL.

nodei [NODE]Node number for the radiosity segment point, if optioni = NODE.

ri [R]si [S]ti [T]Isoparametric coordinates of the radiosity section point, if optioni = RST.

factori [FACTOR]Multiplying factor, indicating weighting of the results from the radiosity segment point.

VSLINE Sec. 6.8 Model lines


VSLINE NAME SHIFT FACTOR

shifti factori

VSLINE assigns a name to a line (sequence) of virtual shift points. Virtual shift points areused in fracture mechanics analysis when virtual shifts are used to evaluate the J-integral.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). VSLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the virtual shift line.

SHIFT [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input lines.

shifti [SHIFT]Label number of a virtual shift.

factori [FACTOR]Multiplying factor, indicating weighting of the results from the virtual shift.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing LCLINE


LCLINE NAME CONTOUR FACTOR

contouri factori

LCLINE assigns a name to a line (sequence) of line contour points. Line contour points areused in fracture mechanics analysis when line contours are used to evaluate the J-integral.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). LCLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the line contour line.

CONTOUR [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input lines.

contouri [CONTOUR]Label number of a line contour.

factori [FACTOR]Multiplying factor for weighting the results from the line contour.

DBLINE Sec. 6.8 Model lines


DBLINE NAME GROUP DRAWBEAD SEGMENT FACTOR

groupi drawbeadi segmenti factori

DBLINE assigns a name to a line of drawbead segments.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). DBLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite elementprogram.

NAMEThe name of the drawbead segment line.

GROUP [1]DRAWBEAD [1]SEGMENT [1]FACTOR [1.0]The default values of the data input lines.

groupi [GROUP]Contact group label number.

drawbeadi [DRAWBEAD]Drawbead label number.

segmenti [SEGMENT]Drawbead segment number.

factori [FACTOR]Multiplying factor, indicating weighting for the drawbead segment result point.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions GNLINE


GNLINE NAME PROGRAM

selectioni sensei

GNLINE assigns a name to a line of node points. You specify geometry lines, edges, pointscontact surfaces or nodes and the AUI chooses all nodes on the selection.

If the selection refers to geometry, the database must contain geometry information beforeyou use this command. See the example below for typical usage of this command.

NAMEThe name of the gnline.

PROGRAM [current FE program] The AUI selects nodes from the PROGRAM that belong to the geometry that you specify.

selectioni

A selection string. When using the command-line interface, you must enclose the selection inquotes so that the AUI does not interpret the selection as a command. When using the dialogbox, you do not need to enclose the selection in quotes.




GEOMETRY POINT or POINTGEOMETRY LINE or LINEGEOMETRY EDGE or EDGEGEOMETRY BODY or BODY (only used after the OF keyword)CONTACT SURFACE NODE



'LINE 1''LINES 2 TO 4'

Notice that you specify a range of numbers using the keyword TO.

GNLINE Sec. 6.8 Model lines


When a single object is not sufficient to entirely specify the desired selection, use the OFkeyword. For example, if there is more than one body in the model, use

'EDGE 1 OF BODY 2'

to specify edge 1 of body 2.

You can type selections in either upper, lower or mixed case and you can abbreviate objectnames. For example

'line 1''Edg 2'

sensei [0]The AUI constructs a list of nodes from the selections as follows. For each selection, ifsensei=1, the AUI constructs the list of nodes in the parametric direction of the selection. Ifsensei=-1, the AUI constructs the list of nodes in the opposite direction of the parametricdirection of the selection. If sensei=0, the AUI constructs the list of nodes in the parametricdirection of the selection, unless the node with highest parametric coordinate corresponds tothe last node from the previous selection, in which case the AUI constructs the list of nodes inthe opposite direction of the parametric direction.

The intent of sensei=0 is to allow the AUI to choose the direction that allows the line toconnect with the previous line.

sensei is not used for geometry point selections or node selections. For contact surfaceselections, sensei =0 or 1 means in increasing segment number order, sensei =-1 means indecreasing segment number order.

In all cases, the AUI merges the first node of the current selection with the last node of theprevious selection when these nodes are the same.

Example

In the following example, we list the velocities for the nodes on geometry lines 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7.

ADINA-IN input:

(commands to define the model)ADINA FILE=test.datDATABASE SAVE test.idbQUIT

ADINA-PLOT input:

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions GNLINE


DATABASE OPEN test.idbLOADPORTHOLE CREATE test.portGNLINE TEST1'LINE 1 TO 5''LINE 7'DATAENDLINELIST TEST1 VAR=X-VELOCITY Y-VELOCITY Z-VELOCITYQUIT

Note that you can achieve the same result by defining a NODELINE, but then you wouldhave to determine the nodes that lie on the geometry lines yourself.

Variables – Introduction Sec. 6.9 Variables


Variables – Introduction

For general information about variables, refer to Chapter 11 in the ADINA Theory andModeling Guide.

The following commands define variables:ALIAS assigns an abbreviation (alias) to a variable

CONSTANT defines a variable to have a constant value

RESULTANT defines a variable as an arithmetic expression possibly using othervariables

To obtain a listing of all variables, use the VARIABLEINFO command in Section 7.1.

Auxiliary commands

The ALIAS command has the following auxiliary commands (there are similar auxiliarycommands for CONSTANT and RESULTANT):

LIST ALIASLists all aliases.

LIST ALIAS NAMELists the attributes of the specified alias.

DELETE ALIAS NAMEDeletes the specified alias.

COPY ALIAS NAME1 NAME2Copies the alias specified by NAME1 to NAME2.

See alsoThe following commands accept variables:

CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE (Section 5.2)BANDPLOT (Section 5.4)RESPONSESHOW, LINESHOW, HARMONICSHOW, RANDOMSHOW,FOURIERSHOW (Section 5.10)POINTLIST, POINTEXCEED, POINTMAX, LINELIST, LINEEXCEED,LINEMAX, ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2)

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions ALIAS


ALIAS NAME VARIABLE

ALIAS associates an alternate name (or alias) with the name of a resultant, constant orpredefined variable. You can use ALIAS to define a short name for a frequently usedvariable.

NAMEThe name of the alias variable.

VARIABLEThe variable name being aliased. The variable can be predefined, a constant or a resultant.

CONSTANT Sec. 6.9 Variables


CONSTANT NAME CONSTANT

CONSTANT defines a variable to have constant real value.

NAMEThe name of the constant variable. If there is a previously defined constant variable with thisname, data entered in this command overwrites the constant variable data. If there is nopreviously defined constant variable with this name, a new constant variable is created by thiscommand.

CONSTANTThe value of the constant. If you specify an integer value, it is converted into a real number.

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESULTANT


RESULTANT NAME RESULTANT

RESULTANT defines a variable using an arithmetic expression, possibly involving othervariables. The variable defined by this command is termed a resultant variable. The resultantvariable is evaluated by evaluating the variables in the resultant and then computing thearithmetic expression. All the variables in the resultant are evaluated at the same solutionpoint. It is permitted for a variable in the resultant expression to be a resultant itself.

NAMEThe name of the resultant variable.

RESULTANTThe arithmetic expression is specified as a string with at most 256 characters. Remember toenclose the expression in single quotes when using the command-line interface.

The resultant string can include the following items:

The arithmetic operators +, -, *, /, ** (exponentiation)

Numbers (either real numbers or integers)

Variables (either predefined variables, aliases, constants or other resultants).

The following functions:

ABS(x) absolute valueACOS(x) arccosineAINT(x) truncationANINT(x) nearest whole numberASIN(x) arcsineATAN(x) arctangentATAN2(x,y) arctangent(x/y)COS(x) cosineCOSH(x) hyperbolic cosineDIM(x,y) positive differenceEXP(x) exponentialLOG(x) natural logarithm LOG10(x) common logarithmLSTRETCH3(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33,i)

component i of the left stretch tensor V, ascomputed from the deformation gradient Xij ,where i=1 returns V11, i=2 returns V22, i=3 returns

RESULTANT Sec. 6.9 Variables


V33, i=4 returns V12, i=5 returns V13, i=6 returnsV23.

MAX(x,y,...) largest valueMAXSHEAR(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) maximum shear stressMIN(x,y,...) smallest valueMOD(x,y) remainderingNOCS(x) function giving the number of cracks when the

variable CRACK_FLAG is substituted for xRSTRETCH3(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33,i)

component i of the right stretch tensor U, ascomputed from the deformation gradient Xij ,where i=1 returns U11, i=2 returns U22, i=3 returnsU33, i=4 returns U12, i=5 returns U13, i=6 returnsU23.

SIGN(x,y) transfer of signSIGNORM2(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) 2-norm of the 3 × 3 symmetric tensorSIGP1(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) maximum principal valueSIGP1DX(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) X direction cosine of maximum principal valueSIGP1DY(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) Y direction cosine of maximum principal valueSIGP1DZ(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) Z direction cosine of maximum principal valueSIGP2(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) intermediate principal valueSIGP2DX(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) X direction cosine of intermediate principal valueSIGP2DY(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) Y direction cosine of intermediate principal valueSIGP2DZ(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) Z direction cosine of intermediate principal valueSIGP3(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) minimum principal valueSIGP3DX(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) X direction cosine of minimum principal valueSIGP3DY(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) Y direction cosine of minimum principal valueSIGP3DZ(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) Z direction cosine of minimum principal valueSIG2P1(�11,�22,�12) maximum principal value of 2 × 2 symmetric

tensorSIG2P2(�11,�22,�12) minimum principal value of 2 × 2 symmetric

tensorSIN(x) sineSINH(x) hyperbolic sineSQRT(x) square rootSTEP(x) the unit step function:

STRETCHMA(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33)maximum angular distortion, as computed fromthe deformation gradient

STRETCHP1(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33)

Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions RESULTANT


maximum principal stretch, as computed from thedeformation gradient

STRETCHP2(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33)intermediate principal stretch, as computed fromthe deformation gradient

STRETCHP3(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33)minimum principal stretch, as computed from thedeformation gradient

TAN(x) tangentTANH(x) hyperbolic tangentTF(i,t) Time function i evaluated at time tTRANS3DT(�xx,�yy,�zz,�xy,�xz,�yz,x,y,z,isyst,i)

component i of the transformed stress tensor, ascomputed from the global stress tensor � ,coordinate (x,y,z) and transformation numberisyst, where i=1 returns �11, i=2 returns �22, i=3returns �33, i=4 returns �12, i=5 returns �13, i=6returns �23.

VONMISES(�11,�22,�33,�12,�13,�23) von Mises effective stress function

Notes

Trigonometric functions: All trigonometric functions operate on or return angles in radians.

Function TF: The typical use of function TF is to evaluate the time function for the timeshifted by an arrival time. E.g.

CONSTANT ARTM 3.45RESULTANT T1SHIFT ’TF(1,(TIME - ARTM))’RESPONSESHOW TIME,, T1SHIFT

plots time function 1 for solution times shifted by the arrival time 3.45.

Chapter 7

Results listing

MODELINFO Sec. 7.1 Model information


MODELINFO SUMMARY

MODELINFO produces a listing giving information about the finite element model loadedinto the database.

SUMMARY [YES]If summary is YES, then summary information is listed. Summary information includes thenumber of substructures, reuses, cyclic parts, nodes and element groups.

Chap. 7 Results listing RESPONSEINFO


RESPONSEINFO SUMMARY

RESPONSEINFO produces a listing giving information about the response solutions for thefinite element model loaded into the database.

SUMMARY [YES]If summary is YES, then summary information is listed. Summary information includes thenumber of load steps, the range of load steps for each type of result, the number of modeshapes, the range of mode shapes for each type of result, etc.

VARIABLEINFO Sec. 7.1 Model information


VARIABLEINFO SUMMARY

VARIABLEINFO produces a listing giving information about the variables that you can useto plot and list results.

SUMMARY [YES]If summary is YES, then summary information is listed. Summary information includes thename of each variable which can be evaluated in the finite element model. The variables arelisted by variable category; within categories, variables are listed in alphabetical order.

A variable given in this listing may not be evaluatable at all points in the finite elementmodel, but will be evaluatable at least one point in the model.

Chap. 7 Results listing MASSINFO


MASSINFO

MASSINFO lists the total mass, volume and other related information for that part of themodel selected by the MASS-SELECT command in Section 6.6.

It is also possible to list this information using the listing commands (such as ZONELIST inSection 7.2) and the mass/volume variables (such as MASS).

Note that mass/volume information is available only when requested in ADINA-IN.

MPFINFO Sec. 7.1 Model information


MPFINFO

MPFINFO lists the following information associated with the ground motion modalparticipation factors:

1) Ground motion modal participation factors for each mode i and direction k, .

2) Squares of the ground motion modal participation factors for each mode i and direction

k, . The square of the ground motion modal participation factor can be interpreted

as a modal mass.

3) The squares of the ground motion modal participation factors divided by the total mass

of the model, . This can be interpreted as the percent of the model mass

contained in mode i.

4) The sum of the squares of the ground motion modal participation factors from modes 1

to i, This can be interpreted as the mass contained in modes 1 to i.

5) The sum of the squares of the ground motion modal participation factors from modes 1

to i, divided by the total mass of the model, . This can be interpreted as

the percent of the model mass contained in modes 1 to i.

For theoretical information about the ground motion modal participation factors, see theADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 8.1.

Chap. 7 Results listing CGINFO


CGINFO GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE

CGINFO produces a listing giving information about a contact group. Information listedincludes:

Type of contact group (2D or 3D)The formulation used (constraint function or segment method)Whether the group is segment or node-node.The contact surfaces defined in the groupThe contact pairs defined in the groupThe drawbead lines defined in the group

GROUP [1]The contact group label number.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]The substructure number of the contact group in the model. Currently this is always 0.

REUSE [1]The reuse number of the contact group in the model. Currently this is always 1.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]Specifies the response used to obtain information about the contact group. RESPONSE isimportant if the contact group information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSELOAD-STEP command (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.

CPINFO Sec. 7.1 Model information


CPINFO CONTACTPAIR SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP RESPONSE

CPINFO produces a listing giving information about a contact pair. Information listedincludes

The contact surfaces (segment contact)The friction model and the coefficient of friction (segment contact)The contactor and target nodes (node-node contact)

CONTACTPAIR [1]The label number of the contact pair.




RESPONSE [DEFAULT]Specifies the response used to obtain information about the contact group. RESPONSE isimportant if the contact pair information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSELOAD-STEP command (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.

Chap. 7 Results listing CSINFO


CSINFO SURFACE SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP RESPONSE

CSINFO produces a listing giving information about a contact surface. Information listedincludes

The number of segments and number of nodes.The node numbers for each segmentThe contact pairs that use the surfaceThe drawbead lines that use the surface

SURFACE [1]The label number of the contact surface.




RESPONSE [DEFAULT]Specifies the response used to obtain information about the contact group. RESPONSE isimportant if the contact surface information changes during the solution. Use theRESPONSE LOAD-STEP command (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.

DRAWBEADINFO Sec. 7.1 Model information


DRAWBEADINFO INFO GROUP NAME

DRAWBEADINFO produces a listing giving information about the drawbead lines. Information listed includes

How the drawbead is defined (geometry lines or nodes)The number of segments in the drawbead line (when defined by nodes)The nodes in the drawbead line (when defined by nodes)The geometry lines in the drawbead line (when defined by geometry lines)The contact surface that the drawbead line is attached toThe drawbead height, restraining force and uplifting forceThe birth and death times

INFO [SUMMARY]Options for drawbead line information.

SUMMARY List summary of all drawbead linesINPUT List the detailed information of a drawbead line.

GROUP [1]The contact group label number. This parameter is used only when INFO=INPUT.

NAME [1]The label number of the drawbead. This parameter is used only when INFO=INPUT.

Chap. 7 Results listing EGINFO


EGINFO GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE

EGINFO produces a listing giving information about an element group. Information listedincludes

The type of the element groupThe kinematic formulation used in the element groupThe material model used in the element groupThe numbers of the elements in the group

GROUP [1]The element group label number.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]The substructure number of the element group in the model.

REUSE [1]The reuse number of the element group in the model.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]Specifies the response used to obtain information about the element group. RESPONSE isimportant if the element group information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSELOAD-STEP command (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.

ELINFO Sec. 7.1 Model information


ELINFO ELEMENT GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE

ELINFO produces a listing giving information about an element. Information listed includes

Information about the element group in which the element is definedNodes in the element

ELEMENT [1]The element label number.

GROUP [1]The element group label number.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]The substructure number of the element group in the model.

REUSE [1]The reuse number of the element group in the model.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]Specifies the response used to obtain information about the element. RESPONSE isimportant if the element information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSELOAD-STEP command (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.

Chap. 7 Results listing NODEINFO


NODEINFO NODE SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE

NODEINFO produces a listing giving information about a node. Information listed includes

The nodal coordinates, current displacements and current position (coordinates + displacements)

The boundary conditionsThe elements, contact surfaces and drawbead lines that use the nodeThe skew system used at the nodeWhether the node is a 5 DOF or a 6 DOF node (considering the rotational dofs

assigned for shell elements)

NODE [1]The node label number.

SUBSTRUCTURE [0]The substructure number of the node in the model.

REUSE [1]The reuse number of the node in the model.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]Specifies the response used to obtain information about the node. RESPONSE is important ifthe node information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSE LOAD-STEPcommand (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.

Variables listing – Introduction Sec. 7.2 Variables listing


Variables listing – Introduction

The following commands list extreme values of variables. You can choose either themaximum, minimum or the absolute value of the maximum and you can select the number ofextreme values to list.

POINTMAX lists extreme values of variables at a point

LINEMAX lists extreme values of variables along a line

ZONEMAX lists extreme values of variables within a zone

The following commands list variables that numerically exceed a prespecified value (that is,the commands apply a filter to the variables).

POINTEXCEED lists filtered variables at a point

LINEEXCEED lists filtered variables along a line

ZONEEXCEED lists filtered variables within a zone

The following commands list variables without any filter.POINTLIST lists variables at a point

LINELIST lists variables along a line

ZONELIST lists variables within a zone

All of these commands operate on up to six variables. Each variable can be a predefinedvariable, an alias, a constant or a resultant.

All of these commands evaluate the variables either for a single response (if parameterRESPOPTION = RESPONSE) or for a response-range (if parameter RESPOPTION =RESPRANGE). See Section 6.3 for information about responses and Section 6.4 forinformation about response-ranges.

All of these commands allow you to specify a smoothing definition and a result controldepiction for control of the evaluation of the variables. See Section 6.6 for information aboutsmoothing definitions and result control depictions.

The zone listing commands allow you to specify a result grid depiction (to specify thelocation within the elements where variables are evaluated). See Section 6.6 for informationabout result grid depictions.

Chap. 7 Results listing POINTMAX


POINTMAX POINTNAME TYPE NUMBER SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

POINTMAX scans the values of up to six variables at the specified point and lists the mostextreme values.

POINTNAMEThe name of the model point at which the variables are evaluated. The point name must havebeen defined using a model point definition command, see Section 6.7.

TYPE [ABSMAX]The type of extreme value to be listed, either the absolute value of the maximum, themaximum or the minimum. {ABSMAX / MAXIMUM / MINIMUM}

NUMBER [1]The NUMBER most extreme values are listed for each specified variable.

SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing definition used when evaluating the variables. A smoothingdefinition is defined by the SMOOTHING command, see Section 6.6.

RESULTCONTROL [DEFAULT]The name of the result control depiction. A result control depiction is defined by theRESULTCONTROL command, see Section 6.6.

RESPOPTION [RESPRANGE]Specifies whether to evaluate the variables for a single response (RESPOPTION =RESPONSE) or for a range of responses (RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE).

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]Used when RESPOPTION = RESPONSE. Specifies the response for which the variables areevaluated. A response name is defined by a response command, see Section 6.3.

RESPRANGE [DEFAULT]Used when RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE. Specifies the response-range for which thevariables are evaluated. A response range name is defined by a response-range command, seeSection 6.4.

VARIABLE1 . . . VARIABLE6

The names of the variables to be scanned. Variables are defined by variable commands, seeSection 6.9.

LINEMAX Sec. 7.2 Variables listing


LINEMAX LINENAME TYPE NUMBER SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

LINEMAX scans the values of up to six variables along the specified line and lists the mostextreme values.

LINENAMEThe name of the model line along which the variables are evaluated. The line name musthave been defined using a model line definition command, see Section 6.8.










Chap. 7 Results listing ZONEMAX


ZONEMAX ZONENAME RESULTGRID TYPE NUMBER SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

ZONEMAX scans the values of up to six variables in the specified zone and lists the mostextreme values. The variables are evaluated at all points specified by the RESULTGRIDparameter within the zone specified by the ZONENAME parameter (see the notes at the endof the ZONELIST command in this section).

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). ZONEMAX evaluates data only at points within the current finite elementprogram.

ZONENAME [WHOLE_MODEL]The name of the zone in which the variables are evaluated. The zone name must have beendefined using a zone command, see Section 6.2.

RESULTGRID [DEFAULT]The name of the result grid that specifies where in the zone the variables are evaluated. Theresult grid name must have been defined using the RESULTGRID command, see Section 6.6.






ZONEMAX Sec. 7.2 Variables listing






Chap. 7 Results listing POINTEXCEED


POINTEXCEED POINTNAME TYPE VALUE SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

POINTEXCEED scans the values of up to six variables at the specified point and lists thevalues that exceed a prespecified value.


TYPE [ABSMAX]VALUE [0.0]If TYPE = ABSMAX, a value is listed if its absolute value is greater than or equal to VALUE. If TYPE = MAXIMUM, a value is listed if it is greater than or equal to VALUE. If TYPE =MINIMUM, a value is listed if it is less than or equal to VALUE.








LINEEXCEED Sec. 7.2 Variables listing


LINEEXCEED LINENAME TYPE VALUE SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

LINEEXCEED scans the values of up to six variables along the specified line and lists thevalues that exceed a prespecified value.







RESPRANGE [DEFAULT]Used when RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE. Specifies the response-range for which thevariables are evaluated A response range name is defined by a response-range command, seeSection 6.4.



Chap. 7 Results listing ZONEEXCEED


ZONEEXCEED ZONENAME RESULTGRID TYPE VALUE SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

ZONEEXCEED scans the values of up to six variables in the specified zone and lists thevalues that exceed a prespecified value. The variables are evaluated at all points specified bythe RESULTGRID parameter within the zone specified by the ZONENAME parameter (seethe notes at the end of the ZONELIST command in this section).

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). ZONEEXCEED evaluates data only at points within the current finite elementprogram.







ZONEEXCEED Sec. 7.2 Variables listing






Chap. 7 Results listing POINTLIST


POINTLIST POINTNAME SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

POINTLIST produces a listing giving the values of up to six variables at the specified point.








The name of the variables to be listed. Variables are defined by variable commands, seeSection 6.9.

LINELIST Sec. 7.2 Variables listing


LINELIST LINENAME SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

LINELIST produces a listing giving the values of up to six variables at points within thespecified line.








The name of the variables to be listed. Variables are defined by variable commands, seeSection 6.9.

Chap. 7 Results listing ZONELIST


ZONELIST ZONENAME RESULTGRID SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...

ZONELIST lists the values of up to six variables for all elements in a zone. The variables areevaluated at all points specified by the RESULTGRID parameter within the zone specified bythe ZONENAME parameter (see the notes at the end of this command).

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command inSection 3.4). ZONELIST evaluates data only at points within the current finite elementprogram.



SMOOTHING [DEFAULT]The name of the smoothing technique that specifies whether to smooth certain variables andhow they are smoothed. A smoothing definition is defined by the SMOOTHING command,see Section 6.6.





ZONELIST Sec. 7.2 Variables listing


VARIABLES...The names of the variables to be listed. Variables are defined by variable commands, seeSection 6.9.

Notes

The locations where the variables are listed is determined using the following algorithm:

Determine the allowable result location types for the variables to be listed by applying Table1 for each variable and intersecting.

If (all variables are location-independent), evaluate the variables.

OtherwiseIf the result grid type is porthole,

If one of the allowable result location types is node, evaluate the variables at thenodes. Otherwise, choose another allowable result location type and evaluate thevariables.

If the result grid type is nodes, evaluate the variables at the nodes if one of the allowableresult location types is node.

If the result grid type is element grid or element nodes, evaluate the variables at therequested locations if one of the allowable result location types is element/layer rst.

If the result grid type is section grid or section nodes, evaluate the variables at therequested locations if one of the allowable result location types is section rst.

Chap. 7 Results listing ZONELIST


Table 1: Allowable result location types for a variable

Variable type Result location types

Location-independent AllNodal field Node, element/layer labeled, element/layer rst, section labeled,

section rst, contact segment labeled, contact segment rst, radiositylabeled, radiosity rst

Element/layer field Node (smoothing only), element/layer labeled, element/layer rst,section labeled, section rst

Contact segment Contact segment labeled, contact segment rstSection field Node (smoothing only), section labeled, section rstRadiosity field Node (smoothing only), radiosity labeled, radiosity rstLine contour Line contourVirtual shift Virtual shiftNode discrete NodeElement local node Element local nodeElement local node field Element/layer labeled, element/layer rst, section labeled, section rst,

element local nodeCoordinate Node, element/layer labeled, element/layer rst, section labeled,

section rst, element local node, contact segment labeled, contactsegment rst, radiosity labeled, radiosity rst

Chapter 8

Graphics device control

Graphics device control – Introduction Chap. 8 Graphics devices


Graphics device control – Introduction

The AUI can use the following plotting systems for graphics interaction and display.

Name File Interactive

Adobe Illustrator Yes No

Windows GDI No YesHP-GL Yes NoHP-GL/2 Yes NoOpenGL No YesPostScript Yes NoX Window No Yes

Under normal use, the AUI displays graphics to you using an interactive plotting system. The AUI chooses the interactive plotting system based on the capabilities of your computer.

When you want to save a graphics image displayed on the screen, you specify one of the file-based plotting systems as one of the parameters of the MOVIESAVE or SNAPSHOTcommands (see Section 3.3). For Windows versions of the AUI, when you are running inuser interface mode, you can also use the SAVEAVI or SAVEBMP commands (see Section3.3) to save graphics.

The AUI also contains a plotting system for which graphics are not displayed; this is calledthe null plotting system. The null system is used to suppress graphics output, which can beuseful in batch scripts. See Section 1.11 for an example.

You use the PLSYSTEM command, described in this section, to select the interactive plottingsystem.

The PLCONTROL commands allow you to control the behaviors of the plotting systems. There is one PLCONTROL command for each plotting system. See the command pages inthis section for detailed information.

Auxiliary commands

LIST PLSYSTEMLists the current plotting system and some diagnostic information.

LIST PLCONTROL ( )Lists the settings for the selected plotting system.

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLSYSTEM


PLSYSTEM SYSTEM

PLSYSTEM specifies the current plotting system, which the AUI uses to draw to the graphicswindow. The system specified by the PLSYSTEM command is not saved in the database.

SYSTEMThe name of the plotting system. Valid names are installation-dependent, but are selectedfrom the following list:

GDIOPENGLXWINDOWNULL

The initial value of SYSTEM is also installation-dependent.

PLCONTROL AI Chap. 8 Graphics devices


PLCONTROL AI FILENAME PROMPT PAGEOPTION ORIENTATION PAGESIZE PAGEWIDTH PAGEHEIGHT SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFF YOFF LINEWIDTH FONT BACKGROUND VERSION RESOLUTION XPIXFC YPIXFC COUNT CARRIAGECONTROL REMOVEPARENTHESES UNITPWIDTH UNITPHEIGHT UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION UNITLINEWIDTH

PLCONTROL AI specifies the parameters associated with the Adobe Illustrator plottingsystem driver.

FILENAMEThis parameter is currently unused.

PROMPT [NO]Determines whether or not the program will display a prompt before writing a new frame. {YES / NO}

PAGEOPTION [0]If PAGEOPTION = 0, parameters ORIENTATION, PAGESIZE, etc., are used to determinethe plot size. For other values of PAGEOPTION, the plot size is set in terms of pixels asfollows:

1 320 × 2002 640 × 4803 800 × 6004 1024 × 768

This option is provided for convenience when the plot destination is the PC screen.

ORIENTATION [LANDSCAPE]Determines whether the program will use the page in portrait mode or landscape mode. (Seefigure.) {PORTRAIT / LANDSCAPE}

PAGESIZE [DIRECT]Specifies the page size. {A, B, C, D, E (for US paper sizes)}, {A0,A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 (for ISO paper sizes)}. You can also set PAGESIZE= DIRECT and specify the page size using parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT.

PAGEWIDTH [8.5]PAGEHEIGHT [11]Specify the width and height of the page when PAGESIZE = DIRECT.

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL AI


SIZE [PAGE]Determines whether the placement of the plotting surface on the page coincides with the pageor is directly determined by parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF and YOFF. {PAGE /DIRECT}

WIDTH [100.0]HEIGHT [100.0]XOFF [0.0]YOFF [0.0]Specify the size and location of the plotting surface on the page when SIZE = DIRECT.

LINEWIDTH [0.007]Line width that the driver uses when drawing its thinnest possible line.

FONT [Helvetica]Specifies the font used for plotting character strings. FONT is case-sensitive, so you mustuse the proper lower and upper-case characters in the font name.

BACKGROUND [WHITE]The AI driver will fill the plotting surface with this color before drawing anything else.

VERSION [AI3]Specifies the Adobe Illustrator version, either Adobe Illustrator 88 or Adobe Illustrator 3. {AI88 / AI3}

RESOLUTION [0.003]RESOLUTION is used as a program tolerance for such tasks as area fill, hidden line removal,etc. It should be set to the width of the thinnest line that the output device can display. RESOLUTION cannot be set to zero. XPIXFC [19.685]YPIXFC [19.685]The number of pixels per centimeter in the X and Y directions. These parameters need to beset only if you want to enter coordinates and lengths using a unit of PIXELS.

COUNT [100]This parameter is currently unused.

CARRIAGECONTROL [NO]If CARRIAGECONTROL = YES, the driver does not write into column 1 of the graphicsfile. The reason for this option is to avoid writing into column 1 when the computerinterprets column 1 as a Fortran carriage control column. {YES / NO}

PLCONTROL AI Chap. 8 Graphics devices


REMOVEPARENTHESES [NO]The AI driver can remove all parentheses from plotted text strings. This option is provided toavoid a bug in the AI import feature of CorelDraw 3.0. {NO / YES}

UNITPWIDTH [INCHES]UNITPHEIGHT [INCHES]UNITWIDTH [PERCENT]UNITHEIGHT [PERCENT]UNITXOFF [PERCENT]UNITYOFF [PERCENT]UNITRESOLUTION [INCHES]UNITLINEWIDTH [INCHES]These parameters specify the unit of parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT, WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF, RESOLUTION and LINEWIDTH. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS(if XPIXFC and YPIXFC are also defined) / POINTS} (A point is 1/72inch.) You can also specify a unit of PERCENT for parameters UNITWIDTH,UNITHEIGHT, UNITXOFF, UNITYOFF.

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL AI


PLCONTROL GDI Chap. 8 Graphics devices


PLCONTROL GDI BACKGROUND PROMPT COLOR SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFF YOFF RESOLUTION PICKRADIUS XPIXFC YPIXFC PUSHKEYSYM PULLKEYSYM PUSHLENGTH UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION UNITPICKRADIUS UNITPUSHLENGTH

PLCONTROL GDI specifies the parameters associated with the Microsoft Windows GDIplotting system.

BACKGROUND [BLACK]The background color of the graphics window.

PROMPTCOLORSIZEWIDTHHEIGHTXOFFYOFFThese parameters are currently unused.

RESOLUTION [1]RESOLUTION is used as a program tolerance for such tasks as area fill, hidden line removal,etc. It should be set to the width of the thinnest line that the workstation can display. RESOLUTION cannot be set to 0.

PICKRADIUS [5]PICKRADIUS is used as a program tolerance for deciding when a graphics structure hasbeen picked.

XPIXFC [AUTOMATIC]YPIXFC [AUTOMATIC]Specify the number of pixels per centimeter of the workstation screen in the X (width) and Y(height) directions. The program will calculate XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC automatically if youenter AUTOMATIC for XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC.

PUSHKEYSYMPULLKEYSYMPUSHLENGTHThese parameters are currently unused.

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL GDI


UNITWIDTH [PIXELS]UNITHEIGHT [PIXELS]UNITXOFF [PIXELS]UNITYOFF [PIXELS]UNITRESOLUTION [PIXELS]UNITPICKRADIUS [PIXELS]These parameters specify the unit of parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF,RESOLUTION, PICKRADIUS and UNITPUSHLENGTH. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS/ POINTS}.

UNITPUSHLENGTHThis parameter is currently unused.

PLCONTROL HPGL Chap. 8 Graphics devices


PLCONTROL HPGL FILENAME PROMPT DEVICE DEVOPTION PAGEOPTION ORIENTATION PAGESIZE PAGEWIDTH PAGEHEIGHT SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFF YOFF BACKGROUND ESCAPECODES POLYGONFILL CARRIAGECONTROL RESOLUTION XPIXFC YPIXFC UNITPWIDTH UNITPHEIGHT UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION

numberi colori

PLCONTROL HPGL specifies the parameters associated with the HP-GL plotting systemdriver.


PROMPT [NO]Determines whether or not the program will display a prompt before creating a new frame.{YES / NO}

DEVICE [7475]DEVOPTION [1]The plotter device number and device option number, see table at the end of this commandfor valid choices.


1 320 × 2002 640 × 4803 800 × 6004 1024 × 768


ORIENTATION [LANDSCAPE]Determines whether the program will use the page in portrait mode or landscape mode (seefigure). {PORTRAIT / LANDSCAPE}

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL HPGL


PAGESIZE [AUTOMATIC]Specifies the page size. If PAGESIZE = AUTOMATIC, the program uses the page sizecorresponding to the given plotter device and plotter device option. If PAGESIZE =DIRECT, you set the page size using parameters PAGEWIDTH and PAGEHEIGHT.


SIZE [DIRECT]Determines whether the placement of the plotting surface on the page coincides with the pageor is directly determined by parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF and YOFF. {PAGE /DIRECT}


BACKGROUND [WHITE]The color of the background, usually WHITE.

ESCAPECODES [NONE]The HP-GL driver can optionally supply escape codes to turn the plotter on or off.

NONE No escape codes are supplied.

INITIALIZATION Escape codes are supplied when the plotter is initialized.

ALL Escape codes are supplied before and after every graphicsfunction.

POLYGONFILL [AUTOMATIC]YES The device driver uses the polygon fill command when outputting filled

areas.

NO The device driver uses moves and draws when outputting filled areas.

AUTOMATIC The device driver uses the polygon fill command if the command issupported by the plotter entered for the DEVICE parameter.

If the plot is to be read by another program, use POLYGONFILL = YES.



CARRIAGECONTROL [NO]If CARRIAGECONTROL = YES, the driver does not write into column 1 of the graphicsfile. The reason for this option is to avoid writing into column 1 when the computerinterprets column 1 as a FORTRAN carriage control column. {YES / NO}

RESOLUTION [0.03]Used as a program tolerance for such tasks as area fill, hidden line removal, etc. It should beset to the width of the thinnest line that the output device can display. RESOLUTION cannotbe set to zero. XPIXFC [19.685]YPIXFC [19.685]The number of pixels per centimeter in the X and Y directions. The default valuecorresponds to 50 pixels/inch. These parameters need to be set only if you want to entercoordinates and lengths using a unit of PIXELS, or if the plot size is specified in terms ofpixels.

UNITPWIDTH [INCHES]UNITPHEIGHT [INCHES]UNITWIDTH [PERCENT]UNITHEIGHT [PERCENT]UNITXOFF [PERCENT]UNITYOFF [PERCENT]UNITRESOLUTION [CM]These parameters specify the unit of parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT, WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF and RESOLUTION. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS (ifXPIXFC and YPIXFC are also defined) / POINTS} (A point is 1/72 inch). For UNITWIDTH, UNITHEIGHT, UNITXOFF, UNITYOFF you can also specify a unit ofPERCENT.

numberi

colori

The pen number (corresponding to the location in a pen carousel or to a color number on aCRT screen) and associated color.

If you will read the HP-GL file into MS-Word and MS-Word is configured to read HP-GLfiles, then use the following pen/color table:

1 BLACK2 RED3 GREEN4 YELLOW5 BLUE



6 MAGENTA7 CYAN8 ORANGE

Valid device and option numbers are given in the following table.

HP plotter numberPlotter optional switchsettings and/or paper

size/type

Device number

7090 ANSI (A-size)ANSI (B-size)ISO (A4-size)ISO (A3-size)

1234

7440, 7470 US (A-size)A4 (A4-size)

12

7475 US/A4 (A-size)US/A3 (B-size)MET/A4 (A4-size)MET/A3 (A3-size)

1234

7510 STANDARD (35 mm) 17510 (cont.) STANDARD (Polaroid)

STANDARD (Preview)PAPER (A-size)PAPER (B-size)PAPER (A4-size)PAPER (A3-size)PAPER (8 × 10)

2345678

7550 A-sizeB-sizeA4-sizeA3-size

1234



7570 NORMAL (C-size)NORMAL (D-size)NORMAL (A2-size)NORMAL (A1-size)NORMAL (Arch. C-size)NORMAL (Arch. D-size)EXPAND (C-size)EXPAND (D-size)EXPAND (A2-size)EXPAND (A1-size)EXPAND (Arch. C-size)EXPAND (Arch. D-size)

123456789101112

7580 NORMAL (A-size)NORMAL (B-size)NORMAL (C-size)NORMAL (D-size)NORMAL (A4-size)NORMAL (A3-size)NORMAL (A2-size)NORMAL (A1-size)EXPAND (A-size)EXPAND (B-size)EXPAND (C-size)EXPAND (D-size)EXPAND (Arch. C-size)EXPAND (Arch. D-size)EXPAND (A4-size)EXPAND (A3-size)EXPAND (A2-size)EXPAND (A1-size)

123456789101112111213141516



7585, 7586 NORMAL (A-size)NORMAL (B-size)NORMAL (C-size)NORMAL (D-size)NORMAL (E-size)NORMAL (A4-size)NORMAL (A3-size)NORMAL (A2-size)NORMAL (A1-size)NORMAL (A0-size)EXPAND (A-size)EXPAND (B-size)EXPAND (C-size)EXPAND (D-size)EXPAND (E-size)EXPAND (A4-size)EXPAND (A3-size)EXPAND (A2-size)EXPAND (A1-size)EXPAND (A0-size)

1234567891011121314151617181920

7586 (roll paper) NORMAL (36 in.)NORMAL (24 in.)NORMAL (11 in.)

212223

7595, 7596 NORMAL (A-size)NORMAL (B-size)NORMAL (C-size)NORMAL (D-size)NORMAL (E-size)NORMAL (A4-size)NORMAL (A3-size)NORMAL (A2-size)NORMAL (A1-size)NORMAL (A0-size)EXPAND (A-size)EXPAND (B-size)EXPAND (C-size)EXPAND (D-size)EXPAND (E-size)EXPAND (A4-size)EXPAND (A3-size)EXPAND (A2-size)EXPAND (A1-size)

12345678910111213141516171819

7595, 7596 (cont.) EXPAND (A0-size) 20



7596 (roll paper) NORMAL (36 in.)NORMAL (24 in.)NORMAL (11 in.)

212223

from the HP-GL Product Comparison Guide, Part No. (11)5954-7124, February 1987.

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL HPGL2


PLCONTROL HPGL2 FILENAME PROMPT DEVICE DEVOPTION PAGEOPTION ORIENTATION PAGESIZE PAGEWIDTH PAGEHEIGHT SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFF YOFF LINEWIDTH BACKGROUND COLORS COLORMAX ENCODEBITS CARRIAGECONTROL RESOLUTION XPIXFC YPIXFC UNITPWIDTH UNITPHEIGHT UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION UNITLINEWIDTH

numberi colori

PLCONTROL HPGL2 specifies the parameters associated with the HP-GL/2 plotting systemdriver.



DEVICE [5]DEVOPTION [1]The plotter device number and device option number, see table at the end of this commandfor valid choices.


1 320 × 2002 640 × 4803 800 × 6004 1024 × 768


ORIENTATION [LANDSCAPE]Determines whether the program will use the page in portrait mode or landscape mode (seefigure). {PORTRAIT / LANDSCAPE}

PLCONTROL HPGL2 Chap. 8 Graphics devices


PAGESIZE [AUTOMATIC]Specifies the page size.

AUTOMATIC The program uses the page size corresponding to the given plotterdevice and plotter device option.

DIRECT You set the page size using parameters PAGEWIDTH andPAGEHEIGHT.


SIZE [DIRECT]Determines whether the placement of the plotting surface on the page coincides with the pageor is directly determined by parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF and YOFF. {PAGE /DIRECT}


LINEWIDTH [0.02]The line width that the driver uses when drawing its thinnest possible line.

BACKGROUND [WHITE]The color of the background, usually WHITE. For certain raster-based plotters, if thebackground is not WHITE, the HP-GL/2 driver will fill the page with the background colorbefore plotting.

COLORS [AUTOMATIC]COLORMAX [2]If COLORS = AUTOMATIC, the HP-GL/2 driver automatically defines a color palette usingCOLORMAX colors and data input lines are not used. If COLORS = PEN, the HP-GL/2driver defines a color palette using the information given in the data input lines.

ENCODEBITS [7]For efficiency, the HP-GL/2 driver uses the PE (polyline encode) command to draw lines andfill areas. If ENCODEBITS = 7, 7-bit mode is used for the encoding. If ENCODEBITS = 8,8-bit mode is used. Use 8-bit mode if your system can send or transfer 8 bits of data withoutparity. Otherwise, use 7-bit mode. If you are unsure, use 7-bit mode.



CARRIAGECONTROL [NO]If CARRIAGECONTROL = YES, the driver does not write into column 1 of the graphicsfile. The reason for this option is to avoid writing into column 1 when the computerinterprets column 1 as a FORTRAN carriage control column. {YES / NO}

RESOLUTION [0.02]Used as a program tolerance for such tasks as area fill, hidden line removal, etc. It should beset to the width of the thinnest line that the output device can display. RESOLUTION cannotbe set to zero. XPIXFC [19.685]YPIXFC [19.685]The number of pixels per centimeter in the X and Y directions. The default valuecorresponds to 50 pixels/inch. These parameters need to be set only if you want to entercoordinates and lengths using a unit of PIXELS, or if the plot size is specified in terms ofpixels.

UNITPWIDTH [INCHES]UNITPHEIGHT [INCHES]UNITWIDTH [PERCENT]UNITHEIGHT [PERCENT]UNITXOFF [PERCENT]UNITYOFF [PERCENT]UNITRESOLUTION [CM]UNITLINEWIDTH [CM]These parameters specify the unit of parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT, WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF, RESOLUTION and LINEWIDTH. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS(if XPIXFC and YPIXFC are also defined) / POINTS} (A point is 1/72inch). For UNITWIDTH, UNITHEIGHT, UNITXOFF, UNITYOFF you can also specify aunit of PERCENT.

numberi

colori

The pen number (corresponding to the location in a pen carousel or to a color number on aCRT screen) and associated color. The data input lines are used and read only if COLORS =PEN.



Valid device and option numbers are given in the following table.

HP plotter numberPaper size/type Device

numberDevice option

number

HP 7600 Model 240DHP 7600 Model 240E

DE

11

12

HP 7600 Model 250HP 7600 Model 255HP 7600 Model 355

DEE

222

123

DraftMaster SX,RX,MX(normal margins)

A (vert.)A (horiz.)B (vert.)C (horiz.)D (vert.)D (horiz.)E (vert.)Arch. C (horiz.)Arch. D (vert.)Arch. D (horiz.)Arch. 30 × 42 (vert.)Arch. 30 × 42 (horiz.)Arch. E (vert.)A4 (vert.)A4 (horiz.)A3 (vert.)A2 (horiz.)A1 (vert.)A1 (horiz.)A0 (vert.)

33333333333333333333

1234567891011121314151617181920

(expanded margins) A (vert.)A (horiz.)B (vert.)C (horiz.)D (vert.)D (horiz.)E (vert.)Arch. C (horiz.)Arch. D (vert.)Arch. D (horiz.)Arch. 30 × 42 (vert.)Arch. 30 × 42 (horiz.)

333333333333

212223242526272829303132



Arch. E (vert.)A4 (vert.)A4 (horiz.)A3 (vert.)A2 (horiz.)A1 (vert.)A1 (horiz.)A0 (vert.)

33333333

3334353637383940

PaintJet XL (withHP-GL/2 font cartridge),PaintJet XL300

A (vert.)B (vert.)A4 (vert.)A3 (vert.)

4444

1234

LaserJet III Letter (vert.)Letter (horiz.)Legal (vert.)Legal (horiz.)Exec. (vert.)Exec. (horiz.)A4 (vert.)A4 (horiz.)COM-10 (vert.)COM-10 (horiz.)Monarch (vert.)Monarch (horiz.)C5 (vert.)C5 (horiz.)DL (vert.)DL (horiz.)

5555555555555555

12345678910111213141516

HP DesignJet(normal margins)

A (vert.)A (horiz.)B (vert.)C (horiz.)D (vert.)D (horiz.)E (vert.)Arch. C (horiz.)Arch. D (vert.)Arch. D (horiz.)Arch. 30 × 42 (vert.)Arch. 30 × 42 (horiz.)Arch. E (vert.)A4 (vert.)

66666666666666

1234567891011121314



A4 (horiz.)A3 (vert.)A2 (horiz.)A1 (vert.)A1 (horiz.)A0 (vert.)

666666

151617181920

(expanded margins) A (vert.)A (horiz.)B (vert.)C (horiz.)D (vert.)D (horiz.)E (vert.)Arch. C (horiz.)Arch. D (vert.)Arch. D (horiz.)Arch. 30 × 42 (vert.)Arch. 30 × 42 (horiz.)Arch. E (vert.)A4 (vert.)A4 (horiz.)A3 (vert.)A2 (horiz.)A1 (vert.)A1 (horiz.)A0 (vert.)

66666666666666666666

2122232425262728293031323334353637383940

Notes on the use of HP-GL/2 with the HP LaserJet III or higher printer:

1) Use the following parameter settings:

DEVICE = 5, DEVOPTION = (from table), PAGEOPTION = 0, PAGESIZE =AUTOMATIC, LINEWIDTH = 0.02, BACKGROUND = WHITE, COLORS =AUTOMATIC, COLORMAX = 2, ENCODEBITS = 7, CARRIAGECONTROL = NO,RESOLUTION = 0.02, UNITRESOLUTION = CM, UNITLINEWIDTH = CM

Some or all of these parameters may be already set correctly.

2) The printer should be configured with the Page Protection option (see the printer user'smanual). Configuring the printer with Page Protection may be possible only if yourprinter has optional memory installed. If you do not use Page Protection, you will



probably get the printer message "21 PRINT OVERRUN" when you send the graphicsfile to the printer.

3) All lines and characters are drawn in black, including line contours. The only graphicsthat are drawn with gray scales are fill areas, including filled bands.

4) On the PC, DOS operating system, a convenient way of printing the HP-GL/2 file is touse the DOS PRINT command, as if you were going to print an ordinary text file usingDOS.

PLCONTROL NULL Chap. 8 Graphics devices


PLCONTROL NULL WIDTH HEIGHT UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT

PLCONTROL NULL specifies the parameters associated with the NULL plotting system. You use this plotting system when you don't want plots to be produced each time you enter aplotting command. One example of when you might use the NULL plotting system is whenyou are running the program in batch mode and you want only hard copies of plots. In thiscase, you specify the PLSYSTEM to be NULL and use SNAPSHOT to make the plots. Seethe example in Section 1.11.

WIDTH [800]HEIGHT [600]The size of the plotting surface.

UNITWIDTH [PIXELS]UNITHEIGHT [PIXELS]Units of parameters WIDTH and HEIGHT. {CM / INCHES / POINTS / PIXELS}

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL OPENGL


PLCONTROL OPENGL BACKGROUND PROMPT DOFF11 DOFF10 SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFF YOFF RESOLUTION PICKRADIUS XPIXFC YPIXFC HIDDEN UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION UNITPICKRADIUS

PLCONTROL OPENGL specifies the parameters associated with the OpenGL plottingsystem.


PROMPT [NO]Determines whether or not the program will display a prompt before opening, clearing orclosing the graphics window. {YES / NO}

DOFF11 [1.0]DOFF10 [1.0]These parameters provide control over the depth buffer. Increasing these values increases thedistance between two successive values in the depth buffer. A value of 1.0 corresponds to thesmallest distance that is resolvable by the depth buffer.

If a bandplot appears speckled when using OpenGL graphics and the positions of the speckleschanges as you rotate the plot out of plane, it is likely that one of these parameters needs to beincreased. If you are using OpenGL 1.1 or OpenGL 1.2, increase DOFF11; if you are usingOpenGL 1.0, increase DOFF10. Use trial and error to find the smallest value of theparameter needed to avoid the speckles.

SIZE [AUTOMATIC]Determines whether you specify the size and location of the plotting window using theparameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF and YOFF, the program automatically selects the sizeand location of the plotting window, or the program draws in the window specified by theuser interface. {DIRECT / AUTOMATIC / INTERFACE}

WIDTHHEIGHTXOFFYOFFSpecifies the size and location of the plotting window when SIZE=DIRECT. However thewindow manager may override these preferences. See the figure in the PLCONTROLXWINDOW command description in this section.

PLCONTROL OPENGL Chap. 8 Graphics devices



PICKRADIUS [5]PICKRADIUS is used as a program tolerance for deciding when a graphics structure hasbeen picked. It also determines the minimum mouse motion before the AUI redraws themodel during dynamic model transformation.

XPIXFC [AUTOMATIC]YPIXFC [AUTOMATIC]Specifies the number of pixels per centimeter of the workstation screen in the X (width) andY (height) directions. The program will calculate XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC automatically ifyou enter AUTOMATIC for XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC.

HIDDEN [HARDWARE]Specifies whether or not to use hardware hidden line removal (typically with a depth buffer). We recommend that you use HARDWARE unless specifically advised otherwise.{HARDWARE / SOFTWARE}

UNITWIDTH [PIXELS]UNITHEIGHT [PIXELS]UNITXOFF [PIXELS]UNITYOFF [PIXELS]UNITRESOLUTION [PIXELS]UNITPICKRADIUS [PIXELS]These parameters specify the units of parameter WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF,RESOLUTION and PICKRADIUS. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS / POINTS}.

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT


PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT FILENAME PROMPT ORIENTATION PAGEOPTION COLOR PAGESIZE PAGEWIDTH PAGEHEIGHT SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFFSET YOFFSETLINEWIDTH FONT BACKGROUND VERSION ENCAPSULATED BOUNDINGBOX PAGEFLAG FOLDING RESOLUTION XPIXFC YPIXFC COUNT CARRIAGECONTROL UNITPWIDTH UNITPHEIGHT UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFFSET UNITYOFFSET UNITRESOLUTION UNITLINEWIDTH

PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT specifies the parameters associated with the PostScript plottingsystem driver.



ORIENTATION [PORTRAIT]Determines whether the program will use the page in portrait mode or landscape mode (seefigure). {PORTRAIT / LANDSCAPE}


1 320 × 2002 640 × 4803 800 × 6004 1024 × 768


COLOR [RGB]Determines whether the program will produce graphics output in color or convert all colors togray-scales. {RGB / GRAY}

PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT Chap. 8 Graphics devices


PAGESIZE [A]Specifies the page size. {A, B, C, D, E (for US paper sizes)}, {A0,A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 (for ISO paper sizes)}. You can also set PAGESIZE= DIRECT and specify the page size using parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT.


SIZE [DIRECT]Determines whether the placement of the plotting surface on the page coincides with the pageor is directly determined by parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFFSET and YOFFSET. {PAGE / DIRECT}

WIDTH [80.0]HEIGHT [80.0]XOFFSET [10.0]YOFFSET [10.0]Specify the size and location of the plotting surface when SIZE=DIRECT (see figure).

LINEWIDTH [0.007]Line width that the PostScript driver will use when drawing its thinnest possible line.

FONT [Helvetica]Specifies the PostScript font that is used for plotting character strings. Note that thePostScript driver does not check if this font is actually present on the device that is being usedto make the plot. The FONT parameter is case-sensitive, so you must use the proper lowerand upper-case characters in the font name.

BACKGROUND [WHITE]The background color of the plotting paper or terminal screen.

VERSION [ADOBE3]Specifies whether the PostScript driver will use Adobe PostScript version 1, AdobePostScript version 2 or ADOBE PostScript version 3. {ADOBE1 / ADOBE2 / ADOBE3}

ENCAPSULATED [NO]Determines whether or not the encapsulated PostScript format (EPSF format) is used. Notethat the encapsulated PostScript format should be used in conjunction with VERSION =ADOBE2 or ADOBE3. {YES / NO}

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT


BOUNDINGBOX [TOP]Determines whether the BoundingBox comment will be written and where in the file it will beplaced (i.e., at the beginning of the file or at the beginning of each page). Some PostScriptdevices require the BoundingBox comment. {NO / TOP / PAGE}

PAGEFLAG [NO]Some PostScript printers that support Adobe PostScript version 2 and higher require the pagesize to be specified with a '<< /PageSize [A B] >> setpagedevice' line, where A and B givethe page size in points. The PostScript driver will write this line if VERSION = ADOBE2 orADOBE3 and PAGEFLAG = YES.

FOLDING [0]The PostScript driver can fold its output so that each line of output contains up to FOLDINGcharacters. This option is useful when you want to transfer the PostScript file using afixed-record format. If FOLDING = 0, folding is disabled and each line of the PostScript filewill contain a single PostScript command.

RESOLUTION [0.0033]RESOLUTION is used as a program tolerance for such tasks as area fill, hidden line removal,etc. It should be set to the width of the thinnest line that the terminal can display.RESOLUTION cannot be set to zero. XPIXFC [19.685]YPIXFC [19.685]The number of pixels per centimeter in the X and Y directions. These parameters need not bedefined in general. They are only used so that you can enter coordinates and lengths on theplotting surface using a unit of PIXELS.

COUNT [100]The maximum number of moves and draws in a path is set by parameter COUNT. When thenumber of moves and draws exceeds COUNT, the driver draws the current path and moves tothe last plotted location. Increasing COUNT slightly improves the efficiency of the driver butmay cause the PostScript device to run out of memory.

CARRIAGECONTROL [NO]Determines whether or not the driver will use column 1 of the PostScript output as aFORTRAN carriage control column. {YES / NO}

UNITPWIDTH [INCHES]UNITPHEIGHT [INCHES]UNITWIDTH [PERCENT]UNITHEIGHT [PERCENT]

PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT Chap. 8 Graphics devices


UNITXOFFSET [PERCENT]UNITYOFFSET [PERCENT]UNITRESOLUTION [INCHES]UNITLINEWIDTH [INCHES]These parameters specify the unit of parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT, WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFFSET, YOFFSET, RESOLUTION and LINEWIDTH. {CM / INCHES /PIXELS (if XPIXFC and YPIXFC are also defined) / POINTS} (A pointis 1/72 inch). For UNITWIDTH, UNITHEIGHT, UNITXOFFSET, UNITYOFFSET youcan also specify a unit of PERCENT.

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL XWINDOW


PLCONTROL XWINDOW BACKGROUND PROMPT COLOR SIZE WIDTHHEIGHT XOFF YOFF RESOLUTION PICKRADIUS XPIXFC YPIXFC PUSHKEYSYM PULLKEYSYM PUSHLENGTH UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION UNITPICKRADIUS UNITPUSHLENGTH

PLCONTROL XWINDOW specifies the parameters associated with the X Window plottingsystem.


PROMPT [NO]Determines whether or not the program will display a prompt before opening, clearing orclosing the graphics window. {YES / NO}

COLORThis parameter is currently unused.

SIZE [AUTOMATIC]Determines whether you specify the size and location of the plotting window using theparameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF and YOFF, the program automatically selects the sizeand location of the plotting window, or the program draws in the window specified by theprogram interface. {DIRECT / AUTOMATIC / INTERFACE}

WIDTHHEIGHTXOFFYOFFSpecify the size and location of the plotting window when SIZE = DIRECT (see figure). However, the window manager may override these preferences.


PICKRADIUS [5]PICKRADIUS is used as a program tolerance for deciding when a graphics structure hasbeen picked.

PLCONTROL XWINDOW Chap. 8 Graphics devices


XPIXFC [AUTOMATIC]YPIXFC [AUTOMATIC]Specify the number of pixels per centimeter of the workstation screen in the X (width) and Y(height) directions. The program will calculate XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC automatically if youenter AUTOMATIC for XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC.

PUSHKEYSYMPULLKEYSYMPUSHLENGTHThese parameters are currently unused.

UNITWIDTH [PIXELS]UNITHEIGHT [PIXELS]UNITXOFF [PIXELS]UNITYOFF [PIXELS]UNITRESOLUTION [PIXELS]UNITPICKRADIUS [PIXELS]These parameters specify the unit of parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF,RESOLUTION, PICKRADIUS and UNITPUSHLENGTH. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS/ POINTS}.

UNITPUSHLENGTHThis parameter is currently unused.

Chap. 8 Graphics devices PLCONTROL XWINDOW


Command index

ADINA R & D, Inc. Index-1

Command index AACTIVEZONE 6-23

ALIAS 6-130

ANIMATE 5-227

AXIS 5-207

BBANDANNOTATION 5-88

BANDPLOT 5-80

BANDRENDERING 5-86

BANDSTYLE 5-82

BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC 5-84

BANDTABLE REPEATING 5-85

BOUNDEPICTION 5-46

BOXZONE 6-15

CCGINFO 7-6

CGZONE 6-16

COLORTABLE 5-241

COLORZONE 6-24

COMBZONE 6-17

COMMANDFILE 3-24

CONSTANT 6-131

CONTROL 6-1

CPINFO 7-7

CSCOMBINATION 6-97

CSINFO 7-8

CSLINE 6-120

CSPOINT 6-87

CSZONE 6-18

CURVEDEPICTION 5-211

CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE 5-57

CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE 5-62

CUTSURFACE NONE 5-65

DDAMPINGTABLE 6-63

DATABASE ATTACH 3-4

DATABASE DETACH 3-5

DATABASE MOVIESAVE 3-6

DATABASE NEW 3-1

DATABASE OPEN 3-2

DATABASE SAVE 3-3

DBCOMBINATION 6-101

DBLINE 6-125

DBPOINT 6-92

DRAWBEADINFO 7-9

EECHO 3-31

EGINFO 7-10

EGZONE 6-19

ELCOMBINATION 6-94

ELDEPICTION 5-37

ELINEANNOTATION 5-110

ELINEPLOT 5-104

ELINESTYLE 5-106

ELINERENDERING 5-108

ELINFO 7-11

ELLINE 6-116

ELPOINT 6-80

ELZONE 6-20

END 3-32

EVECTORPLOT 5-94

EVECTORRENDERING 5-99

Command index

Index-2 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. IV – Display Processing

EVECTORSTYLE 5-97

EXIT 3-32

FFEPROGRAM 3-26

FILEECHO 3-16

FILELIST 3-15

FILELOG 3-17

FILEREAD 3-13

FILESESSION 3-14

FOURIERSHOW 5-194

FRAME 5-2

FREQCURVE 6-65

FREQTABLE 6-66

FSSHOW 5-184

FTSHOW 5-188

GGEDRAWING 5-66

GLDEPICTION 5-22

GNCOMBINATION 6-103

GNLINE 6-126

GPDEPICTION 5-20

GRAPHDEPICTION 5-204

GRAPHLIST 5-203

GRAPHPLOT 5-201

GRAPHSTYLE 5-202

GSDEPICTION 5-24

GVDEPICTION 5-26

HHARMONICSHOW 5-177

HIGHLIGHT 4-11

LLCCOMBINATION 6-100

LCLINE 6-124

LCPLOT 5-149

LCPOINT 6-91

LCSTYLE 5-150

LINEEXCEED 7-19

LINELIST 7-23

LINEMAX 7-15

LINESHOW 5-169

LOADPLOT 5-70

LOADPORTHOLE 3-7

LOADRENDERING 5-72

LOADSTYLE 5-71

LOCATOR 4-6

MMASSINFO 7-4

MASS-SELECT 6-75

MATERIALSHOW STRAIN 5-157

MATERIALSHOW TIME 5-160

MESHANNOTATION 5-44

MESHINTEGRATION 6-105

MESHMAX 6-109

MESHPLOT 5-14

MESHRENDERING 5-30

MESHSTYLE 5-17

MESHWINDOW 5-55

MODE 3-25

MODELDEPICTION 5-27

MODELINFO 7-1

MOVIEFRAME 5-225

MOVIESAVE 3-20

MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE 5-222

MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE 5-223

MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP 5-217

MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE 5-218

MOVIESHOOT ROTATE 5-220

Command index

ADINA R & D, Inc. Index-3

MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT 5-224

MPFINFO 7-5

NNODECOMBINATION 6-93

NODEDEPICTION 5-34

NODEINFO 7-12

NODELINE 6-115

NODEPOINT 6-79

PPAN 4-9

PARAMETER 3-28

PAUSE 3-27

PICKED DELETE 4-3

PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL 4-4

PLCONTROL AI 8-3

PLCONTROL GDI 8-7

PLCONTROL HPGL 8-9

PLCONTROL HPGL2 8-16

PLCONTROL NULL 8-23

PLCONTROL OPENGL 8-24

PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT 8-26

PLCONTROL XWINDOW 8-30

PLOTAREA 5-50

PLSYSTEM 8-2

POINTCOMBINATION 6-102

POINTEXCEED 7-18

POINTLIST 7-22

POINTMAX 7-14

QQUIT 3-32

RRADCOMBINATION 6-98

RADGZONE 6-21

RADLINE 6-121

RADPOINT 6-88

RADZONE 6-22

RANDOMSHOW 5-181

REACTIONPLOT 5-114

REACTIONSTYLE 5-116

REACTIONSUM 6-111

READ 3-12

REDO 4-2

REFRESH 5-229

REGENERATE 5-1

RESET MESHWINDOW 4-5

RESPONSE ENVELOPE 6-43

RESPONSE HARMONIC 6-36

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP 6-30

RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE 6-31

RESPONSE RANDOM 6-38

RESPONSE RESIDUAL 6-32

RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION 6-40

RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM 6-33

RESPONSEINFO 7-2

RESPONSESHOW 5-166

RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP 6-49

RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE 6-52

RESULTANT 6-132

RESULTCONTROL 6-71

RESULTGRID 6-76

RSPECTRUM 6-61

RSPECTRUMSHOW 5-175

SSAVEAVI 3-22

SAVEBMP 3-23

SECTCOMBINATION 6-96

SECTLINE 6-118

Command index

Index-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. IV – Display Processing

SECTPOINT 6-85

SMOOTHING 6-69

SNAPSHOT 3-18

SPECTRUM 6-57

SPECTRUMSHOW 5-171

SSPECTRUM 6-59

SSPECTRUMSHOW 5-173

STOP 3-32

SUBFRAME 5-6

TTEXT 5-231

TFSHOW 5-199

TRACEANNOTATION 5-143

TRACECALCULATION 5-139

TRACEPLOT 5-127

TRACERAKE COORDINATES 5-133

TRACERAKE GNODES 5-135

TRACERAKE GRIDS 5-136

TRACERAKE NODES 5-134 TRACERENDERING 5-142

TRACESHOW 5-196

TRACESTEP 5-145

TRACESTYLE 5-129

TRACETYPE PARTICLE 5-131

TRACETYPE RIBBON 5-132

UUDRAW 5-236

UNDO 4-1

USERDATA 5-163

USERSEGMENT 5-239

USERSHOW 5-164

USERTEXT 5-235

V

VARIABLEINFO 7-3

VIEW 5-52

VSCOMBINATION 6-99

VSDEPICTION 5-43

VSLINE 6-123

VSPOINT 6-90

ZZONE 6-11

ZONEEXCEED 7-20

ZONELIST 7-24

ZONEMAX 7-16

ZOOM 4-8

aui-ref4_83

Documents